Theory Manual

1 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

Table of Contents
Theory Manual ........................................................................................................................... 1

Table of Contents ....................................................................................................................... 2

Chapter 1 General Aspects ....................................................................................................... 15

1.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................... 16

1.1.1. References .......................................................................................... 16

Chapter 2 Loading .................................................................................................................... 17

2.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................... 18

Chapter 3 Solution.................................................................................................................... 19

3.1. Linear analysis ....................................................................................................... 20

3.2. Finite Element Technology .................................................................................... 21

3.3. Dynamic analysis ................................................................................................... 23

3.3.1. Modal Analysis.................................................................................... 23

3.3.2. Harmonic Analysis .............................................................................. 26

3.3.3. Spectrum Analysis .............................................................................. 30

3.3.4. Transient Analysis ............................................................................... 31

3.4. Nonlinear analysis ................................................................................................. 36

3.4.1. Load Incrementation .......................................................................... 36

3.4.2. Newton-Raphson Method .................................................................. 37

3.4.3. Arc-Length .......................................................................................... 39

3.4.4. Convergence Controls ........................................................................ 41

3.4.5. Construction process analysis ............................................................ 43

2 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

3.5. Solvers ................................................................................................................... 44

3.5.1. Basic Theory........................................................................................ 45

3.5.2. Pardiso Direct Sparse method ............................................................ 46

3.5.3. Parallel processing .............................................................................. 46

3.6. Obtaining solution ................................................................................................. 48

3.6.1. Program messages.............................................................................. 48

3.6.2. Stop solution ....................................................................................... 49

3.6.3. Output results ..................................................................................... 50

3.7. Initial State............................................................................................................. 52

Chapter 4 Results ..................................................................................................................... 55

4.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................... 56

4.1.1. Read results ........................................................................................ 56

4.1.2. Results extrapolation .......................................................................... 56

4.2. Element information ............................................................................................. 57

4.2.1. Result Types ........................................................................................ 57

4.2.2. Shell elements .................................................................................... 58

4.2.3. Beam elements ................................................................................... 59

4.2.4. Tensors and associated invariants...................................................... 59

4.2.5. Forces and moments in beams .......................................................... 60

4.2.6. Generalized strains in beams and trusses .......................................... 63

4.2.7. Forces and Moments in Shells ............................................................ 63

4.2.8. Generalized Strains in Shells............................................................... 64

4.3. Nodal results.......................................................................................................... 65

3 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.4. Combining Result Files .......................................................................................... 67

4.5. Envelopes .............................................................................................................. 69

4.6. Derived results....................................................................................................... 71

4.7. Checking and Design results ................................................................................. 72

4.8. History results........................................................................................................ 74

Chapter 5 Concrete Shells ........................................................................................................ 75

5.1. General Concepts .................................................................................................. 76

5.1.1. Forces and Moments Sign Criteria ..................................................... 76

5.1.2. Reinforcement Directions .................................................................. 77

5.1.3. Interaction Diagram............................................................................ 79

5.1.4. Axial + Bending Check and Design ...................................................... 81

5.2. Wood-Armer Design Method ................................................................................ 83

5.2.1. Hypothesis of the Calculation............................................................. 83

5.2.2. Calculation Process of the Reinforcement Design Moments ............. 83

5.2.3. Bending Design ................................................................................... 85

5.3. CEB-FIP Method ..................................................................................................... 89

5.3.1. Calculation Hypothesis ....................................................................... 89

5.3.2. Equivalent Forces and Moments for Reinforcement Calculation ...... 89

5.3.3. States and Resistance ......................................................................... 90

5.3.4. Checking Outline................................................................................. 93

5.3.5. Reinforcement Checking in Intermediate Layer .............................. 104

5.3.6. Required Parameters........................................................................ 104

5.4. Design according to the Orthogonal Directions Method .................................... 106

4 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 5.4.1. Calculation Hypothesis ..................................................................... 106

5.4.2. Design Forces and Moments ............................................................ 106

5.4.3. Maximum Allowable Stress/Strain in Reinforcement ...................... 107

5.4.4. Check and Design ............................................................................. 108

5.5. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER .......................................... 109

5.5.1. Required Input Data ......................................................................... 109

5.5.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking............................................................ 111

5.5.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design ............................................................... 113

5.6. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-05 ............................................. 117

5.6.1. Required Input Data ......................................................................... 117

5.6.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking............................................................ 118

5.6.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design ............................................................... 120

5.7. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-14 ............................................. 123

5.7.1. Required Input Data ......................................................................... 123

5.7.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking............................................................ 124

5.7.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design ............................................................... 126

5.8. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-349-01 ............................................. 129

5.8.1. Required Input Data ......................................................................... 129

5.8.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking............................................................ 130

5.8.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design ............................................................... 132

5.9. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08.................................................... 135

5.9.1. Required Input Data ......................................................................... 135

5.9.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking............................................................ 136

5 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 5.9.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design ............................................................... 139

5.10. In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01 ..................................................... 144

5.10.1. Required Input Data ......................................................................... 144

5.10.2. In-Plane Shear Checking for Walls .................................................... 145

5.10.3. In-Plane Shear Design for Walls ....................................................... 149

5.10.4. In-Plane Shear Checking for Slabs (Seismic Loads) .......................... 153

5.10.5. In-Plane Shear Design for Slabs (Seismic Loads) .............................. 154

5.11. Cracking Checking according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) ....... 156

5.11.1. Cracking Checking ............................................................................. 156

5.11.2. Reinforcement Stress Calculation .................................................... 157

5.11.3. Checking results ................................................................................ 157

5.12. Cracking Checking according to ACI 318-05 and ACI 318-14 .............................. 160

5.12.1. Cracking Checking ............................................................................. 160

5.12.2. Reinforcement Stress Calculation .................................................... 160

5.12.3. Checking results ................................................................................ 161

Chapter 6 Reinforced Concrete Sections ............................................................................... 163

6.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 164

6.2. 2D Interaction Diagram ....................................................................................... 165

6.2.1. Pivots Diagram .................................................................................. 165

6.2.2. Diagram Construction Process ......................................................... 167

6.2.3. Determination of the Diagram Center ............................................. 169

6.2.4. Considerations .................................................................................. 170

6.3. Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Checking ............................................................ 172

6 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 6.3.1. Calculation Hypothesis ..................................................................... 172

6.3.2. Calculation Process ........................................................................... 172

6.3.3. Check Results .................................................................................... 173

6.4. Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Design ................................................................ 175

6.4.1. Calculation Hypothesis ..................................................................... 175

6.4.2. Calculation Process ........................................................................... 175

6.4.3. Design results ................................................................................... 176

6.5. Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes ............................................. 179

6.5.1. Eurocode 2 and ITER Design Code.................................................... 179

6.5.2. EHE Spanish Code ............................................................................. 180

6.5.3. ACI 318-05 ........................................................................................ 180

6.5.4. ACI 318-14 ........................................................................................ 182

6.5.5. ACI 349-01 ........................................................................................ 184

6.5.6. ACI 349-06 ........................................................................................ 186

6.5.7. ACI 349-13 ........................................................................................ 188

6.5.8. CEB-FIP .............................................................................................. 190

6.5.9. British Standard 8110 ....................................................................... 190

6.5.10. Australian Standard 3600 ................................................................. 191

6.5.11. Chinese Code GB50010 .................................................................... 191

6.5.12. Brazilian Code NBR6118 ................................................................... 192

6.5.13. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges .................... 193

6.5.14. Indian Standard 456 ......................................................................... 193

6.5.15. Russian Code SP 52-101 ................................................................... 194

6.6. Shear and Torsion ................................................................................................ 195

7 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 6.6.1. Previous considerations ................................................................... 195

6.6.2. Shear and torsion code properties ................................................... 195

6.6.3. Code Dependent Parameters for Each Section ................................ 201

6.6.4. Shear and Torsion according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-

1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design Code .......................................... 216

6.6.5. Shear and Torsion according to ACI 318-05 ..................................... 232

6.6.6. Shear and Torsion according to ACI 318-14 ..................................... 247

6.6.7. Shear and Torsion according to ACI 349-01 and ACI349-06 ............ 262

6.6.8. Shear and Torsion according to BS8110 ........................................... 277

6.6.9. Shear and Torsion according to GB50010 ........................................ 291

6.6.10. Shear and Torsion according to AASHTO Standard Specifications for

Highway Bridges ............................................................................... 322

6.6.11. Shear and Torsion according to NBR6118 ........................................ 328

6.6.12. Shear and Torsion according to EHE-08 ........................................... 345

6.6.13. Shear and Torsion according to IS 456 ............................................. 362

6.7. Cracking Checking................................................................................................ 380

6.7.1 Cracking according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) .... 380

6.7.2 Cracking according to ACI 318-05..................................................... 383

Chapter 7 Code Check for Structural Steel Members ............................................................ 385

7.1. Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3 .......................................................... 386

7.1.1. Reference axis................................................................................... 387

7.1.2. Material properties .......................................................................... 388

7.1.3. Section data ...................................................................................... 388

7.1.4. Structural steel code properties ....................................................... 390

7.1.5. Check Process ................................................................................... 391

8 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 7.1.6. Section Class and Reduction Factors Calculation ............................. 392

7.1.7. Checking of Members in Axial Tension ............................................ 403

7.1.8. Checking of Members in Axial Compression .................................... 404

7.1.9. Checking of Members under Bending Moment ............................... 405

7.1.10. Checking of Members under Shear Force ........................................ 406

7.1.11. Checking of Members under Bending Moment and Shear Force .... 408

7.1.12. Checking of Members under Bending Moment and Axial Force .... 410

7.1.13. Checking of Members under Bending, Shear and Axial Force ......... 415

7.1.14. Checking for Buckling of Members in Compression ........................ 418

7.1.15. Checking for Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Beams Subjected to

Bending ............................................................................................. 422

7.1.16. Checking for Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Members Subjected to

Bending and Axial Compression ....................................................... 424

7.1.17. Critical Forces and Moments Calculation ......................................... 429

7.2. Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed. ....................................... 433

7.2.1. Material properties .......................................................................... 433

7.2.2. Section data ...................................................................................... 433

7.2.3. Structural steel code properties ....................................................... 435

7.2.4. Check Process ................................................................................... 436

7.2.5. Design requirements ........................................................................ 436

7.2.6. Checking of Members for Tension (Chapter D) ................................ 441

7.2.7. Checking of Members in Axial Compression (Chapter E) ................. 441

7.2.8. Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling..................................... 442

7.2.9. Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling .................... 445

7.2.10. Compressive Strength for Flexure .................................................... 447

9 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 7.2.11. Checking of Members for Shear (Chapter G) ................................... 451

7.2.12. Checking of Members for Combined Flexure and Axial Tension /

Compression (Chapter H) ................................................................. 452

7.2.13. Checking of Members for Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or

Axial Force (Chapter H) ..................................................................... 454

7.3. Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950 .......................................... 456

7.3.1 Checking Types ................................................................................. 456

7.3.2 Reference Axis .................................................................................. 456

7.3.3 Material Properties .......................................................................... 457

7.3.4 Section Data...................................................................................... 458

7.3.5 Structural steel code properties ....................................................... 461

7.3.6 Checking Process .............................................................................. 462

7.3.7 Section Class and Reduction Factor Calculation. ............................. 463

7.3.8 Checking of Bending Moment and Shear Force (BS Article 4.2) ...... 472

7.3.9 Checking of Lateral Torsional Buckling Resistance (BS Article 4.3) .. 477

7.3.10 Checking of Members in Axial Tension (BS Article 4.6).................... 484

7.3.11 Checking of Members in Axial Compression (BS Article 4.7) ........... 485

7.3.12 Tension Members with Moments (BS Article 4.8.2) ........................ 487

7.3.13 Compression Members with Moments (BS Article 4.8.3) ................ 491

7.4. Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF ......................................... 497

7.4.1 Checking Types ................................................................................. 497

7.4.2 Material Properties .......................................................................... 498

7.4.3 Section Data...................................................................................... 498

7.4.4 Structural Steel Properties ............................................................... 499

7.4.5 Checking Process .............................................................................. 499

10 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 7.4.6 Tension Checking .............................................................................. 500

7.4.7 Shear Checking ................................................................................. 501

7.4.8 Compression Checking ..................................................................... 502

7.4.9 Bending Checking ............................................................................. 507

7.4.10 Axial Compression & Bending Checking ........................................... 514

7.5. Steel Structures According to GB50017 .............................................................. 517

7.5.1 Checking Types ................................................................................. 517

7.5.2 Material Properties .......................................................................... 517

7.5.3 Section Data...................................................................................... 518

7.5.4 Structural steel code properties ....................................................... 519

7.5.5 Cross Section Type Classification...................................................... 519

7.5.6 Checking Process .............................................................................. 521

7.5.7 Bending Checking ............................................................................. 521

7.5.8 Shear Checking ................................................................................. 523

7.5.9 Bending & Shear Checking ............................................................... 524

7.5.10 Axial Force Checking ......................................................................... 526

7.5.11 Bending & Axial Checking ................................................................. 527

7.5.12 Compression Buckling Checking ....................................................... 528

7.6. Steel Structures According to IS800-07 ............................................................... 531

7.6.1 Checking types .................................................................................. 531

7.6.2 Material Properties .......................................................................... 531

7.6.2 Section Data...................................................................................... 532

7.6.3 Structural steel code properties ....................................................... 534

7.6.4 Check process ................................................................................... 535

11 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 7.6.5 Section Class and Reduction Factors Calculation ............................. 536

7.6.6 Checking of Members in Axial Tension ............................................ 547

7.6.7 Checking of Members under Bending Moment ............................... 548

7.6.8 Checking of Members under Shear Force ........................................ 550

7.6.9 Checking of Members under Bending Moment and Shear Force .... 551

7.6.10 Checking of Members under Bending Moment + Axial Force and Bi-
axial Bending + Axial Force ............................................................... 553

7.6.11 Checking for Buckling of Compression Members ............................ 558

7.6.12 Checking Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Members Subjected to

Combined Bending and Axial Tension .............................................. 561

7.6.13 Checking for Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Members Subjected to

Bending and Axial Compression ....................................................... 562

7.6.14 Critical Forces and Moments Calculation ......................................... 569

7.7. Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012) ........................................... 573

7.7.1. Checking Types ................................................................................. 573

7.7.2. Material Properties .......................................................................... 573

7.7.3. Check process ................................................................................... 573

7.7.4. Section Class and Reduction Factors Calculation ............................. 574

7.7.5. Members Subjected to Compression ............................................... 575

7.7.6. Members Subjected to Bending ....................................................... 576

7.7.7. Members Subjected to Tension ....................................................... 578

7.7.8. Members Subjected to Axial Compression ...................................... 579

7.7.9. Members Subjected to Flexure ........................................................ 584

7.7.10. Members Subjected to Shear ........................................................... 591

7.7.11. Members Subjected to Combined Forces ........................................ 592

12 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8. Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed. ....................................... 595

7.8.1. Material properties .......................................................................... 595

7.8.2. Section data ...................................................................................... 595

7.8.3. Structural steel code properties ....................................................... 597

7.8.4. Check Process ................................................................................... 598

7.8.5. Design requirements ........................................................................ 598

7.8.6. Checking of Members for Tension (Chapter D) ................................ 603

7.8.7. Checking of Members in Axial Compression (Chapter E) ................. 603

7.8.8. Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling..................................... 604

7.8.9. Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling .................... 607

7.8.10. Compressive Strength for Flexure .................................................... 609

7.8.11. Checking of Members for Shear (Chapter G) ................................... 613

7.8.12. Checking of Members for Combined Flexure and Axial Tension /

Compression (Chapter H) ................................................................. 614

7.8.13. Checking of Members for Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or

Axial Force (Chapter H) ..................................................................... 616

Chapter 8 Seismic Design ....................................................................................................... 618

8.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 619

8.2. Spectrum Calculation according to Eurocode 8 .................................................. 620

8.2.1. Input data ......................................................................................... 620

8.2.2. Spectrum calculation ........................................................................ 620

8.3. Spectrum Calculation according to NCSE-2002................................................... 625

8.3.1. Input data ......................................................................................... 625

8.3.2. Spectrum calculation ........................................................................ 626

13 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.4. Combination of modes and directions ................................................................ 628

8.4.1. Complete Quadratic Combination Method (CQC) ........................... 628

8.4.2. Square Root of the Sum of the Squares ........................................... 629

8.4.3. Combination of maximum modal values ......................................... 629

Chapter 9 Miscellaneous Utilities .......................................................................................... 630

9.1. Parameters and Expressions ............................................................................... 631

9.1.1. Naming rules..................................................................................... 631

9.1.2. Constants .......................................................................................... 632

9.1.3. Operators.......................................................................................... 633

9.1.4. Functions .......................................................................................... 635

9.1.5. Units.................................................................................................. 639

9.1.6. Parameter List Window .................................................................... 643

9.2. CivilFEM Python Programming ............................................................................ 645

9.2.1 Python Data Types ............................................................................ 645

9.2.2 Python Example ................................................................................ 646

14 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Chapter 1
General Aspects

15 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

1.1. Introduction
Welcome to the Theory Manual for CivilFEM Powered by Marc. This manual presents the
theoretical descriptions of every calculation procedure used by the program and describes
the relationship between the input data and the results given by CivilFEM. This manual is
essential for understanding how the program calculates results as well as how to interpret
the results correctly.

The Theory Manual provides the theoretical basis of the algorithms included in the program.
With knowledge of the underlying theory, the user can perform analyses efficiently and
confidently on CivilFEM by using the capabilities to their full potential while being aware of
the limitations.

Reading the whole manual will not be necessary; it is recommended to read only the
paragraphs containing the specific algorithms being utilized.

Take into account that there is a online CivilFEM help manual.

1.1.1. References
 MSC. Software Help Documentation

16 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Chapter 2
Loading

17 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

2.1 Introduction

2.1. Introduction
Linear finite element analysis is characterized by a force-displacement relationship that only
contains linear terms. Linear system of equations always produces a unique solution while
in nonlinear analysis does not guarantee a unique solution. In fact, there may be multiple
solutions or no solution at all. The task of providing analysis directives (i.e. controls by which
the program will come to a solution) is far from simple. Solving nonlinear equations is an
incremental and iterative process.

A linear static structural analysis with a known external load can be performed in one step. If
nonlinearities are expected, it may be necessary to apply the load in increments and let each
load increment iterate to the equilibrium state, within a specified tolerance, using a
particular iteration scheme such as Newton-Raphson.

In this CivilFEM Theory Manual version only linear static loads are considered. In the figure
below there is an example of loading workflow covering all that civil engineering needs.

LOADS

Load group A: LIST OF LOAD CASES

- Punctual load A Linear combina ons of any defined load
- Surface load A α, β, γ, δ coefficients are load factors
- ...

Load group B:
- Punctual moment B Load case 1
- Linear load B
α·(Load group A) + γ·(Accelera on -Z) + B.C. group 1
- ...

Accelera on -Z
Load case 2
β·(Load group B) + δ·(Spectral X) + B.C. group 2
Spectral X

Spectral Y Load case 3

β·(Load group B) + δ·(Spectral Y) + α·(Load group A) + B.C. group 2

Boundary Condi ons group 1: ...

- Punctual contraints
- ...
Load case n
Boundary Condi ons group 2: ...
- Surface contraint
- ...

The word loads in CivilFEM terminology includes load groups, accelerations, spectra and
boundary conditions.

18 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

2.1 Introduction

Chapter 3
Solution

19 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

3.1 Linear analysis

3.1. Linear analysis

Linear analysis is the type of stress analysis performed on linear elastic structures. Because
linear analysis is simple and inexpensive to perform and generally gives satisfactory results,
it is the most commonly used structural analysis.

Nonlinearities due to material, geometry, or boundary conditions are not included in this
type of analysis. The behavior of an isotropic, linear, elastic material can be defined by two
material constants: Young’s modulus, and Poisson’s ratio.

CivilFEM allows user to perform linear elastic analysis using any element type in the
program. Various kinematic constraints and loadings can be prescribed to the structure
being analyzed; the problem can include both isotropic and anisotropic elastic materials.

The principle of superposition holds under conditions of linearity. Therefore, several

individual solutions can be superimposed (summed) to obtain a total solution to a problem.

Linear analysis does not require storing as many quantities as does nonlinear analysis;
therefore, it uses the core memory more sparingly.

20 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

3.2 Finite Element Technology

3.2. Finite Element Technology

This section describes the basic concepts of finite element technology. CivilFEM solver was
developed on the basis of the displacement method. The stiffness methodology used
addresses force-displacement relations through the stiffness of the system.

The force displacement relation for a linear static problem can be expressed as:

Ku = f

Where is the system stiffness matrix, is the nodal displacement, and is the force vector.

Assuming that the structure has prescribed boundary conditions both in displacements and
forces, the governing equation can be written as:

K K u1 f
[ 11 12 ] {u } = { 1 }
K 21 k 22 2 f2

u1 is the unknown displacement vector, f1 is the prescribed force vector,u2 is the prescribed
displacement vector, and f2 is the reaction force. After solving for the displacement vector,
the strains in each element can be calculated from the strain-displacement relation in terms
of element nodal displacement as:

εel = βuel

The stresses in the element are obtained from the stress-strain relations as:

σel = Lεel

Where 𝜎𝑒𝑙 and εel are stresses and strains in the elements, and uel is the displacement
vector associated with the element nodal points; 𝛽 and L are strain-displacement and stress-
strain relations, respectively.

In a dynamic problem, the effects of mass and damping must be included in the system. The
equation governing a linear dynamic system is:

Mü + Du̇ + Ku = f

Where M is the system mass matrix, D is the damping matrix, following equation is the
acceleration vector, and is the velocity vector. The equation governing an undamped
dynamic system is:

Mü + Ku = f

21 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

3.2 Finite Element Technology

The equation governing undamped free vibration is:

Mü + Ku = 0

Natural frequencies and modal shapes of the structural system are calculated using this
equation.

K∅ − ω2 M∅ = 0

22 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

3.3 Dynamic analysis

3.3. Dynamic analysis

CivilFEM’s dynamic analysis capability allows the user to perform the following calculations:

1. Modal analysis.
2. Harmonic analysis.
3. Spectrum analysis.
4. Transient analysis.

Damping and nonlinear effects, including material nonlinearity, and boundary nonlinearity,
can be incorporated. All nonlinear problems should be analyzed using direct integration
methods.

3.3.1. Modal Analysis

CivilFEM uses the Lanczos method to extract eigenvalues (natural frequencies) and
eigenvectors (mode shapes), optimal for several modes. After the modes are extracted, they
can be used in a transient analysis or spectrum response calculation.

In dynamic eigenvalue analysis, we find the solution to an undamped linear dynamics

problem:

(K − ω2 M)∅ = 0

Where K is the stiffness matrix, M is the mass matrix, 𝜔 are the eigenvalues (frecuencies)
and ∅ are the eigenvectors. In CivilFEM, if the extraction is performed after increment zero,
K is the tangent stiffness matrix, which can include material and geometrically nonlinear
contributions. The mass matrix is formed from both distributed mass and point masses.

The Lanczos algorithm converts the original eigenvalue problem into the determination of
the eigenvalues of a tri-diagonal matrix. The method can be used either for the
determination of all modes or for the calculation of a small number of modes. For the latter
case, the Lanczos method is the most efficient eigenvalue extraction algorithm. A simple
description of the algorithm is as follows. Consider the eigenvalue problem:

−ω2 M u + K u = 0

Previous equation can be rewritten as:

1
M u = M K −1 M u
ω2
Consider the transformation:

23 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

3.3 Dynamic analysis

u=Qη

Substituting last equation into previous one and premultiplying by the matrix QT on both
sides of the equation, we have:

1 T
Q M Q η = QT M K −1 M Q η
ω2
The Lanczos algorithm results in a transformation matrix Q such that:

QT M Q = I

QT M K −1 MQ = T

where the matrix T is a symmetrical tri-diagonal matrix of the form:

α1 β2 0
β2 α2 β3
T=[ ]
βm
0 βm αm

Consequently, the original eigenvalue problem is reduced to the following new eigenvalue
problem:

1
η=Tη
ω2
The eigenvalues can be calculated by the standard QL-method.

Within CivilFEM it can be selected either the number of modes to be extracted, or a range of
modes to be extracted. The Sturm sequence check can be used to verify that all of the
required eigenvalues have been found.

In addition, user can select the lowest frequency to be extracted to be greater than zero.

Eigenvalue extraction is controlled by the maximum number of iterations for all modes in
the Lanczos iteration method in convergence controls.

3.3.1.1. Modal stresses and reactions

After the modal shapes (and frequencies) are extracted, it is allowed to recover stresses and
reactions for a specified number of modes during a modal or a buckling analysis.

The stresses are computed from the modal displacement vector φ ; the nodal reactions are
calculated from:

𝐹 = 𝐾𝜙 − 𝜔2 𝑀𝜙

24 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

3.3 Dynamic analysis

The nodal vector of modal mass is calculated as m = Mφ.

3.3.1.2. Participation factors and effective modal masses

The participation factor for a given mode is defined as

𝑇 𝑇
𝑐𝑛𝑗 = ({Φ𝑛,𝑖 } [𝑀]{𝑇𝑖,𝑗 }) / (({Φ𝑛,𝑖 } [𝑀]) {Φ𝑛,𝑖 })

Where:

cnj is the participation factor for mode n in the jth direction.

{Φ𝑛,𝑖 } is the eigenvector value for mode n and degree of freedom i.

[𝑀] is the mass matrix.

{T𝑖,𝑗 } Defines the magnitude of the rigid body response of degree of

freedom i to impose rigid body motion in the jth direction and takes

the following form:

1 0 0 0 (𝑍 − 𝑍0 ) −(𝑌 − 𝑌0 )
0 1 0 −(𝑍 − 𝑍0 ) 0 (𝑋 − 𝑋0 )
0 0 1 (𝑌 − 𝑌0 ) −(𝑋 − 𝑋0 ) 0 {𝑒𝑗 }
0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0
(0 0 0 0 0 1 )

Where:

X, Y, and Z are the coordinates of the respective node.

𝑋0 , 𝑌0 , 𝑍0 are the coordinates of center of rotation.

𝑒𝑗 is the unit vector (carrying 1 for row j and the rest being zeros)

The effective modal masses are calculated as squares of the participation factors.

𝑒𝑓𝑓 2
𝑚𝑛,𝑗 = [𝑐𝑛,𝑗 ]

𝑒𝑓𝑓
Where 𝑚𝑛,𝑗 is the effective modal mass for mode n in the jth direction.

While the nodal vector of modal masses gives the significance of mass participation of the
node for the given mode in the given direction, the effective modal mass gives an idea about
the mass contribution of the whole structure (or model) for the mode in the given direction.

25 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.3.2. Harmonic Analysis
Any sustained cyclic load will produce a sustained cyclic response in a structural system.
Harmonic response analysis gives the ability to predict the sustained dynamic behavior of
structures, thus enabling to verify whether or not designs will successfully overcome
resonance, fatigue, and other harmful effects of forced vibrations.

Harmonic response analysis allows to analyze structures vibrating around an equilibrium

state. This equilibrium state can be unstressed or statically prestressed. Statically
prestressed equilibrium states can include material and/or geometric nonlinearities. User
can compute the damped response for prestressed structures at various states.

In many practical applications, components are dynamically excited. These dynamic

excitations are often harmonic and usually cause only small amplitude vibrations. CivilFEM
linearizes the problem around the equilibrium state. If the equilibrium state is a nonlinear,
statically prestressed situation, CivilFEM considers all effects of the nonlinear deformation
on the dynamic solution. These effects include the following:

• Initial stress.
• Change of geometry.
• Influence on constitutive law.

The vibration problem can be solved as a linear problem using complex arithmetic.

The analytical procedure consists of the following steps:

1. CivilFEM calculates the response of the structure to a static preload (which can be
nonlinear) based on the constitutive equation for the material response. In this
portion of the analysis, the program ignores inertial effects.

2. CivilFEM calculates the complex-valued amplitudes of the superimposed response for

each given frequency, and amplitude of the boundary tractions and/or
displacements. In this portion of the analysis, the program considers both material
behavior and inertial effects.

3. You can apply different loads with different frequencies or change the static preload
at your discretion. All data relevant to the static response is stored during calculation
of the complex response.

3.3.2.1. Small amplitude vibration problem

The small amplitude vibration problem can be written with complex arithmetic as follows:

̅
[K + iωD − ω2 M]u̅ = P

26 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

Where:

u̅ = ure + iuim is the complex response vector,

̅
P = Pre + iPim is the complex load vector,

i = √−1 ,

ω is the excitation frequency.

K= ∑ K el + ∑ K sp

Where:

K el are element stiffness matrices,

K sp are the spring stiffness matrices.

M = ∑ Mel + ∑ Mmp

Where:

Mel are element mass matrices,

Mmp are mass point contributions

2γ
D = ∑ Del + ∑ Dd + ∑ (αM + (β + ) K)
ω

Where:

Del are element damping matrices,

Dd are damper contributions,

𝛼 is the mass damping coefficient,

𝛽 is the stiffness damping coefficient,

𝛾 is the numerical damping coefficient.

If all external loads and forced displacements are in phase and the system is undamped, this
equation reduces to:

(K − ω2 M)ure = Pre

The element damping matrix (Del ) can be obtained for any material with the use of a
material damping matrix which allows the user to input a real (elastic) and imaginary

27 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

(damping) stress-strain relation. The material response is specified with the constitutive
equation.

σ = Bε + Cε̇

Where B and C can be functions of deformation and/or frequency.

The global damping matrix is formed by the integrated triple product. The following
equation is used:

D = ∑ ∫ βT CdVel
el

Where β is the strain-displacement relation.

Similarly, the stiffness matrix K is based on the elastic material matrix B.

The output of CivilFEM consists of stresses, strains, displacements and reaction forces, all of
which may be complex quantities. The strains are given by

ε̅ = β u̅

and the stresses by

σ = Bε̅ + Cε̅̇

The reaction forces are calculated with

̅ = Ku̅ − ω2 Mu̅ + iω∑Del u̅ + iω∑Dd u̅

R

The printout of the nodal values consists of the real and imaginary parts of the complex
values, but you can request that the amplitude and phase angle be printed.

3.3.2.2. Performing a Harmonic Response Analysis

Harmonic response analysis is a technique used to determine the steady-state response of a
linear structure to loads that vary sinusoidally (harmonically) with time. The idea is to
calculate the structure's response at several frequencies and obtain a graph of some
response quantity (usually displacements) versus frequency.

A harmonic analysis, by definition, assumes that any applied load varies harmonically
(sinusoidally) with time. To completely specify a harmonic load, three pieces of information
are usually required: the amplitude, the phase angle, and the forcing frequency range.

28 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 2 2
𝐴0 = √𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑙 + 𝐹𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑔

𝐹
𝛷 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 ( 𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑔⁄𝐹 )
𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑙

The amplitude is the maximum value of the load.

The phase angle is a measure of the time by which the load lags (or leads) a frame of
reference. On the complex, it is the angle measured from the real axis. The phase angle is
required only if you have multiple loads that are out of phase with each other.

Increments in frequency can be linear or logarithmic:

 If linear:
𝑛 = (𝜔𝐻𝐼𝐺𝐻 − 𝜔𝐿𝑂𝑊 )/(Δ𝜔)
(𝜔𝐻𝐼𝐺𝐻 − 𝜔𝐿𝑂𝑊 )
Δ𝜔i = entered value of −1
𝑛
 If logarithmic increments in frequency:

29 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 1
𝜔𝐻𝐼𝐺𝐻 (𝑛−1)
𝑓𝑎𝑐 = ( )
𝜔𝐿𝑂𝑊

Δ𝜔i = fac ∗∗ (𝑖 − 1)

3.3.3. Spectrum Analysis

The spectrum response capability allows obtaining maximum response of a structure
subjected to know spectral base excitation response. This is of particular importance in
earthquake analysis and random vibration studies. You can use the spectrum response
option at any point in a nonlinear analysis and, therefore, ascertain the influence of material
nonlinearity or initial stress.

The spectrum response capability technique operates on the eigenmodes previously

extracted to obtain the maximum nodal displacements, velocities, accelerations, and
reaction forces. You can choose a subset of the total modes extracted by either specifying
the lowest n modes or by selecting a range of frequencies.

Enter the displacement response spectrum SD (ω) for a particular digitized value of damping
through the RESPONSE SPECTRUM model definition. CivilFEM performs the spectrum
analysis based on the latest set of modes extracted. The program lumps the mass matrix to
produce M ̅ . It hen obtains the projection of the inertia forces onto the mode ∅j

̅ ∅j
Pj = M

The spectral displacement response for the jth mode is

αj = SD (ωj )Pj

CivilFEM then calculates the square roots of the sum of the squares as

2 1⁄2
u = [∑j(αj ∅j ) ] DISPLACEMENT

2 1⁄2
v = [∑j(αj ωj ∅j ) ] VELOCITY

2 1⁄2
a = [∑𝑗(𝛼𝑗 𝜔𝑗2 ∅𝑗 ) ] ACCELERATION

2 1⁄2
̅ ∅j ) ]
f = [∑j(αj ω2j M FORCE

The internal forces given by Force equation are identified as reaction forces on the post file.
The force transmitted by the structure to the supporting medium (also referred to as base
shear) is only reported in the out file and is given by

30 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

tf = ∑j SD (ωj )ω2j Pj2 TRANSMITTED FORCE

3.3.4. Transient Analysis

Transient dynamic analysis deals with an initial-boundary value problem. In order to solve
the equations of motion of a structural system, it is important to specify proper initial and
boundary conditions. You obtain the solution to the equations of motion by using either
modal superposition (for linear systems) or direct integration (for linear or nonlinear
systems). In direct integration, selecting a proper time step is very important. For both
methods, you can include damping in the system.

The following sections discuss the seven aspects of transient analysis listed below.

1. Direct Integration
2. Time Step Definition
3. Initial Conditions
4. Time-Dependent Boundary Conditions
5. Mass Matrix
6. Damping

3.3.4.1. Direct Integration

Direct integration is numerical method for solving the equations of motion of a dynamic
system. It is used for both linear and nonlinear problems. In nonlinear problems, the
nonlinear effects can include geometric, material, and boundary nonlinearities. For transient
analysis, CivilFEM offers two direct integration operators listed below.

a) Newmark-beta Operator
b) Generalized-Alpha Operator

Consider the equations of motion of a structural system:

Ma + Cv + Ku = F

where M, C, and K are mass, damping, and stiffness matrices, respectively, and a, v, u, and F
are acceleration, velocity, displacement, and force vectors. Various direct integration
operators can be used to integrate the equations of motion to obtain the dynamic response
of the structural system. The technical background of the two direct integration operators
available in CivilFEM is described below.

31 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 a) Newmark-Beta Operator
This operator is probably the most popular direct integration method used in finite element
analysis. For linear problems, it is unconditionally stable and exhibits no numerical damping.
The Newmark-beta operator can effectively obtain solutions for linear and nonlinear
problems for a wide range of loadings. The procedure allows for change of time step, so it
can be used in problems where sudden impact makes a reduction of time step desirable.
This operator can be used with adaptive time step control. Although this method is stable for
linear problems, instability can develop if nonlinearities occur. By reducing the time step
and/or adding (stiffness) damping, you can overcome these problems.

The generalized form of the Newmark-beta operator is

un+1 = un + ∆tv n + (1⁄2 − β)∆t 2 an + β∆t 2 an+1

v n+1 = v n + (1 − γ)∆tan + γ∆tan+1

where superscriptn denotes a value at the nth time step and u, v, and a take on their usual
meanings.

The particular form of the dynamic equations corresponding to the trapezoidal rule

Υ = 1⁄2, β = 1⁄4

results in

4 2 4
( 2 M + C + K) ∆u = F n+1 − Rn + M (an + v n ) + Cv n
∆t ∆t ∆t

where the internal force R is

R = ∫ βT σdv
v

Dynamic equation allows implicit solution of the system

un+1 = un + ∆u

Notice that the operator matrix includes K, the tangent stiffness matrix, Hence, any
nonlinearity results in a reformulation of the operator matrix. Additionally, if the time step
changes, this matrix must be recalculated because the operator matrix also depends on the
time step. It is possible to change the values of 𝛾 and 𝛽 through the global solution controls.

32 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 b) Generalized Alpha Operator
One of the drawbacks of the existing implicit operators is the inability to easily control the
numerical dissipation. While the Newmark-Beta method has no dissipation and works well
for regular vibration problems. A single scheme that easily allows zero/small dissipation for
regular structural dynamic problems and high-frequency numerical dissipation for dynamic
contact problems is desirable. In (Chung, J. and Hulbert, G.M., “A time integration algorithm
for structural dynamics with improved numerical dissipation: The Generalized-α Method”,
Journal of Applied Mechanics, Vol. 60, pp. 371 - 375, June 1993) a Generalized-alpha method
has been presented as an unconditionally stable, second-order algorithm that allows user-
controllable numerical dissipation. The dissipation is controlled by choosing either the
spectral radius S of the operator or alternatively, two parameters αf and αm . The choice of
the parameters provides a family of time integration algorithms that encompasses the
Newmark-Beta and the Hilber-Hughes-Taylor time integration methods as special cases.

The equilibrium equations for the generalized alpha method can be expressed in the form
n+1+αm n+1+αf n+1+αf
Ma + Cv + Ku = F n+1αf

where

un+1+αf = (1 + αf )un+1 − αf un

v n+1+αf = (1 + αf )v n+1 − αf v n

an+1+αm = (1 + αm )an+1 − αm an

The displacement and velocity updates are identical to those of the Newmark algorithm

un+1 = un + ∆tv n + (1⁄2 − β)∆t 2 an + β∆t 2 an+1

v n+1 = v n + (1 − γ)∆tan + γ∆tan+1

where optimal values of the parameters 𝛽 and 𝛾 are related to 𝛼𝑓 and 𝛼𝑚 by

1
β= (1 + αm − αf )2
4
1
𝛾= + αm − αf
2
It is seen that the 𝛼𝑓 and 𝛼𝑚 parameters can be used to control the numerical dissipation of
the operator. A simpler measure is the spectral radius ρ. This is also a measure of the
numerical dissipation; a smaller spectral radius value corresponds to greater numerical

33 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

dissipation. The spectral radius of the generalized alpha operator can be related to the 𝛼𝑓
and 𝛼𝑚 parameters as follows
ρ
αf = −
1+ρ

1 + 2ρ
αm = −
1+ρ

ρ varies between 0 and 1. Accordingly, the ranges for the αf and αm parameters are given by

−0.5 ≤ αf ≤ 0.0 and −0.5 ≤ αm ≤ 1 . αf = −0.5, αm = 1 corresponds to a spectral radius

of 0.0.

It can also be noted that the case of ρ = 1 has no dissipation and corresponds to a mid-
increment Newmark-beta operator.

3.3.4.2. Time Step Definition

In a transient dynamic analysis, time step parameters are required for integration in time.

Enter parameters to specify the time step size and period of time for this set of boundary
conditions.

When using the Newmark-beta operator, decide which frequencies are important to the
response. The time step in this method should not exceed 10 percent of the period of the
highest relevant frequency in the structure. Otherwise, large phase errors will occur. The
phenomenon usually associated with too large a time step is strong oscillatory accelerations.
With even larger time steps, the velocities start oscillating. With still larger steps, the
displacement eventually oscillates. In nonlinear problems, instability usually follows
oscillation. When using adaptive dynamics, you should prescribe a maximum time step.

As in the Newmark-beta operator, the time step in Houbolt integration should not exceed 10
percent of the period of the highest frequency of interest. However, the Houbolt method
not only causes phase errors, it also causes strong artificial damping. Therefore, high
frequencies are damped out quickly and no obvious oscillations occur. It is, therefore,
completely up to the engineer to determine whether the time step was adequate.

For the Generalized-alpha operator, depending on the chosen parameters, the integration
scheme can vary between the Newmark-beta operator and the Single-step houbolt
operator. For spectral radii < 1, there is artificial damping in the system. Depending on the
type of problem, the Generalized-alpha parameters and the associated time step should be
carefully chosen to reduce phase errors and effects of artificial damping.

34 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

In nonlinear problems, the mode shapes and frequencies are strong functions of time
because of plasticity and large displacement effects, so that the above guidelines can be only
a coarse approximation. To obtain a more accurate estimate, repeat the analysis with a
significantly different time step (1/5 to 1/10 of the original) and compare responses.

35 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.4. Nonlinear analysis
Nonlinear analysis is usually more complex and expensive than linear analysis. Also, a
nonlinear problem can never be formulated as a set of linear equations. In general, the
solutions of nonlinear problems always require incremental solution schemes and
sometimes require iterations within each load/time increment to ensure that equilibrium is
satisfied at the end of each step. Superposition cannot be applied in nonlinear problems.

Newton-Raphson is the iterative procedures supported in CivilFEM.

A nonlinear problem does not always have a unique solution. Sometimes a nonlinear
problem does not have any solution, although the problem can seem to be defined correctly.

Nonlinear analysis requires good judgment and uses considerable computing time. Several
runs are often required. The first run should extract the maximum information with the
minimum amount of computing time. Some design considerations for a preliminary analysis
are:

 Minimize degrees of freedom whenever possible.

 Halve the number of load increments by doubling the size of each load increment.
 Impose a coarse tolerance on convergence to reduce the number of iterations. A
coarse run determines the area of most rapid change where additional load
increments might be required. Plan the increment size in the final run by the
following rule of thumb: there should be as many load increments as required to fit
the nonlinear results by the same number of straight lines.

CivilFEM solves nonlinear static problems according to one of the following two methods:
tangent modulus or initial strain. Examples of the tangent modulus method are elastic-
plastic analysis, nonlinear springs, nonlinear foundations, large displacement analysis and
gaps. This method requires at least the following three controls:

 A tolerance on convergence.
 A limit to the maximum allowable number of iterations.
 Specification of a minimum number of iterations.

3.4.1. Load Incrementation

In many nonlinear analyses, it is useful to have CivilFEM automatically determine the
appropriate load step size. For an adaptive scheme, the load step size changes from one

36 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

increment to the other and also within an increment depending on convergence criteria
and/or user-defined physical criteria.

Selecting a proper load step increment is an important aspect of a nonlinear solution

scheme. Large steps often lead to many iterations per increment and, if the step is too large,
it can lead to inaccuracies and nonconvergence. On the other hand, using too small steps is
inefficient.

When a fixed step fraction scheme is used, it is important to select an appropriate step
fraction size that captures the loading history and allows for convergence within a
reasonable number of recycles. For complex load histories, it is necessary to prescribe the
loading through time tables while setting up the run.

For fixed stepping, there is an option to have the load step automatically cut back in case of
failure to obtain convergence. When an increment diverges, the intermediate deformations
after each iteration can show large fluctuations and the final cause of program exit can be
any of the following: maximum number of iterations reached, elements going inside out or,
in a contact analysis and nodes sliding off a rigid contact body. If the cutback feature is
activated and one of these problems occur, the state of the analysis at the end of the
previous increment is restored and the increment is subdivided into a number of
subincrements. The step size is halved until convergence is obtained or the user-specified
number of cutbacks has been performed. Once a subincrement is converged, the analysis
continues to complete the remainder of the original increment. No results are written to the
post file during subincrementation. When the original increment is finished, the calculation
continues to the next increment with the original increment count and time step
maintained.

3.4.2. Newton-Raphson Method

The Newton-Raphson method can be used to solve the nonlinear equilibrium equations in
structural analysis by considering the following set of equations:

K(u)δu = F − R(u)

Where u is the nodal-displacement vector, F is the external nodal-load vector, R is the

internal nodal-load vector (following from the internal stresses), and K is the tangent-
stiffness matrix. The internal nodal-load vector is obtained from the internal stresses as

𝑅 = ∑ ∫ βT σdv
Elem v

37 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

In this set of equations, both R and K are functions of u. In many cases, F is also a function of
u (for example, if F follows from pressure loads, the nodal load vector is a function of the
orientation of the structure). The equations suggest that use of the Newton-Raphson
method is appropriate. Suppose that the last obtained approximate solution is termed δui ,
where i indicates the iteration number. First equation can then be written as

𝐾(ui−1 i−1
n+1 )δu = F − R(un+1 )

This equation is solved for 𝛿𝑢𝑖 and the next appropriate solution is obtained by

∆ui = ∆ui+1 + δui and uin+1 = un + ∆ui

Solution of this equation completes one iteration, and the process can be repeated. The
subscript n denotes the increment number representing the state t = n. Unless stated
otherwise, the subscript n+1 is dropped with al quantities referring to the current state.

The Newton-Raphson method is the default in CivilFEM (see figure below).

The Newton-Raphson method provides good results for most nonlinear problems, but is
expensive for large, three-dimensional problems, when the direct solver is used. The
computational problem is less significant when the iterative solvers are used. Figure above
illustrates the graphical interpretation of the Newton-Raphson iteration technique in one
dimension to find the roots of the function 𝐹(u) − 1 = √u − 1 = 0 starting from
increment 1 where 𝐹(u0 ) = 0.2 to increment 2 where 𝐹(ulast ) = 1.0.

The iteration process stops when the convergence criteria are satisfied.

38 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.4.3. Arc-Length
The arc-length procedures assume that the control of the nonlinear behavior and possible
instabilities is due to mechanical loads, and that the objective is to obtain an equilibrium
position at the end of the loadcase. Hence, while the program may increase or decrease the
load, the load can always be considered to be 𝐹 = 𝐹𝑏 + 𝜆 (𝐹𝑒 − 𝐹𝑏 ) , where Fb and Fe are
the loads at the beginning and end of the loadcase. The scale factor does not necessarily
vary linearly from 0 to 1 over the increments, and may, in fact, become negative.

Mechanical loads, as shown above, are applied in a proportional manner and thermal loads
are applied instantaneously.

This means that any automatic load incrementation method is limited to mechanical input
histories that only have linear variations in load or displacement and thermal input histories
that have immediate change in temperature. For example, one may not use a rigid body with
a linearly changing velocity, since the resulting displacement of the rigid body would give
parabolically changing displacements. In this case, one would need to use a constant velocity
for the arc length method to work properly.

For the arc length method, care must be taken to appropriately define the loading history in
each loadcase. The load case should be defined between appropriate break points in the
load history curve. For example, in figure above, correct results would be obtained upon
defining three distinct loadcases between times 0-t1, t1-t2, and t2-t3 during the model
preparation. However, if only one load case is defined for the entire load history between
0-t3, the total applied load for the loadcase is zero.

The solution methods described above involve an iterative process to achieve equilibrium
for a fixed increment of load. Besides, none of them have the ability to deal with problems

39 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

involving snap-through and snap-back behavior. An equilibrium path as shown in figure
below displays the features possibly involved.

The issue at hand is the existence of multiple displacement vectors, u , for a given applied
force vector, F . The arc-length methods provide the means to ensure that the correct
displacement vector is found by CivilFEM. If you have a load controlled problem, the solution
tends to jump from point 2 to 6 whenever the load increment after 2 is applied. If you have a
displacement controlled problem, the solution tends to jump from 3 to 5 whenever the
displacement increment after 3 is applied. Note that these problems appear essentially in
quasi-static analyses. In dynamic analyses, the inertia forces help determine equilibrium in a
snap-through problem.

Thus, in a quasi-static analysis sometimes it is impossible to find a converged solution for a

particular load (or displacement increment):

λn+1 F − λn F = ∆λF

This is illustrated in previous figure where both the phenomenon of snap-through (going
from point 2 to 3) and snap-back (going from point 3 to 4) require a solution procedure
which can handle these problems without going back along the same equilibrium curve.

40 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

As shown in figure below, assume that the solution is known at point A for load level λn F.
For arriving at point B on the equilibrium curve, you either reduce the step size or adapt the
load level in the iteration process.

To achieve this end, the equilibrium equations are augmented with a constraint equation
expressed typically as the norm of incremental displacements. Hence, this allows the load
level to change from iteration to iteration until equilibrium is found.

3.4.4. Convergence Controls

The default procedure for convergence criterion in CivilFEM is based on the magnitude of
the maximum residual load compared to the maximum reaction force. This method is
appropriate since the residuals measure the out-of-equilibrium force, which should be
minimized. This technique is also appropriate for Newton methods, where zero-load
iterations reduce the residual load. The method has the additional benefit that convergence
can be satisfied without iteration.

The basic procedures are outlined below.

3.4.4.1. Residual Checking

‖Fresidual ‖∞
< TOL1
‖Freaction ‖∞

41 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 ‖Fresidual ‖∞ ‖Mresidual ‖∞
< TOL1 and < TOL2
‖Freaction ‖∞ ‖Mreaction ‖∞

‖Fresidual ‖∞ < TOL1

‖Fresidual ‖∞ < TOL1 and‖Mresidual ‖∞ < TOL2

Where F is the force vector, and M is the moment vector, TOL1 and TOL2 are control
tolerances. ‖𝐹‖∞ indicates the component of F with the highest absolute value.

3.4.4.2. Displacement Checking

‖δu‖∞
< TOL1
‖∆u‖∞

‖δu‖∞ ‖δ∅‖∞
< TOL1 and < TOL2
‖∆u‖∞ ‖∆∅‖∞

‖δu‖∞ < TOL1

‖δu‖∞ < TOL1 and ‖δ∅‖∞ < TOL2

Where ∆𝑢 is the displacement increment vector, δu is the correction to incremental

displacement vector, ∆∅ is the correction to incremental rotation vector, and 𝛿∅ is the
rotation iteration vector. With this method, convergence is satisfied if the maximum
displacement of the last iteration is small compared the actual displacement change of the
increment. A disadvantage of this approach is that it results in at least one iteration,
regardless of the accuracy of the solution.

42 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.4.5. Construction process analysis
Staged construction of many structures as tunnels, excavations and bridges involve that
certain elements in your model may become come into existence or cease to exist.

Using the activation/deactivation time capability allows the manual deactivation of elements
during the course of an analysis, which can be useful to model ablation, excavation and
other problems. By default, after the elements are deactivated, they demonstrate zero
stresses and strains on the post file. However, internally, they retain the stress state in effect
at the time of deactivation and this state can be postprocessed or printed at any time. At the
later stage in the analysis, the elements can again be activated.

By default the activated elements will appear in their original position (will be reactivated in
their originally specified geometric configuration) unless the behaviour of the contruction
process is changed and then free motion of deactivated elements will be allowed. To achieve
this effect, the program does not actually remove deactivated elements. Instead, it
deactivates them by multiplying their stiffness by a severe reduction factor. This factor is set
to 1.0E-9 by default, but can be given other values.

Element loads associated with deactivated elements are zeroed out of the load vector, but
only if the construction process behaviour option is not checked. In this case, loading must
be set accordingly in the corresponding structural elements and timing. The mass and energy
of deactivated elements are not included in the summations over the model. An element's
strain is also set to zero as soon as that element is deactivated.

In like manner, when elements are activated they are not actually added to the model; they
are simply reactivated. User must create all elements, including those to be activated in later
stages of your analysis.

When an element is reactivated, its stiffness, mass, element loads, etc. return to their full
original values. Elements are reactivated with no record of strain history (or heat storage,
etc.); that is, a reactivated element is generally strain-free. Initial strain defined as a real
constant, however, is not be affected by birth and death operations.

Large-deflections effects should be included to obtain meaningful results.

43 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.5. Solvers
The finite element formulation leads to a set of linear equations. The solution is obtained
through numerically inverting the system. Because of the wide range of problems
encountered with CivilFEM, there are several solution procedures available.

Most analyses result in a system which is real, symmetric, and positive definite. While this is
true for linear structural problems, assuming adequate boundary conditions, it is not true for
all analyses.

Each iteration of the Newton-Raphson Method requires solving the system of equations.
This can be done with a Direct Solver or with an Iterative Solver.

With recent advances in solver technology, the time spent in assembly and recovery now
exceeds the time spent in the solver.

Which solution method to use depends very much on the problem. In some cases, one
method can be advantageous over another; in other cases, the converse might be true.

Whether a solution is obtainable or not with a given method, usually depends on the
character of the system of equations being solved, especially on the kind on nonlinearities
that are involved.

As an example in problems which are linear until buckling occurs, due to a sudden
development of nonlinearity, it is necessary to guide the arc-length algorithm by making sure
that the arc length remains sufficiently small prior to the occurrence of buckling.

Even if a solution is obtainable, there is always the issue of efficiency. The pros and cons of
each solution procedure, in terms of matrix operations and storage requirements have been
discussed in the previous sections. A very important variable regarding overall efficiency is
the size of the problem. The time required to assemble a stiffness matrix, as well as the time
required to recover stresses after a solution, vary roughly linearly with the number of
degrees of freedom of the problem. On the other hand, the time required to go through the
direct solver varies roughly quadratically with the bandwidth, as well as linearly with the
number of degrees of freedom.

In small problems, where the time spent in the solver is negligible, user can easily wipe out
any solver gains, or even of assembly gains, with solution procedures such as a line search
which requires a double stress recovery. Also, for problems with strong material or contact
nonlinearities, gains obtained in assembly in modified Newton-Raphson can be nullified by
increased number of iterations or nonconvergence.

44 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.5.1. Basic Theory
A linear finite element system is expressed as:

Ku = F

And a nonlinear system is expressed as:

K T ∆u = F – R = r

Where K is the elastic stiffness matrix, K T is the tangent stiffness matrix in a nonlinear
system, ∆u is the displacement vector, F is the applied load vector, and r is the residual.

The linearized system is converted to a minimization problem expressed as:

𝛹(𝑢) = 1 ⁄ 2𝑢𝑇 𝐾𝑢 − 𝑢𝑇 𝐹

For linear structural problems, this process can be considered as the minimization of the
potential energy. The minimum is achieved when

𝑢 = 𝐾 −1 𝐹

The function ψ decreases most rapidly in the direction of the negative gradient,

∇𝜓(𝑢) = 𝐹 − 𝐾𝑢 = 𝑟

The objective of the iterative techniques is to minimize function, 𝜓, without inverting the
stiffness matrix. In the simplest methods,

𝑢𝑘+1 = 𝑢𝑘+ 𝛼𝑘 𝑟𝑘

Where

𝛼𝑘 = 𝑟𝑘𝑇 𝑟𝑘 /𝑟𝐾𝑇 𝐾𝑟𝑘

The problem is that the gradient directions are too close, which results in poor convergence.

An improved method led to the conjugate gradient method, in which

𝑢𝐾+1 = 𝑢𝑘 +𝛼𝑘 𝑃𝑘

𝛼𝑘 = 𝑃𝑘𝑇 𝑟𝑘−1 /𝑃𝑘𝑇 𝐾𝑃𝑘

The trick is to choose 𝑃𝐾 to be K conjugate to 𝑃1 ,𝑃2 , …,𝑃𝑘−1 .

45 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

Hence, the name “conjugate gradient methods”. Note the elegance of these methods is that
the solution may be obtained through a series of matrix multiplications and the stiffness
matrix never needs to be inverted.

Certain problems which are ill-conditioned can lead to poor convergence. The introduction
of a preconditioner has been shown to improve convergence. The next key step is to choose
an appropriate preconditioner which is both effective as well as computationally efficient.
The easiest is to use the diagonal of the stiffness matrix. The incomplete Cholesky method
has been shown to be very effective in reducing the number of required iterations.

3.5.2. Pardiso Direct Sparse method

Traditionally, the solution of a system of linear equations was accomplished using direct
solution procedures, such as Cholesky decomposition and the Crout reduction method.
These methods are usually reliable, in that they give accurate results for virtually all
problems at a predictable cost. For positive definite systems, there are no computational
difficulties. For poorly conditioned systems, however, the results can degenerate but the
cost remains the same. The problem with these direct methods is that a large amount of
memory (or disk space) is required, and the computational costs become very large.

The solution of the linear equations may be solved using multi-processors using the
hardware provided solver, the multifrontal solver, the Pardiso solver. If a multiprocessor
machine is available, then Pardiso solver is recommended.

3.5.3. Parallel processing

CivilFEM can make use of multiple processors when performing an analysis in parallel mode.
The type of parallelism used is based upon domain decomposition. A commonly used name
for this is the Domain Decomposition Method (DDM). The model is decomposed into
domains of elements, where each element is part of one and only one domain. The nodes
which are located on domain boundaries are duplicated in all domains at the boundary.
These nodes are referred to as inter-domain nodes below. The total number of elements is
thus the same as in a serial (nonparallel) run but the total number of nodes can be larger.
The computations in each domain are done by separate processes on the machine used. At
various stages of the analysis, the processes need to communicate data between each other.
This is handled by means of a communication protocol called MPI (Message Passing
Interface). MPI is a standard for how this communication is to be done and CivilFEM makes
use of different implementations of MPI on different platforms. CivilFEM uses MPI
regardless of the type of machine used.

The types of machines supported are shared memory machines, which are single machines
with multiple processors and a memory which is shared between the processors and cluster

46 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

of separate workstations connected with some network. Each machine (node) of a cluster
can also be a multiprocessor machine.

Only Pardiso solver supports shared memory machines and out-of-core solution in parallel
on a cluster of workstations. The main reason for running an analysis in parallel on a shared
memory machine is speed. Since all processes run on the same machine sharing the same
memory, the processes all compete for the same memory. There is an overhead in memory
usage so some parts of the analysis need more memory for a parallel run than a serial
analysis. The matrix solver, on the other hand, needs less memory in a parallel analysis. Less
memory is usually needed to store and solve several smaller systems than a single large one.

In the case of a cluster, the picture is somewhat different. Suppose a number of

workstations are used in a run and one process is running on each workstation. The process
then has full access to the memory of the workstation. If a analysis does not fit into the
memory of one workstation, the analysis could be run on, say, two workstations and the
combined memory of the machines may be sufficient.

The amount of speed-up that can be achieved depends on a number of factors including the
type of analysis, the type of machine used, the size of the problem, and the performance of
communications. For instance, a shared memory machine usually has faster communication
than a cluster (for example, communicating over a standard Ethernet). On the other hand, a
shared memory machine may run slower if it is used near its memory capacity due to
memory access conflicts and cache misses etc.

The conjugate gradient iterative solver operates simultaneously on the whole model. It
works to a large extent like in a serial run. For each iteration cycle, there is a need to
synchronize the residuals from the different domains.

47 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.6. Obtaining solution
Load cases must be generated when all load groups are defined and prior the solving process
in order to obtain results. Only with load groups definition is not enough to solve and an
error message will appear if at least one load case is not created.

Then user is ready to solve the analysis, a prompt message is displayed in order to save a
backup copy of the model (a file name and directory path must be specified).

Load cases are solved independently following the sequence of specified Calculation Time
variables. Each load case one generates its corresponding results file (.RCF with the same
name as the load case).

Increments are points within a load case at which solutions are calculated. They are used for
different reasons:

In a nonlinear static or steady-state analysis, increments are used to apply the loads
gradually so that an accurate solution can be obtained.
In a linear or nonlinear transient analysis, increments are used to satisfy transient
time integration rules (which usually dictate a minimum integration time step for an
accurate solution).

In a linear static analysis increments have no meaning and a single increment is solved for
each load case.

Iterations are additional solutions calculated at a given increment for equilibrium

convergence purposes. They are iterative corrections used only in nonlinear analyses (static
or transient), where convergence plays an important role.

3.6.1. Program messages

The messages provided by CivilFEM at various points in the output show the current status
of the problem solution. Several of these messages are listed below.

Initializing solver engine.

Start the solution process.
Checking the model.
Checks the consistency of the model.
Creating input for Marc.
Links with the external Marc solver.

48 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Solving load case n.
Indicates solver is about to enter the stiffness matrix assembly.
Solving increment x.
Indicates the start of the solution of the linear system.
Increment x has been solved.
Indicates the end of matrix decomposition and completion of increment
number x.
Marc run completed successfully.
All load cases are solved without singularities.
Finished solving.
Indicates results file has been written to disk.

In addition to these messages, exit messages indicate normal and abnormal exists from
solver. Following table shows the most common exit messages:

MARC EXIT 13 Input data errors were detected by the program.

MARC EXIT 2004 Operator matrix (for example, stiffness matrix in stress analysis)
has become non-positive definite and the analysis terminated.

MARC EXIT 3002 Convergence has not occurred within the allowable number of
iterations.

EXIT 3015 If the minimum time step is reached and the analysis still fails
to converge.

Failure to satisfy user-defined physical criteria can occur due to two reasons: the maximum
number of cutbacks allowed by the user can be exceeded, or the minimum time step can be
reached. In this case, the analysis terminates with exit 3002 and exit 3015, respectively.
These premature terminations can be avoided by using the option to continue the analysis
even if physical criteria are not satisfied.

3.6.2. Stop solution

Solution process can be terminated anytime and writing data of results file will be skipped.

49 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.6.3. Output results
User can control the solution data written on the results file when solving (.RCF). It writes
outthe specified solution results item for every load case. By default all solution results will
be written and available to list and plot. The list of results is the following:

NODAL RESULTS

UT Displacements

UR Rotations

RF Reaction forces

RM Reaction moments

CPRESS Contact normal stress

CSHEAR Contact shear stress

CNORMF Contact normal force

CSHEARF Contact shear force

CSTATUS Contact status

TRUSS/BEAM/SHELL/SOLID RESULTS

S Stresses

E Total strain

EE Elastic strain

PE Plastic strain

PEEQ Equivalent plastic strain

MISES Von Mises equivalent stress

PRESS Equivalent pressure stress

SF Forces (O.BS.)

SM Moments (O.BS.)

50 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 SE Generalized strains (O.BS.)

SK Curvatures (O.BS.)

CE Cracking strain (N.B.)

SP Principal stresses (O.S.)

(O.BS.) Only available in beam and shell elements.

(N.B.) Not available in beam elements.

(O.S.) Only available in solid elements.

51 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.7. Initial State
The term initial state refers to the state of a structure at the start of an analysis. Typically,
the assumption is that the initial state of a structure is undeformed and unstressed. In many
cases, it is necessary to analyze a nonlinear process in several stages. Each stage may involve
different structural elements and boundary conditions, but history data such as
displacements, stresses and strains have to be carried over for entities to be passed from
one stage to another.

The Initial State option is designed to read data from a Marc results file solver (t16) and to
use the data as initial conditions in the new analysis.

Typical analyses thay may need Initial State are construction or evolutive processes (tunnel,
retaining walls, etc.)

This option takes several steps:

a) Run first stage analysis of the model to generate result files (for example solving a
single lload case with just gravity in a). It is important to use a different model name
to solve this stage. Make sure that Intermediate files are not deleted (uncheck
corresponding box in Configuration options) and output results for initial state is
activated:

52 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 b) Start a new model (with a new model name) by adding new structural elements,
contact pairs and other boundary conditions.
c) Load the .t16 Marc results file. This file can be located inside Marc_Run folder:

d) Choose stresses and/or displacements to be included as Initial State.

e) Run a new analysis.

There are some conditions to be taken into account to carry out an analysis with Initial State:

 For 2D analyses, only plane strain behavior is supported.

 Linear structural elements as beam or cables are not supported.
 Node numbering must be correlative. If merge tool has been performed and nodes
were fused then nodes must be re-numbered.
 If model includes different structural elements participating in a construction or
evolutive analysis (using activation/deactivation material time) then individual mesh
must be performed first on structural elements where Initial State will be studied. For
example, if a tunnel construction analysis is carried out then original unexcavated soil
must be meshed first.

53 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 3.8. Water conditions
Groundwater and pore pressures are very import to modelize the correct behavior of soils.
CivilFEM can takes into account the underground water conditions in soils. There are three
ways to indicate the water table in an initial water table condition :

- By using the result file generated by a seepage analysis.

- By defining the water table orthogonal to an axis.
- By defining the water with a geometry (surfaces for 3d and curves for 2d).

In all cases CivilFEM will compute the water pore pressure at the barycenter of each
element. Then the internal water pressure calculated is applied to the soil skeleton by a
distributed normal pressure on element edges (2D) or element faces(3D) in order to work
with the effective stresses.

If water conditions generates external water pressure (i.e. water load on soil boundaries)
user must introduce the hydrostatic pressure in a load group.

By default, suction (pore water pressure above phreatic level) is ignored. Pore water
pressures are applied only to solid structural elements.

Different initial water conditions can be specified to each structural load case by assigning
the different initial water table condition to each load case. This can be usefull to modelize
the variation of phreatic level. For example, during a construction procces, users can first
resolve the seepage problem for the different stages and then use this results files to define
the pore water pressure in the structural analysis.

54 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Chapter 4
Results

55 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.1 Introduction

4.1. Introduction
Once solution process is completed successfully it is time to analyze the results and verify
the criteria for acceptance. For each load case, the requested results are stored in a binary
file. The following three basic steps are needed to gain access to the results.

Step 1: Open the results file.

Step 2: Select the desired information.
Step 3: Select an appropriate display technique and display the results.

4.1.1. Read results

The first step is to read data from the results file into the model. The model should contain
the same entities for which the solution was calculated, including the structural elements,
nodes, elements, cross sections, material properties and coordinate systems.

Each load case is saved in an independent file. After choosing the desired load case it must
be loaded (.RCF file) replacing any results previously displayed.

4.1.2. Results extrapolation

The solution of the finite element analysis involves a geometrical discretization of the object,
and if applicable, also a temporal discretization. The geometrical discretization is obtained
by creating the finite element mesh that consists primarily of nodes and elements. The
results (depending on their nature) are supplied at either the nodes or the integration points
of the elements. We make the distinction by referring to one as data at nodes, and the other
as data from elements at integration points.

Data at nodes is a vector where the number of degrees of freedom of the quantity indicates
the number of components in the vector. Data from elements at integration points is either
scalar, vector, or tensor data.

The data from elements at integration points are not in a form that can be used directly in a
graphics program.

A node may be shared by several elements. Each element contributes a potentially different
value to that shared node. The values are summed and averaged by the number of
contributing elements.

If a node is shared by elements of different materials, the averaging process may not be
appropriate. To prevent the program from averaging values, do not use the AVERAGE
option.

56 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.2 Element information

4.2. Element information

4.2.1. Result Types
In CivilFEM there are three Result Types:

Node Results.
End Results.
Element Results.

Nodal results are displayed or listed according to the global coordinate system. The
following quantities at each nodal point are available:

- Displacements and rotations.

- Reaction forces and moments at fixed boundary conditions.

End results are derived data as generalized stresses and strains:

- Forces and moments: axial, bending, shear, twist.

- Curvatures.

The system provides the element data for each node end (I,J for beams, I,J,K,L for shells).
The orientation of these physical components depends on the structural element coordinate
system.

Element results are derived data as stresses and strains.

The system provides the element data at each integration point. All quantities are total
values at the current state (at the end of the current load case), and the physical
components are printed for each tensor quantity (stress, strain). The orientation of these
physical components depends on the structural element coordinate system.

In addition to the physical components, certain invariants are given, as follows:

von Mises intensity – calculated for strain type quantities as

2
ε̅ = √ εij εij
3

CivilFEM uses these measures in the plasticity and creep constitutive theories. For example,
incompressible metal creep and plasticity are based on the equivalent von Mises stress. For

57 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.2 Element information

beam, truss, and plane stress elements, an incompressibility assumption is made regarding
the non calculated strain components.

For plane strain elements:

ε33 = −(ε11 + ε22 )

Pressure – calculated as:

−(σ11 + σ22 + σ33 )/3

Previous equation represents the negative hydrostatic pressure for stress quantities. For
strain quantities, the equation gives the dilatational magnitude. This measurement is
important in hydrostatically dependent theories (Mohr-Coulomb or extended von Mises
materials), and for materials susceptible to void growth.

The principal values are calculated from the physical components. The eigenvalue problem
is solved for the principal values using the Jacobi transformation method. Note that this is an
iterative procedure and may give slightly different results from those obtained by solving the
cubic equation exactly.

4.2.2. Shell elements

Conventional finite element implementation of Mindlin shell theory results in the transverse
shear distribution being constant through the thickness of the element.

CivilFEM prints generalized stresses and generalized total strains for each integration point.
The generalized stresses printed out for shell elements are:

 In-plane and transverse shell forces (per unit length)

+t⁄2

∫ σij dz
−t⁄2

 Shell moments (per unit length)

+t⁄2

∫ zσij dz
−t⁄2

The generalized strains printed are:

58 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.2 Element information

Eαβ; α, β = 1,2
(Stretch)
K αβ; α, β = 1,2
(Curvature)

Physical stress values are output only for the extreme layers. In addition, thermal, plastic,
creep, and cracking strains are printed for values at the layers, if applicable.
Although the total strains are not output for the layers, they can be calculated using the
following equations:

ε11 = E11 + hk11

ε22 = E22 + hk 22

γ12 = E12 + hk12

Where h is the directed distance from the midsurface to the layer; are the stretches; and are
the curvatures as printed.

More information about shell results in chapter Forces and Moments Sign Criteria.

4.2.3. Beam elements

The printout for beam elements is similar to shell elements, except that the section values
are force, bending and torsion moment, and bimoment for open section beams. These
values are given relative to the section axes (X, Y, Z).
Before a beam member can be designed, it is necessary to understand the section forces
distribution along the axial direction of the beam. For example, if variations of shear force
and moment along axial direction are plotted, the graphs are termed shear diagram and
moment diagram, respectively.

4.2.4. Tensors and associated invariants

i≤j≤3

TENSORS AND ASSOCIATED INVARIANTS

ij-component of stress

Von Mises equivalent stress

59 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.2 Element information

Pressure

ij-component of elastic strain

ij-component of plastic strain

Equivalent plastic strain

4.2.5. Forces and moments in beams

Forces and moments are calculated with respect to the coordinate system of the elements.

BEAM FORCES AND MOMENTS

Axial force

Transverse shear force in the local 2-direction

Transverse shear force in the local 3-direction

Bending moment about the local i-axis (i = 1:2)

Twisting moment about the beam axis.

Bimoment

Sign criteria of Force and Moment are explained below using a single element (I, J ends):

Axial Force FX:

60 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.2 Element information

Shear Force FY:

Shear Force FZ:

Twisting moment MX:

61 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.2 Element information

Bending moment MY:

Bending moment MZ:

62 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.2 Element information

4.2.6. Generalized strains in beams and trusses

BEAM GENERALIZED STRAINS
Axial strain

Transverse shear strain in the local 2-direction

Transverse shear strain in the local 3-direction

Curvature about the local 1-axis

Curvature about the local 2-axis

Twist about the local 3-axis

Bicurvature

4.2.7. Forces and Moments in Shells

SHELL FORCES AND MOMENTS
Direct membrane force per unit width in local 1-direction

Direct membrane force per unit width in local 2-direction

Shear membrane force per unit width in local 1-2 plane

Transverse shear force per unit width in local 1-direction

Transverse shear force per unit width in local 2-direction

Bending moment force per unit width about local 2-axis

Bending moment force per unit width about local 1-axis

Twisting moment force per unit width in local 1-2 plane

63 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

4.2 Element information

4.2.8. Generalized Strains in Shells

SHELL GENERALIZED STRAINS
Direct membrane strain in local 1-direction

Direct membrane strain in local 2-direction

Shear membrane strain in local 1–2 plane

Transverse shear strain in the local 2-3 plane

Transverse shear strain in the local 1-3 plane

Curvature about local 2-axis

Curvature about local 1-axis

Surface twist in local 1–2 plane

Current section thickness

64 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 4.3. Nodal results
CivilFEM also prints out the following quantities at each nodal point (i = 1-3).

DISPLACEMENTS, ROTATIONS AND

REACTION FORCES
i-component of displacement

i-component of rotation

i-component reaction force

i-component reaction moment component

Contact results.

Contact Status

Normal stress

Shear stress

Normal force

Shear force

Contact status: useful to detect when two surfaces have contacted. This result applies to
nodes on contacting surfaces.

a) A value of 0 means that a node is not in contact.

b) A value of 1 means that a node is in contact.

Contact normal stress: component along the normal of the contact surface of the traction
vector.

Contact shear stress: component along the tangent plane of the contact surface of the
traction vector.

Contact normal force: component along the normal of the contact surface of the equivalent
nodal force of traction vectors.

65 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

Contact shear force: component along the tangent plane of the contact surface of the
equivalent nodal force of traction vectors.

These results are described in Friction Modeling chapter.

66 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 4.4. Combining Result Files
In a typical postprocessing process, user reads one results file (load case1 data, for instance)
into the database and process it. Each time data is stored a new set of results (another .rcf
file), program clears the results portion of the database and then brings in the new results
data. If operations are different between sets of results data, (such as comparing and storing
the maximum of two load cases), the load combinations must be performed.

A load combination is a linear postprocess operation between load cases already solved. The
outcome of the operation creates a new results file, which permits user to display and list
the load case combination as with any other standard results file.

The resulting load cases are obtained by combining linearly the initial load cases, as defined
in the combination rules, with the desired coefficients.

The combination rules are defined in a new window (Automatic User Combination Tool) and
single load cases must exist beforehand.

Summable data are those that can "participate" in the database operations. All primary data
(DOF solutions) are considered summable. Among the derived data, component stresses,
elastic strains, thermal gradients and fluxes, magnetic flux density, etc. are considered
summable.

67 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

Sometimes, combining "summable" data may result in meaningless results, such as
nonlinear data (plastic strains, hydrostatic pressures), thermal strains, etc. Therefore,
exercise your engineering judgement when reviewing combined load cases.

68 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 4.5. Envelopes
The data stored in the CivilFEM results file are stored in two different types of data blocks:
blocks of nodal results (displacements, reactions, etc.), element results (stresses, strains,
etc.) and/or extreme results (forces and moments) in load cases (.rcf files) and blocks of
code check/design results (explained in following chapters) as total criterion, allowable
stresses, design resistance, etc. (.crcf files).

The utility ENVELOPE has been developed to create of other result files as envelope of
others previously obtained. Envelopes have to be homogeneous; specifically, they must be
obtained by the application of the same code and process to the same model. The new
results file will be homogeneous with the previous ones, with a similar identification and the
same utilities for reading, plotting and listing.

There are 3 types of envelopes:

Maximum values envelope.

Minimum values envelope.
Maximum absolute value envelope.

And the available result types:

Displacements.
Stresses and strains.
Axial force.
Bending moment.
Torsional moment.
Shear force.
Reactions.
Rest of results (code check/design).

For example, a new envelope file from different homogeneous results files can store the
maximum displacements in absolute value and minimum values for rest of results types.

69 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

The Envelope window is located in Results tab:

This results window is very user friendly and very easy to manage:

70 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 4.6. Derived results
Once CivilFEM results data are stored, user can perform arithmetic operations among results
data such as addition and subtraction of nodal and element results.

This tool is accessable through within Results tab:

This results window is very user friendly and very easy to manage, user just need to select
the appropriate results file and multiply any available result by a coefficient.

Then a new derived result file will be created.

71 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 4.7. Checking and Design results
After loading a .rcf result file, the user can perform a code check or design using the results
from the loaded result file. By clicking on the corresponding icon, the user will be able to
select the desired option:

After choosing the kind of checking or design option (Axial, bending, torsion, shear, etc),
CivilFEM will generate a new kind of file with the extension .crcf that can be loaded in the
Results tab. Opening this file will generate a whole new result list that will contain the
obtained checking/design results.

Here is an example of a shear/torsion check using a concrete beam.

After solving the model we load the result file which is a .rcf file:

Then we select Concrete, Check Beams, Shear/Torsion and click Shear Qy and Torsion. The
user can choose the file name in the window:

After clicking OK, the Check .crcf is generated and it can be loaded in the Result tab. Note
that the extension needs to be changed to .crcf in the file window.

72 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

Now the different checking options can be selected and plotted or listed.

73 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 4.8. History results
History results is a tool created to review analysis results at specific locations as a function of
time, frecuency or any other available result. For example, user can graph results versus time
in transient analysis or graph force versus displacement results in a nonlinear analysis.

First, introduce the results files desired to be plotted. This results files can be sorted by load
case calculation time automatically.

Add results data to define results and locations to graph/list. One of this result data must be
identified as x-axis. Results data selected will be graphed versus the x-axis data.

74 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Chapter 5
Concrete Shells

75 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.1 General Concepts

5.1. General Concepts

5.1.1. Forces and Moments Sign Criteria

The following figure illustrates the sign criteria for forces and moments. The direction shown
in the figure represents the positive direction of the force/moment.

Tx Axial force in X direction

Ty Axial force in Y direction
Txy Shear force in XY plane
Mx Bending moment about Y axis (XZ plane)
My Bending moment about X axis (YZ plane)
Mxy Torsional moment XY
Nx Shear force in X
Ny Shear force in Y

76 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.1 General Concepts

5.1.2. Reinforcement Directions

Three type of reinforcements are considered for concrete shells:

 Axial+Bending reinforcement.
 Out of plane shear reinforcement.
 In-plane shear reinforcement.

Note: Some design methods or codes consider in-plane shear together with axial+bending.
In these cases, a single group of reinforcement is provided that covers these actions.

The following diagrams show the different reinforcements along with the axis on which they
are defined.

77 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.1 General Concepts

78 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.1 General Concepts

5.1.3. Interaction Diagram

The interaction diagram is a curve in space that contains the forces and moments (axial load,
bending moment) corresponding to the shell ultimate strength states. In CivilFEM the
ultimate strength states are determined through the pivots diagram.

A pivot is a strain limit associated with a material and its position in the shell vertex. If the
strain in a section’s pivot exceeds the limit for that pivot, the shell vertex is considered
cracked. Thus, pivots establish the positions of the strain plane. So, in an ultimate strength
state, the strain plane supports at least one pivot of the shell vertex.

In CivilFEM pivots are defined as material properties and these properties (pivots) are
extrapolated to all the points through the thickness of the shell vertex, accounting for the
particular material of each point (concrete or reinforcement). Therefore, for the section’s
strain plane determination, the following pivots and their corresponding material properties
will be considered:

A Pivot EPSmax. Maximum allowable strain in tension at any point of the shell
vertex (the largest value of the maximum strains allowable for each point of
the section in case there are different materials in the section).

B Pivot EPSmin. Maximum allowable strain in compression at any point of the

section (the largest value of the maximum strains allowable for each point
of the section).

C Pivot EPSint. Maximum allowable strain in compression at the interior points of

the section.

79 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.1 General Concepts

Navier’s hypothesis is assumed for the determination of the strains plane. The strains plane
is defined according to the following equation:

 (z) = g + K·z EQN.1

where:

 (z) Strain of a point of the shell vertex. Depends on its z location.

g Strain in the center of the section (center of gravity).

K Curvature.

Diagram Construction Process

CivilFEM uses the elements (g,K) to determine the strains plane (ultimate strength plane) of
the shell vertex. The process is composed of the following steps:

1. Values of g are chosen arbitrarily within the valid range:

EPSmin (B pivot )  g  EPSmax (A pivot)

If there is no A pivot, (no reinforcement steel or if the ACI, AS3600 or BS8110 codes
are used) there is no tension limit, and this is considered as infinite.

2. Two extreme admissible strains (EPSmin and EPSmax) are defined (different strains
for different materials)
3. For each point of the shell vertex, the minimum ultimate strength curvature (K) is
calculated.
4. The K curvature adopted will be the minimum of all the curvatures of the shell
vertex points, according to the condition K  0.
5. From the obtained K curvature and g (strain imposed at the center of gravity) the
deformation corresponding to each of the shell vertex points (z), is determined
using EQN.1.
6. From the (z) strain, the stress corresponding to each point of the shell vertex (p)
is calculated. With this method, the stress distribution inside the shell vertex will
be determined.
7. The ultimate axial force and bending moment is obtained by integrating the
resulting stresses.

Note: For the design process, two components of forces and moments will be
calculated: the component relative to the fixed points (corresponding to the
concrete) and the component relative to the scalable points (corresponding to the
bending reinforcement). The final forces and moments will be equal to the sum of

80 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.1 General Concepts

the forces and moments of both components. The forces and moments due to the
component for scalable points will be multiplied by the reinforcement factor ().

(F, M)real = (F, M)fixed + ·(F, M)scalable

Steps 1 to 7 are repeated, adjusting the g value and calculating the corresponding ultimate
axial force and bending moment. Therefore, each value of g represents a point in the
interaction diagram of the shell vertex.

5.1.4. Axial + Bending Check and Design

5.1.4.2 Calculation Hypothesis
The checking procedure only verifies the shell vertex strength requirements; thus,
requirements relating to the serviceability conditions, minimum reinforcement amounts or
reinforcement distribution for each code and structural type will not be considered.
It is assumed that plane sections will remain plane. The longitudinal strain of concrete and
steel will be proportional to the distance from the neutral axis.

81 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.1 General Concepts

5.1.4.2 Criterion Definition

Checking of elements with regards to axial force and bending moment is performed as
follows:

1. Acting forces and moments on the shell vertex (F, M) are obtained from the CivilFEM
results file (file .RCF).
2. To construct the interaction diagram of the shell vertex, the ultimate strain state is
determined such that the ultimate forces and moments are homothetic to the acting
forces and moments with respect to the diagram center.

3. The strength criterion of the shell vertex is defined as the ratio between two distances.
As shown above, the distance to the “center” of the diagram (point A of the figure) from
the point representing the acting forces and moments (point P of the figure) is labeled
as d1 and the distance to the center from the point representing the homothetic
ultimate forces and moments (point B) is d2.
𝑑1
𝐶𝑟𝑖𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑜𝑛 =
𝑑2
If the criterion is less than 1.00, the forces and moments acting on the shell vertex will be
inferior to its ultimate strength, and the shell vertex will be safe. On the contrary, for
criterion higher than 1.00, the shell vertex will be considered as not valid.

9.1.4.3 Reinforcement Design

The reinforcement designs produced by the various design methods designed in this chapter
will be valid for a criterion value of 1.00 within a tolerance of 1%.

82 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.2 Wood-Armer Design Method

5.2. Wood-Armer Design Method

5.2.1. Hypothesis of the Calculation
The reinforcement design of shells under bending moments is accomplished by the method
developed by R.H. Wood and G.S.T. Armer.

Once the reinforcement design moments have been calculated, a design for flexure is
performed for each shell vertex.

5.2.2. Calculation Process of the Reinforcement Design

Moments
Bending moments Mx and My and torsional moments Mxy are calculated from the shell
calculation and obtained from the CivilFEM results file. Once these moments are obtained,
the program searches for the pair of design moments Mx* and My*. This pair of moments is
necessary for the reinforcement design and must include all the possible moments
generated by Mx, My and Mxy in every direction.

CivilFEM provides the possibility of placing the reinforcement in two oblique directions: in
the X direction of the element or in a direction at an angle  with the element Y direction.

Design moments for the bottom reinforcement:

Mxy − My ∙ tanα
Mx ∗ = Mx − 2Mxy ∙ tanα + My ∙ tan2 α + | |
cosα

83 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.2 Wood-Armer Design Method

My Mxy − My ∙ tanα
My ∗ = 2
+| |
cos α cosα

If either moment is negative, they will be defined as:

1. If Mx* < 0
𝑀𝑥 ∗ = 0

1 (Mxy − My ∙ tanα)2
My ∗ = (My + | |)
cos2 α Mx − 2Mxy ∙ tanα + My ∙ tan2 α

2. If My* < 0
(Mxy − My ∙ tanα)2
Mx ∗ = Mx − 2Mxy ∙ tanα + My ∙ tan2 α + | |
My

𝑀𝑦 ∗ = 0

Design moments for the top reinforcement:

Mxy − My ∙ tanα
Mx ∗ = Mx − 2Mxy ∙ tanα + My ∙ tan2 α + | |
cosα
My Mxy − My ∙ tanα
My ∗ = 2
+| |
cos α cosα

If either moment is positive, they will be defined as:

3. If Mx* > 0
𝑀𝑥 ∗ = 0

∗
1 (Mxy − My ∙ tanα)2
My = (My − | |)
cos2 α Mx − 2Mxy ∙ tanα + My ∙ tan2 α

4. If My* > 0
(Mxy − My ∙ tanα)2
Mx ∗ = Mx − 2Mxy ∙ tanα + My ∙ tan2 α + | |
My

𝑀𝑦 ∗ = 0

From these design moments, the required top and bottom reinforcement amounts will be
calculated with the same procedure as for beams under bending moments.

84 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.2 Wood-Armer Design Method

5.2.3. Bending Design

5.2.3.2 Calculation Hypothesis
A rectangular diagram is adopted as the concrete stress-strain diagram. The diagram is
formed by a rectangle with a height y given by a function of the neutral axis depth x and a
width equal to 0.85 fcd:

y = 0.8 x for x ≤ 1.25 h

y=h for x > 1.25 h

Where h is the depth of the cross-section.

0.85·fcd

y
x
h

Concrete rectangular diagram

The steel reinforcement stress-strain diagram is taken as bilinear with the horizontal plastic
branch:

σs = Es ∙ εs ≤ fy

The center of gravity of the reinforcement will be placed at a point determined by the
mechanical cover defined in each shell vertex.

In the absence of compression reinforcement, the engineering criteria will be taken as the
maximum strength of the tensile reinforcement:

σs = fy

5.2.3.2 Calculation Process

Reinforcement design for flexure follows these steps:

1. Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated with each shell vertex, which should be previously defined in
CivilFEM database.

85 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.2 Wood-Armer Design Method

2. Obtaining shell thickness geometrical data. Shell geometrical data must be defined
within the CivilFEM shell structural element.
3. Obtaining reinforcement data. The only data concerning flexure design will be the
values for the mechanical cover; these must be defined within the CivilFEM shell
structural element.
4. Obtaining internal forces and moments.

5. Calculating the limit bending moment. Depending on the active code, the limit bending
moment is calculated as follows:

β
MLim = 0.85 ∙ fcd ∙ b ∙ β ∙ Xlim ∙ (d − Xlim )
2

Where:

b Width (one unit length).

d Effective depth: d = h – rc

h Shell thickness depth.

rt Mechanical cover for the tension reinforcement.

rc Mechanical cover for the compression reinforcement.

εcu
XLim Neutral axis depth for the limit bending moment: XLim = ε d
cu + εsy

cu Maximum strain of the extreme compression fiber of the concrete. Depends
on the selected code (material EPSmin property).

sy Elongation for the elastic limit: εsy =

fyd
d
Es

β Compression depth in the concrete rectangular diagram:

Eurocode 2 β = 0.8

EHE β = 0.8

EB-FIP β = 0.8

ACI 318 and ACI β = 0.8 if fcd > 4000 psi

ACI 349
fcd − 4000
β = 0.85 − 0.05 > 0.65 𝑖𝑓 fcd > 4000 𝑝𝑠𝑖
1000

86 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.2 Wood-Armer Design Method

BS8110 β = 0.8 (values of the bellow figure do not apply for code
BS8110)

AS 3600 β = 0.8 if fcd ≤ 4000 psi

fcd − 4000
β = 0.85 − 0.05 > 0.65 𝑖𝑓 fcd > 400 𝑝𝑠𝑖
1000

GB50010 β = 0.8

NBR6118 β = 0.8

AASHTO β = 0.8 if fcd

fcd − 4000
β = 0.85 − 0.05 > 0.65 𝑖𝑓 fcd > 4000 𝑝𝑠𝑖
1000

IS456 β = 0.8

S 52-101 β = 0.8

cu 0.85·fcd

b·x lim
xlim

h d

sy

6. Calculating the required reinforcement. If the design bending moment (Md) is greater
than the limit bending moment, both the tension and compression reinforcements will
be designed. Otherwise, only the tension reinforcement will be designed.

Md ≤ Mlim

β
Md = 0.85 ∙ fcd ∙ b ∙ β ∙ Xn (d − Xn )
2

From Xn (neutral axis depth), the reinforcements are obtained by:

87 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.2 Wood-Armer Design Method

Tensile reinforcement:

0.85fcd ∙ b ∙ β ∙ Xn
Asr =
fyd

Compression reinforcement: Asc=0

Md >Mlim

Stress in compression reinforcement is given by:

d − rc
σsc = Es (−εsy + (εcu +εsy ) ) < fyd
d

Therefore, the resultant reinforcement is:

Tensile reinforcement:

Mlim Md − Mlim
Ast = +
β (d − rc )fyd
(d − 2 Xn ) fyd

Compression reinforcement:

Md − Mlim
Asc =
(d − rc )σsc

7. Obtaining design results. Design results are stored in the CivilFEM results file:

ASTX Reinforcement amount at X top.

ASBX Reinforcement amount at X bottom.

ASTY Reinforcement amount at Y top.

ASBY Reinforcement amount at Y bottom.

88 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

5.3. CEB-FIP Method

5.3.1. Calculation Hypothesis
Design under Bending Moment and In-Plane Loading:

1. The reinforcement design of shells under bending moment and in plane loading is
accomplished by Model Code CEB-FIP 1990.
2. Reinforcements are defined as an orthogonal net (directions of this net are taken
as element X and Y axes).

5.3.2. Equivalent Forces and Moments for Reinforcement

Calculation
The shell is considered to be divided in three, ideal layers. The outer layers provide
resistance to the in-plane effects of both bending and in-plane loading; the inner layer
provides for a shear transfer between the outer layers.

npSdy npSdx
Upper
Layer

Y VpSd
X Vy Vx

Intermediate
Layer
Vx
Vy

Lower
Layer

89 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

From the forces and moments per unit length (mSdx, mSdy, mSdxy, nSdx, nSdy and vSd) that are
calculated from the design and obtained from the CivilFEM results file, the following
equivalent forces per unit length are obtained:
zx − y mSdx
npSdx = nSdx ∙ ±
zx zx
zy − y mSdy
npSdy = nSdy ∙ ±
zy zy

zV − y mSdxy
VpSd = VSd ∙ ±
zV zV

Where:

zx, zy, zv Lever arms between the axial forces in the X and Y directions
respectively and the shear forces.

y Lever arm between the shear forces (Distance from the mean plane of
the slab to the selected force).

Following the Model Code, CivilFEM adopts the values:

z−y 1
=
z 2
2h
z=
3
Where h is the overall thickness of the plate.

So, the former equations change now to:

1 3
npSdx = nSdx ± mSdx
2 2h
1 3
npSdy = nSdy ± mSdy
2 2h
1 3
VpSd = VSd ± mSdxy
2 2h

5.3.3. States and Resistance

These parameters are obtained by:

90 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

npSdx
αx =
|vpSd |
npSdy
αy =
|vpSd |

They are also represented in the following figure:

-ctg y

II I

x

-tg
(-ctg, -tg)
IV

III
x . y = 1

Depending on position of the point (x, y), the applicable procedure is as follows (If vSd  0,
the program utilizes the sign of nSdx and nSdy, to place the point in the correct zone). The
internal system providing resistance to in-plane loading may be one of four cases:

CASE I - Tension in reinforcement in two directions and oblique compression in

concrete.

CASE II - Tension in reinforcement in Y direction and oblique compression in concrete.

91 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

CASE III - Tension in reinforcement in X direction and oblique compression in concrete.

CASE IV - Biaxial compression in the concrete.

According to the case, resistances for the ultimate limit states are the following:

Case Reinforcements Concrete

I fytd fcd2

II fytd fcd2

III fytd fcd2

IV fytd fcd1

Where:

fytd = fytk / s Design tension strength of steel

fcd2 = 0.60 [1 - fck/250] fcd (MPa)

92 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

fcd1 = 0.85 [1 - fck/250] fcd (MPa)

5.3.4. Checking Outline

5.3.4.1. Cases

It is assumed that the shell is reinforced with an orthogonal mesh with dimensions of a x and
ay.

a y = a x · tan

ax

The angle  is defined between the X-axis and the direction of compression. It can be
defined by the user adhering to the condition of 1/3  tan   3 (By default,  = 45º).

Forces and moments that support a cell of ax x ay dimensions are:

npx = ay . npSdx

npy = ax . npSdy

vpx = ax . vpSd

vpy = ay . vpSd

In general, vpx vpy

npy
vpx

npx npx
vpy vpy
vpx
npy

1. CASE 1

93 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

The method of struts and ties will be applied to the following truss:

A
 npx
vpy

B vpx
npy

Applying the forces equilibrium in node A:

A
Na1 npx

vpy
Nh

Na1 − Nh ∙ cosθ = npx vpy

} Nh = ; Na1 = npx + Nh ∙ cosθ
Nh ∙ sinθ = vpy sinθ

From the equilibrium of node B, the result is:

Na2 Nh


B vpx

npy

Na1 − Nh ∙ sinθ = npy vpx

} Nh = ; Na2 = npy + Nh ∙ sinθ
Nh ∙ cosθ = vpx cosθ

To check if these forces and moments are feasible, the strength of the concrete is checked.

Concrete area:

ay min(zx , zy )
Ac = cosθ ∙
2 2

94 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

Stress on concrete struts:

Nh
FCMAX =
Ac

This stress is compared to fcd2 to obtain the concrete maximum compression criterion:

FCMAX
CRTFC =
fcd2

2. CASE II

 A
npx
vpy

B vpx
npy

By equilibrium in node A:

Nh1

npx
vpy
Nh2

Nh1 cos + Nh2 cos = npx

Nh1 sin - Nh2 sin = -Vpy

1 npx vpy
Nh = [ − ]
2 cosθ sinθ
1 npx vpy
Nh2 = [ − ]>0
2 cosθ sinθ

95 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

By equilibrium in node B:

Na2 Nh1
Nh2 
vpx

npy

Na2 = sin (Nh1+Nh2) + npy

Maximum compression stress on concrete struts:

Max(Nh1, Nh2)
FCMAX =
Ac

This stress is compared to fcd2 to obtain the concrete maximum compression criterion:

FCMAX
CRTC =
fcd2

3. CASE III

 A
npx

Vpy

B Vpx
npy

By equilibrium in node B:

Nh1
Nh2 
vpx

npy

Nh1 cos - Nh2 cos = vpx

96 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

Nh1 sin + Nh2 sin = npy

1 vpx npy
Nh1 = [ − ]
2 cosθ sinθ
1 vpx npy
Nh2 = [ − ]>0
2 cosθ sinθ

By equilibrium in node A:

Nh2

Na1 npx

Nh1 vpy

Na1 = (Nh1 + Nh2) cos  + npx

The maximum compression stress on concrete struts:

Max(Nh1, Nh2)
FCMAX =
Ac

This stress is compared to fcd2 to obtain the maximum compression of the concrete criterion:

FCMAX
CRTFC =
fcd2

4. CASE IV – Assuming reinforcing bars are braced

In this situation, the struts and tie model will be the following:

 A
npx

vpy

B vpx
npy

97 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

Hyperstatic structure to be separated into two load states.

1 2
 npx  A
A
vpy

B B
vpx
npy

Both states have simple solutions due to symmetry.

- Solution of Structure 1:
 Node A:
Nh
A
Na1 
npx

Nh

2Nh . cos  + Na1 = npx

 Node B:
/2 -  Na2

Nh
Nh B

npy

2Nh . sin  + Na2 = npy

 Movements compatibility
Where:

Ah = Concrete strut area

Aa1 = Horizontal steel amount

Aa2 = Vertical steel amount

Eh = Concrete modulus of elasticity

98 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

Ea = Steel modulus of elasticity

a = Cell width (ax)

b = Cell depth (ay), (b/a = tan )

Ah ∙ Eh
β1 =
Aa1 ∙ Ea
Ah ∙ Eh
β2 =
Aa2 ∙ Ea
The length of the concrete struts before deformation:

L = √a2 + b 2

sinθ = b/L

Differentiating this expression:

2a∆a + 2b∆b
∆L = = cosθ∆a + sinθ∆b
2L

However, a and b must coincide with the strain of steel bars:

Na1
∆a = ∙a
Aa1 ∙ Ea
Na2
∆b = ∙b
Aa2 ∙ Ea

L must coincide with the strain of the concrete struts:

Nh
∆a = ∙L
Eh ∙ Ah

Nh Na1 Na2
∙ L = cosθ ∙ ∙ a + sinθ ∙ ∙b
Eh ∙ Ah Aa1 ∙ Ea Aa2 ∙ Ea
Nh = β1 cos2 θ ∙ Na1 + β2 sin2 θ ∙ Na2

From the obtained equations, the following linear system is created:

99 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

1 0 2cosθ Na1 npx

[ 0 1 2sinθ ] [Na2] = [npy ]
β1 cos2 θ β2 sin2 θ −1 Nh 0

Which when solved gives:

β1 cos2 θ ∙ npx + β2 sin2 θ ∙ npy

Nh(1 =
1 + 2(β1 cos 3 θ + β2 sin3 θ)

Na1(1 = npx − 2cosθ ∙ Nh(1

Na2(1 = npy − 2sinθ ∙ Nh(1

- Solution of Structure 2:
Due to non-symmetrical loads, the central bars (steel) are not applicable; therefore,
equation 2 is determinant, and the following expression is obtained:

Nh2

A

vpy
Nh1

Nh2 sin + Nh1 sin = vpy

Nh2 cos - Nh1 cos = 0

vpy
Nh1 = Nh2 =
2sinθ
Therefore:

Vpy
Nh(1 =
2sinθ)

Na1(1 = 0

Na2(1 = 0

Total Actions in Case IV

Adding the actions of 1 and 2:

100 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

Nh = A ∙ npx + B ∙ npy ± C ∙ vpy > 0

Na1 = (1 − 2Acosθ) ∙ npx − 2Bcosθ ∙ npy

Na2 = −2Asinθ ∙ npx + (1 − 2Bsinθ) ∙ npy

Where:

β1 cos 2 θ
A=
1 + 2(β1 cos 3 θ + β2 sin3 θ)

β2 sin2 θ
B=
1 + 2(β1 cos 3 θ + β2 sin3 θ)

1
C=
2sinθ

With the assumption of braced bars, Na1 and Na2 signs correspond to compression for a +
sign and tension for a - sign.

5. CASE IV – Assuming reinforcing bars are not braced

For steel bars without braces, there are two possible determinant truss configurations.

 Case 1

 A
npx

vpy

B vpx
npy

By equilibrium in A node:

Nh1

npx
vpy
Nh2

101 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

Nh1 cos + Nh2 cos = npx

Nh1 sin - Nh2 sin = vpy

1 npx vpy
Nh1 = [ + ]
2 cosθ sinθ
1 npx vpy
Nh2 = [ − ]>0
2 cosθ sinθ

By equilibrium in B node:

Na2
Nh1
Nh2 
vpx

npy

Na2 = sin (Nh1+Nh2) - npy > 0

 Case 2

 A npx

vpy

B vpx
npy

By equilibrium in B node:

Nh1
Nh2 
vpx

npy

Nh1 cos - Nh2 cos = vpx

102 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

Nh1 sin + Nh2 sin = npy

1 npy vpx
Nh1 = [ + ]
2 sinθ cosθ
1 npy vpx
Nh2 = [ − ]>0
2 sinθ cosθ
By equilibrium in A node:

Nh2

npx
Na1
vpy
Nh1

Na1 = sin (Nh1 + Nh2) - npx > 0

 Discussion:
With this situation, CivilFEM will select whichever of the two cases satisfies:

Nh1, Nh2  0 and Na1, Na2  0

If neither case results in appropriate signs, it will be impossible to equilibrate the force and
moment states without bracing the steel bars.

The maximum compression stress on the concrete struts is:

Max(Nh1, Nh2)
FCMAX =
Ac

This stress is compared with fcd1 to obtain the concrete maximum compression criterion:

FCMAX
CRTFC =
fcd1

5.3.4.2. Steel amount

For all the cases, steel reinforcement amounts per unit length of the shell are:

𝑁𝑎1
𝑉𝑎1 = 𝑐𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃
𝑓𝑦𝑏𝑑

𝑁𝑎2
𝑉𝑎2 =
𝑓𝑦𝑏𝑑

103 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

5.3.5. Reinforcement Checking in Intermediate Layer

The checking process described in 6.4.2.5 article of Model Code CEB-FIP1990 will be
executed.

Vy Vx

Vx Vy

The principal shear force is:

V1 = √Vx 2 + Vy 2

Acting on a surface at an angle , relative to the Y-axis

Vy
ϕ = arctan
Vx

The following check is to performed: V1  VRdl

VRdl = 0.12 ∙ ξ ∙ (100 ∙ ρ ∙ fck )1/3 ∙ d

ρ = ρx cos 4 θ + ρy sin4 θ

200
ξ=1+√
d

Where d is the total depth without the mechanical cover (in mm), and x, y are the ratios
for the reinforcement closest to the face in tension, in the direction perpendicular to the
surface that V1 acts on.

5.3.6. Required Parameters

5.3.6.1. General Requirements

Material properties described in section 9.3.3.

zx, zy, zv and y parameters which are defined for each element as a fraction of the
depth at each point. As previously stated, CivilFEM uses the specifications from
section 6.5.4 of the CEB Model Code.

104 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.3 CEB-FIP Method

2h
z=
3
z−y 1
=
z 2
The parameter that indicates whether the bars of the element are braced.
Angle  between the reinforcement X axis (element X axis) and the direction of
compression. By default,  = 45º (although any angle is valid if 1/3  tan   3).

a y = a x · tan

ax

5.3.6.2. Checking Requirements

Va1 and Va2 reinforcement amounts per unit length of the shell.

105 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.4 Design according to the Orthogonal Directions Method

5.4. Design according to the Orthogonal

Directions Method
5.4.1. Calculation Hypothesis
1. The design of reinforcement for bending moments and axial forces is performed
independently for each direction.
2. Reinforcements are defined as an orthogonal mesh (directions of this mesh are taken as
element X and Y axes).

5.4.2. Design Forces and Moments

The axial forces (T*x, T*y) and bending moments (M*x, M*y) used for the design are those
obtained for the reinforcement directions as follows:

If torsional moment and membrane shear force are neglected:

T*x = Tx

T*y = Ty

M*x = Mx

106 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.4 Design according to the Orthogonal Directions Method

M*y = My

If torsional moment (Mxy) and membrane shear force (Txy) are taken into account, then two
processes are performed depending on considering membrane (in-plane) shear as tension
and as compression.

1) Torsional moment and membrane shear force in tension:

Tx∗ = Tx + |Txy | ∙ Sign(Tx )

Ty∗ = Ty + |Txy | ∙ Sign(Ty )

Mx∗ = Mx + |Mxy | ∙ Sign(Mx )

My∗ = My + |Mxy | ∙ Sign(My )

2) Torsional moment and membrane shear force in compression:

Tx∗ = Tx − |Txy | ∙ Sign(Tx )

Ty∗ = Ty − |Txy | ∙ Sign(Ty )

Mx∗ = Mx + |Mxy | ∙ Sign(Mx )

My∗ = My + |Mxy | ∙ Sign(My )

If only torsional moment (Mxy) is considered:

T*x=Tx

T*y=Ty

Mx∗ = Mx + |Mxy | ∙ Sign(Mx )

My∗ = My + |Mxy | ∙ Sign(My )

Where X and Y represent the orthogonal directions of bending reinforcement of the shell.

5.4.3. Maximum Allowable Stress/Strain in Reinforcement

Reinforcement is designed using one of the following conditions:

107 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.4 Design according to the Orthogonal Directions Method

 The maximum strain allowed in tension is defined for the material (EPSMAX). It will
be used as pivot A in the interaction diagram. This condition is typically used for
Ultimate Limit States.
 The maximum stress allowed is specified. This condition is typically used for
Serviceability Limit States in order to control cracking.

5.4.4. Check and Design

Reinforcements design for the Orthogonal Directions method follows these steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated with each shell structural element, which should be previously
defined in CivilFEM model.
2) Obtaining shell vertex geometrical data. Vertex geometrical data must be defined
within the CivilFEM model.
3) Obtaining reinforcement data. The only data associated with the bending moment
design are the mechanical cover values for the reinforcement; these must be defined
within the CivilFEM shell structural elements.
4) Obtaining internal forces and moments. The acting bending moments and axial forces
are those obtained for the X and Y directions of each element (T*x, T*y, M*x, M*y).
5) Check and design. Depending on the active code, the checking or design is performed
using the pivot diagram described for the checking and design of concrete cross sections.
For checking, the criteria for axial force and bending moment are obtained as for the
pivot diagram for beams for each direction.

All reinforcements are considered as scalable for design. The obtained reinforcement
factor is therefore the value that must be used to multiply the upper and lower
reinforcement amount to fulfill the code requirements.

6) Checking results. Checking results are stored in the CivilFEM results file:
Criterion for X direction.
Criterion for Y direction.
7) Design results. Design results are stored in the CivilFEM results file:
Reinforcement amount for X direction, top surface.
Reinforcement amount for X direction, bottom surface.
Reinforcement amount for Y direction, top surface.
Reinforcement amount for Y direction, bottom surface.
Design criterion for X direction.
Design criterion for Y direction.

108 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.5 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER

5.5. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to

EC2 and ITER
Check and Design for Out-of-Plane Shear Loadings according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-
1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design Code

5.5.1. Required Input Data

Shear check or design according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design
Code requires a series of parameters described below:

1) Materials strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated with each one of the shell vertices and for the active time. Those
material properties should be previously defined. The required data are the following:
fck characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
fcd design strength of concrete.
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.

fywd design strength of reinforcement.

γc partial safety factor for concrete.

γs partial safety factor for reinforcement.

2) Shell vertex geometrical data:

th thickness of the shell vertex (shell structural element).

3) Geometrical parameters. Required data are the following:

c bending reinforcement mechanical cover (shell structural element).

ρ1i ratio of the longitudinal tensile reinforcement per unit length of the shell:

Assi
ρ1i = < 0.02
th − c
where:

Ass area of the tensile reinforcement (shell structural element).

 angle of the compressive struts of concrete with the longitudinal axis of the
member, (parameter THETA of shell structural element):
1.0 ≤ cotan θ ≤ 2.5 Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)
1.0 ≤ cotan θ ≤ cotan θ0 ITER Design Code

109 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.5 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER

Mean compressive stress (σcp > 0): cotan θ0 = 1.2 + 0.2 σcp ⁄fctm

Mean tensile stress (σcp < 0): cotan θ0 = 1.2 + 0.9 σcp ⁄fctm ≥ 1
4) Shell vertex reinforcement data. Required data are the following:

Ass area of reinforcement per unit area, (parameter ASS of shell structural
element).

The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

sx, sy spacing of the stirrups in each direction of the shell, (parameters SX and SY of
shell structural element).
φ diameter of bars (parameter PHI of shell structural element).
nx, ny number of stirrups per unit length in each direction of the shell (parameters
NX and NY of shell structural element).
5) Shell vertex internal forces. The shear force (VEd) acting on the vertex as well as the
concomitant axial force (NEd) are obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

VEd = √Nx2 + Ny2

which forms an angle with the axis Y

Ny
ϕv = arctan
Nx

The value taken for the design compression force ( TEd ) is the maximum considering all
directions:

1 2
TEd = (Tx + Ty − √(Tx + Ty ) − 4(Tx ∙ Ty − Txy2 ))
2

Design compression force takes into account axial force in x, y directions and in-plane
shear using Mohr’s circle stress transformation equations.

The total shear reinforcement 1 is computed from those in each direction, according
to equation LL.123 (Annex LL from EN 1992-2:2005):

ρ1 = ρx ∙ cos2 ϕv + ρy ∙ sin2 ϕv

110 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.5 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER

5.5.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking

5.5.2.1. Checking whether shear reinforcement is required
Design shear force VEd is compared with the design shear resistance (VRd,c):

VEd ≤ VRd,c
VRd,c = [CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100ρI ∙ fck )1⁄3 + k1 ∙ σcp ] ∙ bw ∙ d
With the constraints:

VEd ≤ 0.5bw ∙ d ∙ 𝛎 ∙ fcd

VRd,c ≥ [Vmin + k1 ∙ σcp ] ∙ bw ∙ d

Where:

CRd,c = 0.18yc

fck in MPa

200
k = 1+√ ≤ 2.0(d en mm)
d

k1 = 0.15

TEd
σcp = < 0.2fcd MPa
Ac

Ac in mm2
f
ck
0.6 (1 − 250 )Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

ν = 0.6 fck ≤ 60 MPa

{ fck ITER Design Code
0.9 − 200 > 0.5 fck > 60 𝑀𝑃𝑎

vmin = 0.035 (k 3 ∙ fck )1⁄2

vRd,c = in N

111 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.5 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER

If shear reinforcement is defined in the section, VEd must be less than the minimum between
the shear reinforcement force:

Asw
VRd,s = ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd ∙ (cotanθ + cotanα) ∙ sin α
s
and the maximum design shear force resisted without crushing of concrete compressive
struts:

Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008):

(cotanθ + cotanα)
VRd,max = αcw ∙ bw ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd ∙
(1 + cotan2 θ)

ITER Design Code:

cotanθ0 + cotanα
VRd,max = αcw ∙ ν ∙ fcd ∙ bw ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙ ( )
(1 + cotan2 θ0 )

where:

1, if the section is not prestressed

σcp
1− , if 0 < σcp ≤ 0.25fcd
fcd
αcw = 1.25, if 0.25fcd < σcp ≤ 0.5fcd
σcp
2.5 (1 − ) , if 0.5fcd < σcp ≤ fcd
{ fcd

The shear reinforcement must be less than or equal to (Eurocode 2 only):

Asw,max fcd
= 0.5 ∙ αcw ∙ bw ∙ 𝛎 ∙
s fyd

Results are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file:

If there is no shear reinforcement defined, the following results can be obtained:

VRDC = VRd,c
VRDS = VRd,s
VRDMAX = VRd,max
VEd
TENS = cotθ
2
Tensile strength for the longitudinal reinforcement

112 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.5 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER

VEd
CRT_1 = VRd,c

CRT_2 = 0, Shear reinforcement not defined

VEd
, Shear reinforcement defined
VRd,s

CRT_3 = 0, Shear reinforcement not defined

VEd
, Shear reinforcement defined
VRd,max

5.5.2.2. Shear Criterion

The shear criterion indicates whether the shell vertex is valid for the design forces (if it is less
than 1, the vertex satisfies the code provisions; whereas if it exceeds 1, the vertex will not be
valid). Furthermore, it includes information about how close the design force is to the
ultimate strength. The shear criterion is defined as follows:

CRT_TOT = VEd If shear reinforcement is not defined.

VRd,c
VEd VEd If shear reinforcement is defined.
min{ VRd,c V
, max{ Rd,s

VEd
VRd,máx }},

A value of 2100 for this criterion indicates that VRd,c, VRd,s or VRd,max are null.

5.5.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design

5.5.3.1. Checking whether shear reinforcement is required
First, a check is made to determine if the design shear force VEd is less than or equal to the
shear design resistance (VRd,c):

VEd ≤ VRd,c
VRd,c = [CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100ρI ∙ fck )1/3 + k1 ∙ σcp ] ∙ bw ∙ d
with constraints:
VEd ≤ 0.5bw ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd
VRd,c ≥ [Vmin + k1 ∙ σcp ] ∙ bw ∙ d
where:

113 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.5 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER

CRd,c = 0.18 yc

fck in MPa

200
k = 1+√ ≤ 2.0 (d in mm)
d

k1 = 0.15
NEd
σcp = < 0.2 fcd MPa
Ac

AC in mm2

ck f
0.6 (1 − 250 ) Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

0.6 fck ≤ 60 MPa

𝝂 = { fck
0.9 − > 0.5 fck > 𝑀𝑃𝑎
200

Vmin = 0.035(k 3 ∙ fck )1/2

VRd,c in N

Results are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

VRDC = VRd,c
VEd
CRT_1 =
VRd,c

5.5.3.2. Maximum Design Shear Force Resisted Without Crushing of the

Concrete Compressive Struts
A check is made to ensure that VEd does not exceed the maximum design shear force
resisted without crushing of the concrete compressive struts.

Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008):

(cotanθ + cotanα)
VRd,max = αcw ∙ bw ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd ∙
(1 + cotan2 θ)

ITER Design Code:

cotanθ + cotanα
VRd max = αcw ∙ ν ∙ fcd ∙ bw ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙ ( )
1 + cotan2 θ0

114 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.5 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER

where:

1, if section is not prestressing

σcp
1+ , if 0 < 1 + σcp ≤ 0.25fcd
fcd
αcw = 1.25, if 0.25fcd < σcp ≤ 0.5fcd
σcp
2.5 (1 − ) , if 0.5fcd < σcp ≤ fcd
{ fcd
The following results will be saved:
VRDMAX = VRd,max
VEd
CRT_3 =
VRd,max
If the design shear force is greater than the shear force required to crush the concrete
compressive struts, the reinforcement design will not be feasible; as a result, the
reinforcement parameter will be defined as 2100.

In this case, the element will be marked as not designed.

5.5.3.3. Ratio of Reinforcement Required

The required strength of the reinforcement is given by:

VEd if VEd < VRd,max

VRd,s = {
VRd,max ifVEd ≥ VRd,max

The amount of reinforcement per length unit is given by:

Asw VRd,s
=
s 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd ∙ cotanθ

The following is also verified (Eurocode 2 only):

Asw fcd
≤ 0.5 ∙ αcw ∙ bw ∙ ν ∙ /sin α
s fywd

If design shear force is greater than the shear force due to crushing of concrete compressive
struts, the reinforcement design will not be feasible; therefore, the parameter containing

115 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.5 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EC2 and ITER

this datum will be marked with 2100. In this case, the element will be marked as not
designed.

ASST and ASSB parameters store the amount of top and bottom reinforcement required due
to the additional tensile force DFtd , in the longitudinal reinforcement due to shear VEd.

DFtd= 0,5 VEd (cotanθ )

0,5VEd cotanθ
∆Asl =
fywd

ASST= DAsl for negative Bending Moments

ASSB= DAsl for positive Bending Moments

Results are written for each element end in the CivilFEM results file as the parameters:

VRDS = VRd,s

Asw
ASSH =
s
DSG_CRT design criterion

116 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.6 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-05

5.6. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to

ACI-318-05
5.6.1. Required Input Data
Shear checking or design according to ACI 318-05 requires the data described below:

1. Material strength properties. Material properties are assigned to each shell structural
element. These material properties must be defined prior to the check and design
process. The required properties are:
f’c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fy specified yield strength of reinforcement.

2. Shell vertex data:

th thickness of the shell vertex (shell structural element).
Required properties are:

3. Shell vertex reinforcement data.

c bending reinforcement mechanical cover (shell structural element).

Ass the area of bending reinforcement per unit length. This parameter is used for
checking (parameters of shell structural element).
4. Shell vertex shear reinforcement data.
Ass area of shear reinforcement per unit of area. This parameter is used
for checking (parameter of shell structural element).

The shear reinforcement ratio may also be obtained from:

AssX, AssY area of shear reinforcement per unit of area in each direction of
the shell. (parameters of shell structural element)

sx, sy spacing of the stirrups in each direction of the shell, (parameters of

shell structural element).
diameter of bars in mm (shell structural element).
Nx, Ny number of stirrups per unit length in each direction of the shell
(parameters of shell structural element).

117 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.6 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-05

5. Shell vertex internal forces. The shear force acting on the vertex as well as the
concomitant membrane force are obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF). For
each direction of the shell vertex:
Force Description

Vu Design out-of-plane shear force

Nu Axial force (positive for compression).

5.6.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking

5.6.2.1. Shear Strength Provided by Concrete
The shear strength provided by concrete (Vc) is calculated with the following expression:

Vc = 2 ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 318-05 Eqn:11-3)
where:

bw = 1 (unit length)

√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
2000 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 318-05 Eqn:11-4)
where:
Nu/(th·bw)expressed in psi.

If section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi:

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
500 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 318-05 Eqn:11-8)

If the shell is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed Vc=0.

118 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.6 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-05

The calculation result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VC (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VC_# Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

5.6.2.2. Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement

The strength provided by the shear reinforcement (Vs) is calculated with the following
expression:

Vs = Ass ∙ fy ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-15)

The calculation result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VS (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y direction):

VS_# Shear strength provided by transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs
The following condition must be satisfied:

VS_X + VS_Y ≤ 8√fc′ ∙ (th − c)

(ACI 318-01 Eqn.11.5.6.8)

This condition is reflected in the total criterion.

5.6.2.3. Nominal Shear Strength

The nominal shear strength (Vn) is the sum of the provided by concrete and by the shear
reinforcement:

Vn = Vc + Vs
This nominal strength, is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter VN (# is the
direction of the shell, X or Y):

VN_# Nominal shear strength.

VN = Vn

5.6.2.4. Minimum Reinforcement

If reinforcement is required, the minimum allowable value is:

119 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.6 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-05

bw
Assmin = 50
fy

(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-13)

5.6.2.5. Shear Criterion

The shell vertex will be valid for shear if the following condition is satisfied and if the
reinforcement is greater than the minimum required:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-1 and 11-2)

Where  is strength reduction factor (φ = 0.75 according to chapter 9.3.2.3 of code

requirements). Therefore, the shear criterion for the validity of the shell vertex is as follows:

Vu
Max { }
ϕVn
For each element, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter CRT_#.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is not defined in the
shell vertex, and the criterion is equal to 2100.

The φ∙Vn value is stored in CivilFEM results file as the parameter VFI_#.
The total checking criterion is defined as:
VS_X + VS_Y Assmin
CRT_TOT = Max {CRT_X; CRT_Y; ; }
8 ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c) Ass

5.6.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design

5.6.3.1. Shear Strength Provided by Concrete
The shear strength provided by the concrete (Vc) is calculated by:

Vc = 2 ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-8)

where:
bw = 1 (unit length)
√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).

120 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.6 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-05

For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
2000 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-4)

where:

Nu/(th·bw)expressed in units of psi.

If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
500 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-8)

If the shell is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed that Vc=0.

The calculation result for all element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VC (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VC_# Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

5.6.3.2. Required Reinforcement Contribution

The shell must satisfy the following condition to resist the shear force:

Vu ≤ 𝜙Vn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )

(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-1 and 11-2)

where:  is the strength reduction factor (defined in Environment Configuration).

Therefore, the required shear strength of the reinforcement is:

Vu
Vs = − Vc
ϕ
Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter VS (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VS_# Shear resistance provided by the transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs
The following condition must be satisfied:
VS_X + VS_Y ≤ 8 ∙ √fc′ ∙ (th − c)

121 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.6 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-05

(ACI 318-01 Eqn.11.5.6.8)

If the required shear strength of the reinforcement does not satisfy the expression above,
the shell vertex cannot be designed; therefore, the reinforcement parameter will be set as
2100.

ASSH = Ass = 2100

In this case, the element will be labeled as not designed.

5.6.3.3. Required Reinforcement

Once the required shear strength of the reinforcement has been determined, the
reinforcement is calculated as the maximum of the following expressions (for both X and Y
directions):
Vs
Ass = f for both X and Y directions
y ∙(th−c)

(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-15)

These reinforcement areas will be proportionally increased, if needed, to reach the

minimum required ratio:
bw
Assx + Assy ≥ 50
fy

(ACI 318-05 Eqn.11-13)

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as:

ASSH_X = Ass for X direction

ASSH_Y = Ass for Y direction
ASSH_X = ASSH_X + ASSH_Y
In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (providing the design process is correct
for all element ends).

122 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.7 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-14

5.7. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to

ACI-318-14
5.7.1. Required Input Data
Shear checking or design according to ACI 318-14 requires the data described below:

1. Material strength properties. Material properties are assigned to each shell structural
element. These material properties must be defined prior to the check and design
process. The required properties are:
f’c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fy specified yield strength of reinforcement.
λ modification factor for lightweight concrete (λ = 1.0 default value)

2. Shell vertex data:

th thickness of the shell vertex (shell structural element).
Required properties are:

3. Shell vertex reinforcement data.

c bending reinforcement mechanical cover (shell structural element).

Ass the area of bending reinforcement per unit length. This parameter is used for
checking (parameters of shell structural element).
4. Shell vertex shear reinforcement data.
Ass area of shear reinforcement per unit of area. This parameter is used
for checking (parameter of shell structural element).

The shear reinforcement ratio may also be obtained from:

AssX, AssY area of shear reinforcement per unit of area in each direction of
the shell. (parameters of shell structural element)

sx, sy spacing of the stirrups in each direction of the shell, (parameters of

shell structural element).
diameter of bars in mm (shell structural element).

123 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.7 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-14

Nx, Ny number of stirrups per unit length in each direction of the shell
(parameters of shell structural element).
5. Shell vertex internal forces. The shear force acting on the vertex as well as the
concomitant membrane force are obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF). For
each direction of the shell vertex:
Force Description

Vu Design out-of-plane shear force

Nu Axial force (positive for compression).

5.7.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking

5.7.2.1. Shear Strength Provided by Concrete
The shear strength provided by concrete (Vc) is calculated with the following expression:

Vc = 2 ∙ λ ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 318-14 Eqn:11-3)
where:

bw = 1 (unit length)

√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ λ ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
2000 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 318-14 Eqn:11-4)
where:
Nu/(th·bw)expressed in psi.

If section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi:

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ λ ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
500 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 318-14 Eqn:11-8)

If the shell is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed Vc=0.

124 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.7 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-14

The calculation result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VC (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VC_# Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

5.7.2.2. Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement

The strength provided by the shear reinforcement (Vs) is calculated with the following
expression:

Vs = Ass ∙ fy ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-15)

The calculation result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VS (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y direction):

VS_# Shear strength provided by transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs
The following condition must be satisfied:

VS_X + VS_Y ≤ 8√fc′ ∙ (th − c)

(ACI 318-01 Eqn.11.5.6.8)

This condition is reflected in the total criterion.

5.7.2.3. Nominal Shear Strength

The nominal shear strength (Vn) is the sum of the provided by concrete and by the shear
reinforcement:

Vn = Vc + Vs
This nominal strength, is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter VN (# is the
direction of the shell, X or Y):

VN_# Nominal shear strength.

VN = Vn

5.7.2.4. Minimum Reinforcement

If reinforcement is required, the minimum allowable value is:

125 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.7 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-14

bw
Assmin = 50
fy

(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-13)

5.7.2.5. Shear Criterion

The shell vertex will be valid for shear if the following condition is satisfied and if the
reinforcement is greater than the minimum required:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-1 and 11-2)

Where  is strength reduction factor (φ = 0.75 according to chapter 21.2 of code

requirements). Therefore, the shear criterion for the validity of the shell vertex is as follows:

Vu
Max { }
ϕVn
For each element, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter CRT_#.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is not defined in the
shell vertex, and the criterion is equal to 2100.

The φ∙Vn value is stored in CivilFEM results file as the parameter VFI_#.
The total checking criterion is defined as:
VS_X + VS_Y Assmin
CRT_TOT = Max {CRT_X; CRT_Y; ; }
8 ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c) Ass

5.7.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design

5.7.3.1. Shear Strength Provided by Concrete
The shear strength provided by the concrete (Vc) is calculated by:

Vc = 2 ∙ λ ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-8)

where:
bw = 1 (unit length)
√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).

126 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.7 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-14

For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ λ ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
2000 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-4)

where:

Nu/(th·bw)expressed in units of psi.

If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ λ ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
500 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-8)

If the shell is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed that Vc=0.

The calculation result for all element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VC (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VC_# Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

5.7.3.2. Required Reinforcement Contribution

The shell must satisfy the following condition to resist the shear force:

Vu ≤ 𝜙Vn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )

(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-1 and 11-2)

where:  is the strength reduction factor (defined in Environment Configuration).

Therefore, the required shear strength of the reinforcement is:

Vu
Vs = − Vc
ϕ
Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter VS (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VS_# Shear resistance provided by the transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs
The following condition must be satisfied:
VS_X + VS_Y ≤ 8 ∙ √fc′ ∙ (th − c)

127 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.7 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-318-14

(ACI 318-01 Eqn.11.5.6.8)

If the required shear strength of the reinforcement does not satisfy the expression above,
the shell vertex cannot be designed; therefore, the reinforcement parameter will be set as
2100.

ASSH = Ass = 2100

In this case, the element will be labeled as not designed.

5.7.3.3. Required Reinforcement

Once the required shear strength of the reinforcement has been determined, the
reinforcement is calculated as the maximum of the following expressions (for both X and Y
directions):
vs
A𝑠𝑠 =
fy (𝑡ℎ − 𝑐)
for both X and Y directions
(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-15)

These reinforcement areas will be proportionally increased, if needed, to reach the

minimum required ratio:
bw
Assx + Assy ≥ 50
fy

(ACI 318-14 Eqn.11-13)

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as:

ASSH_X = Ass for X direction

ASSH_Y = Ass for Y direction
ASSH_X = ASSH_X + ASSH_Y
In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (providing the design process is correct
for all element ends).

128 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.8 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-349-01

5.8. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to

ACI-349-01
5.8.1. Required Input Data
Shear checking or design according to ACI 349-01 requires a series of parameters that are
described below. The formulas listed in this section utilize U.S. (British) units: inch (in),
pound (lb), and second (s).

1. Material strength properties. Material properties are assigned to each active shell
vertex. These material properties must be defined prior to checking and design. The
required properties are:
f’c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fy specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2. Shell vertex data:
th thickness of the shell vertex.
Required properties are:

3. Shell vertex reinforcement data.

c bending reinforcement mechanical cover.

Ass the area of bending reinforcement per unit length. This parameter is used for
checking (parameters of shell structural element).
4. Shell vertex shear reinforcement data.
Ass area of shear reinforcement per unit of area. This parameter is used
for checking (parameters of shell structural element).
The shear reinforcement ratio may also be obtained from:

AssX, AssY area of shear reinforcement per unit of area in each direction of
the shell. Parameters of shell structural element.

sx, sy spacing of the stirrups in each direction of the shell, parameters of

shell structural element.
diameter of bars in mm.
Nx, Ny number of stirrups per unit length in each direction of the shell.
5. Shell vertex internal forces. The shear force acting on the vertex as well as the
concomitant membrane force are obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF). For
each direction of the shell vertex:

129 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.8 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-349-01

Force Description

Vu Design out-of-plane shear force

Nu Axial force (positive for compression).

5.8.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking

5.8.2.1. Shear Strength Provided by Concrete
The shear strength provided by concrete (Vc) is calculated by:

Vc = 2 ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 349-01 Eqn:11-3)
where:

bw = 1 (unit length)

√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to an axial compressive force,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
2000 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 349-01 Eqn:11-4)
where:

Nu/(th·bw)expressed in units of psi.

If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi
then,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
500 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 349-01 Eqn:11-8)

If the shell is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed Vc=0.

The calculation result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VC (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VC_# Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

130 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.8 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-349-01

5.8.2.2. Shear strength provided by shear reinforcement

The strength provided by shear reinforcement (Vs) is calculated with the following
expression:

Vs = Ass ∙ fy ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-15)

The calculated result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VS (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VS_# Shear strength provided by transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs
The following condition must be satisfied:
VS_X + VS_Y ≤ 8 ∙ √fc′ ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11.5.6.8)

This condition is reflected in the total criterion.

5.8.2.3. Nominal shear strength

The nominal shear strength (Vn) is the sum of the concrete and shear reinforcement
components calculated previously:

Vn = Vc + Vs
This nominal strength is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter VN (# is the
direction of the shell, X or Y):

VN_# Nominal shear strength.

VN = Vn

5.8.2.4. Minimum reinforcement

If reinforcement is required, the minimum allowable value is:

bw
Assmin = 50
fy
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-13)

5.8.2.5. Shear criterion

The shell vertex will be valid for shear if the following condition is satisfied:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-1 and 11-2)

131 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.8 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-349-01

where  is strength reduction factor (φ = 0.85 according to chapter 9.3.2.3 of code

requirements ) and if the reinforcement is greater than the minimum required. Therefore,
the validity shear criterion is defined as follows:

Vu
Max { }
ϕVn
For each element, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter CRT_#.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is not defined in the
shell vertex, the criterion is set equal to 2100.

The φ·Vn value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter VFI_#.
The total checking criterion is defined as:
VS_X + VS_Y Assmin
CRT_TOT = Max {CRT_X; CRT_Y; ; }
8 ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c) Ass

5.8.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design

5.8.3.1. Shear strength provided by concrete
The shear strength provided by concrete (Vc) is calculated with the following expression:

Vc = 2 ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-3)

where:
bw = 1 (unit length)
√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (it is always
taken as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
2000 ∙ bw ∙ th
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-4)

Where:

Nu/(th·bw) is expressed in psi.

If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi:

132 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.8 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-349-01

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ bw ∙ (th − c)
500 ∙ bw ∙ th

(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-8)

If the shell is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed that Vc=0.

The calculation result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VC (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VC_# Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

5.8.3.2. Required reinforcement contribution

The shell must satisfy the following condition to resist the shear force:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-1 and 11-2)

Where  is the strength reduction factor (defined in Environment Configuration).

Therefore, the shear force the reinforcement must support is:

Vu
Vs = − Vc
ϕ

Calculation results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for all elements as the parameter VS
(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VS_# Shear resistance provided by the transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs

The following condition must be satisfied:

VS_X + VS_Y ≤ 8 ∙ √fc′ ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11.5.6.8)

If the shear force the reinforcement must support does not satisfy the expression above, the
shell vertex cannot be designed, so the parameters where the reinforcement is stored are
set to 2100. Then:

133 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.8 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to ACI-349-01

ASSH = Ass = 2100

In this case, the element will labeled as not designed.

5.8.3.3. Required reinforcement

Once the shear force that the shear reinforcement must support has been obtained, the
reinforcement is calculated as follows:

Vs
Ass =
fy ∙ (th − c)
(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-15)

for each direction X and Y

These reinforcement areas will be increased proportionally, if needed, to reach the
minimum required ratio:
bw
Assx + Assy ≥ 50
fy

(ACI 349-01 Eqn.11-13)

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit of area is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as:

ASSH_X = Shear reinforcement in X direction.

ASSH_Y = Shear reinforcement in Y direction.

ASSH = ASSH_X + ASSH_Y

In this case, the element will be marked as designed (providing the design process is correct
for all element directions).

134 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

5.9. Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to

EHE-08
5.9.1. Required Input Data
Shear checking or design according to EHE-08 requires the following parameters:

1) Materials strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated with each one of shell structural element and for the active
time. Those material properties should be previously defined. The required data
are the following:
fck characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
fct,m mean tensile strength of concrete.
γc partial safety factor for concrete.
γs partial safety factor for reinforcement.
2) Shell vertex geometrical data:
th thickness of the shell structural element.

3) Geometrical parameters. Required data are the following:

c Bending reinforcement mechanical cover.

ρ1 ratio of the longitudinal tensile reinforcement per unit length of shell:

Assi
ρ1 = < 0.02
th − c
where:

Ass the area of the tensile reinforcement.

 angle of the compressive struts of concrete with the longitudinal axis of
member.
0.5 < cot θ < 2.0
4) Shell vertex reinforcement data. Data concerning reinforcements of the shell vertex
must be included within CivilFEM database. Required data are the following:
Ass area of reinforcement per unit area.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with:

sx, sy spacing of the stirrups in each direction of the shell.

135 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

φ diameter of bars.
nx, ny number of stirrups per unit length in each direction of the shell.
5) Shell vertex internal forces. The shear force acting on the vertex as well as the
concomitant axial force are obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Design shear force (Vrd) is obtained from the shear forces in the X and Y directions:

Vrd = √Nx2 + Ny 2

Which forms an angle with the axis Y:

Ny
ϕv = arctan
Nx

The value taken for the design compression force ( TEd ) is the maximum considering all
directions:

1 2
TEd = (Tx + Ty − √(Tx + Ty ) − 4(Tx ∙ Ty − Txy2 ))
2

Design compression force takes into account axial force in x, y directions and in-plane
shear using Mohr’s circle stress transformation equations.

The total shear reinforcement 1 is computed from those in each direction, according
to equation LL.123 (Annex LL from EN 1992-2:2005):

ρ1 = ρx ∙ cos2 ϕv + ρy ∙ sin2 ϕv

5.9.2. Out-of-Plane Shear Checking

5.9.2.1. Checking Failure by Compression

The design shear force (Vrd) is compared to the oblique compression resistance of concrete
(Vu1):

Vrd ≤ Vu1
cot θ
Vu1 = K ∙ f1cd ∙ (th − c) ∙
1 + cot 2 θ
where:

136 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

f1cd design compressive strength of concrete.

0.60 ∙ fcd fck < 60 𝑀𝑃𝑎
f1cd ={ fck [MPa]
(0.90 − ) fcd ≥ 0.5 ∙ fcd fck ≥ 60 MPa
200
K reduction factor by axial forces effect
1 σ′cd = 0
σ′cd
1+ 0 < σ′cd ≤ 0.25 ∙ fcd
fcd
K=
1.25 0.25 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ 0.50 ∙ fcd
σ′cd
2.5 (1 − ) 0.50 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ fcd
{ fcd

’cd effective axial stress in concrete (compression positive) accounting for the
axial stress taken by reinforcement in compression.
For each element end, calculation results are written in the CivilFEM results file:

VU1 Ultimate shear strength due to oblique compression of the concrete.

VU1 = Vu1
CRTVU1 Ratio of the design shear (Vrd) to the resistance Vu1.
Vrd
CRTVU1 =
Vu1

5.9.2.2. Checking Failure by Tension in the Web

The design shear force (Vrd) must be less than or equal to the shear force due to tension in
the web (Vu2):

Vrd ≤ Vu2
Vu2 = Vsu + Vcu
Vsu contribution of transverse shear reinforcement in the web to the shear strength.
Vcu contribution of concrete to the shear strength.

Members Without Shear Reinforcement

Vsu = 0
0.18
Vu2 = Vcu = [ ξ(100 ρ1 fck )1/3 + 0.15σ′cd ] (th − c)
γc
0.075 3/2
Vu2 = [ ξ √fck + 0.15σ′cd ] (th − c)
γc
where:

137 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

T
σ′cd = Ad < 0.30 ∙ fcd ≤ 12 MPa (Compression positive)
c

200
ξ= 1+√ < 2, d in mm
d

fck limited to 60 MPa

Member With Shear Reinforcement
0.9 ∙ (th − c)
Vsu = ∙ Ass ∙ fyd
tan θ
Where As/s is the shear reinforcement area per unit length

In this case, the concrete contribution to shear strength is:

0.15
Vcu = [ ξ(100 ρ1 fck )1/3 + 0.15σ′cd ] (th − c)β
γc

where:
2 cot θ−1
β = 2 cot θ if 0.5 ≤ cot θ < cot θe
e −1

cot θ−2
β = cot θ if cot θe ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.0
e −2

e inclination angle of cracks, obtained from:

2
√fct,m − fct,m (σxd + σyd ) + σxd σyd
≥ 0.5
cot θe = {
fct,m − σyd ≤ 2.0

σxd, σyd design normal stresses, at the center of gravity, parallel to the longitudinal
axis of member and to the shear force Vd respectively (tension positive)

σ
Taking σyd = 0 → cot θe = √1 − f xd
ct,m

In addition, the increment in tensile force due to shear force is calculated with the following
equation:

Vsu
∆T = Vrd ∙ cot θ − ∙ cot θ
2
For each end, calculation results are written in the CivilFEM results file:

VSU Contribution of the shear reinforcement to the shear strength.

VSU = Vsu

138 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

VCU Contribution of concrete to the shear strength.

VCU = Vcu
VU2 Ultimate shear strength by tension in the web.
VU2 = Vu2 = Vsu + Vcu
CRTVU2 Ratio of the design shear force (Vrd) to the resistance Vu2 .
Vrd
CRTVU2 =
Vu2
If Vu2 = 0, the CTRVU2 criterion is assigned the value of 2100.

The increase in longitudinal reinforcement due to shear is stored in ASST and ASSB
parameters (for top and bottom surfaces of the shell respectively).

5.9.2.3. Shear Criterion

The shear criterion indicates whether the shell vertex is valid for the design forces (if it is less
than 1, the vertex satisfies the code provisions; whereas if it exceeds 1, the vertex will not be
valid). Furthermore, it includes information about how close the design force is to the
ultimate strength. The shear criterion is defined as follows:

Vrd Vrd
CRT_TOT = Max ( , )≤1
Vu1 Vu2
For each end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter CRT_TOT.

A value of 2100 for this criterion indicates Vu2 is equal to zero.

5.9.3. Out-of-Plane Shear Design

5.9.3.1. Checking Compression Failure in the Web
The design shear force (Vrd) is compared to the oblique compression resistance of concrete
(Vu1):

Vrd = Vu1
cot θ
Vu1 = K ∙ f1cd ∙ (th − c) ∙
1 + cot 2 θ
where:

f1cd design compressive strength of concrete

0.60 ∙ fcd fck < 60 𝑀𝑃𝑎
f1cd ={ fck [MPa]
(0.90 − ) fcd ≥ 0.5 ∙ fcd fck ≥ 60MPa
200
K reduction coefficient by axial force effect

139 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

1 σ′cd = 0
σ′cd
1+ 0 < σ′cd ≤ 0.25 ∙ fcd
fcd
K=
1.25 0.25 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ 0.50 ∙ fcd
σ′cd
2.5 (1 − ) 0.50 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ fcd
{ fcd

’cd effective axial stress in concrete (compression positive) accounting for the axial stress
taken by the reinforcement in compression.
For each element end, calculation results are written in the CivilFEM results file:

VU1 Ultimate shear strength due to oblique compression of the concrete in

web.
VU1 = Vu1
CRTVU1 Ratio of the design shear force (Vrd) to the resistance Vu1.
Vrd
CRTVU1 =
Vu1
If design shear force is greater than shear force that causes the failure by oblique
compression of concrete in the web, the reinforcement design is not feasible. Therefore, the
reinforcement parameter will be defined as 2100.

ASSH = Ass = 2100

In this case, the element is labeled as not designed.

If there is no failure due to oblique compression, the calculation process continues.

5.9.3.2. Checking If the Shell Requires Shear Reinforcement

First, a check is made to ensure the design shear force Vd is less than the strength provided
by concrete in members without shear reinforcement (Vcu):

𝑉𝑟𝑑 = 𝑉𝑢2
0.18
Vu2 = Vcu = [ ξ(100 ρ1 fck )1/3 + 0.15σ′cd ] (th − c)
γc
0.075 3/2
Vu2 = [ ξ √fck + 0.15σ′cd ] (th − c)
γc

Where:
Td
σ′cd = < 30 ∙ fcd ≤ 12 MPa (Compression positive)
Ac

140 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

200
ξ= 1+√ < 2, d in mm
d

fck limited to 60 MPa

If the shell does not require shear reinforcement, the following parameters are defined:

VCU Contribution of concrete to the shear strength.

VCU = Vcu
VU2 Ultimate shear strength by tension.
VU2 = Vcu
VSU Contribution of the shear reinforcement to the shear strength.
VSU = 0
ASSH Required amount of shear reinforcement.
ASSH = Ass = 0

5.9.3.3. Contribution of the Required Transverse Reinforcement

If the shell requires shear reinforcement, sections under shear force will be valid if they
satisfy the following condition:

Vrd ≤ Vu2

Vu2 = Vsu + Vcu

Vsu contribution of shear transverse reinforcement in the web to shear strength.
Vcu contribution of concrete to shear strength.

0.15
Vcu = [ ξ(100ρ1 fck )1/3 + 0.15σ′cd ] (th − c)β
γc
where:
2 cot θ−1
β= if 0.5 ≤ cot θ < cot θe
2 cot θe −1
cot θ−2
β = cot θ if cot θe ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.0
e −2

e inclination angle of cracks, obtained from:

2
√fct,m − fct,m (σxd + σyd ) + σxd σyd
≥ 0.5
cot θe = {
fct,m − σyd ≤ 2.0

141 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

σxd, σyd design normal stresses at the gravity center, parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the member and to the shear force Vd, respectively (tension positive)

σxd
Taking σyd = 0 → cotθe = √1 − f
ct,m

Therefore, the shear reinforcement contribution is given by the equation below:

Vsu = Vu2 − Vcu = Vrd − Vcu

For each element end, the value of Vcu and Vsu is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
following parameters:

VCU Contribution of concrete to the shear strength.

VCU = Vcu
VU2 Ultimate shear strength by tension.
VU2 = Vrd
VSU Contribution of the shear reinforcement to the shear strength.
VSU = Vsu

5.9.3.4. Required Reinforcement Ratio

Once the required shear strength of the reinforcement has been obtained, the
reinforcement can be calculated from the equation below:

Vsu
Ass =
fyd ∙ 0.9 ∙ (th − c) ∙ (cot θ)
The area of designed reinforcement per unit of shell area is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as the parameter:

ASSH = Ass
In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (provided the design process is correct
for all element shell vertices).

If the design is not possible, the reinforcement will be marked as 2100 and the element will
not be designed.

ASST and ASSB parameters store the amount of top and bottom reinforcement required due
to the additional tensile force DFtd , in the longitudinal reinforcement due to shear VEd.

Vsu
∆𝐹𝑡𝑑 = Vrd cotanθ − cotg θ
2

142 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.9 Out-of-Plane Shear Load according to EHE-08

Vsu
Vrd cotanθ −
∆Asl = 2 cotg θ
fyd

ASST= DAsl for negative Bending Moments

ASSB= DAsl for positive Bending Moments

143 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

5.10. In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI

349-01
5.10.1. Required Input Data
Shear checking or design according to ACI 349 require the parameters described below. The
formulas listed in this section utilize U.S. (British) units: inch (in), pound (lb), and second (s).

1. Material strength properties. This data is obtained from the material properties
assigned to each active shell vertex. These material properties must be defined prior to
check and design. The required properties are:
f’c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fy specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2. Shell vertex data:
th thickness of the shell vertex.
Required properties are:

3. Shell vertex reinforcement data.

c bending reinforcement mechanical cover.

Ass the area of bending reinforcement per unit length.

4. Shell vertex shear reinforcement data.
AssipX, AssipX area of in plane shear reinforcement per unit of length in each
direction of the shell.
5. Shell vertex internal forces. The shear force that acts on the vertex as well as the
concomitant membrane force are obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF). For
each direction of the shell vertex:
Force Description

Vu Design in plane shear force

Nu Membrane force (positive for compression) perpendicular to V u

6. Type of check/design. In-plane shear check/design according to ACI 349-01 is divided

into the three following types:
 Walls with non-seismic loads. Covers chapter 14 of ACI 349-01 for walls.
 Walls with seismic loads. Covers chapters 14 and 21 of ACI 349-01 for walls.
 Slabs with seismic loads. Covers chapter 21 of ACI 349-01 for slabs.

144 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

5.10.2. In-Plane Shear Checking for Walls

5.10.2.1. Shear strength provided by concrete
For sections subjected to an axial compressive force, the shear strength provided by
concrete (Vc) is calculated as:

Vc = 2 ∙ √fc′ ∙ d ∙ th

d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)

(ACI 349-01 11.10.4 and 11.10.5)

Where:

f 'c square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
less than 100 psi).

If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi
then,

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ d ∙ th
500 ∙ bw ∙ th

d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)

(ACI 349-01 11.10.5, 11.3.2.3)

If the shell is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed Vc=0.

The calculation result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VC (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VC_# Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

5.10.2.2. Shear strength provided by shear reinforcement

The strength provided by shear reinforcement (Vs) is calculated with the following
expression:

Assip ∙ fy ∙ d
Vs =
s

145 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)

s = 1(unit length)

(ACI 349-01 11.10.4 Eqn: 11-33)

The calculated result for all elements is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VS (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VS_# Shear strength provided by reinforcement.

VS = Vs

5.10.2.3. In-plane shear criterion – Non seismic loads

The nominal shear strength (Vn) is the sum of the concrete and shear reinforcement
components calculated previously:

Vn = Vc + Vs
The shell vertex will be valid for shear if the following conditions are satisfied:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
(ACI 349-01 Eqn: 11-1 and 11-2)

Vu ≤ ϕ10√fc′ ∙ d ∙ th
d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)
(ACI 349-01 11.10.3 and 11.10.4)

Assip
≥ 0.0025
th
(ACI 349-01 11.10.9.2)

Where  is the strength reduction factor.

The shear criteria are calculated as:

Vu
CRT_1_# =
ϕVn

Vu
CRT_2_# =
ϕ10√fc′ ∙ 0.8 ∙ th

146 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

0.0025 ∙ th
CRT_3_# =
Assip

(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y)

Therefore, the validity shear criterion is defined as follows:

CRT_TOT = max{CRT_1_X, CRT_1_Y, CRT_2_X, CRT2_Y, CRT_3_X, CRT_3_Y} ≤ 1

These values are stored for all elements in the CivilFEM results file as the parameters
CRT_1_X, CRT_1_Y, CRT_2_X, CRT_2_Y, CRT_3_X, CRT_3_Y and CRT_TOT.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is not defined in the
shell vertex, then Vn=0, and the criterion CRT_1 will be set equal to 2100.

If the shear reinforcement is not defined in the shell vertex, then the criterion CRT_3 is set
equal to 2100.

The φ∙Vn value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter VPHI_# (# is the
direction of the shell, X or Y).

5.10.2.4. In-plane shear criterion – Seismic loads

The nominal shear strength (Vn) is the sum of the concrete and shear reinforcement
components:

Vn = Vc + Vs
But also limited by:
Vn = Acv 2√fc′ + Assip ∙ fy
(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.2)

where Acv is the area of concrete:

Acv = (unit width) ∙ (Thickness of the wall)
The shell vertex will be valid for shear if the following conditions are satisfied:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
Vu ≤ ϕ(Acv 2√fc′ + Assip ∙ fy )
(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.2)

147 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

Vu ≤ ϕ8√fc′ ∙ th ∙ Iw
Iw = 1(unit length)
(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.6)

Assip
≥ 0.0025
th
(ACI 349-01 21.6.2.1)

Where  is the strength reduction factor.

The shear criteria are calculated as:

Vu
CRT_1_# =
ϕmin(Vn , Acv 2√fc′ + Assip ∙ fy )

Vu
CRT_2_# =
ϕ8√fc′ ∙ th

0.0025 ∙ th
CRT_3_# =
Assip

(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y)

Therefore, the validity shear criterion is defined as follows:

CRT_TOT = max{CRT_1_X, CRT_1_Y, CRT_2_X, CRT_2_Y, CRT_3_X, CRT_3_Y} ≤ 1

These values are stored for all elements in the CivilFEM results file as the parameters
CRT_1_X, CRT_1_Y, CRT_2_X, CRT_2_Y, CRT_3_X, CRT_3_Y and CRT_TOT.

In case the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is not defined
in the shell vertex, then Vn=0, and the criterion CRT_1 is set equal to 2100.

If shear reinforcement is not defined in the shell vertex, then the criterion CRT_3 is set equal
to 2100.

The φ·Vn value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter VPHI_# (# is the
direction of the shell, X or Y).

148 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

5.10.3. In-Plane Shear Design for Walls

5.10.3.1. Shear strength provided by concrete
For sections subject to an axial compressive force, the shear strength provided by concrete
(Vc) is calculated by:

Vc = 2 ∙ √fc′ ∙ d ∙ th
d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)
(ACI 349-01 11.10.4 and 11.10.5)
Where:

√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).

If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi:

Nu
Vc = 2 ∙ (1 + ) ∙ √fc′ ∙ d ∙ th
500 ∙ bw ∙ th

d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)

(ACI 349-01 11.10.5, 11.3.2.3)

If the shell is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed Vc=0.

The calculated result for each element is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VC (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VC_# Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

5.10.3.2. Required reinforcement contribution

The shell must satisfy the following condition to resist the shear force:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
(ACI 349-01 11-1 and 11-2)

Where  is the strength reduction factor.

149 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

Required shear strength of the reinforcement:

Vu
Vs = − Vc
ϕ
The calculated result for each element is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
VS (# is the direction of the shell, X or Y):

VS_# Shear strength provided by reinforcement.

VS = Vs

5.10.3.3. Required reinforcement – Non seismic loads

The reinforcement amount is obtained by inserting the value of Vs, determined above, into
the following equation:
Assip ∙ fy ∙ d
Vs =
s
d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)
s = (unit length)
(ACI 349-01 11.10.4 Eqn: 11-33)

The reinforcement amount has a minimum requirement of:

Aipss
≥ 0.0025
th
(ACI 349-01 11.10.9.2)

Therefore:

Vs
Assip = max {f , 0.0025 ∙ th} for each direction X and Y
y ∙0.8

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as:

ASSIP_X = Assip for x direction

ASSIP_Y = Assip for Y direction

Also, the following condition must be satisfied:

Vu ≤ ϕ10√fc′ ∙ d ∙ th
d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)

150 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

(ACI 349-01 11.10.3 and 11.10.4)

This criterion is calculated as:

Vu
CRT_2_# =
ϕ10√fc′ ∙ 0.8 ∙ th
(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y)

If CRT_2_# is greater than 1.0, the condition will not be satisfied, and therefore, the element
will not be designed. ASSIP_# will be set to 2100 and the element will be labeled as not
designed.

The criterion below compares the calculated reinforcement with the minimum
reinforcement requirement:
0.0025 ∙ th
CRT_3_# =
Assip

(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y)

5.10.3.4. Required reinforcement – Seismic loads

The shell vertex will be valid for shear if the following conditions are satisfied:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )

(ACI 349-01 Eqn: 11-1 and 11-2)

With
Assip ∙ fy ∙ d
Vs =
s
d = 0.8 ∙ Iw = 0.8 ∙ 1(unit length)
s = 1(unit length)
(ACI 349-01 Eqn: 11-33)
and

Vu ≤ ϕ(Acv 2√fc′ + Assip ∙ fy )

(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.2)

where Acv is the area of concrete:

Acc = (unit with) ∙ (Thickness of the wall)

Therefore the reinforcement amount is the minimum value that satisfies both expressions:

151 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

Vu − ϕVc Vu − ϕAcv 2√fc′

Assip = max { , }
ϕ ∙ 0.8 ∙ fy ϕfy

The reinforcement amount has a minimum requirement of:

Assip
≥ 0.0025
th
(ACI 349-01 21.6.2.1)

Therefore:

V −ϕV Vu −ϕAcv 2√f′c

u c
Assip = max { ϕ∙0.8∙f , , 0.0025 ∙ th} for each direction X and Y
y ϕfy

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as:

ASSIP_X = Assip for x direction

ASSIP_Y = Assip for Y direction

Also, the following condition must be satisfied:

Vu ≤ ϕ8√fc′ ∙ Iw ∙ th
Iw = 1(unit length)
(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.6)

This criterion is calculated as:

Vu
CRT_2_# =
ϕ8√fc′ ∙ th
(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y)

If CRT_2_# is greater than 1.0, the condition will not be satisfied, and therefore, the element
will not be designed. ASSIP_# will then be set to 2100 and the element will be labeled as not
designed.

The criterion below compares the calculated reinforcement with the minimum required
reinforcement:

152 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

0.0025 ∙ th
CRT_3_# =
Aipss

(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y)

5.10.4. In-Plane Shear Checking for Slabs (Seismic Loads)

5.10.4.1. In plane shear criterion
The nominal shear strength (Vn) is limited by:

Vn = Acv 2√fc′ + Assip ∙ fy

(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.2)

Where Acv is the area of concrete:

Acv = (unit width) ∙ (Thickness of the slab)

The shell vertex will be valid for shear if the following conditions are satisfied:

Vu ≤ ϕ(Acv 2√fc′ + Assip ∙ fy )

(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.2)

Vu ≤ ϕ8√fc′ ∙ Iw ∙ th
Iw = 1(unit length)
(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.6)

Assip
≥ 2 ∙ 0.0012 = 0.0024 (th < 48 𝑖𝑛. )
th
(ACI 349-01 21.6.2.1, 7.12.2)
Note: A minimum reinforcement amount is not calculated for a thickness greater or equal
than 48 in.

Where  is the strength reduction factor.

The shear criteria are calculated as:

Vu
CRT_1_# =
ϕ(Acv 2√fc′ + Assip ∙ fy )

153 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

Vu
CRT_2_# =
ϕ8√fc′ ∙ th

0.0024 ∙ th
CRT_3_# = (th < 48𝑖𝑛. )
Assip

CRT_3_# = 0(th < 48𝑖𝑛. )

(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y)

Therefore, the validity shear criterion is defined as follows:

CRT_TOT = max{CRT_1_X, CRT_1_Y, CRT_2_X, CRT_2_Y, CRT_3_X, CRT_3_Y} ≤ 1

These values are stored for each element in the CivilFEM results file as the parameters
CRT_1_X, CRT_1_Y, CRT_2_X, CRT_2_Y, CRT_3_X, CRT_3_Y and CRT_TOT.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and shear reinforcement is not defined in the
shell vertex, then Vn=0, and the criterion CRT_1 is set equal to 2100.

If shear reinforcement is not defined in the shell vertex, then the criterion CRT_3 is set equal
to 2100.

The φ·Vn value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter VPHI_# (# is the
direction of the shell, X or Y).

5.10.5. In-Plane Shear Design for Slabs (Seismic Loads)

5.10.5.1. Required reinforcement
The shell vertex will be valid for shear if the following condition is satisfied:

Vu ≤ ϕ(Acv 2√fc′ + Assip ∙ fy )

(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.2)

where Acv is the area of concrete:

Acv = (unit width) ∙ (Thickness of the slab)

The reinforcement amount has a minimum requirement of:

Assip
≥ 2 ∙ 0.0012 = 0.0024 (th < 48 𝑖𝑛. )
th
(ACI 349-01 21.6.2.1, 7.12.2)

154 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.10 In-Plane Shear Load according to ACI 349-01

Note: A minimum reinforcement amount is not calculated for a thickness greater or equal
than 48 in.

Therefore the reinforcement amount is the minimum value that satisfies the following
expressions for both X and Y directions:
Vu − ϕAcv 2√fc′
Assip = max { , 0.0024 ∙ th} (th < 48 𝑖𝑛. )
ϕfy
Vu − ϕAcv 2√fc′
Assip = max { } (th ≥ 48 in. )
ϕfy

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as:

ASSIP_X = Assip for X direction

ASSIP_Y = Assip for Y direction

Also, the following condition must be satisfied:

Vu =≤ ϕ8√fc′ ∙ Iw ∙ th
Iw = 1(unit length)
(ACI 349-01 21.6.5.6)

This criterion is calculated as:

Vu
CRT_2_# =
ϕ8√fc′ ∙ th
(# is the direction of the shell, X or Y)

If CRT_2_# is greater than 1.0, the condition above will not be satisfied and therefore the
element cannot be designed. ASSIP_# will be set to 2100 and the element will be labeled as
not designed.

To determine if a minimum reinforcement amount has been defined, the CRT_3_# criterion
is defined as:

0.0024 ∙ th
CRT_3_# = (th < 48𝑖𝑛. )
Assip

CRT_3_# = 0 (th ≥ 48in. )

155 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.11 Cracking Checking according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

5.11. Cracking Checking according to

Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)
5.11.1. Cracking Checking
The cracking check calculates the crack width and checks the following condition:

Wk ≤ Wmax
where:
Wk Design crack width.

Wmax Maximum crack width (option in the Checking menu)

The design crack width is obtained from the following expression (Art. 7.3.4):

Wk = Sr,max ∙ (εsm − εcm )

Sr,max Maximum spacing between cracks.

εsm Mean strain in the reinforcement.

εcm Mean strain in the concrete between bars.

ϕ
Sr,max = k 3 ∙ c + k1 ∙ k 2 ∙ k 4
ρp,eff
f
σs − k t ρct,eff (1 + αe ρp,eff )
p,eff σs
εsm − εcm = ≥ 0.6
Es Es
 Reinforcement bar size in mm (cross section code property).

As +ξ 12 ∙Ap′
ρp,eff = Effective reinforcement ratio, where Ac,eff is the effective area of
Ac,eff
concrete in tension, As is the area of reinforcement contained within
the effective concrete area and Ap’ is the area of pre- or post-
tensioned tendons within Ac,eff CivilFEM calculates this value with
ℎ−𝑥
Ap′ = 0 and Ac,eff = min(2.5(ℎ − 𝑑), , ℎ/2)
3

k1 Coefficient accounting for the influence of the bond properties of the bonded
reinforcement (option in the Checking menu).

k2 Coefficient accounting for the influence of the form of the strain distribution:

156 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.11 Cracking Checking according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

ε1 + ε2
k2 =
2ε1
Where 1 is the larger tensile strain and  2 is the smaller tensile strain at the
boundary of a section subjected to eccentric tension.

k 3 , k 4 Constants defined in the National Annexes (option in the Checking menu).

c Cover to the longitudinal reinforcement. (Cross section code property).

σs Stress in the tensile reinforcement calculated for a cracked section.

Es Elastic modulus of the longitudinal reinforcement.

kt Coefficient accounting for the influence of the duration of the loading (option in the
Checking menu).

αe Ratio between steel-concrete elastic modulus (Es/Ecm).

5.11.2. Reinforcement Stress Calculation

During the calculation process, it is necessary to determine the reinforcement stress under
service loads (σs) with the assumption the section is cracked.

The calculation of these stresses is an iterative process in which CivilFEM searches for the
deformation plane that causes a stress state that is in equilibrium with the external loads.
The reinforcement stress is obtained from this deformation plane and from the
reinforcement position.

The design loads are taken as external loads for the case of serviceability stress calculation.
For the stress calculation at the instant the crack appears, the external loads are taken as
homothetic to the design loads that cause a stress equivalent to the concrete tensile
strength in the fiber under the greatest amount of tension.

If the loads acting on the cross section cause collapse under axial plus bending checking, the
cross section and the associated element are labeled as non-checked.

5.11.3. Checking results

Checking results are stored in the corresponding CivilFEM result file.

The following results are available:

157 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.11 Cracking Checking according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

CRT_TOT_X Cracking criterion.

SIGMA_X Maximum tensile stress.

WK_X Design crack width

SRMAX_X Maximum spacing between cracks.

EM_X Difference between the mean strain in the reinforcement and

the mean strain in concrete εsm − εcm .

POS_X Cracking position inside the section

1 Upper fiber.

-1 Lower fiber.

0 Upper and lower fibers.

CRT_TOT_Y Cracking criterion.

SIGMA_Y Maximum tensile stress.

WK_Y Design crack width

SRMAX_Y Maximum spacing between cracks.

EM_Y Difference between the mean strain in the reinforcement and

the mean strain in concrete εsm − εcm .

POS_Y Cracking position inside the section.

1 Upper fiber.

-1 Lower fiber.

0 Upper and lower fibers.

For the cracking check (wmax > 0) the total criterion is defined as:

Wk
CRT_TOT =
Wmax

For decompression checking (wmax = 0) the total criterion is defined as:

158 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.11 Cracking Checking according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

fcd + σmax
CRT_TOT =
fcd

where

fcd concrete design compressive strength

σmax Maximum section stress (positive tension). It corresponds to the SIGMA result. (If
CRT_TOT is negative, it’s taken as zero)

Therefore, values for the total criterion larger than one indicate that the section does not
pass as valid for this code.

159 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.12 Cracking Checking according to ACI 318-05 and ACI 318-14

5.12. Cracking Checking according to ACI

318-05 and ACI 318-14
5.12.1. Cracking Checking
Checking of the Cracking Limit State according to ACI 318-05 and ACI 318-14 consists of the
following condition:

Sd ≤ S
Where:
Sd Reinforcement spacing closest to the fiber in tension (option in the Checking menu)

S Design reinforcement spacing

CivilFEM checks this condition by applying the general calculation method for the
reinforcement spacing (Art. 10.6.4):

40
S = 15 ( ) − 2.5 ∙ Cc
fs
40
S ≤ 12
fs
where:
fs Calculated stress in reinforcement at service loads (in ksi).

Cc Geometrical cover (cross section code property) (in inches).

5.12.2. Reinforcement Stress Calculation

During the calculation process, it’s necessary to determine the reinforcement stress under
service loads (fs).

The calculation of the stresses is an iterative process in which the program searches for the
deformation plane that causes a stress state that is in equilibrium with the external loads.
The reinforcement stress is obtained from this deformation plane and from the
reinforcement position.

The design loads are taken as external loads.

If the loads acting on the cross section cause collapse under axial plus bending checking, the
cross section and the element to which it belongs are marked as non checked.

160 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.12 Cracking Checking according to ACI 318-05 and ACI 318-14

5.12.3. Checking results

Checking results are stored in the corresponding CivilFEM results file.

The following results are available:

CRT_TOT_X Cracking criterion in X direction.

S_X Design reinforcement spacing in X direction.

FS_X Reinforcement stress in X direction.

SIGMA_X Maximum tensile stress in X direction.

POS_X Cracking position inside the section in X direction.

1 Upper fiber.

-1 Lower fiber.

0 Upper and lower fibers.

CRT_TOT_Y Cracking criterion in Y direction.

S_Y Design reinforcement spacing in Y direction.

FS_Y Reinforcement stress in Y direction.

SIGMA_Y Maximum tensile stress in Y direction.

POS_Y Cracking position inside the section in Y direction.

1 Upper fiber.

-1 Lower fiber.

0 Upper and lower fibers.

For the cracking check (sd > 0) the total criterion is defined as:

Sd
CRT_TOT =
S
For decompression checking (sd = 0) the total criterion is defined as:

fc + σmax
CRT_TOT =
fc

161 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

5.12 Cracking Checking according to ACI 318-05 and ACI 318-14

where

fc concrete design compressive strength.

σmax Maximum section stress (positive tension), corresponding to the SIGMA result. (If
CRT_TOT is negative, it is taken as zero)

Therefore, the values for the total criterion larger than one indicate that the section is not
considered valid for this code.

162 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Chapter 6
Reinforced Concrete Sections

163 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.1 Introduction

6.1. Introduction
Checking and reinforcement designing of reinforced concrete beams in CivilFEM is available
for structures formed by 2D and 3D beam elements under axial loading plus biaxial bending,
axial loading plus bending (particular case), shear, torsion and combined shear and torsion.

The check and design process of reinforced concrete beams under axial loading plus biaxial
bending is based on the 3D interaction diagram of the analysed transverse section. This 3D
interaction diagram contains forces and moments (FX, MY, MZ) corresponding to the
sections ultimate strength states. Using this diagram, the program is able to check and
design the section accounting for forces and moments previously obtained that act on the
section. This process considers both generic sections and sections formed by different
concretes and reinforcement steels.

The codes CivilFEM considers for the checking and design of reinforced beams subjected to
axial force and biaxial bending are: ACI 318, EHE, Eurocode 2, ITER Design code, British
Standard 8110, Australian Standard 3600, CEB-FIP 1990 model code, the Chinese code
GB50010, NBR6118, AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Russian Code СП
52-101-03, Indian Standard IS 456 and ACI 349.

164 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.2 2D Interaction Diagram

6.2. 2D Interaction Diagram

6.2.1. Pivots Diagram
The interaction diagram is a graphical summary that contains the forces and moments (FX,
MY) or (FX, MZ) corresponding to the section ultimate strength states. In CivilFEM the
ultimate strength states are determined through the pivots diagram.

The “Pivot” concept is related to the limit behavior of the cross section with respect to steel
and concrete material characteristics.

A pivot is a strain limit associated with a material and its position in the section. If the strain
in a section’s pivot exceeds the limit for that pivot, the section will be considered as cracked.
Thus, pivots establish the positions of the strain plane. In an ultimate strength state, the
strain plane supports at least one pivot of the section.

In CivilFEM, pivots are defined as material properties and these properties (pivots) are
extrapolated to all the section’s points, taken into account the material of each point.
Therefore, for the section’s strain plane determination, the following pivots and their
corresponding material properties will be considered:

A Pivot EPSmax. Maximum allowable strain in tension at any point of the section
(largest value of the maximum strains allowable for each point of the
section if there are different materials in the section).

B Pivot EPSmin. Maximum allowable strain in compression at any point of the

165 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.2 2D Interaction Diagram

section (largest value of the maximum strains allowable for each point of
the section).

C Pivot EPSint. Maximum allowable strain in compression at the interior points of

the section.

Navier’s hypothesis is assumed for the determination of the strains plane. The strain’s plane
is determined according to the following equation:

ε(y, z) = εg + K z y + K y z
where:

 (y,z) Strain of a section point as a function of the Y, Z axes of the section.

εg Strain in the origin of the section (center of gravity).

Kz Curvature in Z axis.

Ky Curvature in Y axis.

In CivilFEM, the three elements g, Kz, Ky are substituted by the elements εg , θ, K to
determine the strain plane. The relationship between (Kz, Ky) and (, K) is the following:

K y = K·cos()
K z = K·sin()
 = Angle of the neutral axis with respect to the section’s Y axis

166 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.2 2D Interaction Diagram

6.2.2. Diagram Construction Process

As stated in the previous section, CivilFEM uses the elements (εg, θ, K)to determine the
strains plane (ultimate strength plane) of the section.
εg and  are used as independent variables. The process is composed of the following steps:

1. Values of εg and  are chosen arbitrarily inside the extreme values allowed for these
variables, which are:
EPSmin (B pivot ) < εg <EPSmax (A pivot)
-180º    +180º
If there is no A pivot, (if there is no reinforcement steel or if ACI, AS3600 or BS8110 codes
are used) the tension limit does not exist and is considered infinite.

2. From the angle , the program can identify which points are inside and outside the
nucleus of the section.
3. Once the interior and exterior points are known, the two extreme admissible strains,
EPSmin and EPSmax, are defined in each of the points (for each point based on its
material).
4. For each point of the section, the minimum ultimate strength curvature (K) is
calculated.
5. The K curvature will be adopted as the minimum of all the curvatures of all the
section points, according to the condition K  0.
6. From the obtained K curvature and g (strain imposed in the section’s center of
gravity), the deformation corresponding to each of the section points  (x, y), is
determined using the equations shown previously.
7. From the  (x, y) strain, the stress corresponding to each point of the section (p) is
calculated and entered into the stress-strain diagram for that point. Through this
method, the stress distribution inside the section is determined.

167 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.2 2D Interaction Diagram

8. Thus, as the elements (εg, θ, K) are determined, the ultimate forces and moments
(FX, MY, MZ) corresponding to the g strain and the  angle defined in step 1 are
obtained by the summation of stresses at each of the section’s points multiplied by
its corresponding weight.
NP

FX = ∑ WFxp ∙ σp
1
NP

MY = ∑ WMyp ∙ σp
1
NP

MZ = ∑ WMzp ∙ σp
1

Where: NP = number of points of the section

WFx , WMy , WMz = weights at each point of the section.

Note: For the design process, two components of forces and moments will be calculated: the
component relating to the fixed points (corresponding to the reinforcement defined as fixed
and to the concrete) and the component relating to the scalable points (corresponding to
the part of the section reinforcement defined as scalable, see Chapter 4.6.). The final forces
and moments will be equal to the sum of the forces and moments of both components. The
forces and moments due to the component for scalable points will be multiplied by the
reinforcement factor ().

(FX, MY, MZ)real = (FX, MY, MZ)fixed + .(FX, MY, MZ)scalable

168 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.2 2D Interaction Diagram

9. Steps 1 to 8 are repeated, adjusting the g and  values and calculating the
corresponding ultimate force and moments (FX, MY, MZ). Each defined couple (g
and ) represents a point in the 3D interaction diagram of the section. The greater
the number of g and  values used (inside the interval specified in step 1), the larger
of the number of points in the diagram, and therefore the accuracy of the diagram
will increase.

With all of the 2D points previously obtained, the program constructs the interaction
diagram by calculating the convex hull of these points. Once the convex hull is calculated,
the “convexity criterion” of the diagram is determined; this criterion is the minimum of the
criteria calculated for all the points of the diagram. The ideal value of the convexity criterion
of the diagram is 1. In CivilFEM, it is not recommended to perform the check and design
described above with interaction diagrams whose convexity criterion is less than 0.95.

It has been proven that the interaction diagram of sections composed by materials whose
stress-strain law (for sections analysis) presents a descending branch has a very low
convexity criterion. The check and design process with the diagram of these sections may
lead to unsafe solutions. Therefore, it is NOT RECOMMENDED to use materials with this
characteristic.

6.2.3. Determination of the Diagram Center

Normal interaction diagrams contain the coordinates’ origin in their interior, but in some
cases the origin may be a point belonging to the surface or even a point outside the diagram
(such as for prestressed concrete sections). In this situation, the section is cracked for null
forces and moments.

To avoid these situations, CivilFEM changes the axes, placing the origin of the coordinate
system inside the geometric center of the diagram. In this case, the calculation of the safety
criterion is executed according to the new coordinate’s origin instead of the real origin.

If these changes are not made, safety forces and moments (in the diagram interior) could
have a safety factor less than 1.00 and vice versa. If the coordinate’s origin is close to the
diagram’s surface (although still inside), it will also be necessary to change the origin
coordinates. In these cases, although the safety factors maintain values greater than 1.0 for
safe sections and less than 1.0 for unsafe ones, they may adopt arbitrary values not very
related to the section’s real safety factor.

Therefore, CivilFEM establishes a criterion to determine whether to use the real coordinate
system origin or a modified one as a reference. Thus, if the following condition is fulfilled,

169 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.2 2D Interaction Diagram

the origin of the coordinates will be modified, moving the diagram’s real center to its
geometric center.

Diameter
Distance ≤ Delta ∙
2
Where:

Distance Minimum distance from any point of the diagram to the real
coordinate system origin.

Delta Variable parameter which may be defined inside the [0,1] range. By
default Delta=0.05.

Diameter Diagonal of the rectangle which involves the diagram surface points.

6.2.4. Considerations
- The selection of the strains values at the origin of the section (g) inside the interval
(EPSmin, EPSmax) for each adopted angle of the neutral axis () is made uniformly
spaced for sections with reinforcements below the center of gravity (bottom
reinforcement). Half of it is distributed in the tension zone and the other half in the
compression zone, avoiding a concentration of points in the ultimate tension zone and
obtaining an even distribution of points.
- If the section does not have bottom reinforcement for each  or the reinforcement does
not have pivot (EPSmax) (as in the case of the ACI or BS8110 codes), the distribution of
the tension zone is hyperbolic. The compression zone will continue to have uniform
distribution. By default the number of the values adopted by g is 30. The number of
values must be a multiple of 2.
- At the same time, the selection of the  values is also uniform, inside the interval (-180º,
+180º). The number of values must be a multiple of 4 in order to embrace the 4
quadrants of the section. By default, the number of values adopted by the program is
28.
- Although the number of the values of g and  used for the construction of the diagram
can be defined by the user, it is recommended to choose numbers close to the default
values. These values have been chosen in consideration of the calculation time and
precision. If a number of values for either variable is a great deal higher than the default
value, the processing time increases significantly.

On the other hand, if the number of values of g and  is reduced significantly, the precision
in the calculation of the diagram may be affected.

170 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.2 2D Interaction Diagram

171 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.3 Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Checking

6.3. Axial Load and Biaxial Bending

Checking
6.3.1. Calculation Hypothesis
This checking procedure only verifies the section’s strength requirements; thus,
requirements relating to serviceability conditions, minimum reinforcement amounts
or reinforcement distribution for each code and structural typology will be not be
considered.
Navier’s hypothesis is always assumed as valid; therefore, the deformed section will
remain plane. The longitudinal strain of concrete and steel will be proportional to the
distance from the neutral axis.

6.3.2. Calculation Process

Checking elements for axial force and biaxial bending adheres to the following steps:

1. Obtaining the acting forces and moments of the section (FXd, MYd, MZd). The acting
forces and moments are obtained, following a calculation, directly from the CivilFEM
results file (file .RCF).
2. Constructing the interaction diagram of the section. The ultimate strain state is
determined such that the ultimate forces and moments are homothetic to the acting
forces and moments with respect to the diagram center.

Obtaining the strength criterion of the section. This criterion is defined as the ratio between
two distances. As shown above, the distance to the “center” of the diagram (point A of the
figure) from the point representing the acting forces and moments (point P of the figure) is
labeled as d1 and the distance to the center from the point representing the homothetic
ultimate forces and moments (point B) is d2.

172 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.3 Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Checking

d1
Criterion =
d2

If this criterion is less than 1.00, the forces and moments acting on the section will be
inferior to its ultimate strength, and the section will be safe. On the contrary, for
criterion larger than 1.00, the section will not be considered as valid.

6.3.3. Check Results

Total Criterion, if this criterion is less than 1.0, in such a way that the forces
and moments acting on the section are inferior to its ultimate strength, the section
is safe (element is OK). On the contrary, for criterion higher than 1.0, the section will
be considered as not valid (element is NOT OK).

Criterion > 1

NOT OK elements

Interaction Diagram, it includes all the necessary information for checking as well as
design. Effects of actions, ultimate strength, safety information, as well as strength
with and without reinforcement can be seen. The criterion provided is the ratio
between the distances of the center of the diagram to the design loads point and the
center of the diagram to the ultimate strength.

173 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.3 Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Checking

174 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.4 Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Design

6.4. Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Design

6.4.1. Calculation Hypothesis
For the design of sections under axial loading and biaxial bending, the same hypothesis for
the axial load and biaxial bending check is adopted.

6.4.2. Calculation Process

For the design, an optimization process is carried out through successive iterations; within
this process, the safety factor of the section (or its criterion) must be strict (1.00). These
values are determined by the following steps:

1. Obtaining the minimum and maximum reinforcement factors. The maximum and
minimum reinforcement factors (max ,min) are introduced by the user. The designed
reinforcement of the section will always be more than min times and less than max
times the initial distribution.
2. Obtaining the reinforcement data of the section. The reinforcements of the section to
be designed must be defined by the class (only reinforcements defined as scalable are
modified), type, position and initial amount (see Chapter 4.4). The designed
reinforcement will be homothetic to the one defined in the section, in such a way that it
complies with the strength requirements of the section. If the reinforcement amount is
null, the program will not perform the design.
3. Obtaining the forces and moments acting on the section. Forces and moments
(Fx , My , Mz ) acting on the section are obtained directly from the CivilFEM results file (file
.RCF).
4. Constructing the 2D interaction diagram. The diagram of the section is constructed for
reinforcement corresponding to min times the initial distribution to determine the
ultimate forces and moments of the section with this configuration.

(FX, MY, MZ)real = (FX, MY, MZ)fixed + ωmin∙ (FX, MY, MZ)scalable

5. From the interaction diagram of the previous step the ultimate strain state homothetic
to the acting forces and moments can be determined with respect to the diagram
center.
6. Obtaining the strength criterion of the section. This criterion is determined following the
same process as described in the checking section.

175 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.4 Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Design

7. If the value of the criterion is less than 1.00 (the forces and moments acting on the
section are inferior to its ultimate strength), the section will be assigned reinforcement
equal to ωmin times the initial distribution and the calculation will be terminated.
8. Repetition of steps 4, 5 and 6 for a reinforcement corresponding to ωmax times the
initial reinforcement distribution.
(FX, MY, MZ)real = (FX, MY, MZ)stationary + ωmax∙ (FX, MY, MZ)scalable

9. If the value of the strength criterion of the section is more than 1.00 (acting forces are
larger than the ultimate strength of the section), the program will indicate it is not
possible to design the section and will not assign reinforcement nor will it continue
calculating.
10. Optimization of the section reinforcement through successive iterations. From the
forces and moments previously determined (FX, MY, MZ)fixed and (FX, MY, MZ)scalable, a
search is done to obtain a reinforcement factor  that will produce a value of the
section criterion between 0.99 and 1.01. The program will then assign reinforcement
equal to  times the initial distribution of the section.

6.4.3. Design results

CivilFEM can obtain the needed reinforcement (design) in order to fulfill the code
requirements. CivilFEM uses the interaction diagram of each section, taking into account the
design stress-strain curve for each of the materials of the section. Moments in two directions
are applied to the section. Scalable reinforcement will be increased/decreased until the
section reaches a safety factor of 1.0 according to the code.

Design Total Criterion, elements with values equal to unity means that those
elements were designed and a reinforcement factor was found within the provided
range of ωmin and ωmax.

Designed elements

176 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.4 Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Design

If the result is out of range then 2100 values will appear.

Not

Designed elements

Reinforcement factor, depending on the range of ωmin and ωmax provided, different
results appear:
1) Obtained reinforcement factor is inside (ωmin ,ωmax), then REINFACT value times
the defined reinforcement amount gives the needed reinforcement.
2) ωmax is smaller than the reinforcement factor obtained, then REINFACT = 2100 for
those elements.
3) ωmin is greater than the reinforcement factor obtained, then REINFACT = ωmin for
those elements.

REINFACT = -1

ωmin should be lower

REINFACT >1

Designed elements

177 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.4 Axial Load and Biaxial Bending Design

REINFACT = -1

ωmax should be larger

If CivilFEM is not able to design reinforcement with considered section, materials and initial
reinforcement amount, then 2100 values will appear.

Total scalable reinforcement (SCALAREA): This option gives the the product of the
REINFACT previously obtained and the total scalable area of all reinforcement groups
defined as scalable:
𝑆𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐴𝑅𝐸𝐴 = 𝑅𝐸𝐼𝑁𝐹𝐴𝐶𝑇 × 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎
The user should note that reinforcement defined as Fixed will not be included in the
calculation. If REINFACT is 2100 , SCALAREA will also be assigned the value 2100 .

178 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

6.5. Axial Force and Biaxial Bending

Calculation Codes
For the check and design of reinforced concrete beams with different codes, the only
variation will be the consideration of the pivots relative to the concrete (corresponding to
EPSmin) and to the steel (corresponding to EPSmax). Therefore the pivots diagram for each
code will differ in the construction of the section interaction diagram.

Codes provided by CivilFEM for the check and design of reinforced concrete beams under
axial load and biaxial bending include: Eurocode 2, ITER Design code, Spanish code EHE,
American codes ACI 318 and ACI 349, British Standard 8110, Australian Standard 3600, CEB-
FIP model code, Chinese code GB50010, Brazilian code NBR6118, AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridges and ITER Structural Design Code for Buildings.

The strain limits defined hereafter are default values, but can be changed for each of the
materials defined in the model.

6.5.1. Eurocode 2 and ITER Design Code

If the active code is Eurocode 2 or ITER Structural Design Code for Buildings, the strain states
relative to concrete and reinforcement steel are those defined in the following figure:

179 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

If concrete has fck > 50 𝑀𝑃𝑎 , the concrete strain limits are the following:

EPSmin (‰) = −(2.6 + 35[(90 − fck )/100]4 )(with fck in MPa)

EPSint (‰) = −(2.0 + 0.085(fck − 50)0.53 )(with fck in MPa)

6.5.2. EHE Spanish Code

If the active code is EHE, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel are
those defined in the following figure:

If concrete has fck > 50 MPa, the concrete strain limits are the following:

EPSmin (‰) = −(2.6 + 14.4[(100 − fck )/100]4 )(with fck in MPa)

EPSint (‰) = −(2.0 + 0.085(fck − 50)0.5 )(with fck in MPa).

6.5.3. ACI 318-05

If the active code is ACI 318-05, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are those defined in the following figure. It can be noted that there is no pivot relative to

180 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

steel (EPSmax), considering the section does not fail due to reinforcement steel
deformation.

The theoretical values of the interaction diagram are affected by the strength reduction
factor  according to Chapter 9.3 of Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
Structures (ACI 318-05) document:

181 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

Φ = Φc εt ≤ 0.002

1000
Φ = Φc + (εt − 0.002)(0.90 − Φc ) 0.002 < εt < 0.005
3
Φ = 0.90 εt ≥ 0.005

Where t is the maximum strain obtained at the reinforcement and c is the strength
reduction factor for compression controlled sections:

For ACI 318-05 (according to chapter 9.3.2 from code requirements)

Member with spiral reinforcement Φc =0.70

Other reinforcement members Φc =0.65 (default value)

Furthermore, according to Chapter 10.3.6 of Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete Structures (ACI 318-05) document, design axial strength φPn of compression
members must not be greater than:

1. For member with spiral reinforcement:

ΦPn,max = 0.85𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
2. For other reinforcement:
ΦPn,max = 0.80𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
Where Ag is the gross area of concrete section and Ast is the total area of longitudinal
reinforcement.

6.5.4. ACI 318-14

If the active code is ACI 318-14, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are those defined in the following figure. It can be noted that there is no pivot relative to
steel (EPSmax), considering the section does not fail due to reinforcement steel
deformation.

182 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

The theoretical values of the interaction diagram are affected by the strength reduction
factor  according to Chapter 21.2.2 of Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
Structures (ACI 318-14) document

Φ = Φc εt ≤ 0.002

1000
Φ = Φc + (εt − 0.002)(0.90 − Φc ) 0.002 < εt < 0.005
3

183 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

Φ = 0.90 εt ≥ 0.005

Where t is the maximum strain obtained at the reinforcement and c is the strength
reduction factor for compression controlled sections:

For ACI 318-14 (according to chapter 21.2.2 from code requirements)

Member with spiral reinforcement Φc =0.75

Other reinforcement members Φc =0.65 (default value)

Furthermore, according to Chapter 22.4.2 of Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete Structures (ACI 318-14) document, design axial strength φPn of compression
members must not be greater than:

1. For member with spiral reinforcement:

ΦPn,max = 0.85𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
2. For other reinforcement:
ΦPn,max = 0.80𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
Where Ag is the gross area of concrete section and Ast is the total area of longitudinal
reinforcement.

6.5.5. ACI 349-01

If the active code is ACI 349-01, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are the ones defined in the following figure. It can be noted that there is no pivot relative to
steel (EPSmax), considering the section does not fail due to reinforcement steel
deformation.

184 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

The theoretical values of the interaction diagram are affected by the strength reduction
factor  according to Chapter 9.3 of Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related Concrete
Structures (ACI 349-01) document:

Φ = 0.90 Pn > 0

Pn
Φ = 0.90 − (0.90 − Φc ) ∙ 0 ≤ Pn ≤ Pa
Pa

Φ = Φc Pn < Pa

Ag
Pa = −0.10 ∙ fc ′ ∙
Φc

Where Pn is the axial load (tension positive), Ag is the concrete gross area and Φc is the
strength reduction factor for compression controlled sections:

For ACI 349-01 (according to chapter 9.3.2 from code requirements)

Axial tension, and axial tension with flexure Φ = 0.90

Axial compression and axial compression with flexure:
a) Member with spiral reinforcement Φc =0.75
b) Other reinforcement members Φc =0.70 (default value)

Furthermore, according to Chapter 10.3.5 of Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related
Concrete Structures (ACI 349-01) document, design axial strength φPn of compression
members must not be greater than:

185 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

1. For member with spiral reinforcement:

ΦPn,max = 0.85𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
2. For other reinforcement:
ΦPn,max = 0.80𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
Where Ag is the gross area of concrete section and Ast is the total area of longitudinal
reinforcement.

6.5.6. ACI 349-06

If the active code is ACI 349-06, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are the ones defined in the following figure. It can be noted that there is no pivot relative to
steel (EPSmax), considering the section does not fail due to reinforcement steel
deformation.

The theoretical values of the interaction diagram are affected by the strength reduction
factor  according to Chapter 9.3 of Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-Related Concrete
Structures (ACI 349-06) document:

186 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

Φ = Φc εt ≤ 0.002

1000
Φ = Φc + (εt − 0.002)(0.90 − Φc ) 0.002 < εt < 0.005
3
Φ = 0.90 εt ≥ 0.005

Where t is the maximum strain obtained at the reinforcement and c is the strength
reduction factor for compression controlled sections:

For ACI 349-06 (according to chapter 9.3.2 from code requirements)

Axial tension, and axial tension with flexure Φ = 0.90

Axial compression and axial compression with flexure:
a) Member with spiral reinforcement Φc =0.70
b) Other reinforcement members Φc =0.65 (default value)

Furthermore, according to Chapter 10.3.6 of Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related
Concrete Structures (ACI 349-06) document, design axial strength φPn of compression
members must not be greater than:

1. For member with spiral reinforcement:

ΦPn,max = 0.85𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
2. For other reinforcement:

187 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

ΦPn,max = 0.80𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]

Where Ag is the gross area of concrete section and Ast is the total area of longitudinal
reinforcement.

6.5.7. ACI 349-13

If the active code is ACI 349-13, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are the ones defined in the following figure. It can be noted that there is no pivot relative to
steel (EPSmax), considering the section does not fail due to reinforcement steel
deformation.

The theoretical values of the interaction diagram are affected by the strength reduction
factor  according to Chapter 9.3.2 of Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-Related
Concrete Structures (ACI 349-13) document:

188 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

Φ = Φc εt ≤ 0.002

1000
Φ = Φc + (εt − 0.002)(0.90 − Φc ) 0.002 < εt < 0.005
3
Φ = 0.90 εt ≥ 0.005

Where t is the maximum strain obtained at the reinforcement and c is the strength
reduction factor for compression controlled sections:

For ACI 349-13 (according to chapter 9.3.2 from code requirements)

Axial tension, and axial tension with flexure Φ = 0.90

Axial compression and axial compression with flexure:
a) Member with spiral reinforcement Φc =0.75
b) Other reinforcement members Φc =0.65 (default value)

Furthermore, according to Chapter 10.3.6 of Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related
Concrete Structures (ACI 349-13) document, design axial strength φPn of compression
members must not be greater than:

3. For member with spiral reinforcement:

ΦPn,max = 0.85𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
4. For other reinforcement:

189 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

ΦPn,max = 0.80𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]

Where Ag is the gross area of concrete section and Ast is the total area of longitudinal
reinforcement.

6.5.8. CEB-FIP
If the active code is CEB-FIP, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are those defined in the following figure:

6.5.9. British Standard 8110

If the active code is BS8110, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are those defined in the following figure. It can be noted that there is no pivot relative to
steel (EPSmax), considering the section does not fail due to reinforcement steel
deformation:

190 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

6.5.10. Australian Standard 3600

If the active code is AS3600, CivilFEM uses the same parameters as the ACI 318 code for
material properties.

The theoretical values of the interaction diagram are affected by the strength reduction
factor . This value is taken from the member properties.

6.5.11. Chinese Code GB50010

If the active code is GB50010, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are the ones defined in the following figure:

191 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

Where EPScu = 0.0033-(fcuk-50)*105 [MPa]

6.5.12. Brazilian Code NBR6118

If the active code is NBR6118, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are those defined in the following figure:

192 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

6.5.13. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

If the active code is AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges CivilFEM uses the
same parameters as the ACI 318 code for material properties.

The theoretical values of the interaction diagram are affected by the strength reduction
factor .

ϕ = 0.70 εt ≤ 0.002

200
ϕ = 0.70 + (εt − 0.002) 0.002 < εt < 0.005
3
ϕ = 0.90 εt ≤ 0.005

Where t is the maximum strain obtained at the reinforcement.

For AASHTO (according to chapter 5.5.4.2 from AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications):

Axial tension, and axial tension with flexure Φ = 0.90

Axial compression and axial compression with flexure Φ = 0.75

Furthermore, according to Chapter 5.7.4.4, design axial strength φPn of compression

members must not be greater than:

1. For member with spiral reinforcement:

ΦPn,max = 0.85𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
2. For other reinforcement:
ΦPn,max = 0.80𝜙[0.85𝑓 ′ 𝑐 (𝐴𝑔 − 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ) + 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑠𝑡 ]
Where Ag is the gross area of concrete section and Ast is the total area of longitudinal
reinforcement.

6.5.14. Indian Standard 456

If the active code is the Indian Standard 456, the strain states relative to concrete are the
ones defined in the following figure:

193 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.5 Axial Force and Biaxial Bending Calculation Codes

It can be noted that there is no pivot relative to steel (EPSmax), considering the section does
not fail due to reinforcement steel deformation.

6.5.15. Russian Code SP 52-101

If the active code is SP 52-101, the strain states relative to concrete and reinforcement steel
are the ones defined in the following figure:

194 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6.6. Shear and Torsion

6.6.1. Previous considerations
Valid reinforced concrete sections for shear and torsion check and design are the following:

TABLE 1-1 VALID SECTIONS FOR SHEAR AND TORSION CHECKING

SECTION Y SHEAR Z SHEAR TORSION

Rectangular Yes Yes Yes

Box Yes Yes Yes

Circular Yes Yes Yes

Annular Yes Yes Yes

Double T/I-shape Yes No No

T Yes No No

For each one of these sections and directions, a set of geometrical parameters in accordance
with the code is automatically defined. These parameters are required for the calculating
process. Later on, there is a detailed explanation on how to obtain these parameters for
each valid section.

6.6.2. Shear and torsion code properties

Parameters required for the check and design processes for shear and torsion are the
following:

EUROCODE 2 AND ITER

REC: Reinforcement cover.

BW_VY: Minimum width of the section over the effective depth for
shear in Y.

BW_VZ: Minimum width of the section over the effective depth for
shear in Z.

195 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

DY: Effective depth of the section in the Y direction.

DZ: Effective depth of the section in the Z direction.

RHO1: Reinforcement ratio:

Asl
ρ1 = < 0.02
bw d

Where:

Asl Area of the tension reinforcement extending not less

than d + Ib.net beyond the section considered.
bw Minimum width of the section over the effective
depth.

d Effective depth.

T: Equivalent thickness of the wall:

A
T=
u
Where:

A Total area of the cross-section within the outer

circumference, including inner hollow areas.
u Outer circumference.
This equivalent thickness cannot be greater than the real
thickness of the wall nor less than twice the cover.

AK: Area enclosed within the centre-line of the thin-walled cross-

section.

UK: Circumference of the AK area.

KEYAST: Indicator of the position of the torsion reinforcement in the

section:

= 0 if closed stirrups are placed on both faces of each wall of

the equivalent hollow section or on each wall of a box section
(value by default for hollow sections).

= 1 if there are only closed stirrups distributed around the

196 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

periphery of the member (value by default for solid sections).

THETA: Angle of the concrete compressive struts with the longitudinal

axis of member.

ACI 318-05 and ACI 349-01

REC: Reinforcement cover.

BW_VY: Web width or diameter of circular section for shear in Y (Art. 11.1).

BW_VZ: Web width, or diameter of circular section for shear in Z (Art. 11.1).

DY: Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension

reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections, this distance should not be less
than the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension
reinforcement in the opposite half of the member) (Art. 11.1).

DZ: Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension

reinforcement in Z, (for circular sections, this distance should not be less
than the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension
reinforcement in the opposite half of the member) (Art. 11.1).

ACP: Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section (Art. 11.6.1).

PCP: Outside perimeter of the concrete cross section (Art. 11.6.1).

AOH: Area enclosed by center-line of the outermost closed transverse torsional

reinforcement (Art. 11.6.3).

PH: Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional

reinforcement (Art. 11.6.3).

AO: Gross area enclosed by shear flow path (Art. 11.6.3).

BS 8110

REC: Reinforcement cover.

BW_VY: Minimum web width, for shear in Y (Art.3.4.5.1 Part 1).

197 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

BW_VZ: Minimum web width, for shear in Z (Art.3.4.5.1 Part 1).

DY: Effective depth of section in the Y direction (Art.3.4.5.1 Part 1).

DZ: Effective depth of section in the Z direction (Art.3.4.5.1 Part 1).

AS: Longitudinal tension reinforcement (Art.3.4.5.4 Part 1).

XW : Torsional modulus for checking and dimensioning purposes.

X1: Minimum dimension of the rectangular torsion stirrups (Art.2.4.2 Part 2).

Y1: Maximum dimension of the rectangular torsion stirrups (Art.2.4.2 Part 2).

GB 50010

REC: Reinforcement cover.

BW_VY: Minimum width of the section over the effective depth for shear in Y (Art.
7.5.1).

BW_VZ: Minimum width of the section over the effective depth for shear in Z (Art.
7.5.1).

DY: Effective depth of the section in Y (Art. 7.5.1).

DZ: Effective depth of the section in Z (Art. 7.5.1).

HW_VY: Effective depth of the web in Y (Art. 7.5.1).

HW_VZ: Effective depth of the web in Z (Art. 7.5.1).

Acor : Area enclosed within the hoop reinforcements for torsion A st1 (Art. 7.6.4).

Acor1 : Area enclosed within the hoop reinforcements for torsion Ast1 (Art. 7.6.4) of
branch 1(e. x. Flange).

Acor2 : Area enclosed within the hoop reinforcements for torsion Ast1 (Art. 7.6.4) of
branch 2(e. x. Flange).

Ucor: Perimeter of the Acor area (Art. 7.6.4).

Ucor1: Perimeter of the Acor1 area of branch 1 (Art. 7.6.4).

198 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ucor2: Perimeter of the Acor2 area of branch 2 (Art. 7.6.4).

Wt : Plastic resistance of torsion moment (Art. 7.6.4).

Wt1 : Plastic resistance of torsion moment of branch 1 (Art. 7.6.4).

Wt2 : Plastic resistance of torsion moment of branch 2 (Art. 7.6.4).

ALF: Ratio of the web depth to the web width (Art. 7.6.1).

ALFh : Affected factor of the thickness of web for torsion (Art. 7.6.6).

Tky For rectangular sections: Section width in Y.

Tkz For rectangular sections: Section width in Z.

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

REC: Reinforcement cover.

BW_VY: Web width or diameter of circular section for shear in Y (Art. 8.15.5).

BW_VZ: Web width or diameter of circular section for shear in Z (Art. 8.15.5).

DY: Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tensile

reinforcement in Y (for circular sections, this distance should not to be less
than the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tensile
reinforcement in the opposite half of the member) (Art. 8.15.5).

DZ: Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tensile

reinforcement in Z, (for circular sections, this distance should not to be less
than the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tensile
reinforcement in the opposite half of the member) (Art. 8.15.5).

ACP: Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section (taken from
ACI 318 Art. 11.6.1).

PCP: Outside perimeter of the concrete cross section (taken from ACI 318 Art.
11.6.1).

AOH: Area enclosed by center-line of the outermost closed transverse torsion

reinforcement (taken from ACI 318 Art. 11.6.3).

PH: Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsion

199 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

reinforcement (taken from ACI 318 Art. 11.6.3).

AO: Gross area enclosed by shear flow path (taken from ACI 318 Art. 11.6.3).

EHE

REC: Reinforcement cover.

BW_VY: Width of element in VY direction equal to the total width in solid sections or
in case of box sections, the width equals the sum of the width of both webs.

BW_VZ: Width of element in VZ direction equal to the total width in solid sections or
in case of box sections, the width equals the sum of the width of both webs.

DY: Effective depth of the section in Y (Art. 44.2.3).

DZ: Effective depth of the section in Z (Art. 44.2.3).

RHO1: Geometric ratio of the longitudinal tensile reinforcement anchored at a

distance greater than or equal to d (Art. 44.2.3.2).

As
ρ1 = < 0.02
bw d

Where:

As Area of the longitudinal tensile reinforcement anchored at a

distance greater than or equal to d beyond the section
considered.
bw Width of the web.

d Effective depth.

HE: Equivalent thickness of the wall (Art. 45.2.1):

A
he =
u
Where:

A Total area of the cross-section within the outer circumference,

including inner hollow areas.
u Outer circumference.

200 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

This equivalent thickness cannot be greater than the real thickness of the
wall nor less than twice the cover.

AE: Area inside the center-line of the design effective hollow section (Art.
45.2.2).

UE: Perimeter of the center-line of the design effective hollow section (Art.
45.2.2).

KEYAST: Indicator of the position of the torsion reinforcement in the section (Art.
45.2.2.1):

=0 if closed stirrups are placed on both faces of each wall of the equivalent
hollow section or of the real hollow section (value by default for hollow
sections).

= 1 if there are only closed stirrups distributed around the periphery of the
member (value by default for solid sections).

THETA: Angle of the concrete compressive struts with the longitudinal axis of
member (Art. 44.2.3).

6.6.3. Code Dependent Parameters for Each Section

The following section describes how to compute the required parameters for shear and
torsion according to each code. Shear and torsion calculations are performed taking for each
end its section for shear considerations without accounting for reductions or enlargements
due to depth variations. The mechanical cover for bending longitudinal reinforcement is
required for the calculations of some parameters. The default mechanical cover for every
case is equal to 5 cm.

6.6.3.1 Rectangular Section Parameters

Where Tky Section width in Y.
Tkz Section width in Z.

201 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Y 2

1 3

Z
TKY

TKZ

Eurocode 2 and ITER

REC = 0.05 m(by default)

BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = Tky

DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC

RHO1 = 0.0015 Tky ∙ Tkz

T= ≥ 2 ∙ REC
2(Tky + Tkz)

AK = (Tky − T) ∙ (Tkz − T) UK = 2[(Tky − T) + (Tkz − T)]

KEYAST = 1(outer reinforcement). THETA = 45°

ACI 318 and ACI 349

REC = 0.05 m(by default)

BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = Tky

DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC

ACP = Tky ∙ Tkz PCP = 2 (Tky + Tkz)

AOH = (Tky − 2 ∙ REC)(Tkz − 2 ∙ REC) PH = 2[(Tky − 2 ∙ REC) + (Tkz − 2 ∙ REC)]

AO = 0.85 AOH

BS 8110
REC = 0.05 m (by default)
BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = Tky
DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC

202 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

AS = 0.002 ∙ Ac 1
Xw = [h2min ∙ (hmax − hmin /3)]
Ac = concrete gross area 2
hmin =MIN(Tky, Tkz)
hmax = MAX(Tky, Tkz)

X1 = MIN(Tky, Tkz) − 2 ∙ REC Y1 = MAX(Tky, Tkz) − 2 ∙ REC

EHE
REC = 0.04 m(by default)
BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = Tky
DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC
RHO1 = 0.0028 Tky ∙ Tkz
HE = ≥ 2 ∙ REC
2(Tky + Tkz)
AE = (Tky − HE) ∙ (Tkz − HE) UK = 2[(Tky − HE) + (Tkz − HE)]
KEYAST = 1(outer reinforcement). THETA = 45O

GB50010

REC = 0.05 m(default option)

BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = Tky
DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC

HW_VY = Tky − REC HW_VZ = Tkz − REC

Acor = (Tkz − 2 ∙ REC)(Tky − 2 Acor1 = 0.0

∙ REC)
Acor2 = 0.0 Ucor = 2 ∙ (Tkz + Tky − 4 ∙ REC)

Ucor1 = 0.0 Ucor2 = 0.0

hmin2 (3 ∙ hmax − hmin )

Wt =
6

hmin = min(Tkz, Tky)

hmax = max(Tkz, Tky)

Wt1 = 0.0 Wt2 = 0.0

203 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

DZ DY ALFh = 1.0
ALF = max ( , )
Tky Tkz

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

REC = 0.05 m(by default)

BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = Tky

DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC

ACP = Tky ∙ Tkz PCP = 2(Tky + Tkz)

AOH = (Tky − 2 ∙ REC)(Tkz − 2 ∙ REC) PH = 2[(Tky − 2 ∙ REC) + (Tkz − 2 ∙ REC)]

AO = 0.85 AOH

6.6.3.2 Box Section Parameters

Where: Tky Section width in Y.

Tkz Section width in Z.
Twy Thickness of walls in Y.
Twz Thickness of walls in Z.

TWY Y 2

1 5 8 3
Z
TKY
7
TWZ
6

TKZ

Eurocode 2 and ITER

REC = 0.05 m(by default)

204 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

BW_VY = 2 ∙ Twz BW_VZ = 2 ∙ Twy

DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC

RH01 = 0.0015 Tky ∙ Tkz

T=
2(Tky + Tkz)
T ≥ 2 ∙ REC ; T ≤ Twy ; T ≤ Twz

AK = (Tky − T) ∙ (Tkz − T) UK = 2[(Tky − T) + (Tkz − T)]

KEYAST = 0 (outer and inner THETA = 45°

reinforcement)

ACI 318 and ACI 349

REC = 0.05 m(by default)

BW_VY = 2 ∙ Twz BW_VZ = 2 ∙ Twy

DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC

ACP = Tky ∙ Tkz PCP = 2(Tky + Tkz)

AOH = (Tky − 2 ∙ REC)(Tkz − 2 ∙ REC) PH = 2[(Tky − 2 ∙ REC) + (Tkz − 2 ∙ REC)]

AO = 0.85 AOH

BS8110
REC = 0.05 m(by default)
BW_VY = 2 ∙ Twz BW_VZ = 2 ∙ Twy
DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC
AS = 0.002 ∙ Ac Xw is considered solid rectangular if Twy >
Ac = gross concrete area 0.25Tky and Twz > 0.25Tkz. Otherwise: Xw =
2.MIN(Twy,Twz).(Tkay,Twy).(Tkz,Twz)
X1 = MIN(Tky,Tkz) – 2.REC Y1 = MAX(Tky,Tkz) – 2.REC

EHE
REC = 0.04 m(by default)
BW_VY = 2 ∙ Twz BW_VZ = 2 ∙ Twy
DY = Tky − REC DZ = Tkz − REC
RHO1 = 0.0028 Tky ∙ Tkz
HE =
2(Tky + Tkz)

205 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

HE ≥ 2 ∙ REC ; HE ≤ Twy ; HE ≤ Twz

AE = (Tky − HE) ∙ (Tkz − HE) UE = 2[(Tky − HE) + (Tkz − HE)]
KEYAST = 0 (outer and inner THETA = 45O
reinforcement)

GB50010
REC = 0.05 m (by default)

BW_VY = 2 Twz BW_VZ = 2 Twy

DY= Tky – REC DZ = Tkz – REC

HW_VY = Tky– 2TWY HW_VZ = Tkz –2·TWZ

Acor = (Tkz –2·REC) ·(Tky– 2·REC) Acor1= 0.0

Acor2= 0.0 Ucor = 2·(Tkz +Tky– 4·REC)

Ucor1= 0.0 Ucor2= 0.0

hmin2 (3 x hmax − hmin ) (hmin − 2 xTwy)2

Wt = − [3(hmax − 2Twz) − (hmin − 2 x Twy)]
6 6

hmin = min(Tkz, Tky)

hmax = max(Tkz, Tky)

Wt1 = 0.0 Wt2 = 0.0

Tkz − 2 x Twz Tky − 2 xTwy Twy Twz

ALF = max ( , ) ALFh = min ( , )
Twy Twz Tky Tkz

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

REC = 0.05 m (by default)

BW_VY = 2 Twz BW_VZ = 2 Twy

DY= Tky – REC DZ = Tkz – REC

ACP = Tky ∙ Tkz PCP = 2(Tky + Tkz)

206 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

AOH = (Tky − 2 ∙ REC)(Tkz − 2 ∙ REC) PH = 2[(Tky − 2 ∙ REC) + (Tkz − 2 ∙ REC)]

AO = 0.85 AOH

6.6.3.3 Circular Section Parameters

Where: OD Diameter of the section.
Y
OD
1

Eurocode 2 and ITER

REC = 0.05 m (by default)

OD OD
BW_VY = BW_VZ =
√2 √2
(The width of the square within the (The width of the square within the
circumference is used) circumference is used)
DY = OD - REC DZ = OD - REC
RHO1 = 0.0015 OD
T= ≥ 2 ∙ REC
4
π(OD−T)2 UK = π(OD − T)
AK = 4
KEYAST = 1 (outer reinforcement) THETA = 45°

ACI 318 and ACI 349

REC = 0. 05 m (by default)

BW_VY = OD BW_VZ = OD
OD OD
OD 4 ( 2 − REC) OD 4 ( 2 − REC)
DY = + DZ = +
2 3π 2 3π
(In both directions, the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of reinforcement in
the opposite half of the section is used, assuming that this reinforcement is uniformly distributed

207 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

and considering the cover of REC.)

OD2 PCP = π ∙ OD
ACP = π ∙
4
(OD − 2 ∙ REC)2 PH = π(OD − 2 ∙ REC)
AOH = π ∙
4
AO = 0.85 AOH

BS8110
REC = 0.05 m (by default)
BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = Tky
DY = Tky - REC DZ = Tkz - REC
AS = 0.002.Ac π ∙ OD3
Ww =
16
X1 = OD – 2.REC Y1 = OD – 2.REC

EHE

REC = 0.04 m (by default)

OD 2 OD + REC 2 OD 2 OD + REC 2
√
BW_VY = 2 ( ) − ( ) √
BW_VZ = 2 ( ) − ( )
2 4 2 4
DY = OD - REC DZ = OD - REC
RHO1 = 0.0028 OD
HE = ≥ 2 ∙ REC
4
π (OD−HE)2 UE = π(OD − HE)
AE = 4
KEYAST = 1 (outer reinforcement) THETA = 45º

GB50010
REC = 0.05 m (by default)
BW_VZ = 0.88·OD BW_VY = 0.88·OD
DY = 0.8·OD DZ = 0.8·OD
HW_VY = 0.8·OD HW_VZ = 0.8·OD

OD − 2 ∙ REC 2 Acor1 = 0.0

Acor = π( )
2

Acor2 = 0.0 Ucor = π ∙ (OD − 2 ∙ REC)

208 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ucor1 = 0.0 Ucor2 = 0.0

OD3 Wt1 = 0.0

Wt = π
16

Wt2 = 0.0 ALF = 0.91

ALFh = 1.0

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

REC = 0. 05 m (by default)

BW_VY = OD BW_VZ = OD
OD OD
OD 4 ( 2 − REC) OD 4 ( 2 − REC)
DY = + DZ = +
2 3π 2 3π
(In both directions the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of reinforcement in
the opposite half of the section is used, assuming that this reinforcement is uniformly distributed
and considering the cover of REC.)
OD2 PCP = π ∙ OD
ACP = π ∙
4
(OD − 2 ∙ REC)2 PH = π(OD − 2 ∙ REC)
AOH = π ∙
4
AO = 0.85 AOH

6.6.3.4 Circular Hollow Section Parameters

Where: OD Diameter of the section.
TKWALL Thickness of the wall.
Y
OD
1

Z 2 TKWALL

Eurocode 2 and ITER

209 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

REC = 0.05 m (by default)

BW_VY =2 · TKWALL BW_VZ =2 · TKWALL
DY= OD - REC DZ = OD - REC
RHO1 = 0.0015 OD
T=
4
T ≥ 2 ∙ REC ; T ≤ TKWALL
π(OD−T)2 UK = π(OD − T)
AK = 4
KEYAST = 0 (inner and outer reinforcement). THETA = 45°

ACI 318 and ACI 349

REC = 0. 05 m (by default)

BW_VY = 2 · TKWALL BW_VZ = 2 · TKWALL
OD OD
OD 4 ( 2 + REC) OD 4 ( 2 + REC)
DY = + DZ = +
2 3π 2 3π

(In both directions the distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of reinforcement in the
opposite half of the section is used, assuming that this reinforcement is uniformly distributed and
considering the cover of REC.)
OD2 PCP = π ∙ OD
ACP = π ∙
4
(OD − 2 ∙ REC)2 PH = π(OD − 2 ∙ REC)
AOH = π ∙
4
AO = 0.85 AOH

BS 8110
REC = 0.04 m (by default)
BW_VY = 2 · TKWALL BW_VZ = 2 · TKWALL
DY = OD - REC DZ = OD - REC
.
AS = 0.002 Ac XW is considered a solid circular section if
(Tkwall > 0.25.OD)
Otherwise:
π[OD4 − (OD − TKwall)4 ]
Xw =
16 ∙ OD
X1 = OD - 2.REC Y1 = OD – 2.REC

EHE

REC = 0.04 m (by default)

210 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

OD 2 OD + REC 2
BW_VY = 2√( ) − ( ) < 2 ∙ 𝑇𝐾𝑊𝐴𝐿𝐿
2 4

OD 2 OD + REC 2
BW_VZ = 2√( ) − ( ) < 2 ∙ 𝑇𝐾𝑊𝐴𝐿𝐿
2 4
DY = OD - REC DZ = OD - REC
RHO1 = 0.0028 OD
HE =
4
HE ≥ 2 ∙ 0.04 m ; HE ≤ TKWALL
π (OD−HE)2 UE = π(OD − HE)
AE = 4
KEYAST = 0 (outer and inner reinforcement). THETA = 45º

GB50010
REC = 0. 05 m (by default)
BW_VY = 2 ·TKWALL BW_VZ = 2 ·TKWALL
DY = 0.8·OD DZ = 0.8·OD
HW_VY = not defined HW_VZ = not defined

OD − 2 ∙ REC 2 Acor1 = 0.0

Acor = π ( )
2

Acor2 = 0.0 Ucor = πx(OD − 2xREC)

Ucor1 = 0.0 Ucor2 = 0.0

OD4 − (OD − TKWALL)4 Wt1 = 0.0

Wt = π
16 ∙ OD

Wt2 = 0.0 ALF = 0.91

TKWALL
ALFh =
OD

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

REC = 0. 05 m (by default)

BW_VY = 2 · TKWALL BW_VZ = 2 · TKWALL

211 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

OD OD
OD 4 ( 2 + REC) OD 4 ( 2 + REC)
DY = + DZ = +
2 3π 2 3π

(In both directions the distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of reinforcement
in the opposite half of the section is used, assuming that this reinforcement is uniformly
distributed and considering the cover of REC.)
OD2 PCP = π ∙ OD
ACP = π ∙
4
(OD − 2 ∙ REC)2 PH = π(OD − 2 ∙ REC)
AOH = π ∙
4
AO = 0.85 AOH

6.6.3.5 Double T / I-Section Parameters

Where: DEPTH Depth of the section (in Y).
TW Web thickness.
Y

BFTOP
Z 1
TFTOP

TW DEPTH

TFBOT 2

BFBOT

Eurocode 2 and ITER

REC = 0.05 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined
DY = DEPTH - REC DZ = undefined
RHO1 = 0.0015 T = undefined
AK = undefined UK = undefined
KEYAST = undefined THETA = 45°

ACI 318 and ACI 349

REC = 0.04 m (by default)

212 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined

DY = DEPTH - REC DZ = undefined
ACP = undefined PCP = undefined
AOH = undefined PH = undefined
AO = undefined

BS 8110
REC = 0.04 m (by default)
BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = undefined
DY = Tky - REC DZ = Tkz - REC
AS = 0.002.Ac XW = undefined
Ac = concrete gross section
X1 = undefined Y1 = undefined

EHE

REC = 0.04 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined
DY = DEPTH - REC DZ = undefined
RHO1 = 0.0028 HE = undefined
AE = undefined U= undefined
KEYAST = undefined THETA = 45º

GB50010
REC = 0.04 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined

DY = DEPTH – REC DZ = undefined

HW_VY = DEPTH – TFTOP – TFBOT HW_VZ = undefined

Acor = (DEPTH − 2 ∙ REC) ∙ (TW − 2 ∙ REC) Acor1 = (TFTOP − 2 ∙ REC) ∙ (BFTOP − TW − 2 ∙ REC

Acor2 = (TFBOT − 2 ∙ REC) Ucor = 2 ∙ (DEPTH + TW − 4 ∙ REC)

∙ (BFBOT − TW − 2 ∙ REC)

213 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ucor1 = 2 ∙ (TFTOP + BFTOP − TW − 4 ∙ REC) Ucor2 = 2 ∙ (TFBOT + BFBOP − TW − 4 ∙ REC)

TW 2 (3 ∙ DEPTH − TW) TFTOP2 ∙ (BFTOP − TW) TFBOT 2 ∙ (BFBOT − TW)

Wt = + +
6 2 2

TFTOP 2 ∙ (BFTOP − TW) TFBOT 2 ∙ (BFBOT − TW)

Wt1 = Wt2 =
2 2

DEPTH − TFTOP − TFBOT ALFh = 1.0

ALF =
TW

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

REC = 0.04 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined
DY = DEPTH - REC DZ = undefined
ACP = undefined PCP = undefined
AOH = undefined PH = undefined
AO = undefined

6.6.3.6 T-Section Parameters

Where: DEPTH Depth of the section (in Y).
TW Web thickness.
Y

BF
Z 1

TF

DEPTH

TW
2

Eurocode 2 and ITER

REC = 0.05 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined
DY = DEPTH - REC DZ = undefined

214 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

RHO1 = 0.0015 T = undefined

AK = undefined UK = undefined
KEYAST = undefined THETA = 45º

ACI 318 and ACI 349

REC = 0.05 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined
DY = DEPTH - REC DZ = undefined
ACP = undefined PCP = undefined
AOH = undefined PH = undefined
AO = undefined

EHE

REC = 0.04 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined
DY = DEPTH - REC DZ = undefined
RHO1 = 0.0028 HE = undefined
AE = undefined U = undefined
KEYAST = undefined THETA = 45º

BS 8110
REC = 0.05 m (by default)
BW_VY = Tkz BW_VZ = undefined
DY = Tky - REC DZ = Tkz - REC
.
AS = 0.002 Ac XW = undefined
Ac = concrete gross section
X1 = undefined Y1 = undefined

GB50010
REC = 0.05 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = TF

DY = DEPTH – REC DZ = BF– REC

215 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

HW_VY = DEPTH – TF – REC HW_VZ = undefined

Acor = (DEPTH − 2 ∙ REC) ∙ (TW − 2 ∙ REC) Acor1 = (TF − 2 ∙ REC) ∙ (BF − TW − 2 ∙ REC)

Acor2 = 0.0 Ucor = 2 ∙ (DEPTH + TW − 4 ∙ REC)

Ucor1 = 2 ∙ (TF + BF − TW − 4 ∙ REC) Ucor2 = 0.0

TW 2 (3 ∙ DEPTH − TW) TF 2 ∙ (BF − TW)

Wt = +
6 2

TF 2 ∙ (BF − TW) Wt2 = 0.0

Wt1 =
2

DEPTH − TF ALFh = 1.0

ALF =
TW

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

REC = 0.05 m (by default)

BW_VY = TW BW_VZ = undefined
DY = DEPTH - REC DZ = undefined
ACP = undefined PCP = undefined
AOH = undefined PH = undefined
AO = undefined

6.6.4. Shear and Torsion according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-

1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design Code
6.6.4.1. Shear Check
Checking elements for shear according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER
Design Code follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. The required material properties

associated with each transverse cross section at the active time are:

fck characteristic compressive strength of concrete.

fcd design strength of concrete.
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
fywd design strength of shear reinforcement.

216 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking are the
following ones:
Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on code. Required data are as follows:

bw minimum width of the section over the effective depth.
d effective depth of the section.

ρ1 ratio of the tension longitudinal reinforcement

Asl
ρ1 = < 0.02
bw d
where:

Asl the area of the tension reinforcement extending not less than d + Ib,net
beyond the section considered.
 angle of the compressive struts of concrete with the member’s longitudinal
axis, (parameter THETA):
1.0 ≤ cotan ≤ 2.5 Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)
1.0 ≤ cotanθ ≤ cotanθ0 ITER Design Code
Compressive mean stress (σcp > 0): cotan θ0 = 1.2 + 0.2 σcp /fctm

Tensile mean stress (σcp < 0): cotan θ0 = 1.2 + 0.9 σcp /fctm ≥ 1
Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are as follows:

 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member
section, (parameter ALPHA).
Asw /S area of reinforcement per unit length, (parameters ASSY or ASSZ).
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

Asw total area of the reinforcement legs, (parameters ASY or ASZ, both Y and Z
directions are available).
s spacing of the stirrups.
or with the following ones:

s spacing of the stirrups.

φ diameter of bars, (parameter PHI).

217 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

N number of reinforcement legs, (parameters NY or NZ for Y and Z directions).

5) Obtaining the section’s internal forces and moments. The shear force that acts on
the section, as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment, are
obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Force Description

VEd Design shear force ( 0)

NEd Design axial force (positive for compression)
MEd Design bending moment ( 0)
6) Checking whether the section requires shear reinforcement. First, the design shear
(VEd ) is compared to the design shear resistance (VRd,c ):

VEd ≤ VRd,c
VRd,c = [CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100ρl ∙ fck )1/3 + k1 ∙ σcp ] ∙ bw ∙ d

with the constraints:

VEd ≤ 0.5bw ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd
VRd,c ≥ [Vmin + k1 ∙ σcp ] ∙ bw ∙ d

where:

CRd,c = 0.18 γc

fck = in MPa

200
k = 1+√ ≤ 2 (d en mm)
d

k1 = 0.15

NEd
σcp = < 0.2fcd Mpa
Ac

Ac in mm2
f
𝜈 = 0.6 (1 − ck ) Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)
250

218 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

0.6 fck ≤ 60 Mpa

{ fck ITER Design Code
0.9 − 200 > 0.5 fck > 60 Mpa

Vmin = 0.035(k 3 ∙ fck )1/2

VRd,c in N

If shear reinforcement has not been defined for the section, a check is made to ensure VEd is
less than the lowest value between the shear reinforcement resistance,

Asw
VRd,s = ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd ∙ (cotanθ + cotanα) ∙ sinα
s
and the maximum design shear reinforcement resistance:

Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008):

(cotanθ + cotanα)
VRd,max = αcw ∙ bw ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd ∙
1 + cotan2 θ

ITER Design Code:

(cotanθ0 + cotanα)
VRd,max = αcw ∙ ν ∙ fcd ∙ bw ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙
1 + cotan2 θ0

Where :
σcp
1+ , if 0 < σcp ≤ 0.25fcd
fcd
αcw = 1.25, if 0.25fcd < σcp ≤ 0.5fcd
σcp
2.5 (1 − ) , if 0.5fcd < σcp ≤ fcd
{ fcd

The shear reinforcement must be equal to or less than (Eurocode 2 only)

Asw,max fcd
= 0.5 ∙ αcw ∙ bw ∙ ν ∙ /sinα
S fywd

Results are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

VRDC = VRd,c

VRDS = VRd,s

219 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

VRDMAX = VRd,max
MEd VEd
TENS = + (cotθ − cotα)
0.9d 2

Tension resistance of the longitudinal reinforcement

VEd
CRT_1 =
VRd,c

CRT_2 = 0, If there is no shear reinforcement.

VEd If there is shear reinforcement.
,
VRd,s

CRT_3 = 0, If there is no shear reinforcement.

VEd If there is shear reinforcement.
,
VRd,max

7) Obtaining shear criterion. The shear criterion indicates whether the section is valid
for the design forces (if it is less than 1, the section satisfies the code provisions;
whereas if it exceeds 1, the section will not be valid). Furthermore, it includes
information pertaining to how close the design force is to the ultimate section
strength. The shear criterion is defined as follows:
CRT_TOT = VEd If there is no shear reinforcement
,
VRd,c

V
min {V Ed , max {V Ed
V If there is shear reinforcement
Rd,c Rd,s

VEd
}},
VRd,max

A value of 2100 for this criterion indicates that VRd2,red or VRd3 are equal to zero.

6.6.4.2. Torsion Check

The torsion checking according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design
Code follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. These properties are obtained from
the material properties associated to the transverse cross section and for the active
time.

220 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The Required data are as follows:

fck characteristic strength of concrete.

fcd calculation strength of concrete.

fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.

fyd calculation torsion resistance of reinforcement. The same material is

considered for transverse and longitudinal reinforcement

2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data

are as follows:

t equivalent thickness of wall.

Ak area enclosed within the centre-line of the thin-walled cross-section.
uk circumference of area Ak.
 Angle of the compressive struts of concrete with the member’s longitudinal
axis:
1.0  cotan   2.5 Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)
1.0  cotan   cotan 0 ITER Design Code
Compressive mean stress (σcp > 0): cotanθ0 = 1.2 + 0.2σcp /fctm

Tensile mean stress (σcp < 0): cotanθ0 = 1.2 + 0.9σcp /fctm ≥ 1

Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are as follows:

Transverse reinforcement
Asw /S area of transverse reinforcement per unit length.

The reinforcement ratio can alternatively be defined using the following data:

Asw closed stirrups area for torsion.

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Or with the following data:

221 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Φt diameter of the closed stirrups.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.

The reinforcement ratio can alternatively be defined using the following data:

ΦI diameter of longitudinal bars.

N number of longitudinal bars.

4) Obtaining section internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on
the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Moment Description

Tsd Design torsional moment

5)
longitudinal axis of the member.
transverse and longitudinal torsion reinforcements with the expression below:

Asw
tan2 θ = S
Asl
Uk
This angle must satisfy the following condition:

1.0 ≤ cotanθ ≤ 2.5

If the angle obtained does not satisfy this condition, the value of the nearest limit is
adopted.

When evaluating TRd,max , three reinforcement cases exist. For a section with no torsion
reinforcement, cotanis defined by the user within the previous limits. If the section
only contains transverse reinforcement, cotan =1.0, and if it contains only longitudinal
reinforcement, cotan = 2.5. Obviously, in these cases the section will not satisfy torsion
checking.

6) Calculating the maximum torsional moment that can be resisted by the concrete
compressive struts. The design torsional moment (Tsd ) must be less than or equal to
the maximum torsional moment that can be resisted by the concrete compressive
struts (TRd,max ); therefore, the following condition must be fulfilled:

222 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

TEd ≤ TRd,max
TRd,max = 2 ∙ ν ∙ αcw ∙ fcd ∙ t ∙ Ak ∙ sinθ ∙ cosθ
Where the values de of ν and αcw are the same as those used in shear checking,
Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TRDMAX = TRd,max
TEd
CRT_1 = T
Rd,max

7) Calculating the maximum torsional moment that can be resisted by the

reinforcement. The design torsional moment (TEd ) must be less than or equal to the
maximum design torsional moment that can be resisted by the reinforcement (TRd );
consequently, the following condition must be fulfilled:

TEd ≤ TRd
Asw
TRd = 2Ak (fyd ∙ ) cotanθ
S
Calculation results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameters:

TRD = TRd
TEd
CRT_2 =
TRd
If transverse reinforcement is not defined, TRd2 = 0 and the criterion will take the value
of 2100.

8) Calculating the required longitudinal reinforcement. The required longitudinal

reinforcement is calculated from TRd as follows:

Uk
Asl,nec = TRd cotanθ
2Ak fyd
If longitudinal reinforcement is not defined, Asl = 0 and the criterion will be 2100.

ALT = Asl,nec
Asl,nec
CRTALT = Asl

223 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

9) Obtaining torsion criterion. The torsion criterion is defined as the ratio of the design
moment to the section ultimate resistance: if it is less than 1, the section is valid;
whereas if it exceeds 1, the section is not valid. The criterion pertaining to the validity
for torsion is defined as follows:

TEd TEd Asl,nec

CRT_TOT = max ( , , )≤1
TRd,max TRd Asl
This value is stored in the CivilFEM results file for each end.

A value 2100 for this criterion indicates that any one of the torsion reinforcement groups
are undefined.

6.6.4.3. Combined Shear and Torsion Check

For checking sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment, we
follow the steps below:

1) Torsion checking considering a null shear force. This check follows the same
procedure as for the check of elements subjected to pure torsion according to
Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design Code.
2) Shear checking assuming a null torsional moment. . This check follows the same
steps as for the check of elements subjected to pure shear according to Eurocode 2
(EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design Code.

3) Checking the concrete ultimate strength condition. The design torsional moment
(TSd ) and the design shear force (VSd ) must satisfy the following condition:

TEd VEd
+ ≤1
TRd,max VRd,max
4) Obtaining the combined shear and torsion criterion. This criterion comprehends
pure shear, pure torsion and ultimate strength condition criteria of concrete. The
criterion determines whether the section is valid and is defined as follows:
VEd VEd TEd TEd Asl,nec TEd VEd
CRT_TOT = max { , , , , , + }≤1
VRd,s VRd,max TRd,max TRd Asl TRd VRd
A value 2100 for this criterion indicates that VRd1,red or VRd3 are equal to zero or that one
of the torsion reinforcement groups has not been defined.

6.6.4.4. Shear Design

Shear reinforcement design according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER
Design Code follows the steps below:

224 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. The required material properties

associated with each transverse cross section at the active time are:
fck characteristic strength of concrete.

fcd characteristic design strength of concrete.

fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.

fywd design strength of shear reinforcement.

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear design are the
following:
Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Required data are as

follows:
bw minimum width of the section over the effective depth.
d effective depth of the section.

ρ1 ratio of the longitudinal tensile :

Asl
ρ1 = < 0.02
bw d
where:

Asl the area of the tensile reinforcement extending not less than d + Ib,net beyond
the section considered.
 angle of the compressive struts of concrete with the member’s longitudinal
axis:

1.0  cotan  2.5 Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

1.0  cotan   cotan 0 ITER Design Code
Compressive mean stress (σcp > 0): cotanθ0 = 1.2 + 0.2σcp /fctm

Tensile mean stress (σcp < 0): cotan θ0 = 1.2 + 0.9 σcp /fctm ≥ 1

Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

225 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. For shear reinforcement design, it is

member can be indicated. This angle should be included in the reinforcement definition
of each element. If this angle is nu ° is used. Other reinforcement
data will be ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on the
section as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment, are obtained from
the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Force Description
VEd Design shear force
NEd Design axial force (positive for compression)
MEd Design bending moment ( 0)
6) Checking whether the section requires shear reinforcement. First, the design shear
(VEd ) is compared to the design shear resistance (VRd,c ):
VEd ≤ VRd,c
VRd,c = [CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100 ρ1 ∙ fck )1/3 + k1 ∙ σcp ] ∙ bw ∙ d
with the constraints:
VEd ≤ 0.5bw ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd
VRd,c ≥ [Vmin + k1 ∙ σcp ] ∙ bw ∙ d
where:

CRd,c = 0.18 γc

fck in MPa

k = 1 + √200 (d in mm)
d

Asl
ρ1 = ≤ 0.02
bw d

k1 = 0.15

NEd
σcp = < 0.2fcd MPa
Ac

Ac in mm2

226 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

ckf
0.6 (1 − 250 ) Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

0.6 fck ≤ 60 Mpa

ν = { fck ITER Design Code
0.9 − 200 > 0.5 fck > 60 𝑀𝑝𝑎

Vmin = 0.035(k 3 ∙ fck )1/2

VRd,c in N

Results are written for each element end in the CivilFEM results file as the parameters:

VRDC = VRd,c
VEd
CRT_1 =
VRd,c

7) Calculating the maximum shear force that can be resisted by the concrete compressive
struts.
A check is made to ensure that VEd is less than VRd,max :

Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008):

(cotanθ + cotanα)
VRd,max = αcw ∙ bw ∙ 0.9 ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd ∙
(1 + cotan2 θ)

ITER Design Code:

(cotanθ0 + cotanα)
VRd max = αcw ∙ ν ∙ fcd ∙ bw ∙ d ∙
(1 + cotan2 θ0 )

where:

1, if the section is not prestessing

σcp
1− , if 0 < σcp ≤ 0.25fcd
fcd
αcw = 1.25, if 0.25fcd < σcp ≤ 0.5fcd
σcp
2.5 (1 − ) , if 0.5fcd < σcp ≤ fcd
{ fcd

 = 90º if shear reinforcement was determined as not necessary in the previous

step. If reinforcement is necessary, the angle  will be read from in the
reinforcement definition data.

227 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Results are written for each element end in the CivilFEM results file as the parameters:

VRDMAX = VRd,max
VEd
CRT_3 =
VRd,max
If design shear force is greater than the force required to crush the concrete
compressive struts, the reinforcement design will not be feasible, so the parameter
containing this datum will be marked with 2100.

If the struts are not crushed by oblique compression, the calculating process continues.

8) Calculating required amount of transverse reinforcement. The section validity

condition pertaining to shear force is:

VEd if VEd < VRd,max

VRd,s = {
VRd,max if VEd ≥ VRd,max

Therefore, the reinforcement amount per length unit should be:

Asw VRd,s
=
S 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd ∙ (cotanθ + cotanα) ∙ sinα
While also satisfying the following condition (Eurocode 2 only):

Asw fcd
≤ 0.5 ∙ αcw ∙ bw ∙ ν ∙ /sinα
S fywd
If the design is not possible, the reinforcement will be defined as 2 100 and labeled as not
designed.

The design criterion will be 1 (Ok) if the element was designed or 0 (Not Ok) if not.
For each element end, the results are included in the CivilFEM results file as the
following parameters:

VRDS = VRd,s
Asw
ASSH =
S
DSG_CRT = Design criterion

228 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6.6.4.5. Torsion Design

Torsion reinforcement design according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER
Design Code follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. These properties are obtained from
the material properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active
time. Those material properties should be previously defined. The Required data are
as follows:

fck characteristic strength of concrete.

fcd characteristic design strength of concrete.

fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.

fyd design strength of shear reinforcement. The same material will be considered
for transverse and longitudinal reinforcement.

2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data

are as follows:

t equivalent thickness of wall.

Ak area enclosed within the centre-line of the thin-walled cross-section.
Uk circumference of area Ak .
 angle between the concrete compressive struts and the longitudinal axis of
the member:

1.0  cotan   2.5 Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008)

1.0  cotan   cotan 0 ITER Design Code
Compressive mean stress (σcp > 0): cotan θ0 = 1.2 + 0.2 σcp /fctm

Tensile mean stress (σcp < 0): cotan θ0 = 1.2 + 0.9 σcp /fctm
Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The torsional moment that
acts on the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file.

Moment Description
TEd Design torsional moment in I-section.

229 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

4) Checking crushing of concrete compressive struts. First, it is necessary to check that

the design torsional moment (TEd ) is less than or equal to the maximum torsional
moment that can be resisted by the concrete compressive struts (TRd,max ):

TEd ≤ TRd,max
TRd,max = 2 ∙ ν ∙ αcw ∙ fcd ∙ t ∙ Acd ∙ sinθ ∙ cosθ

Where the values ν and αcw are the same as the used previously.
Calculation results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameters:

TRDMAX = TRd,max

TEd
CRT_1 =
TRd,max

If the design torsional moment is greater than the moment required to crush the
concrete compressive struts, the reinforcement design will not be feasible. As a result,
the parameter for the reinforcement will contain a value of 2100.
Ast
ASTT = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

ASLT = Asl = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case, the element will be labeled as not designed.

If there is no crushing due to compression, the calculation process continues.

5) Determining the required transverse reinforcement ratio. The required transverse

reinforcement is defined by this expression:

Asw TEd
= tan θ
S 2 Ak fyd

The area of the designed transverse reinforcement per unit length is stored in the
CivilFEM results file as the parameter:

Asw
ASTT =
S

230 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6) Determining the required longitudinal reinforcement ratio. The longitudinal

reinforcement is calculated as:

TEd Uk
Asl =
2 Ak fyd

The area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as the parameter:
ASLT = Asl
If both transverse and longitudinal reinforcements are designed for both element
sections, this element will be labeled as designed.

Design criterion (DSG_CRT) is 1 (Ok) if the element was designed, 0 (Not OK) if not.

6.6.4.6. Combined Shear and Torsion Design

The design of sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment, follows
the steps below:

1) Torsion design considering a null shear force. This design follows the same steps as
for the design of elements subjected to pure torsion according to Eurocode 2 (EN
1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design Code.
2) Shear design considering a null torsion force. This design is accomplished with the
same steps as for the design of elements subjected to pure shear according to
Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2008) and ITER Design Code.

3) Checking concrete ultimate strength condition. The design torsional moment (TEd )
and the design shear force (VEd ) must satisfy the following condition:

TEd VEd
+ ≤1
TRd,max VRd,max
4) Obtaining required shear and torsion reinforcement ratios. If the concrete ultimate
strength condition is fulfilled (i.e. the concrete can resist the combined shear and
torsion action) the reinforcements calculated in steps 1 and 2 are taken as the
designed reinforcements. The element is then labeled as designed.

If the concrete ultimate strength condition is not fulfilled, the parameters corresponding
to each type of reinforcement will take the value of 2100.

231 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The design criterion is 1 (Ok) if the element has been designed, and 0 if not.

6.6.5. Shear and Torsion according to ACI 318-05

Strength reduction factor φ is taken as φ = 0.75 for shear and torsion according to Chapter
9.3.2 of Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete Structures (ACI 318-05)
document.

6.6.5.1. Shear Check

Shear checking according to ACI 318-05 is described in this section. These equations refer to
US (British) units which include force, length, and time units of lb, in, and sec.

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. The required material properties

associated with each transverse cross section at the active time are:
f′c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking:
Ag area of concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Required data:

bw web width or diameter of circular section.
d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in the Y direction, (for circular sections this
should not be less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to
the centroid of the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are as follows:

 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member
section.
As /S area of the reinforcement per unit length (reinforcement ratio) in both the Y
and Z directions.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

232 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

s spacing of the stirrups.

or with the following input:

s spacing of the stirrups.

φ diameter of bars.
N number of reinforcement legs.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The forces that act on the section
are obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Force Description

Vu Factored design shear force

Nu Factored axial force occurring simultaneously to the shear force
(positive for compression).
6) Calculating the shear strength provided by concrete for nonprestressed members. First,
the shear strength provided by concrete (Vc) is calculated with the following expression:

Vc = 2√f′c bw d
where:

√f′c square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √f′c bw d
2000 Ag
If section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi,

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √f′c bw d
2000 Ag

If the section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it
is assumed Vc = 0.

The calculation result for both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VC:

VC Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc

233 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

7) Calculating the shear strength provided by shear reinforcement. The strength provided
by shear reinforcement (Vs ) is calculated with the following expression:
As
Vs = f (sinα + cosα)d ≤ 8√f′c bw d
S y
where:

fy yield strength of the shear reinforcement (not greater than 60000 psi).
The calculation result for both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VS:

VS Shear strength provided by transverse reinforcement.

8) Calculating the nominal shear strength of section. The nominal shear strength (Vn ) is the
summation of the provided by concrete and by the shear reinforcement:
Vn = Vc + Vs
This nominal strength as well as its ratio to the design shear are stored in the CivilFEM
results file as the parameters:

VN Nominal shear strength.

VN = Vn
CRTVN Ratio of the design shear force (Vu) to the resistance Vn .
Vu
CRTVN
Vn
If the strength provided by concrete is null, and the shear reinforcement
is not defined in the section, then Vn = 0, and the criterion is equal to –1.

9) Obtaining shear criterion. The section will be valid for shear if the following condition is
fulfilled:
Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
φ strength reduction factor of the section. φ = 0.75 for shear and torsion
according to Chapter 9.3 of Building Code Requirements for Structural
Concrete Structures (ACI 318-05) document.

Therefore, the validity shear criterion is defined as follows:

Vu
CRT_TOT = ≤1
ϕVn

234 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

For each element, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
CRT_TOT.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is not defined in
the section, then Vn = 0, and the criterion is equal to 2100.

The ϕ ∙ Vn value is stored in CivilFEM results file as the parameter VFI.

6.6.5.2. Torsion Check

The torsion checking according to ACI 318-05 is described in this section. These equations
refer to US (British) units which include force, length, and time units of lb, in, and sec.

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated with each transverse cross section at the active time:
f′c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data are
as follows:
bw web width or diameter of circular section.
d distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections this should not be
less than the distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of
the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Acp area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section.

Pcp outside perimeter of the concrete cross section.
Aoh area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
Ph perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
Ao gross area enclosed by shear flow path.
Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are as follows:

Transverse Reinforcement
Ast/S area of transverse reinforcement per unit of length.

235 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The reinforcement ratio can alternatively be defined using the following data:

Ast closed stirrups area for torsion.

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Or with the following data:

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Φt diameter of the closed stirrups.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.

The reinforcement ratio can alternatively be defined using the following data:

ϕl diameter of longitudinal bars.

N number of longitudinal bars.

4) Obtaining section’s internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on
the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Moment Description

Tu Factored design torsional moment.

5) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if the
design torsional moment (Tu ) satisfies the condition below:
A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√f′c )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
will be considered as null for checking.
Checking section dimensions. Section dimensions must satisfy the following
requirements:

Tu Ph Vc
√
2 ≤ ϕ (b d + 8 f′c )
1.7 Aoh w

In hollow sections, if the section wall’s thickness is less than Aoh /Ph, this value will be
replaced by the minimum thickness of the section in the previous formula.

236 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element
ends as the parameter:

Tu Ph
1.7 A2oh
CRTTC =
V
ϕ ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d
6) Calculating the nominal torsional moment strength of the section. The nominal
torsional moment strength (Tn ) is evaluated with the following expression:
Ast
Tn = 2 Ac f
S y
where:

fy specified yield strength of torsional reinforcement (not greater than 60,000

psi).
This nominal torsional moment strength and its ratio to the design shear force are
stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TN Nominal torsional moment strength.

TN = Tn
CRTTN Ratio of the design torsional moment (Tu ) to the torsional moment
strength Tn .
Tu
CRTTN =
Tn
The required longitudinal reinforcement area is given by:

Ast
(Al )nec = P
S h
Calculation results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameters:

ALT Area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement required in accordance with

the transverse torsion reinforcement defined.
ALT = (Al )nec
CRTALT Ratio of the area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement required to the
area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement defined.
(Al )nec
CRTALT =
Asl

237 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

If longitudinal reinforcement is not defined, then Asl = 0 and the

criterion is equal to 2100.

7) Obtaining torsion criterion. The section will be valid for torsion if the following condition
is fulfilled:
Tu ≤ ΦTn
Asl ≥ (Al )nec
Tu Ph Vc
2 ≤ ϕ (b + 8√f′c )
1.7 Ach w d

φ strength reduction factor of the section, (0.75 for shear and torsion).

Therefore, the validity torsion criterion is defined as follows:

Tu Ph
Tu (Al )nec 1.7 A2oh
CRT_TOT = Max ( ; ; )≤1
ϕ Tn Asl V
( c + 8√f′c )
bw d
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the torsion reinforcement is not defined
in the section, the criterion will be 2100.

The ϕ ∙ Tn value is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter TFI.

6.6.5.3. Combined Shear and Torsion Check

For checking sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment, the
following steps are taken:

1) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if the
design torsional moment (Tu ) satisfies the condition below:
A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√f′c )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
is considered as null for checking.

2) Checking section dimensions. For shear force and the associated torsional moment,
section dimensions must satisfy the following requirements:
a) Solid sections:

238 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

2
Vu 2 Tu Ph Vc
√( ) +( 2 ) ≤ ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d

b) Hollow sections:

Vu Tu Ph Vc
( )+( 2 ) ≤ ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7Aoh bw d

In hollow sections, if the section wall’s thickness is less than Aoh /Ph , this value is
replaced in the expression above by the section’s minimum thickness.

The ratio between these two factors is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both
element ends.

a) Solid sections:

2 2
√( Vu ) + (Tu2Pn )
bw d Aoh
CRTTC =
Vc
ф( + 8√f′c )
bw d
b) Hollow sections:

Vu TP
+ u n
bw d 1.7 A2oh
CRTTC =
V
ф ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d

3) Checking for shear force with concomitant torsional moment. This check is
accomplished with the same steps as the check of elements subjected to pure shear
force according to ACI 318-05. The same results as for shear checking will be calculated.
Except for this check, the CRT_TOT criterion is stored in the CivilFEM results file as
CRTSHR for each element end.

4) Checking for torsion with shear force. This check follows the same steps considered for
the check of elements subjected to pure torsion according to ACI 318-05. The same
results as in torsion checking will be calculated.

239 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Except for this check, the CRT_TOT criterion is stored in the CivilFEM results file as
CRTTRS for each element end.

5) Obtaining the combined shear and torsion criterion. This criterion determines whether
the section is valid or not. It is defined as follows:
Vu Tu (Al )nec
CRT_TOT = Max [ ; ; ; CRTTC] ≤ 1
ф Vn ф Tn Asl
For each end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file.

A value equal to 2100 for this criterion indicates:

 the shear strength provided by concrete is equal to zero and the shear
reinforcement has not been defined.
 the shear strength provided by concrete is equal to zero and the transverse
torsion reinforcement has not been defined.
 the longitudinal torsion reinforcement has not been defined.

6.6.5.4. Shear Design

The shear designing according to ACI 318-05 is described in this section. These equations
refer to US (British) units which include force, length, and time units of lb, in, and sec.

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. The required material properties

associated with each transverse cross section at the active time are:

f′c specified compressive strength of concrete.

fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear designing are the
following ones:

Ag area of concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The Required data
are as follows:

bw web width or diameter of the circular section.

d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tension reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections this should not
be less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid
of the tension reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

240 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. For shear reinforcement design, it is

possible to define the angle  between the reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of
the member. This angle must be stored in the shear reinforcement data of each
element.
pertaining to reinforcements will be ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on
the section as well as the concomitant axial force are obtained from the CivilFEM
results file (.RCF).
Force Description

Vu Design shear force

Nu Axial force (positive for compression)

6) Calculating the shear strength provided by concrete. The shear strength provided by
concrete (Vc ) is calculated with the following expression:

Vc = 2√f′c bw d
where:

√f′c square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √f′c bw d
2000 Ag
If the section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi,

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √f′c bw d
500 Ag

If the section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it
is assumed Vc = 0.

The calculation result is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter:

VC Shear strength provided by concrete: VC = Vc

241 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

7) Calculating the required reinforcement contribution to the shear strength. The

section must satisfy the following condition to resist the shear force:

Vu ≤ ϕ Vn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
Therefore, the reinforcement shear resistance must satisfy:

Vu
Vs = − Vc ≤ 8√f′c bw d
ϕ
If the shear resistance of the reinforcement does not satisfy the expression above, the
section cannot be designed. As a result, the parameters for the reinforcement ratio will
be equal to 2100.

As
ASSH = = 2100
S
For this case, the element will be labeled as not designed.

Calculation results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter:

VS Shear resistance provided by the transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs ≤ 8√f′c bw d
8) Calculating the required reinforcement ratio. Once the shear resistance of the
reinforcement has been obtained, the reinforcement can be calculated with the
following expression:

As Vs
=
S fy (sinα + cosα)d
Where:

As area of the cross-section of the shear reinforcement.

s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.
fy yield strength of the shear reinforcement (not greater than 60000 psi).
The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results
file for both element ends:

As
ASSH =
S
In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (providing the design process is
correct for both element sections).

242 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6.6.5.5. Torsion Design

The torsion designing according to ACI 318-05 is described in this section. These equations
refer to US (British) units which include force, length, and time units of lb, in, and sec.

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. These properties are obtained from
the material properties associated with each transverse cross section at the active
time.
f′c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data
are as follows:

bw web width or diameter of the circular section.

d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections this should not be
less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of
the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Acp Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section.

Pcp Outside perimeter of the concrete cross section.
Aoh Area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
Ph Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
Ao Gross area enclosed by shear flow path.
Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The torsional moment that
acts on the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Moment Description

Tu Design torsional moment in l section.

4) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if
the design torsional moment (Tu ) satisfies the condition below:

243 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

A2cp
Tu > ф (√f′c )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
is consider as null for the design.

5) Checking section dimensions. Section dimensions must satisfy the following

requirements:
Tu Ph Vc
√
2 ≤ ϕ (b d + 8 f′c )
1.7Aoh w

For hollow sections, if the thickness of the section walls is less than Aoh /Ph, this value
will be replaced by the minimum thickness of the section in the equation above.
The torsion reinforcement will not be designed if the previous expression is not fulfilled;
consequently, the parameters for the reinforcement will be equal to 2100.
Ast
ASTT = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

ASLT = Asl = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case the element will be marked as not designed and it will be stored in the
TRS_NOT OK component.

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element
ends:

Tu Ph
1.7 A2oh
CRTTC =
V
ϕ ( c + 8√f′c )
bw b

6) Calculating the required transverse reinforcement. In order to resist the torsional

moment, the section must satisfy the condition below:

At
Tu ≤ ϕ Tn = ϕ (2A0 f )
S y
At cross-sectional area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion.
s spacing of the stirrups.

Therefore, the required transverse torsion reinforcement is:

At Tu
=
S ϕ 2 A0 fy

244 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The area of designed transverse reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM
results file for both element ends:

At
ASTT =
S
7) Calculating the required longitudinal reinforcement. The longitudinal reinforcement
area is given by the following expression:

At
Al = P
S h
The area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM results file
for both element ends:

ASLT = Al
If transverse and longitudinal reinforcements are designed for both element ends, this
element will be labeled as designed.

6.6.5.6. Combined Shear and Torsion Design

The designing of sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment,
follows the steps below:

1) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if
the design torsional moment (Tu ) satisfies the condition below:

A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√f′c )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
is considered as null for the design.

2) Checking section dimensions. For shear force and concomitant torsional moment,
section dimensions must satisfy the following requirements:

a) Solid sections:

2
V 2 TP V
√( u ) + ( u h2 ) ≤ ϕ ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d
b) Hollow sections:

245 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Vu Tu Ph Vc
( )+( 2 ) ≤ ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d

For hollow sections, if the section wall’s thickness is less than Aoh /Ph, this value will be
replaced by the minimum thickness of the section in the expression above.
The torsion reinforcement will not be designed if the expression above is not fulfilled;
consequently, the parameters for the reinforcement will be equal to 2100.
Ast
ASTT = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

ASLT = Asl = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case, the element will be marked as not designed.

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element
ends.

a) Solid sections:

2 2
√( Vu ) + ( Tu Ph2 )
bw d 1.7 Aoh
CRTTC =
Vc
ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d
b) Hollow sections:

2 2
Vu TP
( ) + ( u h2 )
bw d 1.7 Aoh
CRTTC =
V
ϕ ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d

3) Shear design assuming a null torsional moment. This design follows the same
procedure as for the design of elements subjected to pure shear force according to
ACI 318-05.

4) Torsion design considering a null shear force. This design is accomplished with the
same steps as for the design of elements subjected to pure torsion according to ACI
318-05.

246 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6.6.6. Shear and Torsion according to ACI 318-14

Strength reduction factor φ is taken as φ = 0.75 for shear and torsion according to Chapter
21.2.1 of Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete Structures (ACI 318-14)
document.

6.6.6.1. Shear Check

Shear checking according to ACI 318-14 is described in this section. These equations refer to
US (British) units which include force, length, and time units of lb, in, and sec.

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. The required material properties

associated with each transverse cross section at the active time are:
f′c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
λ modification factor for lightweight concrete (λ = 1.0 default value).

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking:
Ag area of concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Required data:

bw web width or diameter of circular section.
d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in the Y direction, (for circular sections this
should not be less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to
the centroid of the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are as follows:

 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member
section.
As /S area of the reinforcement per unit length (reinforcement ratio) in both the Y
and Z directions.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

247 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

s spacing of the stirrups.

or with the following input:

s spacing of the stirrups.

φ diameter of bars.
N number of reinforcement legs.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The forces that act on the section
are obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Force Description

Vu Factored design shear force

Nu Factored axial force occurring simultaneously to the shear force
(positive for compression).
6) Calculating the shear strength provided by concrete for nonprestressed members. First,
the shear strength provided by concrete (Vc) is calculated with the following expression
for sections without axial force:

Vc = 2λ√f′c bw d
where:

√f′c square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) 𝜆√f′c bw d
2000 Ag
If section is subjected to significant tensile force,

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) 𝜆√f′c bw d
500 Ag

The calculation result for both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VC:

VC Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc
7) Calculating the shear strength provided by shear reinforcement. The strength provided
by shear reinforcement (Vs ) is calculated with the following expression:

248 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

As Vu
Vs = fy (sinα + cosα)d ≤ 8√f ′ c bw d and ≥ Vs = − V𝑐
S 𝜙
where:

fy yield strength of the shear reinforcement (not greater than 60000 psi).
The calculation result for both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VS:

VS Shear strength provided by transverse reinforcement.

8) Calculating the nominal shear strength of section. The nominal shear strength (Vn ) is the
summation of the provided by concrete and by the shear reinforcement:
Vn = Vc + Vs
This nominal strength as well as its ratio to the design shear are stored in the CivilFEM
results file as the parameters:

VN Nominal shear strength.

VN = Vn
CRTVN Ratio of the design shear force (Vu) to the resistance Vn .
Vu
CRTVN
Vn
If the strength provided by concrete is null, and the shear reinforcement
is not defined in the section, then Vn = 0, and the criterion is equal to –1.

9) Obtaining shear criterion. The section will be valid for shear if the following condition is
fulfilled:
Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
φ strength reduction factor of the section (0.75 for shear and torsion).

Therefore, the validity shear criterion is defined as follows:

Vu
CRT_TOT = ≤1
ϕVn
For each element, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
CRT_TOT.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is not defined in
the section, then Vn = 0, and the criterion is equal to 2100.

249 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The ϕ ∙ Vn value is stored in CivilFEM results file as the parameter VFI.

6.6.6.2. Torsion Check

The torsion checking according to ACI 318-14 is described in this section. These equations
refer to US (British) units which include force, length, and time units of lb, in, and sec.

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated with each transverse cross section at the active time:
f′c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
λ modification factor for lightweight concrete.

2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data are
as follows:
bw web width or diameter of circular section.
d distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections this should not be
less than the distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of
the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Acp area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section.

Pcp outside perimeter of the concrete cross section.
Aoh area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
Ph perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
Ao gross area enclosed by shear flow path.
Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are as follows:

Transverse Reinforcement
Ast/S area of transverse reinforcement per unit of length.

The reinforcement ratio can alternatively be defined using the following data:

250 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ast closed stirrups area for torsion.

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Or with the following data:

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Φt diameter of the closed stirrups.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.

The reinforcement ratio can alternatively be defined using the following data:

ϕl diameter of longitudinal bars.

N number of longitudinal bars.

4) Obtaining section’s internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on
the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Moment Description

Tu Factored design torsional moment.

5) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if the
design torsional moment (Tu ) satisfies the condition below:
A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (𝜆√f′c )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
will be considered as null for checking.
Checking section dimensions. Section dimensions must satisfy the following
requirements for solid sections:

2
Vu 2 Tu Ph Vc
√( ) +( 2 ) ≤ ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d

Hollow sections:

Vu Tu Ph Vc
( )+( 2 ) ≤ ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7Aoh bw d

251 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element
ends as the parameter (solid sections):

2 2
√( Vu ) + ( Tu Ph2 )
bw d 1.7 Aoh
CRTTC =
Vc
ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d
Hollow sections:

Vu TP
+ u n
bw d 1.7 A2oh
CRTTC =
V
ф ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d

6) Calculating the nominal torsional moment strength of the section. The nominal
torsional moment strength (Tn ) is evaluated with the following expression:
Ast
Tn = 2 Ac f
S y
where:

fy specified yield strength of torsional reinforcement (not greater than 60,000

psi).
This nominal torsional moment strength and its ratio to the design shear force are
stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TN Nominal torsional moment strength.

TN = Tn
CRTTN Ratio of the design torsional moment (Tu ) to the torsional moment
strength Tn .
Tu
CRTTN =
Tn
The required longitudinal reinforcement area is given by:

Ast
(Al )nec = P
S h
Calculation results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameters:

252 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

ALT Area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement required in accordance with

the transverse torsion reinforcement defined.
ALT = (Al )nec
CRTALT Ratio of the area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement required to the
area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement defined.
(Al )nec
CRTALT =
Asl
If longitudinal reinforcement is not defined, then Asl = 0 and the
criterion is equal to 2100.

7) Obtaining torsion criterion. The section will be valid for torsion if the following condition
is fulfilled:
Tu ≤ ΦTn
Asl ≥ (Al )nec
2
V 2 TP V
√( u ) + ( u h2 ) ≤ ϕ ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d

φ strength reduction factor of the section, (0.75 for shear and torsion).

Therefore, the validity torsion criterion is defined as follows:

2 2
√( Vu ) + ( Tu Ph2 )
Tu (Al )nec bw d 1.7 Aoh
CRT_TOT = Max ; ; ≤1
ϕ Tn Asl Vc
( + 8√f′c )
bw d
( )
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the torsion reinforcement is not defined
in the section, the criterion will be 2100.

The ϕ ∙ Tn value is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter TFI.

6.6.6.3. Combined Shear and Torsion Check

For checking sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment, the
following steps are taken:

253 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if the
design torsional moment (Tu ) satisfies the condition below:
A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√f′c )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
is considered as null for checking.

7) Checking section dimensions. For shear force and the associated torsional moment,
section dimensions must satisfy the following requirements:
a) Solid sections:

2
V 2 TP V
√( u ) + ( u h2 ) ≤ ϕ ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d

b) Hollow sections:

Vu Tu Ph Vc
( )+( ) ≤ ϕ ( + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7A2oh bw d

In hollow sections, if the section wall’s thickness is less than Aoh /Ph , this value is
replaced in the expression above by the section’s minimum thickness.

The ratio between these two factors is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both
element ends.

a) Solid sections:

2 2
√( Vu ) + (Tu2Pn )
bw d Aoh
CRTTC =
Vc
ф( + 8√f′c )
bw d

254 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

b) Hollow sections:

Vu TP
+ u n
bw d 1.7 A2oh
CRTTC =
V
ф ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d

8) Checking for shear force with concomitant torsional moment. This check is
accomplished with the same steps as the check of elements subjected to pure shear
force according to ACI 318-14. The same results as for shear checking will be calculated.
Except for this check, the CRT_TOT criterion is stored in the CivilFEM results file as
CRTSHR for each element end.

9) Checking for torsion with shear force. This check follows the same steps considered for
the check of elements subjected to pure torsion according to ACI 318-05. The same
results as in torsion checking will be calculated.
Except for this check, the CRT_TOT criterion is stored in the CivilFEM results file as
CRTTRS for each element end.

10) Obtaining the combined shear and torsion criterion. This criterion determines whether
the section is valid or not. It is defined as follows:
Vu Tu (Al )nec
CRT_TOT = Max [ ; ; ; CRTTC] ≤ 1
ф Vn ф Tn Asl
For each end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file.

A value equal to 2100 for this criterion indicates:

 the shear strength provided by concrete is equal to zero and the shear
reinforcement has not been defined.
 the shear strength provided by concrete is equal to zero and the transverse
torsion reinforcement has not been defined.
 the longitudinal torsion reinforcement has not been defined.

6.6.6.4. Shear Design

The shear designing according to ACI 318-14 is described in this section. These equations
refer to US (British) units which include force, length, and time units of lb, in, and sec.

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. The required material properties

associated with each transverse cross section at the active time are:

255 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

f′c specified compressive strength of concrete.

fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
λ modification factor for lightweight concrete.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear designing are the
following ones:

Ag area of concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The Required data
are as follows:

bw web width or diameter of the circular section.

d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tension reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections this should not
be less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid
of the tension reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. For shear reinforcement design, it is

possible to define the angle  between the reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of
the member. This angle must be stored in the shear reinforcement data of each
element. If this angle is equal to zero or it is not defined, alpha= 90º. Other data
pertaining to reinforcements will be ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on
the section as well as the concomitant axial force are obtained from the CivilFEM
results file (.RCF).
Force Description

Vu Design shear force

Nu Axial force (positive for compression)

6) Calculating the shear strength provided by concrete. The shear strength provided by
concrete (Vc ) is calculated with the following expression:

Vc = 2λ√f′c bw d
where:

√f′c square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).

256 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

For sections subject to a compressive axial force,

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) 𝜆√f′c bw d
2000 Ag
If the section is subjected to a significant tensile force,

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) 𝜆√f′c bw d
500 Ag

The calculation result is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter:

VC Shear strength provided by concrete: VC = Vc

7) Calculating the required reinforcement contribution to the shear strength. The
section must satisfy the following condition to resist the shear force:

Vu ≤ ϕ Vn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
Therefore, the reinforcement shear resistance must satisfy:

Vu
Vs = − Vc ≤ 8√f′c bw d
ϕ
If the shear resistance of the reinforcement does not satisfy the expression above, the
section cannot be designed. As a result, the parameters for the reinforcement ratio will
be equal to 2100.

As
ASSH = = 2100
S
For this case, the element will be labeled as not designed.

Calculation results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter:

VS Shear resistance provided by the transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs ≤ 8√f′c bw d
8) Calculating the required reinforcement ratio. Once the shear resistance of the
reinforcement has been obtained, the reinforcement can be calculated with the
following expression:

As Vs
=
S fy (sinα + cosα)d

257 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Where:

As area of the cross-section of the shear reinforcement.

s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.
fy yield strength of the shear reinforcement (not greater than 60000 psi).
The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results
file for both element ends:

As
ASSH =
S
In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (providing the design process is
correct for both element sections).

6.6.6.5. Torsion Design

The torsion designing according to ACI 318-14 is described in this section. These equations
refer to US (British) units which include force, length, and time units of lb, in, and sec.

1) Obtaining strength properties of the materials. These properties are obtained from
the material properties associated with each transverse cross section at the active
time.
f′c specified compressive strength of concrete.
fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
λ modification factor for lightweight concrete.
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data
are as follows:

bw web width or diameter of the circular section.

d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections this should not be
less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of
the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Acp Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section.

Pcp Outside perimeter of the concrete cross section.
Aoh Area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.

258 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ph Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional

reinforcement.
Ao Gross area enclosed by shear flow path.
Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The torsional moment that
acts on the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Moment Description

Tu Design torsional moment in l section.

4) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if
the design torsional moment (Tu ) satisfies the condition below:

A2cp
Tu > ф (𝜆√f′c )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
is consider as null for the design.

Checking section dimensions. Section dimensions must satisfy the following

requirements for solid sections:

2
Vu 2 Tu Ph Vc
√( ) +( ) ≤ ϕ ( + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 A2oh bw d

Hollow sections:

Vu T P
u h Vc
(b ) + (1.7A 2 ) ≤ ϕ (b + 8√f′c )
w d oh w d

For hollow sections, if the thickness of the section walls is less than Aoh /Ph, this value
will be replaced by the minimum thickness of the section in the equation above.
The torsion reinforcement will not be designed if the previous expression is not fulfilled;
consequently, the parameters for the reinforcement will be equal to 2100.
Ast
ASTT = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

ASLT = Asl = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case the element will be marked as not designed and it will be stored in the
TRS_NOT OK component.

259 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element
ends:

a) Solid sections:

2
2
√( Vu ) +(Tu2Pn )
bw d Aoh
CRTTC = Vc
ф( +8√f′c )
bw d

b) Hollow sections:
Vu T P
+ u n
bw d 1.7 A2
oh
CRTTC = V
ф( c +8√f′c )
bw d

5) Calculating the required transverse reinforcement. In order to resist the torsional

moment, the section must satisfy the condition below:

At
Tu ≤ ϕ Tn = ϕ (2A0 f )
S y
At cross-sectional area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion.
s spacing of the stirrups.

Therefore, the required transverse torsion reinforcement is:

At Tu
=
S ϕ 2 A0 fy
The area of designed transverse reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM
results file for both element ends:

At
ASTT =
S
6) Calculating the required longitudinal reinforcement. The longitudinal reinforcement
area is given by the following expression:

At
Al = P
S h
The area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM results file
for both element ends:

ASLT = Al
If transverse and longitudinal reinforcements are designed for both element ends, this
element will be labeled as designed.

260 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6.6.6.6. Combined Shear and Torsion Design

The designing of sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment,
follows the steps below:

5) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if
the design torsional moment (Tu ) satisfies the condition below:

A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√f′c )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
is considered as null for the design.

6) Checking section dimensions. For shear force and concomitant torsional moment,
section dimensions must satisfy the following requirements:

a) Solid sections:

2
V 2 TP V
√( u ) + ( u h2 ) ≤ ϕ ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d

b) Hollow sections:

Vu Tu Ph Vc
( )+( 2 ) ≤ ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d 1.7 Aoh bw d

For hollow sections, if the section wall’s thickness is less than Aoh /Ph, this value will be
replaced by the minimum thickness of the section in the expression above.
The torsion reinforcement will not be designed if the expression above is not fulfilled;
consequently, the parameters for the reinforcement will be equal to 2100.
Ast
ASTT = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

ASLT = Asl = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case, the element will be marked as not designed.

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element
ends.

261 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

a) Solid sections:

2 2
√( Vu ) + ( Tu Ph2 )
bw d 1.7 Aoh
CRTTC =
Vc
ϕ( + 8√f′c )
bw d
b) Hollow sections:

2 2
Vu TP
( ) + ( u h2 )
bw d 1.7 Aoh
CRTTC =
V
ϕ ( c + 8√f′c )
bw d

7) Shear design assuming a null torsional moment. This design follows the same
procedure as for the design of elements subjected to pure shear force according to
ACI 318-14.

8) Torsion design considering a null shear force. This design is accomplished with the
same steps as for the design of elements subjected to pure torsion according to ACI
318-14.

6.6.7. Shear and Torsion according to ACI 349-01 and

ACI349-06
6.6.7.1. Shear Check
Shear checking according to ACI 349-01 and 349-06 is described in this section. Units in these
equations refer to the US (British) force, length, time units measured in pounds, inches, and
seconds.

1) Obtaining material strength properties. The required material properties associated

with each transverse cross section at the active time are:
fc′ specified compressive strength of concrete.
fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking:
Ag area of concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical

parameters used for shear calculations must be defined. The required data:
bw web width or diameter of circular section.

262 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the

longitudinal tensile reinforcement in the Y direction, (for circular sections, this
must not be less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the
centroid of the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Section 6.6.1. “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides

detailed information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid
section.

4) Obtaining section reinforcement data. Required data includes:

 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member
section.
As /S area of reinforcement per unit length (reinforcement ratio) in both the Y and
Z directions.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

s spacing of the stirrups.
or with the data below:

s spacing of the stirrups.

diameter of bars.
N number of reinforcement legs.
5) Obtaining forces acting on the section. The forces that act on the section are obtained
from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Force Description

Vu Factored design shear force in the section

Nu Factored axial force occurring simultaneously to the shear force
(positive for compression).
6) Calculating the shear strength provided by concrete for nonprestressed members. First,
the shear strength provided by concrete (Vc) is calculated with the following expression:

Vc = 2√fc′ bw d
where:

√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force:

263 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √fc′ bw d
2000Ag
If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress is less than 500
psi:

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √fc′ bw d
500Ag

If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi,
it is assumed that Vc = 0.

The calculated result at both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VC:

VC Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc
7) Calculating the shear strength provided by the shear reinforcement. The strength
provided by the shear reinforcement (Vs) is calculated with the following expression:
As
Vs = f (sin α + cos α)d ≤ 8√fc′ bw d
S y
where:

fy yield strength of the shear reinforcement (not greater than 60,000 psi).

The calculated result at both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VS:

VS Shear strength provided by transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs
8) Calculating the nominal shear strength of section. The nominal shear strength (Vn) is the
sum of the shear strength provided by the concrete and the shear reinforcement as
described in the previous sections:
Vn = Vc + Vs
This nominal shear strength as well as its ratio to the design shear are stored in the
CivilFEM results file as the parameters:

VN Nominal shear strength.

VN = Vn

264 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

CRTVN Ratio of the design shear force (Vu) to the resistance Vn.
Vu
CRTVN =
Vn
If the shear strength provided by the concrete is null and shear
reinforcement is not defined in the section, then Vn = 0, and the criterion
is set equal to –1.

9) Obtaining shear criterion. The section will be valid for shear if the following condition is
satisfied
Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
φ strength reduction factor of the section, (0.85 for shear and torsion).

Therefore, the validity of the shear criterion is defined as follows:

Vu
CRT_TOT = ≤1
ϕ Vn
For each element, this shear utilization value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter CRT_TOT.

In cases where the strength provided by the concrete is null and the shear
reinforcement is not defined in the section, the shear strength Vn = 0, and the criterion
is set equal to 2100.

The ϕ ∙ Vn value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter VFI.

6.6.7.2. Torsion Check

Torsion checking according to ACI 349-01 and 349-06 is described in this section. Units in
these equations refer to the US (British) force, length, time units measured in pounds,
inches, and seconds.

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated with each transverse cross section at the active time are:
fc′ specified compressive strength of concrete.
fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical
parameters used for torsion calculations must be defined. The required data are as
follows:
bw web width or diameter of circular section.

265 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

d distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the

longitudinal tensile reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections, this must not be
less than the distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of
the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Acp Area enclosed by outside perimeter of the concrete cross section.

Pcp Outside perimeter of the concrete cross section.
A0h Area enclosed by the centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
Ph Perimeter of the centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
A0 Gross area enclosed by the shear flow path.
Section 6.6.1. “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides
detailed information on how to calculate the required data for each valid section.

3) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are as follows:

Transverse Reinforcement
Ast /s area of transverse reinforcement per unit length.

The reinforcement ratio can alternatively be defined using the following data:

Ast closed stirrups area for torsion.

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Or with the data below:

s spacing of closed stirrups.

ϕt diameter of the closed stirrups.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.

The reinforcement ratio can also be defined using the following data:

ϕl diameter of longitudinal bars.

N number of longitudinal bars.

4) Obtaining section internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on the
section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

266 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Moment Description

Tu Factored design torsional moment.

5) Checking whether torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered
if the design torsional moment (Tu) satisfies the following equation:
A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√fc′ )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
is considered as null for checking.

6) Checking section dimensions. Section dimensions must satisfy the following

requirements:
Tu Ph Vc
≤ ϕ ( + 8√fc′ )
1.7 A20h bw

In hollow sections, if the section wall thickness is less than Aoh/Ph, this value must be
substituted with the minimum thickness of the section in the expression above.

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file at both element
ends as the parameter:

Tu Pu
1.7 A20h
CRTTC =
V
ϕ ( c + 8√fc′ )
bw d
7) Calculating the nominal torsional moment strength of the section. The nominal
torsional moment strength (Tn) is evaluated with the following expression:
Ast
Tn = 2A0 f
S y
where:

fy specified yield strength of torsional reinforcement (not greater than 60000

psi).
This nominal torsional moment strength and its ratio to the design shear force are
stored in the CivilFEM results file at both element ends as the parameters:

TN Nominal torsional moment strength.

TN = Tn

267 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

CRTTN Ratio of the design torsional moment (Tu) to the torsional moment
strength Tn .
Tu
CRTTN =
Tn
The needed longitudinal reinforcement area is given by:

Ast
(Al )nec = P
S h
The calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file at both element ends as the
parameters:

ALT Area of torsion longitudinal reinforcement required in accordance to the

torsion transverse reinforcement defined.
ALT = (Al )nec
CRTALT Ratio of the area of torsion longitudinal reinforcement required to the
area of torsion longitudinal reinforcement defined.
(Al )nec
CRTALT =
Asl
If longitudinal reinforcement is not defined, then Asl , and the criterion is
set equal to 2100.

8) Obtaining torsion criterion. The section will be valid for torsion if the following condition
is satisfied:
Tu ≤ ϕTn
Asl ≥ (Al )nec
Tu Ph Vc
≤ ϕ ( + 8√fc′ )
1.7A20h bw d
φ strength reduction factor of the section, (=0.85 for shear and torsion).

Therefore, the torsion design utilization is defined as follows:

Tu Ph
Tu (Al )nec 1.7A20h
CRT_TOT = Max ( ; ; )≤1
ϕ Tn Asl Vc ′
+ 8√fc
bw d
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file.

In cases where the strength provided by concrete is null and the torsion reinforcement
is not defined in the section, the criterion will be set to 2100.

268 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The ϕ ∙ Tn value is stored in the CivilFEM results file at both element ends as the
parameter TFI.

6.6.7.3. Combined Shear and Torsion Checking

For checking sections subjected to combined shear force and torsional moment, the
following steps are taken:

1) Checking if torsion effects must be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if the
design torsional moment (Tu) satisfies the condition below:
A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√fc′ )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value its effects can be neglected and it is
considered as null for checking.

2) Checking section dimensions. For shear force and associated torsional moment, section
dimensions must satisfy the following requirements:
a) Solid sections:

2
Vu 2 Tu Ph Vc
√( ) +( 2 ) ≤ ϕ( + 8√fc′ )
bw d 1.7 A0h bw d

b) Hollow sections:

Vu Tu Ph Vc
( )+( ) ≤ ϕ ( + 8√fc′ )
bw d 1.7A20h bw d

In hollow sections if the section wall thickness is lower than A0h /Ph, this value is
changed in the previous expression by the section minimum thickness.

269 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The ratio between these two factors is stored in the CivilFEM results file at both element
ends.

a) Solid sections:

2 2
√( Vu ) + ( Tu Ph2 )
bw d 1.7 A0h
CRTTC =
Vc
ϕ( + 8√fc′ )
bw d
b) Hollow sections:

Vu TP
+ u h
bw d 1.7 A20h
CRTTC =
V
ϕ ( c + 8√fc′ )
bw d

3) Checking for shear force with associated torsional moment. This checking is
accomplished following the same steps considered for the checking of elements
subjected only to shear force according to ACI 349. The same results as defined in the
shear check are calculated.
4) Checking for torsion with shear force. This checking is accomplished following the same
steps considered for the checking of elements subjected only to torsion according to ACI
349. The same results as defined in the torsion check are calculated.
5) Obtaining the combined shear and torsion criterion. This criterion determines whether
the section is valid or not. The utilization is defined as follows:
Vu Tu (Al )nec
CRT_TOT = Max [ ; ; ; CRTTC] ≤ 1
ϕ Vn ϕ Tn Asl
For each end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file.

A value equals to 2100 for this criterion would indicate one of the following:

 the shear strength provided by concrete is equal to zero and shear

reinforcement has not been defined
 the shear strength provided by concrete is equal to zero and transverse
torsion reinforcement has not been defined
 the longitudinal torsion reinforcement has not been defined

270 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6.6.7.4. Shear Design

Shear design according to ACI 349-01 and 349-06 is described in this section. Units in these
equations refer to the US (British) force, length, time units measured in pounds, inches, and
seconds.

1) Obtaining material strength properties. The required material properties associated

with each transverse cross section at the active time are:

fc′ specified compressive strength of concrete.

fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining section geometrical data. Required data for shear design:

Ag area of concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical
parameters used for shear designing must be defined. The required data:

bw web width or diameter of the circular section

d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections, this must not be
less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of
the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Section “6.6.1. Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides

detailed information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid
section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. In shear reinforcement designing, it is

possible to define the angle  between the reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of
the member. This angle must be stored in the shear reinforcement data of each
element. If this angle is equal to zero or is not defined, =90º. Other data concerning to
reinforcements are ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on the
section as well as the associated axial force are obtained from the CivilFEM results file
(.RCF).
Force Description

Vu Factored design shear force.

Nu Factored axial force occurring simultaneously with the shear force
(positive for compression).

271 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6) Calculating the shear strength provided by concrete for nonprestressed members. First,
the shear strength provided by the concrete (Vc) is calculated with the following
expression:

Vc = 2√fc′ bw d
where:

√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force:

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √fc′ bw d
2000 Ag
If section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi:

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √fc′ bw d
500 Ag

If the section is subjected to a tensile force such that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi,
it is assumed that Vc=0.

The calculated result is stored in the CivilFEM results file at both element ends as the
parameter:

VC Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc
7) Calculating the required reinforcement contribution to the shear strength. The section
must satisfy the following condition to resist the shear force:

Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
Therefore, the required shear strength of the reinforcement must be:

Vu
Vs = − Vc ≤ 8√fc′ bw d
ϕ
If the required shear strength of the reinforcement does not satisfy the expression
above, the section cannot be designed; consequently, the reinforcement parameter will
be defined as 2100. Then:

As
ASSH = = 2100
S

272 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

In this case, the element will be labeled as not designed, the program then advances to
the following element.

The calculated result at both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VS:

VS Shear resistance provided by the transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs ≤ 8√fc′ bw d
8) Calculating the required reinforcement ratio. Once the shear force that the shear
reinforcement must support has been obtained, the reinforcement is obtained from the
following expression:

As Vs
=
S fy (sin α + cos α)d
Where:

As area of the cross-section of the shear reinforcement.

s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.
fy yield strength of the shear reinforcement (not greater than 60000 psi).
The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results
file at both element ends:

As
ASSH =
S
In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (providing the design process is
correct at both element ends).

6.6.7.5. Torsion Design

The design of torsion reinforcements according to ACI 349-01 and 349-06 follows these
steps:

1) Obtaining material resistant properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated with each transverse cross section and for the active
time:

fc′ specified compressive strength of concrete.

fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data is
as follows:

273 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

bw web width or diameter of the circular section

d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections, this should not
be less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid
of the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Acp Area enclosed by outside perimeter of the concrete cross section.

Pcp Outside perimeter of the concrete cross section.
A0h Area enclosed by the centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
Ph Perimeter of the centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional
reinforcement.
A0 Gross area enclosed by the shear flow path.
Section 11-A.7 “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides
detailed information on how to calculate the required data for each valid section.

3) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The torsional moment that acts
on the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Moment Description

Tu Factored design torsional moment.

4) Checking whether torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only
considered if the design torsional moment (Tu) satisfies the condition below:

A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√fc′ )
Pcp

If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
is consider as null for the design.

5) Checking section dimensions. Section dimensions must satisfy the following

requirements:

Tu Ph Vc ′
2 ≤ ϕ (b d + 8√fc )
1.7 A0h w

274 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

In hollow sections, if the section’s wall thickness is less than Aoh/Ph, this value will be
equal to the minimum thickness of the section in the formula above.

The torsion reinforcement will not be designed if the previous expression is not
satisfied, so the parameters where the reinforcement is stored would be marked with
2100. Then:
Ast
ASTT = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

ASLT = Al = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case, the element will be marked as not designed.

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file at both element
ends:

Tu Ph
1.7 A20h
CRTTC =
V
ϕ ( c + 8√fc′ )
bw d

6) Calculating the required transverse reinforcement. In order to resist the torsional

moment, the section must satisfy the following condition:

Ast
Tu ≤ ϕ Tn = ϕ (2 AO f )
S y
Ast cross-sectional area of one leg of a closed stirrup of the transverse
reinforcement.
s spacing of the stirrups.

Therefore, the required transverse torsion reinforcement is:

Ast Tu
=
S ϕ 2 AO fy
The area of the designed transverse reinforcement per unit length is stored in the
CivilFEM results file at both element ends:

Ast
ASTT =
S
7) Determining the longitudinal reinforcement requirement. The longitudinal
reinforcement area is given by the following expression:

Ast
Al = P
S h

275 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM results file
at both element ends:

ASLT = Al
If both transverse and longitudinal reinforcements are designed at both element ends,
this element will be labeled as designed.

6.6.7.6. Combined Shear and Torsion Design

The design of sections subjected to combined shear force and torsional moment, follows the
steps below:

1) Checking whether torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only
considered if the design torsional moment (Tu) satisfies the condition below:

A2cp
Tu > 𝜙 (√fc′ )
Pcp
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and it
will be considered as null for designing.

2) Checking section dimensions. For shear force and associated torsional moment, section
dimensions must satisfy the following requirements:

a) Solid sections:

2
V 2 TP V
√( u ) + ( u h2 ) ≤ ϕ ( c + 8√fc′ )
bw d 1.7 A0h bw d

b) Hollow sections:

Vu Tu Ph Vc
( )+( 2 ) ≤ ϕ( + 8√fc′ )
bw d 1.7 A0h bw d

In hollow sections, if the section wall thickness is less than Aoh/Ph, this last value will be
equal to the minimum thickness of the section in the equation above.

If the expression above is not satisfied, the torsion reinforcement will not be designed;
as a result, the reinforcement parameters will be defined as:
Ast
ASTT = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

276 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

ASLT = Al = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case, the element will be labeled as not designed, and the program will then
advance to the next element.

The ratio of the two coefficients is stored in the CivilFEM results file at both element
ends.

a) Solid sections:

2 2
√( Vu ) + ( Tu Ph2 )
bw d 1.7 A0h
CRTTC =
Vc
ϕ( + 8√fc′ )
bw d
b) Hollow sections:

Vu TP
+ u h2
bw d 1.7 A0h
CRTTC =
V
ϕ ( c + 8√fc′ )
bw d

3) Shear design assuming a null torsional moment. This design is accomplished with the
same procedure as for the design of elements subjected to pure shear force according
to ACI 349-01 and 349-06.

4) Torsion design considering a null shear force. This design is follows the same procedure
as for the design of elements subjected to pure torsion according to ACI 349-01 and
349-06.

6.6.8. Shear and Torsion according to BS8110

6.6.8.1. Shear Check
1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active
time.
The required data are the following:
fcu characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
fy characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.

277 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

γcs concrete partial safety factor.

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking are the
following:

Ac total area of the concrete transverse section.

h total depth in the shear direction considered.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Required data are

the following ones:

bw minimum width of the section.

d effective depth of the section.
Asb Area of the longitudinal tension reinforcement that extends at least a distance
d beyond the considered section.
Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are the following:
 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member.
For this code, = 90º.
As /S area of reinforcement per unit length.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

s spacing of the stirrups.

Or with the data below:

s spacing of the stirrups.

 diameter of bars.

N number of reinforcement legs.

5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on
the section as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment are obtained
from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Force Description

Vd Design shear force

278 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Nd Concomitant axial force

M Concomitant bending moment
6) Checking compression failure in the web. First, a check is made to ensure the design
shear force (Vd ) is less than or equal to the oblique compression resistance of
concrete section (Vu1 ):
Vd ≤ Vu1
Vu1 = MIN {0.8√fcu , 5 N/mm2 } ∙ bw ∙ d
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:
VU1 Ultimate shear strength due to oblique compression of the concrete in
web.
VU1 = Vu1
CRTVU1 Ratio of the design shear (Vd ) to the resistance Vu1 .
Vd
CRTVU1 =
Vu1
7) Calculating the shear resistance of concrete. Shear resistance of concrete (Vc ) is
checked using the following expression:

0.79 Asb 1/3 400 1/4

Vc = (100 ) ( ) ∙ bw ∙ d
γcs bw d d
Where:

Asb Area of the longitudinal tension reinforcement that extends at least a distance
d beyond the considered section.
Considering the following restrictions:

Asb
100 =3
bw d
400
=1
d
f 1/3
If fcu > 25 𝑁/mm2 , the results are multiplied by ( 25
cu
)

If the section is subjected to an axial force, then the following expression will be used:

NVh
Vc ′ = Vc + 0.6 ∙b ∙d
Ac M w
Where:

279 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

h total depth in the shear direction considered.

Vc concrete shear resistance without axial forces.

Taking into account that Vd h / M always has to be = 1

For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file as the
following parameters:

VC concrete shear resistance:

VC = Vc
8) Calculaing the steel reinforcement shear resistance. Shear resistance provided by
the steel reinforcement (Vs ) is checked using the following expression:
As
Vs = ∙ 0.95 ∙ fyv ∙ d
S
Where:

As /S area per unit length of shear reinforcement.

fyv characteristic yield strength of shear reinforcement.
fyv = fy , always less than 460 N/mm2
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:

VS shear resistance provided by the transverse reinforcement

VS = Vs
9) Calculating the total shear resistance of section. The total shear resistance (VU2) is
the sum of the shear resistance provided by the concrete and the shear resistance
provided by the reinforcement:

Vu2 = Vc + Vs
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:

VU2 Total shear resistance of section.

VU2 = Vu2 = Vc + Vs
CRTVU2 ratio of shear design force (V) and the resistance force Vn
Vd
CRTVU2 =
Vu2

280 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

If Vu2 = 0, a value of 2100 is assigned to criterion CRTVU2.

10) Calculating the shear criterion. The shear criterion indicates the validity of the
section (if less than 1, the section conforms to code specifications, and if greater than
1, the section is not valid). Moreover, it provides information with regards to how
much more additional load the section can resist. The shear criterion is defined as
follows:

Vd Vd
CRT_TOT = Max ( ; )≤1
Vu1 Vu2
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
parameter CRT_TOT.

A value of 2100 for this criterion indicates that the shear resistance (Vu2 ) has a value of
zero, as indicated in the previous step.

6.6.8.2. Torsion Check

The torsion checking according to BS8110 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active
time.

The required data are the following ones:

fcu characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
fy characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical
parameters used for torsion calculations must be defined within CivilFEM database.
The required data are the following ones:

Xw torsion modulus for torsion checking and design.

X1 minimum distance of the rectangular stirrups.
y1 maximum distance of the rectangular stirrups.
Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining section reinforcement data. Required data are the following:

Transverse Reinforcement

281 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ast /S area of transverse reinforcement per unit length.

The reinforcement ratio can also be obtained with the following data:

Ast closed stirrups area for torsion.

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Or with the data below:

s spacing of closed stirrups.

ϕt diameter of the closed stirrups bars.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.
The reinforcement ratio can also be obtained with the following data:

 diameter of longitudinal bars.

N number of longitudinal bars.
4) Obtaining section internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on
the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Moment Description

Td Design torsional moment

5) Checking if torsion effects will be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if
design torsional moment (Td) satisfies the condition below:
Td ≥ Tmin
with Tmin = Vt,min ∙ Xw
Vt,min = 0.0067 ∙ √fcu ≤ 0.4 N/mm2
Where Vt,min is the minimum torsional stress.
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and its
default value taken as 0 for checking purposes.
6) Checking concrete failure. The design torsional moment Td must be less than or
equal to the maximum torsional moment resisted by the concrete (Tu1 ):

Td ≤ Tu1
Tu1 = Vtu ∙ Xw
y1
If y1< 550 mm Tu1 = Vtu ∙ Xw ∙ 550

282 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

where:

Vtu = 0.8√fcu ≤ 5.0 N/mm2 is the maximum allowable stress.

Xw torsion modulus for torsion check and design.
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:

TU1 Maximum torsional moment resisted by the section.

TU1 = Tu1
CRTTU1 Ratio of the design torsional moment (Td) to the resistance Tu1.
Td
CRTTR =
TU1
If the torsion transverse reinforcement is not defined, the criterion is
taken as 2100.
7) Checking the maximum torsional moment resisted by the reinforcement. The
design torsional moment Td must be less than or equal to the maximum torsional
moment that the reinforcement can resist (Tu2 ), therefore:

Td ≤ Tu2

Ast
Tu2 = ∙ 0.8 ∙ x1 y1 ∙ 0.87 ∙ fyv
S
where:
Ast /S area of transverse reinforcement per unit length
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:

TU2 Maximum torsional moment that can be resisted by the reinforcement.

TU2 = Tu2
CRTTU2 Ratio of the design torsional moment (Td ) to the resistance Tu2 .
Td
CRTTU2 =
TU2
In case the longitudinal reinforcement is not defined, the criterion is
taken as 2100.
8) Obtaining the necessary torsion reinforcement. The necessary longitudinal
reinforcement is calculated as a function of the transverse reinforcement, using the
following expression:

283 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ast
(Asl )nec = ∙ (x1 + y1 )
S
Where:
Asl defined longitudinal reinforcement
(Asl )nec necessary longitudinal reinforcement
As area of transverse reinforcement
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:

ALT Area of necessary longitudinal torsion reinforcement in compliance with

the defined transverse reinforcement.
ALT = (Asl )nec

CRTALT Ratio between the area of the required longitudinal torsion

reinforcement and the area of the defined longitudinal torsion
reinforcement.
(Asl )nec
CRTALT =
Asl

9) Obtaining torsion criterion. The torsion criterion identifies the ratio of the design
moment to the section’s ultimate strength (if it is less than 1, the section is valid;
whereas if it exceeds 1, the section is not valid). The criterion concerning the validity
for torsion is defined as follows:

Td Td (Asl )nec
CRT_TOT = Max ( ; ; )≤1
Tu1 Tu2 Asl
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

A value 2100 for this criterion indicates that any one of the torsion reinforcements are
not defined.

6.6.8.3. Combined Shear and Torsion Check

Checking sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment follows the
steps below:

284 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

1) Shear checking disregarding the torsional moment. This check follows the same
procedure as the check of elements subjected to shear.
In this case, the total shear criterion CRT_TOT is named as CRTSHR.

2) Torsion checking disregarding the shear force. This check will be accomplished with the
same procedure as the check of elements subjected to torsion, considering the torsional
force due to shear in the calculation of concrete failure.
Td ≤ Tu1
Vd
Tu1 = Vtu ∙ χw −
bw d
In this case, the total torsion criterion CRT_TOT is named as CRTTRS.

3) Obtaining the criterion of combined shear and torsion. This criterion contains both
shear and torsion criteria:
Vd Vd Td Td (Asl )nec
CRT_TOT = Max [ ; ; ; ; ]
Vu1 Vu2 Tu1 Tu2 Asl
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
parameter CRT_TOT.

6.6.8.4. Shear Design

The shear design according to BS8110 follows these steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active
time.

The required data are the following:

fcu characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
fy characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
γcs concrete partial safety factor.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking are the
following:

Ac total area of the concrete transverse section.

h total depth in the shear direction considered.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Required data are

the following:

285 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

bw minimum width of the section.

d effective depth of the section,.
Asb Area of the longitudinal tension reinforcement that extends at least a distance
d beyond the considered section.
Chapter 6.6.1. “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides
detailed information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid
section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are the following ones:
 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member.
For this code,  = 90º.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on
the section as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment are obtained
from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Force Description

Vd Design shear force

Nd Concomitant axial force
M Concomitant bending moment
6) Checking the crushing of the web in compression. First, a check is made to ensure
the design shear force (Vd ) is less than or equal to the oblique compression
resistance of concrete section (Vu1 ):

Vd ≤ Vu1
Vu1 = MIN {0.8√fcu, 5 N/mm2 } ∗ bw ∗ d
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:
VU1 Ultimate shear strength due to oblique compression of the concrete in
web.
VU1 = Vu1
CRTVU1 Ratio of the design shear (Vd ) to the resistance Vu1 .
Vd
CRTVU1 =
Vu1
If the design shear force is greater than the shear force that causes failure in the web,
the section will not be designed. Therefore, the parameter for the reinforcement data
will be defined as 2100.

286 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

As
ASSH = = 2100
S
For this case, the element will be labeled as not designed.
7) Calculating the concrete shear resistance. The shear resistance of concrete (Vc) is
checked using the following expression:

0.79 Asb 1/3 400 1/4

Vc = (100 ) ( ) ∙ bw ∙ d
γcs bw d d
Where:

Asb Area of the longitudinal tension reinforcement that extends at least a distance
d beyond the considered section.
Taking into account the following restrictions:

Asb
100 ≤3
bw d
400
≥1
d
f 1/3
If fcu > 25 𝑁/mm2 , the results are multiplied by ( 25
cu
)

If the section is subjected to an axial force, then the following expression will be used:

NVh
Vc ′ = Vc + 0.6 ∙b ∙d
Ac M w
Where:

h total depth in the shear direction considered.

Vc concrete shear resistance without axial forces.

Vd ∙ h⁄
Taking into account that M≤1

For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:

VC concrete shear resistance:

VC = Vc
8) Determining the contribution of the required transverse reinforcement to the shear
force. If the section requires shear reinforcement, the condition for the validity of
sections subjected to shear force is the following:

287 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Vd ≤ Vu2
Vu2 = Vc + Vs
Vs is the reinforcement contribution.
Vc is the concrete contribution.

Vs = Vu2 − Vc = Vd − Vc
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameter:

VS Transverse reinforcement shear resistance.

VS = Vs
9) Calculating the required reinforcement ratio. Once the shear force that must be
carried by the shear reinforcement has been obtained, this can be calculated from
the equation below:

As Vs
=
S 0.95 ∙ fyv ∙ d
where:

As /S area per unit length of shear reinforcement.

fyv characteristic yield strength of shear reinforcement.
The area of designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
for both ends:
As
ASSH =
S
In this case the element is marked as designed (provided that the design process is
correct for both element sections).

6.6.8.5. Torsion Design

Torsion reinforcement design according to BS8110 follows the following steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active
time.

The required data are the following ones:

fcu characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
fy characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.

288 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical

parameters used for torsion calculations must be defined within CivilFEM database.
The required data are the following ones:

Xw torsion modulus for torsion checking and dimensioning.

x1 minimum distance of the rectangular stirrups.
y1 maximum distance of the rectangular stirrups.
Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining section internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on
the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Moment Description

Td Design torsional moment

4) Checking if torsion effects must be considered. Torsion effects are only considered if
design torsional moment (Td ) satisfies the condition below:
Td ≥ Tmin
with Tmin = vt,min ∙ Xw
vt,min = 0.0067 ∙ √fcu ≤ 0.4N/mm2
Where:
Vt,min minimum torsional stress
If the design torsional moment is less than this value, its effects can be neglected and its
default value will be defined as 0 for checking purposes.
5) Checking concrete failure. The design torsional moment Td must be less than or
equal to the maximum torsional moment that concrete can resist (Tu1 ); therefore:

Td ≤ Tu1
Tu1 = Vtu ∙ Xw
y1
If y1< 550mm Tu1 = Vtu ∙ Xw ∙ 550
Where:

Vtu = 0.8 √fcu ≤ 5.0 N/mm2 is the maximum allowable stress.

Xw torsion modulus for torsion check and design.
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameters:

289 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

TU1 Maximum torsional moment that can be resisted by the section.

TU1 = Tu1
CRTTU1 Ratio of the design torsional moment (Td) to the resistance Tu1.
Td
CRTTR =
TU1
In case the torsion transverse reinforcement is not defined, the criterion is taken as 2 100.
If the design torsional moment is greater than the torsional moment that causes the
compression failure of concrete, the reinforcement design will not be feasible.
Therefore, the parameters for reinforcement data will be assigned a value of 2 100.
Ast
AST/ST = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

AST/ST = Asl = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case, the element is marked as not designed, and the program then advances to
the next element.

If there is no failure due to oblique compression, the calculation process continues.

6) Calculating the transverse reinforcement required. The design torsional

reinforcement must be less than or equal to the resistance torsional reinforcement:

Td ≤ Tu2
Ast
Tu2 = ∙ 0.8 ∙ x1 y1 ∙ 0.87 ∙ fyv
S
Where:
Ast/S area of transverse reinforcement per unit length
fy characteristic yield strength of reinforcement fyv ≤ 460 N/mm2

Therefore, the required transverse reinforcement is:

Ast Td
=
S 0.8 ∙ x1 y1 ∙ 0.87 ∙ fyv
The area per unit length of the designed transverse reinforcement is stored in the
CivilFEM results file for both element ends as:

At
ASTT =
S
7) Calculating the longitudinal reinforcement required. The longitudinal reinforcement
is calculated as a function of the transverse reinforcement using the expression:

290 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ast
(Asl )nec = ∙ (x1 + y1 )
S
Where:
(Asl )nec required longitudinal reinforcement.
Ast /s area per unit length of transverse reinforcement.
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
following parameter:

ASLT Area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement.

ASLT = (Asl )nec

6.6.8.6. Shear and Torsion Design

The design of sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment follows
the steps below:

1) Shear design assuming a null torsional moment. This design follows the same steps
as for the design of elements subjected to pure shear according to BS8110.

2) Torsion design assuming a null shear force. This design is accomplished with the
same procedure as for the designing of elements subjected to torsion force according
to BS8110. However, this design considers the stress due to shear in the calculation
of concrete failure.

Td ≤ Tu1
Vd
Tu1 = Vtu ∙ Xw −
bw d
Where:
Vtu maximum combined shear stress (shear plus torsion).
Xw torsion modulus for torsion check and design.

6.6.9. Shear and Torsion according to GB50010

6.6.9.1. Shear Check
Shear checking for elements according to GB50010-2010 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining materials strength properties. The required data are the following:

291 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

fc design compressive strength of concrete.

ft design tensile strength of concrete.
fyv steel design tensile strength for of shear reinforcement.

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking are the
following:
Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Required data are the
following:
b minimum width of the section over the effective depth.
h0 effective height of the section.

hw the web height.

4) Obtaining the reinforcement data of the section. The necessary data are:
 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member.

As /S Reinforcement area per length unit.

Alternatively, the amount of reinforcement can be determined from:

As total area in the reinforcement legs.

s spacing among stirrups.

Or from the data below:

s spacing among stirrups.

φ diameter among bars.

N reinforcement leg number.

5) Obtaining the section internal forces and moments. The shear force that acts on the
section as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment are obtained from
the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Force Description

V Design shear force

N Axial force

292 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6.6.9.2. Shear Check without Seismic Action

1) Checking whether the section dimensions meet the requirement. First, a check is made
to ensure the design shear (V) is less than or equal to maximum shear resistance of the
section (VRd1 ):
V ≤ VRd1
If hw ⁄b ≤ 4 , VRd1 = 0.25βc fc bh0
If hw ⁄b ≥ 6 , VRd1 = 0.2βc fc bh0
where βc is a coefficient depending on the concrete strength:

 For concrete C50 (fc= 23.1 N/mm2) or under, βc = 1.0;

 For concrete C80 (fc= 35.9 N/mm2), βc = 0.8,
 For concrete C55-75, a linear interpolation is made for βc according to the values of
fc.
Results are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

VRD1 Maximum shear resistance.

VRD1 = VRd1
CRVRD1 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd1.
V
CRVRD1 =
VRd1
2) Checking if shear reinforcement will be required.
If shear reinforcement has not been defined for the section, a check is made to ensure the
design shear force V is less than the maximum design shear force that can be resisted by the
concrete without reinforcements (VRd2):

V ≤ VRd2
Where
VRd2 = 0.7βh ft bh0

800 1
βh = ( h )4 is the section height factor,
0

if h0 < 800𝑚𝑚, assume h0 = 800mm;

if h0 > 2000𝑚𝑚, assume h0 = 2000mm;

293 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

If reinforcement has been defined, axial forces are not present (N=0), and the shear force
from the concentrated load for an independent beam is less than 75%:
VRd2 = 0.7ft bh0

If N is compressive (N < 0)
1.75
VRd2 = f bh − 0.07N
λ+1 t 0
If N is tensile (N > 0)
1.75
VRd2 = f bh − 0.02N
λ+1 t 0

The following are given in CivilFEM results:

VRD2 Maximum design shear force resisted by the section without the crushing
of the concrete compressive struts.
VRD2 = VRd2
CRVRD2 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd2 .
V
CRVRD2 =
VRd2
For sections subjected to an applied tensile axial force so that VRd2 = 0,
CRVRD2 is taken as 2100.

3) Checking of elements requiring shear reinforcement. The shear resistance calculation of

a section with reinforcement (VRd3) will differ according to whether the concentrated
load exists.
Conditions below must be verified:

V ≤ VRd3
where
VRd3 = VRd2 + Vs
Vs design shear load capacity of reinforcement.
Asv
Vs = αcf fyv h
S 0
αcf = 1
As v cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement.
s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.

294 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

fyv design tensile strength of shear reinforcement.

Results obtained are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following
parameters:

Vs Shear strength of the reinforcement.

VRD3 Design shear resistance.

VRD3 = VRd3
CRVRD3 Ratio of the design shear force V to the shear resistance VRd3 .
V
CRVRD3 =
VRd3
If VRd3 = 0, CRVRD3 is taken as 2100.

4) Obtaining the shear criterion. The shear criterion indicates the validity of the section (if
less than 1, the section will be valid; if greater than 1 the section, is not good). Moreover,
it provides information with regards to how much more load the section can resist. The
shear criterion is defined as follows:
CRT_TOT = Max(CRVRD1; CRVRD3) ≤ 1
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
parameter CRT_TOT.

A value of 2100 in this criterion will indicate that shear resistance (VRd2 ) is not been
considered, as indicated in the previous step.

6.6.9.3. Shear Check with Seismic Action

Shear checking of elements according to GB50010-2010 and GB50011-2010 follows the
steps below:

1) Determining the factor for seismic fortification, used to adjust the shear capacity and
performing the check for shear. Firstly, this checking method differs from the other
typical checking methods:
V ≤ VR /YRe
V Design shear force
VR/ γRE Design shear resistance

295 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

γRE factor for seismic fortification, used to adjust the shear capacity. If the
combination of the cases does not include the horizontal seismic action,
γRE=1.
Otherwise, it is selected as illustrated in the following table.
TABLE 9-2 FACTORS FOR SEISMIC FORTIFICATION

Member Status γRE

Beam Bending 0.75
Column N 0.75
Eccentric compression and f ≤ 0.15
cA

N 0.8
Eccentric compression and f ≤ 0.15
cA

Shear wall Eccentric compression 0.85

Other Shear 0.85
Eccentric tension

2) Checking whether section dimensions meet requirements under the actions of seismic
loads. First, a check is made to ensure the design shear (V) is less than or equal to
sectional maximum possible resistance (VRd1 ) under the seismic loads:
V ≤ VRd1
For beam:

1
VRd1 = 0.2βc fc bh0 for l/h0 > 2.5
γRE
1
VRd1 = 0.15βc fc bh0 for l/h0 ≤ 2.5
γRE

Where:
𝒉𝟎 effective height of the section

𝒍 Length between restraints

For column:

296 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

1
VRd1 = 0.20βc fc bh0 for λ > 2
γRE
1
VRd1 = 0.15βc fc bh0 for λ ≤ 2
γRE
λ = M⁄(Vh0 )
VRD1 Maximum possible shear resistance.
VRD1 = VRd1
CRVRD1 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd1 .
V
CRVRD1 =
VRd1

3) Checking whether shear reinforcement will be required for the section under actions of
seismic loads.
If the member is a beam, axial forces are not present (N=0), and the shear force from the
concentrated load is less than 75%:
1
VRd2 = 0.42ft bh0
γRE
If the member is an independent beam and the shear force from concentrated load is more
than 75%:
1 1.05
VRd2 = f bh
γRE λ + 1 t 0
If the member is a column and N is compressive (N < 0)

1 1.05
VRd2 = [ f bh − 0.056N]
γRE λ + 1 t 0
If N is tensile (N > 0)
1 1.05
VRd2 = [ f bh − 0.2N]
γRE λ + 1 t 0
VRd2 ≥ 0

The following are given in CivilFEM results:

VRD2 Maximum design shear force resisted by the section without crushing of
the concrete compressive struts.
VRD2 = VRd2

297 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

CRVRD2 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd2.

V
CRVRD2 =
VRd2
For sections subjected to an applied tensile axial force so that VRd2 = 0,
CRVRD2 is taken as 2100.

4) Checking of elements that will require shear reinforcement under the actions of
seismic loads. The calculated of the shear resistance of a section with reinforcement
(VRd3 ) differs according to whether the concentrated load exists.
The following condition is checked:

V ≤ VRd3
where
VRd3 = VRd2 + Vs
Vs is the design shear load capacity of reinforcement.
Asv
Vs = αcf fyv ( ) hc
S
αcf = 1
As v is the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement.
s is the spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.
fyv is the design tensile strength of shear reinforcement.
Results obtained are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following
parameters:

Vs Shear strength of the reinforcement.

VRD3 Design shear resistance.

VRD3 = VRd3
CRVRD3 Ratio of the design shear force V to the shear resistance VRd3 .
V
CRVRD3 =
VRd3
100
If VRd3 = 0, CRVRD3 is taken as 2 .

5) Obtaining the shear criterion. The shear criterion indicates the validity of the section (if
less than 1, the section conforms to code specifications; if greater than 1, the section is
not valid). Moreover, it provides information with regards to how much more load
section can resist. The shear criterion is defined as follows:

298 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

CRT_TOT = Max(CRVRD1 ; CRVRD3) ≤ 1

For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file in the
parameter CRT_TOT.

A value of 2100 for this criterion indicates that shear resistance (VRd2 ) is not considered,
as indicated in the previous step.

6.6.9.4. Torsion Check

The torsion checking according to GB50010-2010 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated to the transverse cross section and for the active time.
The required data are the following:
fc design compressive strength of concrete.
ft design tensile strength of concrete.
fy design tensile strength for torsion reinforcement.

2) Obtaining section geometrical data. Required data for shear checking are the following
ones:
Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

tw thickness of a box section (TWY)

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data are
the following:
b minimum width of the section over the effective depth or section inner
diameter for circular section.
h0 height of the section or section outer diameter for circular section.

hw the web height.

Wt Plastic resistance of torsion moment.

Acor Core area.

Ucor Core perimeter.

299 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Wt1 Plastic resistance of torsion moment for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-
section.

Acor1 Core area for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-section.

Ucor1 Core perimeter for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-section.

Wt2 Plastic resistance of torsion moment for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-
section.

Acor2 Core area for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-section.

Ucor2 Core perimeter for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-section.

Section 11-A.7 “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides

detailed information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid
section.

4) Obtaining the reinforcement data section. The required data are:

Transverse Reinforcement
Ast /S transverse reinforcement area per length unit.

Alternatively, the amount of the reinforcement can be calculated from:

Ast critical tensile zone.

s spacing between stirrups.

Or from the data below:

s spacing between stirrups.

ϕt diameter of the bar of the stirrup.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl Total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.
Alternatively, the amount of the reinforcement can determined from:

ϕI Longitudinal bar diameter.

N Longitudinal bar number.
5) Obtaining section internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on the
section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

300 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Moment Description

T Design torsion moment

N Axial force
6) Checking if the section dimensions meet the requirement.
T ≤ TRd1
if hw /b ≤ 4 or hw /t w ≤ 4 then TRd1 = 0.2Wt βc fc
if hw /b ≤ 6 or hw /t w ≤ 6 then TRd1 = 0.16Wt βc fc

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TRD1 Maximum possible resistance of torsional moment

TRD1 = TRd1
CRTRD1 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance TTd1 .
T
CRTRD1 =
TRd1
7) Calculating the maximum torsional moment resisted without reinforcements.
T ≤ TRd2
Where
For rectangular and circular sections:

N
TRd2 = 0.35ft Wt − 0.07 W
Ac t
N (< 0) is the compressive axial force, if|N| > 0.3fc A, assume|N| = 0.3fc A.

For box sections (axial forces cannot be resisted):

TRd2 = 0.35αh ft Wt
αh is the influence coefficient of the wall thickness of the box section.

αh = 2.5t w /bh , if αh > 1.0, assume, αh = 1.0.

For T and double T sections/I-sections, these are divided into rectangle sections and
therefore, follow the procedure according to rectangular sections.
Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TRD2 Maximum design torsional moment resisted by the section without crushing
the concrete compressive struts.

301 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

TRD2 = TRd2
CRTRD2 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance TRd2.

T
CRTRD2 =
TRd2
8) Calculating the maximum torsional moment resisted by the reinforcement. The design
torsional moment T must be less than or equal to the maximum design torsional
moment resisted by concrete and the reinforcement (TRd2 ); as a result, the following
condition must be satisfied:
T ≤ TRd3 = TRd2 + Ts
where

Ast1 Acor
Ts = 1.2√ξfy
S
Astl S
ζ= the ratio between longitudinal reinforcement and hoop
Ast1 Ucor

reinforcement strength 0.6 ≤ ζ ≤ 1.7

if ζ > 1.7, assume ζ = 1.7

Calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameters:

Ts Torsion strength of the reinforcement.

TRD3 Maximum design torsional moment resisted by concrete and the torsion
reinforcement.
TRD3 = TRd3
CRTRD3 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance TRd3 .
T
CRTRD3 =
TRd3
If transverse reinforcement is not defined, TRd3 = TRd2 .

9) Obtaining criterion of torsion checking.

CRT_TOT = MAX (CRTRD1, CRTRD3)

6.6.9.5. Combined Shear and Torsion Check

1) Checking for whether section dimensions meet the requirements.

302 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

V ≤ VRd1
T ≤ TRd1

Where

If hw /b ≤ 4 or hw /t w ≤ 4 then VTRd1 = 0.25βc fc

If hw /b ≤ 6 or hw /t w = 6 then VTRd1 = 0.2βc fc
T
VRd1 = (VTRd1 − )bh0
0.8Wt
V
TRd1 = (VTRd1 − ) 0.8Wt
bh0

Linear interpolation for 4 < hw /b < 6 or 4 < t w /b < 6

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

VRD1 Maximum shear resistance.

VRD1 = VRd1
TRD1 Maximum possible resistance of torsional moment
TRD1 = TRd1
CRVRD1 Ratio of the design shear and torsion resistance V to the shear resistance
VRd1 .
V
CRVRD1 =
VRd1
CRTRD1 Ratio of the design shear torsion resistance T to the torsion resistance
TRd1 .
T
CRTRD1 =
TRd1

2) Checking whether the section will require reinforcement.

If V ≤ VRd2 where VRd2 = 0.35ft bh0 or VRd2 = 0.875ft bh0 /(λ + 1)

No shear reinforcement is necessary.

If T ≤ TRd2 where TRd2 = 0.175ft Wt or TRd2 = 0.175αh ft Wt ,

No torsion reinforcement is necessary.

303 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

VRD2 Design shear resistance without considering the reinforcement.

VRD2 = VRd2
CRVRD2 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd1.
V
CRVRD2 =
VRd2
For sections subjected to an axial tensile force so that VRd2=0, CRVRD1 is
taken as 2100.

TRD2 Maximum design torsional moment resisted by the section without

crushing the concrete compressive struts.
TRD2 = TRd2
CRTRD2 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance TRd1.
T
CRTRD2 =
TRd2

If reinforcement has been defined:

Vc = 0.7(1.5 − βt )ft bh0

Tc = 0.35αh βt ft Wt

αh The wall thickness influence coefficient for box sections, αh =

2.5t w /bh , if αh > 1. or for sections other than box, assume
αh = 1.0.
1.5
βt = VWt Torsion reduction coefficient for elements under shear
1+0.5
Tbh0

and torsion.

if βt < 0.5, 𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑒 βt = 0.5;

if βt > 1.0, 𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑒 βt = 1.0;

For compressed rectangle section frame columns:

304 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

1.75 Asv
Vc = (1.5 − βt )(λ+1 ft bh0 − 0.07N) Vs = fyv h0
S

N
Tc = βt (0.35ft − 0.07 )Wt
A
Results obtained are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following
parameters:

VRD2 Shear strength of concrete.

VRD2 = VC
Tc Torsion strength of concrete.

3) Calculating the maximum load that can be resisted by the reinforcement.

V ≤ VRd3
T ≤ TRd3
where

VRd3 = Vc + Vs TRd3 = Tc + Ts
Asv
Vs = 1.25fyv h0
S
fy Ast1 Acor
Ts = 1.2√ζ S

For compressed rectangle section frame columns:

Asv
Vs = fyv h0
S

Results obtained are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following
parameters:

VRD3 Design shear resistance.

VRD3 = VRd3
CRVRD3 Ratio of the design shear force (V) to the shear resistance V Rd3.
V
CRVRD3 =
VRd3
If VRd3 = 0, CRVRD3 is taken as 2100.

305 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

TRD3 Maximum design torsional moment resisted by the torsion

reinforcement.
TRD3 = TRd3
CRTRD3 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance TRd3.
T
CRTRD3 =
TRd3
If transverse reinforcement is not defined, TRd3=0, and the criterion would
be assigned a value of 2100.

4) Obtaining the criterion of shear & torsion checking.

This criterion considers pure shear, pure torsion, shear-torsion and ultimate strength
condition of concrete criteria. The criterion determines whether the section is valid and is
defined as follows

CRT_TOT= MAX(CRVRD1, CRVRD3, CRTRD1, CRTRD3)

For each end, the value of this criterion is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
CRT_TOT.

6.6.9.6. Shear Design

Elements shear design according to GB50010-2010 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining materials strength properties. The required data are the following:
fc design compressive strength of concrete.
ft design tensile strength of concrete.
fyv design tensile strength for of shear reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking are the
following:
Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Required data are the
following:
b minimum width of the section over the effective depth.
h0 effective height of the section.

hw the web height.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are the following:

306 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

As /S area of reinforcement per unit of length.

 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member.
5) Obtaining the section internal forces and moments. The shear force that acts on the
section as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment are obtained from
the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Force Description

V Design shear force

N Axial force

6.6.9.7. Shear Design without Seismic Action

1) Checking whether the section dimensions meet the requirement. Firstly, a check is
made to ensure the design shear (V) is less than or equal to the maximum resistance of
the section (VRd1):
V ≤ VRd1
If hw/b ≤ 4 , VRd1 = 0.25βc fc bh0
If hw/b ≥ 6 , VRd1 = 0.2βc fc bh0
where βc is a coefficient depending on the concrete strength:

 For concrete C50 (fc= 23.1 N/mm2) or under, βc =1. 0;

 For concrete C80 (fc= 35.9 N/mm2), βc =0.8,
 For concrete C55-75, a linear interpolation is made for βc according to the values
of fc.
Results are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

VRD1 Maximum possible shear resistance.

VRD1 = VRd1
CRVRD1 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd1.
V
CRVRD1 =
VRd1
2) Maximum shear force resisted without shear reinforcements.
If shear reinforcement has not been defined for the section, the design shear force V must
be less than the maximum design shear force that can be carried by the concrete without
reinforcements (VRd2):

V ≤ VRd2

307 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Where:
VRd2 = 0.7βh ft bh0

800
βh = ( h )1/4 is the section height factor,
0

If h0 < 800 𝑚𝑚, assume h0 = 800 mm;

if h0 > 2000 𝑚𝑚, assume h0 = 2000 𝑚𝑚.

If reinforcement has been defined, axial forces are not present (N=0), and the shear force
from the concentrated load for an independent beam is less than 75%,
VRd2 = 0.7ft bh0

If N is compressive (N < 0):

1.75
VRd2 = λ+1 ft bh0 -0.07N

If N is tensile (N > 0):

1.75
VRd2 = f bh − 0.2N
λ+1 t 0

The following are given in CivilFEM results:

VRD2 Maximum design shear force resisted by the section without crushing the
concrete compressive struts.
VRD2 = VRd2

CRVRD2 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd2.

V
CRVRD2 =
VRd2
For sections subjected to an axial tensile force so that V Rd2=0, CRVRD2 is
taken as 2100.

308 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

If design shear force is greater than the shear force required to crush the concrete
compressive struts, the reinforcement design will not be feasible; as a result, the
parameter pertaining to the reinforcement data will be defined as 2 100:

Asv
ASSH = = 2100
s
In this case, the element will be labeled as not designed, and the program will advance
to the next element.

If there is no crushing by oblique compression, the calculation process continues.

3) Determining the shear strength contribution of the required transverse reinforcement.

The condition for the validity of the section subjected to shear force is:
V ≤ VRd3 = VRd2 + Vs
Vs shear reinforcement contribution.

Therefore, the reinforcement contribution should be:

Vs = VRd3 − VRd2 = V − VRd2

For each element end, the Vs value is included in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter:

VRD3 = Vs
4) Calculating the required transverse reinforcement ratio. Once the required shear
strength of the reinforcement has been obtained, the reinforcement can be calculated
from the equation below:
Asv V − VRd2
=
S αcf fyv h0
where:

αcf = 1
Asv cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement.
s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.

The area of designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as the parameter:

Asv
ASSH =
S

309 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (provided that design process is
correct for both element sections).

If the section is labeled as not designed, the reinforcement will be defined as 2 100.

6.6.9.8. Shear Design with Seismic Action

Shear checking of elements according to GB50010-2010 and GB50011-2010 follows the
steps below:

1) Determining the factor for seismic fortification, used to adjust the shear capacity and
performing the check for shear. Firstly, this checking method differs from the other
typical checking methods:
V ≤ VR /YRe
V Design shear force
VR/ γRE Design shear resistance
γRE factor for seismic fortification, used to adjust the shear capacity. If the
combination of the cases does not include the horizontal seismic action,
γRE=1.
Otherwise, it is selected as illustrated in the following table.
TABLE 9-3 FACTORS FOR SEISMIC FORTIFICATION

Member Status γRE

Beam Bending 0.75
Column N 0.75
Eccentric compression and f ≤ 0.15
cA

N 0.8
Eccentric compression and f ≤ 0.15
cA

Shear wall Eccentric compression 0.85

Other Shear 0.85
Eccentric tension

2) Checking whether section dimensions meet requirements under the actions of seismic
loads. First, a check is made to ensure the design shear (V) is less than or equal to the
maximum resistance of the section (VRd1 ) under the seismic loads:
V ≤ VRd1
For beams:

310 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

1
VRd1 = 0.2βc fc bh0
γRE
For columns:
1
VRd1 = γ 0.20βc fc bh0 for λ > 2
RE
1
VRd1 = γ 0.15βc fc bh0 forλ ≤ 2
RE

λ = M/(Vh0 )
VRD1 Maximum shear resistance.
VRD1 = VRd1
CRVRD1 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd1.
V
CRVRD1 =
VRd1
The design process stops if CRVRD1>1.0
3) Maximum shear force resisted without shear reinforcements under the actions of
seismic loads.

If the member is a beam, axial forces are not present (N=0), and the shear force from the
concentrated load is less than 75%:
1
VRd2 = 0.42ft bh0
γRE
If the member is an independent beam and the shear force from the concentrated load is
more than 75%,
1 1.05
VRd2 = f bh
γRE λ + 1 t 0
If the member is a column and N is compressive (N < 0)

1 1.05
VRd2 = [ f bh − 0.056N]
γRE λ + 1 t 0
If N is tensile (N > 0)
1 1.05
VRd2 = [ f bh − 0.2N]
γRE λ + 1 t 0
VRd2 ≥ 0
The following are given in CivilFEM results:

311 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

VRD2 Maximum design shear force resisted by the section without crushing of
the concrete compressive struts.
VRD2 = VRd2
CRVRD2 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd2.
V
CRVRD2 =
VRd2
For sections subjected to an axial tensile force so that V Rd2=0, CRVRD2 is taken as 2100.

The design process stops if CRVRD2=1.0 because the reinforcement will not be required for
the strength (minimum reinforcements are still necessary).

4) Determining the shear strength contribution of the required transverse reinforcement.

The condition for the validity of the section concerning shear force is:
V ≤ VRd3 = VRd2 + Vs
Vs shear reinforcement contribution.

Therefore, the reinforcement contribution should be:

Vs = VRd3 − VRd2 = V − VRd2

For each element end, the Vs value is included in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter:

VRD3 = Vs
5) Calculating the required transverse reinforcement ratio. Once the required shear
strength of the reinforcement has been obtained, the reinforcement area per unit length
can be calculated:
Asv V − VRd2
= x γRE
S αcf fyv h0
where:

αcf = 1.0
Asv cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement.
s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results
file as the parameter:

312 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Asv
ASSH =
S
In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (provided that design process is
correct for both element sections).

If the design is not possible, the reinforcement will be assigned the value 2 100.

6.6.9.9. Torsion Design

Torsion checking according to GB50010-2010 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining materials strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated to the transverse cross section and for the active time.
The required data are the following:
fc design compressive strength of concrete.
ft design tensile strength of concrete.
fy design tensile strength for torsion reinforcement.

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking are the
following:
Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

tw thickness of a box section (TWY)

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data are
the following:
b minimum width of the section over the effective depth or section inner
diameter for circular section.
h0 height of the section or outer diameter for circular section.

hw the web height.

Wt Plastic resistance of torsion moment

Acor Core area

Ucor Core perimeter

313 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Wt1 Plastic resistance of torsion moment for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-
section.

Acor1 Core perimeter for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-section.

Ucor1 Core perimeter for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-section.

Wt2 Plastic resistance of torsion moment for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-
section.

Acor2 Core perimeter for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-section.

Ucor2 Core perimeter for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-section.

Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are the following ones:
Transverse Reinforcement
Ast /S Area of transverse reinforcement per unit length.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.

5) Obtaining section internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on the
section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).
Moment Description
T Design torsion moment
N Axial force

6) Checking if the section dimensions meet the requirement.

T ≤ TRd1
If hw /b ≤ 4(or hw /t w ≤ 4)then TRd1 = 0.2Wt βc fc
If hw /b = 6(or hw /t w = 6)then TRd1 = 0.16Wt βc fc

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TRD1 Maximum resistance of torsional moment

314 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

TRD1 = TRd1
CRTRD1 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance T Rd1.
T
CRTRD1 =
TRd1
7) Calculating the maximum torsional moment resisted without reinforcement.
T ≤ TRd2
where

For rectangular and circular sections

N
TRd2 = 0.35ft Wt − 0.07 W
Ac t
N (< 0) compressive axial force, if |N| > 0.3fc A, assume|N| = 0.3fc A.

For box section (no axial force resistance),

TRd2 = 0.35αh ft Wt

h h The influence coefficient of the wall thickness of the box section.

αh = 2.5t w /bh , if αh > 1.0, 𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑒, αh = 1.0

For T and double T sections, these are divided into rectangle sections, following the
proceedure according to rectangular sections.

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TRD2 Maximum design torsional moment resisted by the section without

crushing of the concrete compressive struts.
TRD2 = TRd2
CRTRD2 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance TRd1.
T
CRTRD2 =
TRd2
8) Calculating the required transverse reinforcement ratio. The design torsional moment T
must be less than or equal to the maximum design torsional moment resisted by
concrete and the reinforcement (TRd2); consequently, the following condition must be
satisfied:
T ≤ TRd3 = TRd2 + Ts
Where:

315 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ast1 Acor
Ts = 1.2√ζfy
S
Astl S
ζ=A is the ratio between longitudinal reinforcement and hoop reinforcement
st1 Ucor
strength 0.6 ≤ ζ ≤ 1.7; ζ > 1.7 if, assume ζ = 1.7

The required transverse reinforcement is given by this expression:

Ast1 T − TRd2
=
S 1.2√ζfy Acor
The area of the designed transverse reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM
results file as the parameter:

Ast
ASTT =
S
9) Calculating the required longitudinal reinforcement ratio. The longitudinal
reinforcement is calculated from:
ζAst1 Ucor
Astl =
S
where:

Astl area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement.

fyv hoop reinforcements
The area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as the parameter:

ASLT = Astl
If both transverse and longitudinal reinforcements are designed for both element
sections, this element will be labeled as designed.

6.6.9.10. Combined Shear and Torsion Design

The check of sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment we follow
the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. The required data are the following:
fc design compressive strength of concrete.
ft design tensile strength of concrete.
fy design tensile strength for torsion reinforcements

316 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

fyv design tensile strength for shear hoop reinforcements

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section.
Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on code. Required data are the

following:
b minimum width of the section over the effective depth or section inner
diameter for circular section.
h0 effective height of the section or outer diameter for circular section.

hw the web height.

Wt1 Plastic resistance of torsion moment for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-
section.

Acor1 Core perimeter for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-section.

Ucor1 Core perimeter for branch 1 for T and double T section/I-section.

Wt2 Plastic resistance of torsion moment for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-
section.

Acor2 Core perimeter for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-section.

Ucor2 Core perimeter for branch 2 for T and double T section/I-section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are the following:
Shear Reinforcement
Asv /S area of reinforcement per unit length.
Transverse Torsion Reinforcement
Ast1 /S area of reinforcement per unit length.
Torsion Longitudinal Reinforcement
Astl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.

5) Obtaining the section internal forces and moments. The shear force that acts on the
section, as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment, are obtained from
the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

317 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Force Description

V Design shear force

N Axial force
T Design torsion moment
1) Checking for whether section dimensions meet the requirements.
V ≤ VRd1
T ≤ TRd1
Where

If hw /b ≤ 4 or hw /t w ≤ 4 then VTRd1 = 0.25βc fc

If hw /b ≤ 6 or hw /t w = 6 then VTRd1 = 0.2βc fc
T
VRd1 = (VTRd1 − )bh0
0.8Wt
V
TRd1 = (VTRd1 − ) 0.8Wt
bh0

Linear interpolation for 4 < hw /b < 6 or 4 < t w /b < 6

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

VRD1 Maximum shear resistance.

VRD1 = VRd1
TRD1 Maximum possible resistance of torsional moment
TRD1 = TRd1
CRVRD1 Ratio of the design shear and torsion resistance V to the shear resistance
VRd1 .
V
CRVRD1 =
VRd1
CRTRD1 Ratio of the design shear torsion resistance T to the torsion resistance
TRd1 .
T
CRTRD1 =
TRd1

2) Checking whether the section will require reinforcement.

318 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

If V ≤ VRd2 where VRd2 = 0.35ft bh0 or VRd2 = 0.875ft bh0 /(λ + 1)

Then no shear reinforcement is necessary.

If T ≤ TRd2 where TRd2 = 0.175ft Wt or TRd2 = 0.175αh ft Wt ,

Then no torsion reinforcement is necessary.

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

VRD2 Design shear resistance without considering the reinforcement.

VRD2 = VRd2
CRVRD2 Ratio of the design shear force V to the resistance VRd1.
V
CRVRD2 =
VRd2
For sections subjected to an axial tensile force so that V Rd2=0, CRVRD1 is
taken as 2100.

TRD2 Maximum design torsional moment resisted by the section without

crushing the concrete compressive struts.
TRD2 = TRd2
CRTRD2 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance T Rd1.
T
CRTRD2 =
TRd2

If reinforcement has been defined:

Vc = 0.7(1.5 − βt )ft bh0

Tc = 0.35αh βt ft Wt

αh The wall thickness influence coefficient for box sections, αh =

2.5t w /bh , if αh > 1. or for sections other than box, assume
αh = 1.0.
1.5
βt = VWt Torsion reduction coefficient for elements under shear
1+0.5
Tbh0

319 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

and torsion.

if βt < 0.5, 𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑒 βt = 0.5;

if βt > 1.0, 𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑒 βt = 1.0;

For compressed rectangle section frame columns:

1.75
Vc = (1.5 − βt )( f bh − 0.07N)
λ+1 t 0
N
Tc = βt (0.35ft − 0.07 )Wt
A
Results obtained are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following
parameters:

VRD2 Shear strength of concrete.

VRD2 = VC
Tc Torsion strength of concrete.

3) Calculating the maximum load that can be resisted by the reinforcement.

V ≤ VRd3
T ≤ TRd3
where

VRd3 = Vc + Vs TRd3 = Tc + Ts
Asv
Vs = 1.25fyv h0
S
fy Ast1 Acor
Ts = 1.2√ζ S

For compressed rectangle section frame columns:

Asv
Vs = fyv h0
S

Results obtained are written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following
parameters:

VRD3 Design shear resistance.

320 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

VRD3 = VRd3
CRVRD3 Ratio of the design shear force (V) to the shear resistance V Rd3.
V
CRVRD3 =
VRd3
If VRd3 = 0, CRVRD3 is taken as 2100.

TRD3 Maximum design torsional moment resisted by the torsion

reinforcement.
TRD3 = TRd3
CRTRD3 Ratio of the design torsional moment T to the resistance T Rd3.
T
CRTRD3 =
TRd3
If transverse reinforcement is not defined, TRd3=0, and the criterion would
be assigned a value of 2100.

6) Obtaining required shear and torsion reinforcement ratios.

Shear:

Asv V − Vc
=
S αcf fyv h0
Torsion:

Ast1 T − Tc
=
S 1.2√ζfy Acor
where

Asv cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement.

αcf = 1.0

Ast1 cross-sectional area of the bars used as closed-stirrups.

s spacing of the closed stirrups of the transverse reinforcement.

fyv design yield strength of torsion reinforcement.

Astl S
ζ=A the ratio between longitudinal and hoop reinforcement
st1 Ucor

reinforcement strength 0.6 ≤ ζ ≤ 1.7; if ζ > 1.7, assume ζ = 1.7

321 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results
file as the parameter:

Asv
ASSH =
S
Ast1
ASTT =
S
7) Calculating the required longitudinal requirement ratio.
ζAst1 Ucor
Astl =
S
The area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM results file
as the parameter:

ASLT = Astl
If both transverse and longitudinal reinforcements are designed for both element
sections, this element will be labeled as designed.

6.6.10. Shear and Torsion according to AASHTO Standard

Specifications for Highway Bridges
6.6.10.1. Shear Check
Shear checking according to AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges follows
these steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated with each transverse cross section and for the active time.
The required data are the following ones:

fc′ specified compressive strength of concrete.

fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking are the
following:
Ag area of concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data are
the following:
bw web width or diameter of circular section.
d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in the Y direction, (for circular sections, this

322 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

should be greater than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the
centroid of the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining section reinforcement data. Required data are the following:

 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member
section.
As /S area of reinforcement per unit length.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

s spacing of the stirrups.
or with the following ones:

s spacing of the stirrups.

φ diameter of bars.
N number of reinforcement legs.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on the
section as well as the concomitant axial force are obtained from the CivilFEM results file
(.RCF).
Force Description

Vu Design shear force in Y direction for I-section

6) Calculating the shear strength provided by concrete. First, the shear strength provided
by concrete (Vc) is calculated by the following expression:

Vc = 2√fc′ bw d
where:

√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force:

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √fc′ bw d
2000Ag
Where Nu/Ag is expressed in psi.

If section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi:

323 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √fc′ bw d
500Ag

If section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed Vc = 0.

The calculated result for both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VC:

VC Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc
7) Calculating the shear strength provided by shear reinforcement. The strength provided
by shear reinforcement (Vs) is calculated with the following expression:
Av
Vs = f (sin α + cos α)d ≤ 8√fc′ bw d
S y
where:

Av area of the cross-section of shear reinforcement.

s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.
The calculated result for both element ends is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter VS:

VS Shear strength provided by transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs
8) Calculating the nominal shear strength of the section. The nominal shear strength (Vn) is
the sum of the provided by concrete and by the shear reinforcement:
Vn = Vc + Vs
This nominal strength as well as its ratio with the design shear are stored in the CivilFEM
results file as the parameters:

VN Nominal shear strength.

VN = Vn
CRTVN Ratio of the design shear force (Vu) to the resistance Vn.
Vu
CRTVN =
Vn
If the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is
not defined in the section, then Vn=0 and the criterion will be equal to –1.

324 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

9) Obtaining shear criterion. The section will be valid for shear if the following condition is
satisfied:
Vu ≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
φ strength reduction factor of the section, (0.85 for shear and torsion).

Therefore, the shear criterion for the validity of the section is defined as follows:

Vu
CRT_TOT = ≤1
ϕVn
For each element, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter
CRT_TOT.

If the strength provided by concrete is null and the shear reinforcement is not defined in
the section, then Vn = 0, and the criterion will be equal to 2100.

The ϕ ∙ Vn value is stored in CivilFEM results file as the parameter VFI.

6.6.10.2. Torsion Check

Torsion checking of elements is done according to ACI-318, with φ=0.85.

6.6.10.3. Combined Shear and Torsion Check

For checking sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment, the same
procedure as for the ACI-318 code is followed, with φ=0.85.

6.6.10.4. Shear Design

The shear design according to AASHTO Specific Standards for Highway Bridges follows these
steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated with each transverse cross section and for the active
time.

The required data are the following:

fc′ specified compressive strength of concrete.

fyk specified yield strength of reinforcement.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear designing are the
following:

325 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Ag area of concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data are
the following:

bw web width or diameter of the circular section.

d distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement in Y, (for circular sections, this must not be
less than the distance from the extreme compressed fiber to the centroid of
the tensile reinforcement in the opposite half of the member).

Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. In shear reinforcement designing, it is

possible to define the angle α between the reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of
the member. This angle must be stored in the shear reinforcement data of each
element. If this angle is equal to zero or is not defined, α=90º. Other data concerning
the reinforcements are ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on the
section, as well as the concomitant axial force, is obtained from the CivilFEM results file
(.RCF).
Force Description

Vu Design shear force in Y

6) Calculating the shear strength provided by concrete. First, we calculate the shear
strength provided by concrete (Vc) with the following expression:

Vc = 2√fc′ bw d
where:

√fc′ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, in psi (always taken
as less than 100 psi).
For sections subject to a compressive axial force:

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √fc′ bw d
2000 Ag
Where Nu /Ag is expressed in psi.

If section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress is less than 500 psi:

326 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Nu
Vc = 2 (1 + ) √fc′ bw d
500 Ag
If section is subjected to a tensile force so that the tensile stress exceeds 500 psi, it is
assumed Vc = 0.

The calculated result is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter:

VC Shear strength provided by concrete.

VC = Vc
7) Determining the required reinforcement contribution to the shear strength. The
section must satisfy the following condition to resist the shear force:

Vu =≤ ϕVn = ϕ(Vc + Vs )
Therefore, the required shear force of the reinforcement must be:

Vu
Vs = −Vc ≤ 8√fc′ bw d
ϕ
If the required shear strength of the reinforcement does not satisfy the expression
above, the section will not be designed. Consequently, the parameters for the
reinforcement data will be defined as 2100. Therefore:

As
ASSH = = 2100
S
In this case, the element will be labeled as not designed, and the program will then
advance to the following element.

Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the
parameter:

VS Shear resistance provided by the transverse reinforcement.

VS = Vs ≤ 8√fc′ bw d
8) Calculating the required reinforcement ratio. Once the required shear strength of the
reinforcement has been obtained, the reinforcement can be calculated with the
following expression:

Av Vs
=
s fy (sin α + cos α)d
Where:

327 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

𝐴𝑣 area of the cross-section of the shear reinforcement.

s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis.
The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results
file for both element ends:

Av
ASSH =
s
In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (providing the design procedure is
correct for both element sections).

6.6.10.5. Torsion Design

Torsion reinforcements are designed according to ACI-318.

6.6.10.6. Combined Shear and Torsion Design

The design of sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment follows
the method used for the ACI-318 code.

6.6.11. Shear and Torsion according to NBR6118

6.6.11.1. Shear Check
The checking for shear according to NBR6118 follows these steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated with each transverse cross section and for the active
time.

The required data are the following:

fck characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
γc concrete partial safety factor.
γs steel partial safety factor.
2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Required data for shear checking are the
following ones:

Ac total area of the concrete section.

328 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical

parameters used for shear calculations must be defined:

bw minimum width of the section at a height equal to ¾ the effective depth.

d effective depth of the section.
 Angle of the concrete compressive struts with the longitudinal axis of member
30º <  < 45º
Section 6.6.1. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are the following:
 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member.
As /S area of reinforcement per unit of length.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

s spacing of the stirrups.

Or from the data below:

s spacing of the stirrups.

 diameter of bars.

N number of reinforcement legs.

5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on the
section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Force Description

VSd Design shear force

6) Checking failure by compression in the web. First, a check is made to ensure the design
shear force (VSd) is less than or equal to the oblique compression resistance of the
concrete in the web (VRd2). VRd2 is calculated with Model I if  = 45º and with Model II if
 ≠ 45º:

VSd ≤ VRd2
Model I

329 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

VRd2 = 0.27 ∙ αv2 fcd bw d

Where
f
ck
αv2 = 1 − 250 (fck in MPa).

Model II

VRd2 = 0.54 ∙ αv2 fcd bw d ∙ sin2 θ ∙ (cot an α + cot an θ)

Where
f
ck
αv2 = 1 − 250 (fck in MPa).

For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file:

VRD2 Ultimate shear strength due to oblique compression of the concrete in

web.
VRD2 = VRd2
CRTVRD2 Ratio of the design shear (Vsd) to the resistance VRd2.
VSd
CRTVRD2 =
VRd2
7) Checking failure by tension in the web. The design shear force (Vsd) must be less than or
equal to the shear force due to tension in the web (VRd3). VRd3 is calculated with Model I
if  = 45º and with Model II if  ≠ 45º:

VSd ≤ VRd3
VRd3 = Vc + Vsw
Vsw contribution of web shear transverse reinforcement to the shear strength.
Vc contribution of concrete to the shear strength.

Model I
Asw
Vsw = 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd (sin α + cos α)
S
Where

ASw /S shear reinforcement area per unit length.

fywd design strength of reinforcement limited to 435 MPa.

330 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

0 Only tension in the section

Vc = {
Vc0 Tension and compression in the section
Vc0 = 0.6 ∙ fctd ∙ bw ∙ d

Model II
Asw
Vsw = 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd (cot anα + cot anα) ∙ sin α
S

Where

Asw /S shear reinforcement area per unit of length.

fywd design strength of reinforcement limited to 435 MPa.

0 Only tension in the section

Vc = {
Vc1 Tension and compression in the section

Vc0 VSd ≤ Vc0

Vc1 = { Interpolating linearly in between these values.
0 VSd = VRd2
Where

Vc0 = 0.6 ∙ fctd ∙ bw ∙ d

For each end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file:

VSW Contribution of the shear reinforcement to the shear strength.

VSW = Vsw

VC Contribution of concrete to the shear strength.

VC = Vc

VRD3 Ultimate shear strength by tension in the web.

VRD3 = VRd3 = Vc + Vsw
CRTVRD3 Ratio of the design shear force (Vsd) to the resistance VRd3.
VSd
CRTVRD3 =
VRd3
If VRd3 = 0, the CTRVRD3 criterion is taken as 2100.

331 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

8) Obtaining shear criterion. The shear criterion indicates whether the section is valid for
the design forces (if it is less than 1, the section satisfies the code prescriptions; whereas
if it exceeds 1, the section will not be valid). Furthermore, it includes information about
how close the design force is to the ultimate section strength. The shear criterion is
defined as follows:

VSd VSd
CRT_TOT = Max ( ; )
VRd2 VRd3
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

A value 2100 for this criterion indicates that the shear strength due to tension in the web
(VRd3) is equal to zero, as was indicated in the previous step.

6.6.11.2. Torsion Checking

Checking for torsion according to NBR6118 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated with each transverse cross section and for the active
time.

The required data are the following:

fck characteristic strength of concrete
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement
γc concrete partial safety factor
γs reinforcement steel partial safety factor
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical
parameters used for torsion calculations must be defined within CivilFEM database. The
required data are the following:

he effective thickness.
Ae area involved by the center-line of the effective hollow section.
Ue perimeter of the center-line of the effective hollow section.
 Angle of the compressive struts of concrete with the longitudinal axis of
member:
30º <  < 45º
Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Required data are the following:

332 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Transverse Reinforcement
ASt /S area of transverse reinforcement per unit of length.

The reinforcement ratio can also be obtained with the following data:

ASt closed stirrups area for torsion.

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Or from the data below:

s spacing of closed stirrups.

ϕt diameter of the closed stirrups bars.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.
The reinforcement ratio can also be obtained from the following data:

diameter of longitudinal bars.

N number of longitudinal bars.
4) Obtaining section internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts on the
section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Moment Description

TSd Design torsional moment in the section

5) Checking compression failure of concrete. Firstly, a check is made to ensure the design
torsional moment (TSd) is less than or equal to the ultimate torsional moment cause by
the compression of the concrete (TRd2); therefore, the following condition must be
satisfied:

TSd ≤ TRd2
TRd2 = 0.50 ∙ αv2 ∙ fcd ∙ Ae ∙ he ∙ sin 20
Where:

ck f
Av2 = 1 − 250 (fck in MPa).

Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file as:

333 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

TRD2 Maximum torsional moment resisted by the section without crushing the
concrete compressive struts due to compression.
TRD2 = TRd2
CRTTRD2 Ratio of the design torsional moment (TSd) to the resistance TRd2.
TSd
CRTTRD2 =
R Rd2
6) Checking transverse reinforcement failure. The condition for tensile failure of the
transverse reinforcement when a torsional moment TSd is applied is as follows:

TSd ≤ TRd3
TRd3 = (Ast /s) ∙ fywd ∙ 2Ae ∙ cot anθ
where:

Ast cross-sectional area of one of the bars used as transverse torsional

reinforcement.
s spacing of closed stirrups of transverse torsional reinforcement.
fywd design strength of reinforcement, limited to 435 MPa.
Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file as:

TRD3 Maximum torsional moment resisted by the section without tensile

failure of the transverse reinforcement.
TRD3 = TRd3
CRTTRD3 Ratio of the design torsional moment (TSd) to the resistance TRd3.
TSd
CRTTRD3 =
TRd3
If the transverse torsion reinforcement is not defined, the criterion is
taken as 2100.

7) Checking longitudinal reinforcement failure. The condition of tensile failure for the
longitudinal reinforcement when a torsional moment TSd is applied is as follows:

TSd ≤ TRd4
TRd4 = (Asl /Ue ) ∙ fywd ∙ 2Ae ∙ tan θ
where:

334 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Asl area of the longitudinal torsion reinforcement.

fywd design strength of reinforcement limited to 435 MPa.
Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file as:

TRD4 Maximum torsional moment resisted by the section without tensile

failure of transverse reinforcement.
TRD4 = TRd4
CRTTRD4 Ratio of the design torsional moment (TSd) to the resistance TRd3.
TSd
CRTTRD4 =
TRd4
In case the longitudinal reinforcement is not defined, the criterion is
taken as 2100.
8) Obtaining torsion criterion. The torsion criterion indicates the ratio of the design
moment to the section ultimate strength (if it is less than 1, the section is valid; whereas
if it exceeds 1, the section is not valid). The criterion for the validity of the section for
torsion is defined as follows:

TSd TSd TSd

CRT_TOT = Max ( ; ; )
TRd2 TRd3 TRd4
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

A value 2100 for this criterion would indicate the non-definition of one of the torsion
reinforcements.

6.6.11.3. Combined Shear and Torsion Checking

For checking sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment, we
follow the steps below:

1) Torsion checking considering a null shear force. This check is accomplished with the
same steps as for the check of elements subjected to pure torsion according to
NBR6118.

Except for this check, the CRT_TOT criterion is stored in the CivilFEM results file as
CRTTRS for each element end.

1) Shear checking assuming a null torsional moment. This check follows the same
procedure as for the checking of elements only subjected to shear according to
NBR6118.

335 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Except for this check, the CRT_TOT criterion is stored in the CivilFEM results file as
CRTSHR for each element end.

3) Checking the concrete ultimate strength condition by compression. The design

torsional moment (TSd) and the design shear force (VSd) must satisfy the following
condition:

VSd TSd
( )+( )≤1
VRd2 TRd2
where:

VRd2 ultimate shear force by compression of concrete.

TRd2 ultimate torsional moment due to compression of concrete.

For each element, this criterion value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRTCST.

4) Obtaining the combined shear and torsion criterion. This criterion considers pure
shear, pure torsion and concrete ultimate strength condition criteria. The criterion
determines whether the section is valid and is defined as follows:

VSd VSd TSd TSd TSd VSd TSd

CRT_TOT = Max [ ; ; ; ; ;( )+( )]
VRd2 VRd3 TRd2 TRd3 TRd4 VRd2 TRd2
For each element, this criterion value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

A value 2100 for this criterion indicates that one of the denominators is null, and
therefore, one of the reinforcements is not defined.

6.6.11.4. Shear Design

The shear designing according to NBR6118 follows these steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated with each transverse cross section and for the active
time.

The required data are the following:

fck characteristic strength of concrete.
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
γc concrete safety factor.
γs steel safety factor.

336 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

2) Obtaining section geometrical data. Required data for shear designing are the
following:

Ac total area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Required data are the
following:

bw minimum width of the section in a height equal to ¾ the effective depth.

d effective depth of the section.

 angle of the concrete compressive struts with the longitudinal axis of

member.

30º <  < 45º

Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. With the shear reinforcement design, it is
possible to indicate the angle  btetweeen the reinforcement and the longitudinal axis
of the member. If this angle is null or it is not defined,  = 90º. Other reinforcement
data are ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on the
section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Force Description

VSd Design shear force

6) Checking compression failure in the web. Firstly, a check is made to ensure the design
shear force (VSd) is less than or equal to the oblique compression resistance of concrete
in the web (VRd2). VRd2 is calculated with Model I Model II if

VSd ≤ VRd2
Model I

VRd2 = 0.27 ∙ αv2 fcd bw d

Where

337 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

f
ck
αv2 = 1 − 250 (fck in MPa).

Model II

VRd2 = 0.54 ∙ αv2 fcd bw d ∙ sin2 θ(cot an α + cot an θ)

Where
f
ck
αv2 = 1 − 250 (fck in MPa).

For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file as:

VRD2 Ultimate shear strength due to oblique compression of the concrete in

web.
VRD2 = VRd2
CRTVRD2 Ratio of the design shear (Vsd) to the resistance VRd2.
VSd
CRTVRD2 =
VRd2
If design shear force is greater than shear force that causes the failure by oblique
compression of concrete in the web, the reinforcement design is not feasible. Therefore,
the parameter for the reinforcement data is defined as 2100.

Asw 100
ASSH = 2
s
In this case, the element is labeled as not designed and the program then advances then
to next element.

In the case there is no failure due to oblique compression, the calculation process
continues.

7) Checking if shear reinforcement will be required. First, a check is made to ensure the
design shear force (Vsd) is less than or equal to the strength provided by the concrete in
members without shear reinforcement (Vc). VRd3 is calculated with Model I
with Model II

VSd ≤ VRd3
VRd3 = Vc
Model I

338 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

0 Only tension in the section

Vc = {
Vc0 Tension and compression in the section

Vc0 = 0.6 ∙ fctd ∙ bw ∙ d

Model II
0 Only tension in the section
Vc = {
Vc1 Tension and compression in the section

Vc0 VSd ≤ Vc0

Vc1 = { Interpolating linearly in between these values.
0 VSd = VRd2
Where

Vc0 = 0.6 ∙ fctd ∙ bw ∙ d

If the section does not require shear reinforcement, the following parameters are
defined (for both element ends):

VC = Vc

VRD3 = VRd3 = Vc

VSW = 0

Asw
ASSH = =0
s
If the section requires shear reinforcement the calculation process continues.

8) Determining the shear strength contribution of the required transverse reinforcement.

If the section requires shear reinforcement, the condition pertaining to the validity of
sections under shear force is as follows:

VSd ≤ VRd3
VRd3 = Vc + Vsw
Vsw contribution of web shear transverse reinforcement to the shear strength.
Vc contribution of concrete to the shear strength.

Vsw is calculated with Model I Model II

Model I

339 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Asw
Vsw = 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd (sin α + cos α)
S
Where

Asw /S shear reinforcement area per unit length.

fywd design strength of reinforcement limited to 435 MPa.

Model II
Asw
Vsw = 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd (cot anα + cot anθ) ∙ sinα
S
Where

Asw /S shear reinforcement area per unit length.

fywd design strength of reinforcement, limited to 435 MPa.

Therefore, the shear reinforcement contribution is given by the equation below:

Vsw = VRd3 − Vc
For each element end, the value of Vc and Vsw is stored in the CivilFEM results file:

VC = Vc
VSW = Vsw

10) Caculating the required reinforcement ratio. Once the required shear strength of the
reinforcement has been obtained, the reinforcement ratio can be calculated:

Asw Vsw
= for Model I
s 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd (sin α + cos α)

Asw Vsw
= for Model II
s 0.9 ∙ d ∙ fywd (cot an α + cot an α) ∙ sin α

Where:

Asw /S cross-sectional area of the designed shear reinforcement per unit length.
fywd design strength of reinforcement, limited to 435 MPa.

340 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The area of designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
for both ends:

Asw
ASSH =
S
In this case the element is labeled as designed (provided that the design process is
correct for both element sections).

6.6.11.5. Torsion Design

Torsion reinforcement design according to NBR6118 follows the following steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the
material properties associated with each transverse cross section and for the active
time.

The required data are the following:

fck characteristic strength of concrete
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement
γc concrete partial safety factor
γs reinforcement partial safety factor
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical
parameters used for torsion designing must be defined for each code in data at member
level according to chapter 5 of this manual. The required data are the following:

Ae area enclosed by the center-line of the effective hollow section.

Ue perimeter of the center-line of the effective hollow section.

angle of the concrete compressive struts with the longitudinal axis of

member: 30º º

Section 6.6.1.. provides detailed information on how to calculate the required data for
each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The torsional moment that acts
on the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCF).

Moment Description

TSd Design torsional moment

341 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

4) Checking compression failure of concrete. First, the design torsional moment (TSd) must
be less than or equal to the ultimate torsional moment due to compression in the
concrete (TRd2); therefore, the following condition must be satisfied:

TSd ≤ TRd2
TRd2 = 0.50 ∙ αv2 ∙ fcd ∙ Ae ∙ he ∙ sin2 θ
Where:
f
ck
αv2 = 1 250 (fck in MPa).

Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file:

TRD2 Maximum torsional moment resisted by the section without crushing the
concrete compressive struts due to compression.
TRD2 = TRd2
CRTTRD2 Ratio of the design torsional moment (TSd) to the resistance TRd2.
TSd
CRTTRD2 =
TRd2
If design torsional moment is greater than the torsional moment that causes the
compression failure of concrete, the reinforcement design is not feasible. Therefore, the
parameters for reinforcement data are assigned a value of 2100.
Ast
ASTT = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

ASLT = Asl = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case, the element is labeled as not designed, and the program then advances to
the next element.

In the case there is no failure due to oblique compression, the calculation process
continues.

5) Calculating the transverse reinforcement required. The ultimate strength condition of

the transverse reinforcement is:

TSd ≤ TRd3 = (Ast ⁄S) ∙ fywd ∙ 2Ae ∙ cot anθ

where:

ASt cross-sectional area of one of the bars used as transverse torsional

reinforcement.
s spacing of closed stirrups of transverse torsional reinforcement.

342 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

fywd design strength of reinforcement, limited to 435 MPa.

Therefore, the required transverse reinforcement is:

ASt TSd
= tan θ
S fywd ∙ 2Ae
The area per unit length of the designed transverse reinforcement is stored in the
CivilFEM results file for both element ends as:

Ast
ASTT =
S
6) Calculating the longitudinal reinforcement required. The ultimate strength condition of
the longitudinal reinforcement is:

TSd ≤ TRd4 = (Asl ⁄Ue ) ∙ fywd ∙ 2Ae ∙ tan θ

where:

Asl area of the longitudinal torsion reinforcement.

fywd design strength of reinforcement limited to 435 MPa.
Consequently, the longitudinal reinforcement required is:

Ue
ASl = ∙ T ∙ cot an θ
fywd ∙ 2Ae Sd
The area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM results file
for both element ends as:

ASLT = Asl
If the design for both element sections is completed for both transverse and longitudinal
reinforcements, the element will be labeled as designed.

6.6.11.6. Combined Shear and Torsion Design

The design of sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment follows
the steps below:

1) Torsion design considering a null shear force. This design is accomplished with the
same steps as for the designing of elements subjected to pure torsion according to
NBR6118.

2) Shear design assuming a null torsional moment. This design follows the same
procedure as for the design of elements only subjected to shear force according to
NBR6118.

343 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

3) Checking the failure condition by compression in the concrete. The design torsional
moment (TSd) and the design shear force (VSd) must satisfy the following condition:

VSd TSd
( )+( )≤1
VRd2 TRd2
where:

VRd2 ultimate shear force by compression of concrete.

TRd2 ultimate torsional moment due to compression of concrete.

For each element end, this criterion value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRTCST.

4) Obtaining required shear and torsion reinforcement ratios. If the concrete ultimate
strength condition is satisfied (i.e. the concrete can resist the combined shear and
torsion action), the reinforcements calculated are taken as the designed reinforcements.
The element will be labeld as designed.

If the concrete ultimate strength condition is not satisfied, the parameters

corresponding to each reinforcement group take the value of 2100.

344 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6.6.12. Shear and Torsion according to EHE-08

6.6.12.1. Shear Check

The checking for shear according to EHE-08 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active time.
The required data are the following:
fck characteristic compressive strength of concrete.

fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.

fct,m mean tensile strength of concrete.

fct,k characteristic tensile strength of concrete (fctk_005).

γc concrete partial safety factor.

γs steel partial safety factor.

2) Obtaining section geometrical data. Section geometrical requirements must be defined

within CivilFEM. Required data for shear checking are the following:
Ac total area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical

parameters used for shear calculations must be defined. Required data are the following
ones:
bw Width of element equal to the total width in solid sections or in case of box
sections, the width equals the sum of the width of both webs.
d effective depth of the section.
ρ1 geometric ratio of the tensile longitudinal reinforcement anchored at a
distance greater than or equal to d from the considered section:
As
ρ1 = ≤ 0.02
bw d
 angle of the concrete compressive struts with the longitudinal axis of
member:
0.5 ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.0

345 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Section “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides detailed

information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Data concerning reinforcements of the

section must be included within CivilFEM. Required data are the following ones:
 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member.
As /S area of reinforcement per unit length.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

s spacing of the stirrups.

Or with the data below:

s spacing of the stirrups.

φ diameter of bars.

N number of reinforcement legs.

5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that acts on the
section, as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment, are obtained from
the CivilFEM results file.

Force Description

Vrd Design shear force in Y

Nd Axial force

6) Checking failure by compression in the web. First, a check is made to ensure the design
shear force (Vrd ) is less than or equal to the oblique compression resistance of concrete
in the web (Vu1 ):

Vrd ≤ Vu1
cot θ + cot α
Vu1 = K f1cd bw ∙ d
1 + cot 2 θ
where:

f1cd design compressive strength of concrete.

346 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

0.60 ∙ fcd fck < 60 𝑀𝑃𝑎

f1cd { fck [MPa]
(0.90 − ) fcd ≥ 0.5 ∙ fcd fck ≥ 60 MPa
200
K reduction factor by axial forces effect

1 σ′cd = 0
σ′cd
1+ 0 < σ′cd ≤ 0.25 ∙ fcd
fcd
𝐾
1.25 0.25 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ 0.50 ∙ fcd
σ′cd
2.5 (1 − ) 0.50 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ fcd
{ fcd
σ′cd effective axial stress in concrete (compression positive) considering the axial
stress taken by compressed reinforcement.
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file:

VU1 Ultimate shear strength due to oblique compression of the concrete in

web.
VU1 = Vu1
CRTVU1 Ratio of the design shear (Vrd) to the resistance Vu1 .
Vrd
CRTVU1 =
Vu1
7) Checking failure by tension in the web. A check is made to ensure the design shear force
(Vrd) is less than or equal to the shear force due to tension in the web (Vu2 ):

Vrd ≤ Vu2
Vu2 = Vsu + Vcu
Vsu contribution of web shear transverse reinforcement to the shear strength.
Vcu contribution of concrete to the shear strength.

Members without shear reinforcement

If shear reinforcement has not been defined:

Vsu = 0
0.18
Vu2 = Vcu = [ ξ(100ρ1 fck )1/3 + 0.15σ′cd ] bw d
γc
0.075 3/2
Vu2 >[ ξ √fck + 0.15σ′cd ] bw d
γc

347 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

where:

Nd
σ′cd = < 0.30 ∙ fcd ≤ 12 MPa (Compression positive)
Ac
200
ξ= 1+√ < 2, d in mm
d

fck limited to 60 MPa

Members with shear reinforcement
If shear reinforcement has been defined:

As
Vsu = 0.9 d sin α(cot α + cot θ) f
S yd
where:

As /S shear reinforcement area per unit of length

fyd design strength of reinforcement (fyd ≤ 400 N⁄mm2 )

In this case, the concrete contribution to shear strength is:

0.15
Vcu = [ ξ(100 ρ1 fck )1/3 + 0.15σ′cd ] bw d β
γc
where:

2 cot θ − 1
β= if 0.5 ≤ cot θ < cot θe
2 cot θe − 1

cot θ − 2
β= if cot θe ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.0
cot θe − 2

θe reference angle of cracks inclination, obtained from:

2
√fct,m − fct,m (σxd + σyd ) + σxd σyd
≥ 0.5
cot θe = {
fct,m − σyd ≤ 2.0
σxd , σyd design normal stresses, at the section’s center of gravity, parallel to the
longitudinal axis of member and the shear force Vd respectively (tension
positive)

σ
Taking σyd = 0  cot θe = √1 − f xd
ct,m

348 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

In addition, the increment in tensile force due to shear force is calculated with the
following equation:

Vsu
∆T = Vrd · cot θ − · cot θ + cot α
2
For each end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file as:

VSU Contribution of the shear reinforcement to the shear strength.

VSU = Vsu
VCU Contribution of concrete to the shear strength.
VCU = Vcu
VU2 Ultimate shear strength by tension in the web.
VU2 = Vu2 =Vsu + Vcu
CRTVU2 Ratio of the design shear force (Vrd )to the resistance Vu2 .
Vrd
CRTVU2 =
Vu2
If Vu2 = 0 , the CTRVU2 criterion is taken as 2100.

The tension increment due to shear force is stored in the CivilFEM results file as
INCTENS.

8) Obtaining shear criterion. The shear criterion indicates whether the section is valid or
not for the design forces (if it is less than 1, the section satisfies the code provisions;
whereas if it exceeds 1, the section will not be valid). Furthermore, it includes
information about how close the design force is to the ultimate section strength. The
shear criterion is defined as follows:

Vrd Vrd
CRT_TOT = Max ( ; )≤1
Vu1 Vu2
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

A value 2100 for this criterion indicates that the shear strength for tension in the web
(Vu2 ) is equal to zero, as was described in the previous step.

6.6.12.2. Torsion Checking

The torsion checking according to EHE-08 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active time.

349 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The required data are the following:

fck characteristic strength of concrete
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement
γc concrete partial safety factor
γs reinforcement steel partial safety factor
2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical
parameters used for torsion calculations must be defined within CivilFEM. The required
data are the following:
he effective thickness.
Ae area enclosed by the center-line of the effective hollow section.
Ue perimeter of the center-line of the effective hollow section.
KEYAST indicator of the position of torsional reinforcement in the section:
=0 if closed stirrups are placed in both faces of the equivalent hollow section wall
or of the real hollow section (value by default for hollow sections).

=1 if there are closed stirrups only along the periphery of the member (value by
default for solid sections).

 Angle of the compressive struts of concrete with the longitudinal axis of

member:
0.50 ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.00
“Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides detailed
information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining section reinforcement data. Data concerning reinforcements of the section

must be included within CivilFEM database. Required data are the following:

Transverse Reinforcement
Ast /S area of transverse reinforcement per unit of length.

The reinforcement ratio can also be obtained with the following data:

Ast closed stirrups area for torsion.

s spacing of closed stirrups.

Or with the data below:

s spacing of closed stirrups.

350 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Φt diameter of the closed stirrups bars.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Asl total area of the longitudinal reinforcement.
The reinforcement ratio can also be obtained with the following data:

Φ diameter of longitudinal bars.

N number of longitudinal bars.
4) Obtaining the section’s internal forces and moments. The torsional moment that acts
on the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file (.RCV).

Moment Description

Td Design torsional moment in the section

5) Checking compression failure of concrete. First, a check is made to ensure the design
torsional moment (Td ) is less than or equal to the ultimate torsional moment due to
compression in the concrete (Tu1 ); as a result, the following condition must be satisfied:

Td ≤ Tu1
cot θ
Tu1 = 2Kα f1cd Ae he
1 + cot 2 θ
Where:

f1cd design compressive strength of concrete

0.60 ∙ fcd fck < 60 𝑀𝑃𝑎

f1cd ={ fck [MPa]
(0.90 − ) fcd ≥ 0.5 ∙ fcd fck ≥ 60 MPa
200
K reduction factor by axial forces effect
1 σ′cd = 0
σ′cd
1+ 0 < σ′cd ≤ 0.25 ∙ fcd
fcd
K=
1.25 0.25 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ 0.50 ∙ fcd
σ′cd
2.5 (1 − ) 0.50 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ fcd
{ fcd
 0.60 if only there are stirrups along the periphery of the member;
0.75 if closed stirrups are placed at both faces of the wall of the effective
hollow section or real hollow section.

351 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file as:

TU1 Maximum torsional moment that can be resisted by the section without
crushing due to compression of concrete compressive struts.
TU1 = Tu1
CRTTU1 Ratio of the design torsional moment (Td ) to the resistance Tu1 .
Td
CRTTU1 =
Tu1
6) Checking transverse reinforcement failure. The tensile failure condition of the
transverse reinforcement in a section subjected to a torsional moment Td is:

Td ≤ Tu2
2 Ae At
Tu2 = fyd cot θ
S
where:

At cross-sectional area of one of the bars used as transverse torsional

reinforcement.
s spacing of closed stirrups of transverse torsional reinforcement.
2
ftd design yield strength of torsion reinforcement (fyd ). The same
steel type will be used for both transverse and longitudinal torsion
reinforcement.
Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file as:

TU2 Maximum torsional moment resisted by the section so without causing

failure in the transverse reinforcement due to tension.
TU2 = Tu2
CRTTU2 Ratio of the design torsional moment (Td ) to the resistance Tu2 .
Td
CRTTU2 =
Tu2
If the torsion transverse reinforcement is not defined, the criterion is
taken as 2100.

7) Checking longitudinal reinforcement failure. The tensile failure condition of the

longitudinal reinforcement in a section subjected to a torsional moment Td is:

Td ≤ Tu3

352 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

2 Ae
Tu3 = A f tan θ
Ue sl yd
Where Asl is the area of the longitudinal torsion reinforcement.

Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file as:

TU3 Maximum torsional moment resisted by the section without causing

tensile failure in the longitudinal reinforcement.
TU3 = Tu3
CRTTU3 Ratio of the design torsional moment (Td) to the resistance Tu3.
Td
CRTTU3 =
Tu3
In the case the longitudinal reinforcement is not defined, the criterion is
taken as 2100.
8) Obtaining torsion criterion. The torsion criterion identifies the ratio of the design
moment to the section’s ultimate strength (if it is less than 1, the section is valid;
whereas if it exceeds 1, the section is not valid). The criterion concerning the validity for
torsion is defined as follows:

Td Td Td
CRT_TOT = Max ( ; ; )≤1
Tu1 Tu2 Tu3
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

A value 2100 for this criterion indicates that any one of the torsion reinforcements are
not defined.

6.6.12.3. Combined Shear and Torsion Checking

Checking sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment follows the
steps below:

1) Torsion checking considering a null shear force. This check is accomplished with the
same steps as for the check of elements subjected to pure torsion according to EHE-08.
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRTTRS.

2) Shear checking assuming a null torsional moment. Follows the same procedure as for
the check of elements only subjected to shear according to EHE-08.
For each element end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRTSHR.

3) Checking the ultimate compressive strength condition of concrete. The design torsional
moment (Td ) and the design shear force (Vrd ) must satisfy the following condition:

353 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

TSd β VSd β
( ) +( ) ≤1
Tu1 Vu1
Where:

he
β = 2 (1 − )
bw
Tu1 ultimate torsional moment due to compression of concrete, calculated in step
No. 1.

Vu1 ultimate shear force by compression of concrete, calculated in step No. 2.

For each element, this criterion value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRTCST.

4) Obtaining the combined shear and torsion criterion. This criterion comprehends pure
shear, pure torsion and concrete ultimate strength condition criteria. The criterion
determines whether the section is valid or not, and it is defined as follows:

Vrd Vrd Td Td Td Vrd β Td β

CRT_TOT = Max [ ; ; ; ; ( ) +( ) ]≤1
Vu1 Vu2 Tu1 Tu2 Tu3 Vu1 Tu1
For each element, this criterion value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRT_TOT.

A value 2100 for this criterion indicates that one of the denominators is null, because one
of the reinforcements is not defined.

6.6.12.4. Shear Design

The shear designing according to EHE-08 follows these steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from

the material properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active time.

The required data are the following ones:

fck characteristic strength of concrete.
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
fct,m mean tensile strength of concrete.
γc concrete safety factor.
γs steel safety factor.

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Section geometrical requirements

must be defined within CivilFEM database:

Ac total area of the concrete section.

354 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical

parameters used for shear design must be defined within the CivilFEM. Required data are
the following ones:

bw Width of element equal to the total width in solid sections or in case of box
sections, the width equals the sum of the width of both webs.
d effective depth of the section.

ρ1 geometric ratio of the tension longitudinal reinforcement anchored at a

distance greater than or equal to d from the considered section.
As
ρ1 = b ≤ 0.02
w d

θ angle of the concrete compressive struts with the longitudinal axis of

member:

0.5 ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.0

Section “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides detailed
information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. In the shear reinforcement

design, it is possible to define the angle between the reinforcement and the longitudinal axis
of the member. If this angle is null or it is not defined, it’s defined as 90º. Other
reinforcement data are ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that
acts on the section as well as the concomitant axial force are obtained from the CivilFEM
results file.

Force Description

Vrd Design shear force in Y

Nd Design axial force

6) Checking compression failure in the web. First, a check is made to ensure the
design shear force (Vrd ) is less than or equal to the oblique compression resistance of
concrete in the web (Vu1 ):

Vrd ≤ Vu1
cot θ+cot α
Vu1 = K f1cd bw ∙ d 1+cot2 θ

where:

355 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

f1cd design compressive strength of concrete

0.60 ∙ fcd fck < 60 𝑀𝑃𝑎
f1cd { f [MPa]
(0.90 − ck200 ) fcd ≥ 0.5 ∙ fcd fck ≥ 60 MPa
K reduction factor by axial forces effect
1 σ′cd = 0
σ′cd
1+ 0 < σ′cd ≤ 0.25 ∙ fcd
fcd
K=
1.25 0.25 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ 0.50 ∙ fcd
σ′cd
{2.5 (1 − ) 0.50 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ fcd
fcd

σ′cd effective axial stress in concrete (compression positive) considering the axial
stress taken by reinforcement in compression.
For each element end, calculated results are written in the CivilFEM results file as:

VU1 Ultimate shear strength due to oblique compression of the concrete in web.
VU1 = Vu1
CRTVU1 Ratio of the design shear force (VRd ) to the resistance Vu1 .
V
CRTVU1 = Vrd
u1

If the design shear force is greater than the shear force that causes failure due to oblique
compression in the concrete of the web, the reinforcement design will not be feasible. The
parameter where the reinforcement data is stored will be defined as 2100.
As
ASSH = = 2100
s

In this case, the element is labeled as not designed, and the program then advances to next
element.

In the case there is no failure due to oblique compression, the calculation process continues.

7) Checking if section requires shear reinforcement. First, a check is made to ensure

the design shear force Vd is less than the strength provided by the concrete in members
without shear reinforcement (Vcu ):

Vrd ≤ Vu2
0.18
Vu2 = Vcu = [ ξ(100ρ1 fck )1/3 + 0.15σ′cd ] bw d
γc
0.075
Vu2 > [ γ ξ3⁄2 √fck + 0.15σ′cd ] bw d
c

356 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

where:
Nd
σ′cd = < 0.30 ∙ fcd ≤ 12 MPa (Compression positive)
Ac

200
ξ= 1+√ < 2, d in mm
d

fck limited to 60 MPa

If the section does not require shear reinforcement, the following parameters are defined
(for both element ends):

VCU = Vcu
VU2 = Vcu
VSU = 0
As
ASSH = =0
s

If section requires shear reinforcement, the calculation process continues.

8) Determining the contribution of the required transverse reinforcement to the shear

strength. If the section requires shear reinforcement, the condition for the validity of the
sections under shear force is the following:

Vrd ≤ Vu2
Vu2 = Vsu + Vcu
Vsu contribution of transverse shear reinforcement in the web to the shear strength.
Vcu contribution of concrete to the shear strength.
0.15
Vcu = [ ξ(100ρ1 fck )1/3 + 0.15σ′cd ] bw d β
γc

where:
2 cot θ−1
β = 2 cotθ if 0.5 ≤ cot θ < cot θe
e −1

cot θ−2
β = cot θ if cot θe ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.0
e −2

θe reference angle of cracks inclination, obtained from the following expression:

√f2ct,m −fct,m (σxd +σyd )+σxd σyd

≥ 0.5
cot θe = {
fct,m −σyd ≤ 2.0

357 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

σxd , σyd design normal stresses, at the center of gravity of the section, parallel to the
longitudinal axis of the member or to the shear force Vd , respectively (tension positive)

σxd
Taking σyd = 0 → cot θe = √1 − f
ct,m

Therefore, the shear reinforcement contribution is given by:

Vsu = Vu2 − Vcu = Vrd − Vcu

For each element end, the value of Vcu and Vsu is stored in the CivilFEM results file:

VCU = Vcu
VSU = Vsu
9) Required reinforcement ratio. Once the required shear strength of the shear
reinforcement has been obtained, the reinforcement ratio can be calculated from the
equation below:
As Vsu
=f
S yd 0.9 d (cot α+cot θ)

Where:

As /S cross-sectional area of the designed shear reinforcement per unit length.

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM results file
for both ends:
As
ASSH = S

In this case, the element is labeled as designed (provided that the design process is correct
for both element sections).

6.6.12.5. Torsion Design

Torsion reinforcement design according to EHE-08 follows the following steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from

the material properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active time.

The required data are the following ones:

fck characteristic strength of concrete
fyk characteristic yield strength of reinforcement
γc concrete partial safety factor

358 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

γs reinforcement partial safety factor

2) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical
parameters utilized used for torsion design must be defined for each code at member level
according to chapter 5 of this manual. The required data are the following ones:

Ae area enclosed by the center-line of the effective hollow section.

Ue perimeter of the center-line of the effective hollow section.

KEYAST indicator of the position of the torsion reinforcement in the section.

=0 if closed stirrups are placed in both faces of the equivalent hollow section wall
or of the real hollow section (value by default for hollow sections).
=1 if closed stirrups are only placed along the periphery of the member (value by
default for solid sections).

 angle of the concrete compressive struts with the longitudinal axis of

member:

0.50 ≤ cot θ ≤ 2.00

Section “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides detailed

information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid section.

3) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The torsional moment
that acts on the section is obtained from the CivilFEM results file.

Moment Description

Td Design torsional moment

4) Checking compression failure of concrete. First, a check is made to ensure

the design torsional moment (Td ) is less than or equal to the ultimate torsional moment for
compression in concrete (Tu1 ); therefore, the following condition must be satisfied:

Td ≤ Tu1
cot θ
Tu1 = 2Kα f1cd Ae he 1+cot2 θ
where:

f1cd concrete compressive strength

0.60 ∙ fcd fck < 60 𝑀𝑃𝑎

f1cd = { fck [MPa]
(0.90 − ) fcd ≥ 0.5 ∙ fcd fck ≥ 60 MPa
200

359 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

K reduction factor by axial forces effect

1 σ′cd = 0
σ′cd
1+ 0 < σ′cd ≤ 0.25 ∙ fcd
fcd
K=
1.25 0.25 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ 0.50 ∙ fcd
σ′cd
{2.5 (1 − ) 0.50 ∙ fcd < σ′cd ≤ fcd
fcd

 1.20 if stirrups are only placed along the periphery of the member.
1.50 if closed stirrups are placed at both faces of the wall of the effective hollow
section or of the real hollow section.

Calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file:

TU1 Maximum torsional moment resisted by the section without

causing crushing due to compression of concrete compressive struts.
TU1 = TU1
CRTTU1 Ratio of the design torsional moment (Td ) to the resistance Tu1 .
T
CRTTU1 = T d
u1

If design torsional moment is greater than the torsional moment that causes the
compression failure of concrete, the reinforcement design will not be feasible. Therefore,
the parameters for the reinforcement data will be defined as 2 100.
Ast
AST/ST = = 2100 for transverse reinforcement
S

AST/ST = Asl = 2100 for longitudinal reinforcement

In this case, the element is labeled as not designed, and the program then advances
to the next element.

In the case there is no failure due to oblique compression, the calculation process
continues.

5) Calculating the transverse reinforcement required. The ultimate strength

condition of the transverse reinforcement is:
2 Ae At
Td ≤ Tu2 = fyd cot α
S

where:

360 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

At area of the section of one of the bars used as transverse reinforcement for
torsion.
s spacing of the closed stirrups of the transverse reinforcement for torsion.
Therefore, the required transverse reinforcement is:
At T
= 2 A df tan θ
S e yd

The area per unit length of the designed transverse reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM
results file for both element ends as:
At
ASTT = S

6) Calculating the longitudinal reinforcement required. The ultimate strength condition

of the longitudinal reinforcement is:
2 Ae
Td ≤ Tu3 = Asl fyd tan θ
Ue

Where Asl is the area of the torsional longitudinal reinforcement.

Consequently, the longitudinal reinforcement required is:

U
Asl = 2 A ef Td cot g θ
e yd

The area of the designed longitudinal reinforcement is stored in the CivilFEM results file for
both element ends as:

ASLT = Asl
If design for both element sections is done for both transverse and longitudinal
reinforcements, and the element will be labeled as designed.

6.6.12.6. Combined Shear and Torsion Design

The design of sections subjected to shear force and concomitant torsional moment follows
the steps below:

1) Torsion design considering a null shear force. This design is accomplished with the
same steps as for the design of elements subjected to pure torsion according to EHE-08.

2) Shear design assuming a null torsional moment. This design follows the same
procedure as for the design of elements only subjected to shear force according to EHE-
08.

361 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

3) Checking the failure condition by compression in the concrete. The design torsional
moment (Td) and the design shear force (Vrd) must to satisfy the following condition:

TSd β VSd β
( ) +( ) ≤1
Tu1 Vu1

where:

he
β = 2 (1 − )
bw
Tu1 ultimate torsional moment due to compression of concrete, calculated in step
1.

Vu1 ultimate shear strength due to compression of concrete, calculated in step 2.

For each element end, this criterion value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as CRTCST.

4) Obtaining required shear and torsion reinforcement ratios. If the concrete ultimate
strength condition is satisfied (i.e. the concrete can resist the combined shear and
torsion action), the reinforcements calculated in steps 1 and 2 are taken as the designed
reinforcements. The element will be labeled as designed.

If the concrete ultimate strength condition is not satisfied, the parameters corresponding to
each reinforcement group will take the value 2100.

6.6.13. Shear and Torsion according to IS 456

6.6.13.1 Shear Checking
Shear checking of elements according to IS 456 follow the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated with each transverse cross section and for the active time. Those
material properties should be previously defined. The required data are the following:
fck characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
fy characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
γc partial safety factor for concrete.
γs partial safety factor for reinforcement.

362 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

2) Obtaining geometrical data of the section. Section geometrical requirements must be

defined within the CivilFEM. Required data for shear checking are the following:
Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on code. Geometrical parameters used

for shear calculations must be defined within CivilFEM. Required data are the following:
bw effective width of the section.
d effective depth of the section.

ρ1 ratio of the longitudinal tensile reinforcement extending beyond the effective

depth of the considered section, except in supports where the total area of
the tensile reinforcement is used.:
Asl
ρ1 =
bw d
Section “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides detailed
information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Data concerning reinforcements of the

element section must be included within the CivilFEM database. Required data are the
following:
 angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the member
section.
As /s area of reinforcement per unit length.
The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

s spacing of the stirrups.
or with the data below:

s spacing of the stirrups.

φ diameter of bars.
N number of reinforcement legs.
5) Obtaining the section internal forces and moments. The shear force that acts on the
section as well as the concomitant axial force are obtained from the CivilFEM results file.
Force Description

Vu Design shear force

Pu Concomitant axial force

363 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

6) Calculating the nominal shear stress. The nominal shear stress is calculated by the
following expression:
Vu
τv ≤
bw ∙ d

This stress is written for each end of the element in the CivilFEM results file as:
TAOV Shear strength
TAOV = τv
7) Checking of the maximum shear stress. The nominal shear stress must be less than or
equal to the maximum shear stress:
τv ≤ τc max
where τc max is given in Table 20 according to the concrete type:

Results are stored for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

TCMAX Maximum shear stress.

TCMAX = τc max
CRTCMAX Ratio of the nominal shear stress to the shear maximum stress.
τv
CRTCMAX =
τc max
8) Calculating the shear resistance of the section. The shear resistance is calculated as the
sum of the resistance provided by the concrete and the shear reinforcement:
Vut = Vuc + Vus

where:

Vut shear resistance of the section

Vuc concrete contribution to the shear resistance
Vus shear reinforcement contribution to the shear resistance

364 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

The concrete contribution to the resistance is:

Vuc = τc ∙ bw ∙ d
c is
given in Table 19 according to the concrete type and the amount of the
longitudinal tension reinforcement:

For members subjected to axial compression Pu, the design shear strength of concrete,
given in Table 19, shall be multiplied by the following factor:

3Pu
δ= 1+ ≤ 1.5
Ac fck

The reinforcement contribution to the shear resistance shall be calculated as:

Asw
Vus = 0.87fy d(sin α + cos α)
s
Asw total cross sectional area of the shear reinforcement
s spacing of the stirrups along the axis of the member

Results are stored for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

365 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

TC Design shear stress.

TC = τc
VUC Contribution of concrete to the shear resistance.
VUC = Vuc
VUS Contribution of shear reinforcement to the shear resistance.
VUS = Vus
VUT Design shear resistance of the section.
VUT = Vut + Vus
CRVUT Ratio of the design shear force (Vu) to the shear resistance Vut.
Vu
CRVUT =
Vut
If Vut = 0, CRVUT is taken as 2100.

9) Obtaining shear criterion. The shear criterion indicates whether the section is valid or
not for the design forces (if it is less than 1, the section satisfies the code prescriptions,
whereas if it exceeds 1, the section will not be valid). Furthermore, it includes
information about how close is the design force from the ultimate section strength. The
shear criterion is defined as follows:
τv Vu
CRT_TOT = Max ( ; )≤1
τc max Vut
For each end, this value is stored in the CivilFEM results file as the parameter CRT_TOT.

A value of 2100 for this criterion would mean that Vut are equal to zero.

6.6.13.2 Axial and Bending with combined Shear and Torsion

Checking
The axial and bending with combined shear and torsion checking according to IS 456 follows
the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated with the transverse cross section and for the active time.
2) Obtaining of the geometrical parameters of the section. Geometrical parameters of the
section must be defined within the CivilFEM database.
3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. The required data are
the following:
bw effective width of the section.

366 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

d effective depth of the section.

ρ1 ratio of the longitudinal tensile reinforcement extending beyond the effective

depth of the considered section, except in supports where the total area of
the tensile reinforcement is used:
Asl
ρ1 =
bw d
b1 , d1 center to center distances between corner bars situated between transversal
stirrups, measured along the width and the flange of the section respectively.
Section “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides detailed
information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. Data concerning reinforcements of the

section must be included within CivilFEM. Required data are the following:
Longitudinal Bending Reinforcement
It is obtained from the bending reinforcement distribution of the section

Transverse Shear Reinforcement

 angle between the shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the
member section.
As /s area of transverse reinforcement per unit length.

The reinforcement ratio may also be obtained with the following data:

As total area of the reinforcement legs.

s spacing of the stirrups.
or with the data below:

s spacing of the stirrups.

 diameter of bars.
N number of reinforcement legs.
TransverseTorsional Reinforcement
Ast /s area of transverse reinforcement per unit length.

The reinforcement ratio can also be obtained with the following data:

As closed stirrups area for torsion.

s spacing of closed stirrups.

367 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Or with the data below:

s spacing of closed stirrups.

ϕt diameter of the closed stirrups.

Longitudinal Shear Reinforcement

This reinforcement will be ignored.

5) Obtaining section internal forces and moments. The forces and moments that acts on
the section are obtained from the CivilFEM results file.
Force/Moment Description

Vu Design shear force

Tu Design torsional moment
Pu Concomitant axial force
Mu Concomitant bending moment

6) Calculating the equivalent shear. Equivalent shear shall be calculated from the following
formula:
Tu
Ve = Vu + 1.6
bw

Where Ve is the equivalent shear force.

7) Calculating the equivalent nominal shear stress. The equivalent nominal shear stress
shall be calculated from the following formula:
Ve
τve ≤
bw ∙ d

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TAOVE Nominal shear stress

TAOVE = τve

8) Checking with the maximum shear stress. The equivalent nominal shear stress must be
less than or equal to the maximum shear stress:

368 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

τve ≤ τc max
c max is given in Table 20 according to the type of concrete:

Results are stored for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

TCMAX Maximum shear stress.

TCMAX = τc max
CRTCMAX Ratio of the nominal shear stress to the maximum shear stress.
τve
CRTCMAX =
τc max

9) Checking whether the section will require transverse reinforcement. Transverse

reinforcement will not be required if the equivalent nominal shear stress is less than or
equal to the maximum shear stress:
τve ≤ τc
c is
given in Table 19 according to the concrete type and the amount of the
longitudinal tension reinforcement:

369 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Results are stored for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

ATT Area of the necessary transverse reinforcement.

Asv
ATT = ( ) =0
Sv nec
CRTATT Ratio of the area of the necessary transverse reinforcement to the area of
the defined transverse reinforcement (sum of shear and torsional
transverse reinforcement).
A
( Ssv )
v nec
CRTATT = =0
Ass Ast
+
S S
10) Calculating the transverse reinforcement required. If the equivalent nominal stress
exceeds the maximum shear stress, the necessary transverse reinforcement will be
calculated with the following expression:
Asv Tu Vu
= +
Sv b1 d1 (0.87fy ) 2.5d1 (0.87fy )
ATT Area of the necessary transverse reinforcement
Asv
ATT = ( )
Sv nec
CRTATT Ratio of the area of the necessary transverse reinforcement to the area of
the defined transverse reinforcement (sum of shear and torsional
transverse reinforcement).
A
( Ssv )
v nec
CRTATT =
Ass Ast
+
S S
If the shear and torsional transverse reinforcement is zero, Ass/s+Ast/s=0,
the criterion is taken as 2100.

11) Checking of the longitudinal reinforcement. We check if the defined longitudinal

bending reinforcement resists an equivalent bending moment given by the formula:
Mel = Mu + Mt
where

Mel equivalent bending moment

370 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

Mt increment due to torsional moment:

1 + D⁄b
w
Mt = Tu ( )
1.7

D overall depth

This equivalent moment is used in the axial bending checking

(in the direction defined in the command argument). For
further information about this calculation procedure, see
chapters about axial load and biaxial bending of the Theory
Manual.
The calculation results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for
both element ends as the parameters:
MT increment of the bending moment due to torsional moment
MT = Mt
MEL equivalent bending moment
MEL = Mel
CRTASL Ratio of the forces and moments that acts on the section to the ultimate
forces and moments.
(Nu , Mel )
CRTASL =
(Nh , Mh )

12) Obtaining total criterion. The criterion of the combined axial, bending, shear and
torsional checking is obtained from the enveloping of the partial criterions. If it is less
than 1, the section is valid; if it exceeds 1, the section is not valid:
CRT_TOT = Max (CRTCMAX; CRTATT; CRTASL)
This value is stored in the CivilFEM results file for both element
ends as the parameter CRT_TOT.
A value of 2100 for this criterion indicates that the shear and
torsion transverse reinforcements have not been defined.

6.6.13.3 Shear Design

Shear reinforcement design according to IS 456 follows the steps below:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from

the material properties associated with the transverse cross section and for the active time.
The required data are the following:

371 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

fck characteristic compressive strength of concrete.

fy characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
γc partial safety factor for concrete.
γs partial safety factor for reinforcement.
2) Obtaining section geometrical data. Section geometrical requirements must
be defined within CivilFEM database. Required data for shear designing are the following:

Ac total cross-sectional area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical

parameters used for shear designing must be defined within the CivilFEM. Required data are
the following ones:

bw effective width of the section.

d effective depth of the section.

ρ1 ratio of the tensile reinforcement extending beyond the effective depth of the
considered section, except in supports where the total area of the tensile reinforcement is
used.:
Asl
ρ1 = b
w d

Section “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides detailed

information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. In shear reinforcement design,

it is possible to define the angle between the reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of
the member. This angle should be included in the reinforcement definition of each element.
If this angle is null or it is not defined, =90º. Other reinforcement data are ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The shear force that
acts on the section as well as the concomitant axial force and bending moment are obtained
from the CivilFEM results file.

Force Description

Vu Design shear force

Pu Concomitant axial force
6) Calculating the nominal shear stress. The nominal shear stress is calculated
from the following expression:
Vu
τv ≤ b
w ∙d

372 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

This stress is written for each end in the CivilFEM results file as:

TAOV Shear strength

TAOV = τv
7) Checking of the maximum shear stress. The nominal shear stress must be less than
or equal to the maximum shear stress:

τv ≤ τc max
c max is given in Table 20 according to the concrete type:

Results are stored for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following
parameters:
TCMAX Maximum shear stress.
TCMAX = τc max
CRTCMAX Ratio of the nominal shear stress to the shear maximum stress.
τv
CRTCMAX = τ
c max

If the nominal shear stress is greater than the maximum shear stress, the
reinforcement design will not be possible; therefore, the parameter where the
reinforcement amount is stored will be defined as 2100.
As
ASSH = = 2100
S

In this case, the element will be labeled as not designed, advancing then to the
following element end.

8) Determining the required transverse reinforcement contribution to the shear

strength. The shear resistance is calculated as the sum of the resistance provided by the
concrete and the resistance provided by the shear reinforcement:

Vu ≤ Vut = Vuc + Vus

373 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

where:
Vu design shear force
Vut shear resistance of the section
Vuc concrete contribution to the shear strength
Vus shear reinforcement contribution to the shear strength
Therefore, the shear reinforcement contribution shall be:
Vus = Vu − Vuc
The concrete contribution to the strength is:
Vuc = τc ∙ bw ∙ d
c is given in Table 19 according to the concrete type and the amount of the
longitudinal tension reinforcement:

For members subjected to axial compression Pu, the design shear strength of
concrete, given in Table 19, shall be multiplied by the following factor:
3Pu
δ= 1+A ≤ 1.5
c fck

For each element end, the Vus value is included in the CivilFEM results file as the
parameter:

VUS reinforcement design shear force

374 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

VUS = Vus
9) Calculating the required reinforcement ratio. The resistance contribution of
the shear reinforcement is calculated with the following expression:
Asw
Vus = 0.87fy d(sin α + cos α)
S
Asw area of the cross-section of the shear reinforcement
s spacing of the stirrups measured along the longitudinal axis
Therefore:
Asw Vus
= 0.87f
S y d(sin α+cos α)

The area of the designed reinforcement per unit length is stored in the CivilFEM
results file for both element ends:
Asw
ASSH = S

In this case, the element will be labeled as designed (providing the design procedure
is correct for both element sections).

If the reinforcement design is not possible, the reinforcement value is taken as 2 100
and the element will be considered not designed.

DSG_CRT Design criterion (Ok the element is designed and NotOk the element is not
designed).

10.6.11.4 Axial and Bending with Combined Shear and Torsion

Design
Axial and bending with shear and torsion longitudinal and transverse reinforcement design
according to IS 456 follows the following steps:

1) Obtaining material strength properties. These properties are obtained from the material
properties associated to each transverse cross section and for the active time,.
The required data are the following:

fck characteristic compressive strength of concrete.

fy characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
γc partial safety factor for concrete.
γs partial safety factor for reinforcement.

375 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

2) Obtaining geometrical parameters. Geometrical parameters must be defined within

CivilFEM database.
Ac gross area of the concrete section.

3) Obtaining geometrical parameters depending on specified code. Geometrical

parameters used for torsion designing must be defined within the CivilFEM. The required
data are the following:
bw effective width of the section.
d effective depth.
ρ1 ratio of the tensile reinforcement extending beyond the effective depth of the
considered section, except in supports where the total area of the tensile
reinforcement is used.:

Asl
ρ1 =
bw d

Section “Previous Considerations to Shear and Torsion Calculation” provides detailed

information on how to calculate the required data for each code and valid section.

4) Obtaining reinforcement data of the section. In longitudinal reinforcement design, it is

necessary to define the distribution of bending reinforcement. In transversal
reinforcement design, it is possible to define the angle α between the reinforcement and
the longitudinal axis of member can be indicated. This angle should be stored in the
section data of each element. If this angle is null or it is not defined, α=90º. Other
reinforcement data will be ignored.
5) Obtaining forces and moments acting on the section. The forces and moments that act
on the section are obtained from the CivilFEM results file:
Force/Moment Description

Vu Design shear force

Tu Design torsional moment
Pu Concomitant axial force
Mu Concomitant bending moment

6) Calculating the equivalent shear. Equivalent shear shall be calculated from the following
formula:
Tu
Ve = Vu + 1.6
bw

Where Ve is the equivalent shear force.

376 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

7) Calculating the equivalent nominal shear stress. The equivalent nominal shear stress
shall be calculated from the following formula:
Ve
τve ≤
bw ∙ d

Results are written in the CivilFEM results file for both element ends as the parameters:

TAOVE Nominal shear stress

TAOVE = τve

8) Checking with the maximum shear stress. The equivalent nominal shear stress must be
less than or equal to the maximum shear stress:
τve ≤ τc max
c max is given in Table 20 according to the type of concrete:

Results are stored for each end in the CivilFEM results file as the following parameters:

TCMAX Maximum shear stress.

TCMAX = τc max
CRTCMAX Ratio of the nominal shear stress to the shear maximum stress.
τve
CRTCMAX =
τc max
If the nominal shear stress is greater than the maximum shear stress, the reinforcement
design will not be possible; therefore the parameter for the area per unit length of the
reinforcement will be taken as 2100.

As
ASSH = = 2100
S

377 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

9) Checking whether the section will require transverse reinforcement. This reinforcement
is not required if the equivalent nominal shear stress is less than or equal to the
maximum shear stress:
τve ≤ τc
c is
given in Table 19 according to the concrete type and the amount of the
longitudinal tension reinforcement:

Results are stored for each end in the CivilFEM results file as
the following parameters:
ATT Area of the required transverse reinforcement.
Asv
ATT = =0
Sv
10) Calculating the required transverse reinforcement. If the equivalent nominal stress
exceeds the maximum shear stress, the required transverse reinforcement will be
calculated by:
Asv Tu Vu
= +
Sv bw d1 (0.87fy ) 2.5 d1 (0.87fy )
ATT Area of the necessary transverse reinforcement
Asv
ATT = ( )
Sv nec

378 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.6 Shear and Torsion

11) Calculating the longitudinal reinforcement amount. A check is made to ensure the
defined longitudinal bending reinforcement resists an equivalent bending moment given
by the formula:
Mel = Mu + Mt
where

Mel equivalent bending moment

Mt increment due to torsional moment:

1 + D⁄b
w
Mt = Tu ( )
1.7

D overall depth

This equivalent moment is used in the axial bending design (in

the direction defined in the command argument). For further
information on the calculation procedure, see chapters 11-A.3
and 11-A.4 of the Theory Manual.
The calculated results are stored in the CivilFEM results file for
both element ends as the parameters:
MT increment of the bending moment due to torsional moment
MT = Mt
MEL equivalent bending moment
MEL = Mel
REINFACT Factor to multiply the scalable longitudinal bending reinforcement to
satisfy the code provisions.
If the reinforcement factor is greater than the upper reinforcement limit established by
the command, the design will not be possible; therefore, the reinforcement factor is
defined as 2100.

REINFACT = 2100
If the reinforcement design is not possible at both ends, the reinforcement value is taken
as 2100 and the element will be considered not designed.

DSG_CRT Design criterion (Ok the element is designed and NotOk the element is
not designed).

379 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.7 Cracking Checking

6.7. Cracking Checking

6.7.1 Cracking according to Eurocode 2 (EN 1992-1-
1:2004/AC:2008)
10.7.2.10 Cracking Checking
The cracking check calculates the crack width and checks the following condition:

Wk ≤ Wmax
where:
Wk Design crack width.
Wmax Maximum crack width

The design crack width is obtained from the following expression (Art. 7.3.4):

Wk = Sr,max ∙ (εsm − εcm )

Sr,max Maximum spacing between cracks.

εsm Mean strain in the reinforcement.

εcm Mean strain in the concrete between bars.
ϕ
Sr,max = k 3 ∙ c + k1 ∙ k 2 ∙ k 4 ρ
p,eff

fct,eff
σs −kt (1+αe ρp,eff )
ρp,eff σ
εsm − εcm = ≥ 0.6 Es
Es s

 Reinforcement bar size in mm.

As +ξ 12 ∙Ap′
ρp,eff = Effective reinforcement ratio, where Ac,eff is the effective area
Ac,eff
of concrete in tension, As is the area of reinforcement contained within the effective
concrete area and Ap’ is the area of pre- or post-tensioned tendons within Ac,eff.
k1 Coefficient accounting for the influence of the bond properties of the bonded
reinforcement.
k2 Coefficient accounting for the influence of the form of the strain distribution:
ε1 +ε2
k2 = 2ε1

Where 1 is the larger tensile strain and  2 is the smaller tensile strain at the
boundary of a section subjected to eccentric tension.
k 3 , k 4 Constants defined in the National Annexes.

380 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.7 Cracking Checking

c Cover to the longitudinal reinforcement.

σs Stress in the tensile reinforcement calculated for a cracked section.
Es Elastic modulus of the longitudinal reinforcement.
kt Coefficient accounting for the influence of the duration of the loading.
αe Ratio between steel-concrete elastic modulus (Es/Ecm).

10.7.1.2 Reinforcement Stress Calculation

During the calculation process, it is necessary to determine the reinforcement stress
under service loads (s) with the assumption the section is cracked.
The calculation of these stresses is an iterative process in which CivilFEM searches for
the deformation plane that causes a stress state that is in equilibrium with the external
loads. The reinforcement stress is obtained from this deformation plane and from the
reinforcement position.
The design loads are taken as external loads for the case of serviceability stress
calculation. For the stress calculation at the instant the crack appears, the external loads are
taken as homothetic to the design loads that cause a stress equivalent to the concrete
tensile strength in the fiber under the greatest amount of tension.
If the loads acting on the cross section cause collapse under axial plus bending
checking, the cross section and the associated element are labeled as non-checked.

10.7.2.41 Reinforcement Stress Calculation

Checking results are stored in the corresponding alternative in the CivilFEM results
file.
The following results are available:

CRT_TOT Cracking criterion.

SIGMA Maximum tensile stress.

WK Design crack width. (Not valid for decompression checking).

SRMAX Maximum spacing between cracks. (Not valid for decompression

checking).

EM Difference between the mean strain in the reinforcement and the

mean strain in concrete εsm − εcm . (Not valid for decompression
checking).

POS Cracking position inside the section. (Not valid for decompression
checking).

381 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.7 Cracking Checking

1 Upper fiber.

-1 Lower fiber.

0 Upper and lower fibers.

For the cracking check (wmax > 0) the total criterion is defined as:
Wk
CRT_TOT = W
max

Therefore, values for the total criterion larger than one indicate that the section does
not pass as valid for this code.

382 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.7 Cracking Checking

6.7.2 Cracking according to ACI 318-05

10.7.2.1 Cracking Checking
Checking of the Cracking Limit State according to ACI 318-05 consists of the following
condition:

sd ≤ s
Where:
sd Reinforcement spacing closest to the fiber in tension
s Design reinforcement spacing
CivilFEM checks this condition by applying the general calculation method for the
reinforcement spacing (Art. 10.6.4):
40,000
s = 15 ( ) − 2.5c𝑐
𝑓𝑠

where:
fs Calculated stress in reinforcement at service loads.
cc Geometrical cover

10.7.2.2 Reinforcement Stress Calculation

During the calculation process, it’s necessary to determine the reinforcement stress under
service loads (fs).

The calculation of the stresses is an iterative process in which the program searches for the
deformation plane that causes a stress state that is in equilibrium with the external loads.
The reinforcement stress is obtained from this deformation plane and from the
reinforcement position.

The design loads are taken as external loads.

If the loads acting on the cross section cause collapse under axial plus bending checking, the
cross section and the element to which it belongs are marked as non checked.

10.7.2.3 Checking Results

The following results are available:

CRT_TOT Cracking criterion.

S Design reinforcement spacing. (Not valid for decompression

383 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

6.7 Cracking Checking

checking).

FS Reinforcement stress. (Not valid for decompression checking).

SIGMA Maximum tensile stress.

POS Cracking position inside the section. (Not valid for decompression
checking).

1 Upper fiber.

-1 Lower fiber.

0 Upper and lower fibers.

ELM_OK Plots Ok and not Ok elements.

For the cracking check (sd > 0) the total criterion is defined as:
Sd
CRT_TOT =
S

For decompression checking (sd = 0) the total criterion is defined as:

fc +σmax
CRT_TOT = fc

where

fc concrete design compressive strength.

σmax Maximum section stress (positive tension), corresponding to the SIGMA
result. (If CRT_TOT is negative, it is taken as zero)
Therefore, the values for the total criterion larger than one indicate that the section
is not considered valid for this code.

384 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Chapter 7
Code Check for Structural Steel Members

385 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

7.1. Steel Structures According to

Eurocode 3
For checking steel structures according to Eurocode 3 in CivilFEM, it is possible to check
structures composed by welded or rolled shapes under axial forces, shear forces and
bending moments in 3D. The calculations made by CivilFEM correspond to the
recommendations of Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Part 1-1: General rules and
rules for buildings (EN 1993-1-1:2005).

With CivilFEM it is possible to accomplish the following check and analysis types:

Check steel sections subjected to

- Tension Art. 6.2.3
- Compression Art. 6.2.4
- Bending Art. 6.2.5
- Shear force Art. 6.2.6
- Bending and Shear Art. 6.2.8
- Bending and axial force Art. 6.2.9
- Bending, shear and axial force Art. 6.2.10

Check for buckling

- Compression members with constant cross-section Art. 6.3.1
- Lateral-torsional buckling of beams Art. 6.3.2
- Members subjected to bending and axial tension N/A
- Members subjected to bending and axial compression Art. 6.3.3

Valid cross-sections supported by CivilFEM for checks according to Eurocode 3 are the
following:

All rolled shapes included in the program libraries (see the hot rolled shapes library).
The following welded beams: double T shapes, U or channel shapes, T shapes, box,
equal and unequal legs angles and pipes.
Structural steel sections defined by plates.

CivilFEM considers the above sections as sections composed of plates; for example, an I-
section is composed by five plates: four flanges and one web. These cross sections are

386 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

therefore adapted to the method of analysis of Eurocode 3. Obviously circular sections

cannot be decomposed into plates, so these sections are analyzed separately.

7.1.1. Reference axis

With checks according to Eurocode 3, CivilFEM includes three different coordinate reference
systems. All of these systems are right-handed:

1. CivilFEM Reference Axis. (XCF, YCF, ZCF).

2. Cross-Section Reference Axis. (XS, YS, ZS).
3. Eurocode 3 Reference Axis. (Code axis). (XEC3, YEC3, ZEC3).

YCF ZEC3

YS

ZCF G YEC3

ZS
O
For the Eurocode 3 axes system:

The origin matches to the CivilFEM axes origin.

XEC3 axis coincides with CivilFEM X-axis.

YEC3 axis is the relevant axis for bending and its orientation is defined by the
user (in steel check process).

ZEC3 axis is perpendicular to the plane defined by X and Y axis, to ensure a

right-handed system.

To define this reference system, the user must indicate which direction of the CivilFEM axis
(-Z, -Y, +Z or +Y) coincides with the relevant axis for positive bending. The user may define
this reference system when checking according to this code. In conclusion, the code
reference system coincides with that of CivilFEM, but it is rotated a multiple of 90 degrees,
as shown in table below.

387 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Relevant Axis for Bending in Angle of Rotation (clockwise) of Eurocode 3

CivilFEM Reference System Reference System respect to the CivilFEM
Reference System
- ZCF 90 º (Default value)
- YCF 180 º
+ ZCF 270 º
+ YCF 0º

7.1.2. Material properties

For Eurocode 3 checking, the following material properties are used:

Description Property

Steel yield strength Fy(th)

Ultimate strength Fu(th)

M0
Partial safety factors M1
M2

Elasticity modulus E

Poisson coefficient 

Shear modulus G
*th =thickness of the plate

7.1.3. Section data

Eurocode 3 considers the following data set for the section:

Gross section data

Net section data
Effective section data
Data belonging to the section and plates class.

Gross section data correspond to the nominal properties of the cross-section. For the net
section, only the area is considered. This area is calculated by subtracting the holes for
screws, rivets and other holes from the gross section area. The area of holes is introduced
within the structural steel code properties.

388 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Effective section data and section and plates class data are obtained in the checking process
according to the effective width method. For class 4 cross-sections, this method subtracts
the non-resistance zones for local buckling. However, for cross-sections of a lower class, the
sections are not reduced for local buckling.

In the following tables, the section data used in Eurocode 3 are shown:

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Height H
2.- Web thickness Tw
3.- Flanges thickness Tf
4.- Flanges width B
5.- Distance between flanges Hi
6.- Radius of fillet (Rolled shapes) r1
7.- Toe radius (Rolled shapes) r2
8.- Weld throat thickness (Welded shapes) a
9.- Web free depth d

Output data (None)

Description Data Reference

axis

Input data:
1.- Depth in Y Tky CivilFEM
2.- Depth in Z tkz CivilFEM
3.- Cross-section area A
4.- Moments of inertia for torsion It CivilFEM
5.- Moments of inertia for bending Iyy, Izz CivilFEM
6.- Product of inertia Izy CivilFEM
7.- Elastic resistant modulus Wely, Welz CivilFEM
8.- Plastic resistant modulus Wply, Wplz CivilFEM
9.- Radius of gyration iy, iz CivilFEM
10.- Gravity center coordinates Ycdg, Zcdg Section
11.- Extreme coordinates of the perimeter Ymin, Ymax, Section
Zmin, Zmax
12.- Distance between GC and SC in Y and in Z Yms, Zms Section
13.- Warping constant Iw

389 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Description Data Reference

axis
14.- Shear resistant areas Yws, Zws CivilFEM
15.- Torsional resistant modulus Xwt CivilFEM
16.- Moments of inertia for bending about U, V Iuu, Ivv Principal
17.- Angle Y->U or Z->V  CivilFEM

Output data: (None)

The effective section depends on the section geometry and on the forces and moments that
are applied to it. Consequently, for each element end, the effective section is calculated.

Description Data Reference

axis

Imput data: (None)

Output data:
1.- Cross-section area Aeff
2.- Moments of inertia for bending Iyyeff, Izzeff CivilFEM
3.- Product of inertia Izyeff CivilFEM
4.- Elastic resistant modulus Wyeff, Wzeff CivilFEM
5.- Gravity center coordinates Ygeff, Zgeff Section
6.- Distance between GC and SC in Y and in Z Ymseff, Zmseff Section
7.- Warping constant Iw
8.- Shear resistant areas Yws, Zws CivilFEM

7.1.4. Structural steel code properties

For Eurocode 3 checking, besides the section properties, more data are needed for buckling
checks. These data are shown in the following table.

Description EN 1993-1-
1:2005

Input data:

1.- Unbraced length of member (global buckling). Length between L

lateral restraints (lateral-torsional buckling).

2.- Buckling effective length factors in XY, XZ planes YZ (Effective K XY, K XZ

390 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Description EN 1993-1-
1:2005
buckling length for plane XY =L*K XY ) (Effective buckling length
for plane XZ =L*K XZ ).

3.- Lateral buckling factors, depending on the load and restraint C1, C2, C3
conditions.

4.- Equivalent uniform moment factors for flexural buckling. CMy, CMz

5.- Equivalent uniform moment factors for lateral-torsional buckling. CMLt

6.- Effective length factor regarding the boundar conditions. K

7.- Warping effective factor. KW

7.1.5. Check Process

The checking process includes the evaluation of the following expression:

NEd My.Ed Mz.Ed

+ + ≤1
Nc.Rd My.Rd Mz.Rd
Evaluation steps:

1. Read the loading check requested by the user.

2. Read the CivilFEM axis to be considered as the relevant axis for bending so that it
coincides with the Y axis of Eurocode 3. In CivilFEM, by default, the principle
bending axis that coincides with the +Y axis of Eurocode 3 is the –Z.
3. The following operations are necessary for each selected element:
a. Obtain material properties of the element stored in CivilFEM database and
calculate the rest of the properties needed for checking:
Properties obtained from CivilFEM database:

Calculated properties:

Epsilon, material coefficient:

ε = √235⁄fy (th) (fy in N⁄mm2 )

b. Obtain the cross-section data corresponding to the element.

c. Initialize values of the effective cross-section.
d. Initialize reduction factors of section plates and the rest of plate parameters
necessary for obtaining the plate class.

391 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

e. If necessary for the type of check (check for buckling), calculate the critical
forces and moments of the section for buckling: elastic critical forces for the
XY and XZ planes and elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling.
(See section: Calculation of critical forces and moments).
f. Obtain internal forces and moments: NEd , Vy.Ed , Vz.Ed , Mx.Ed , My.Ed , Mz.Ed
within the section.
g. Specific section checking according to the type of external load. The specific
check includes:
1. If necessary, selecting the forces and moments considered for the
determination of the section class and used for the checking process.
2. Obtaining the cross-section class and calculating the effective section
properties.
3. Checking the cross-section according to the external load and its class by
calculating the check criterion.
h. Store the results.

7.1.6. Section Class and Reduction Factors Calculation

Sections, according to Eurocode 3, are made up by plates. These plates can be classified
according to:

1. Plate function: webs and flanges in Y and Z axis, according to the considered
relevant axis of bending.
2. Plate union condition: internal plates or outstand plates.

For sections included in the program libraries, the information above is defined for each
plate. CivilFEM classifies plates as flanges or webs according to their axis and provides the
plate union condition for each end. Ends can be classified as fixed or free (a fixed end is
connected to another plate and free end is not).

For checking the structure for safety, Eurocode 3 classifies sections as one of four possible
classes:

Class 1 Cross-sections which can form a plastic hinge with the rotation capacity
required for plastic analysis.

Class 2 Cross-sections which can reach their plastic moment resistance, but have
limited rotation capacity.

392 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Class 3 Cross-sections for which the stress in the extreme compression fiber of the
steel member can reach the yield strength, but local buckling is liable to
prevent the development of the plastic moment resistance.

Class 4 Cross-sections for which it is necessary to make explicit allowances for the
effects of local buckling when determining their moment resistance or
compression resistance.

The cross-section class is the highest (least favorable) class of all of its elements: flanges and
webs (plates). First, the class of each plate is determined according to the limits of Eurocode
3. The plate class depends on the following:

1. The geometric width to thickness ratio with the plate width properly corrected
according to the plate and shape type.
GeomRat = Corrected_Width / thickness
The width correction consists of subtracting the zone that does not contribute to
buckling resistance in the fixed ends. This zone depends on the shape type of the
section. Usually, the radii of the fillet in hot rolled shapes or the weld throats in
welded shapes determine the deduction zone. The values of the corrected width that
CivilFEM uses for each shape type include:

 Welded Shapes:
Double T section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

d Web free depth

Outstand flanges:

Corrected B Tw
− − r1
width 2 2

Where:

B Flanges width

Tw Web thickness

𝑟1 Radius of fillet

393 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

T section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

Outstand flanges:

Corrected width = B/d

C section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

Outstand flanges:

Corrected
B – Tw –r1
width

L section:

Corrected width = √I12 + I22

l1 , l2 Angle flange width

Box section:

Internal webs:

Corrected width = H

H Height

Internal flanges:

Corrected width = B − 2 ∙ Tw

Tw Web thickness

Circular hollow section

394 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Corrected width = H

 Rolled Shapes:
Double T section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

d Web free depth

Outstand flanges:

Corrected width = B/2

B Flanges width

T Section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

Outstand flanges:

Corrected width = B/2

C Section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

Outstand flanges:

Corrected width = B

L Section:

Corrected width = = √l12 + l22

l1 , l2 Angle flange width

Box section:

Internal webs:

Corrected width = d

395 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Internal flanges:

Corrected width = B − 3 ∙ Tf

Tf Flanges thickness

Pipe section:

Corrected width = H

2. The limit listed below for width to thickness ratio. This limit depends on the
material parameter  and the normal stress distribution in the plate section. The
latter value is given by the following parameters: , Ψ and k0, and the plate type,
internal or outstand; the outstand case depends on if the free end is under
tension or compression.
Limit (class) = f(ε, α, Ψ, k 0 )
ε = √235⁄fy (fy in N⁄mm2 )
where:

 Compressed length / total length

 σ2 ⁄σ1

k0 Buckling factor

σ2 The higher stress in the plate ends.

σ1 The lower stress in the plate ends.

A linear stress distribution on the plate is assumed.

The procedure to determine the section class is as follows:

1. Obtain stresses at first plate ends from the stresses applied on the section, properly
filtered according to the check type requested by the user.
2. Calculate the parameters: , Ψ and k0
For internal plates:

ENV 1993-1-1:1992 EN 1993-1-1:2005

1≥Ψ≤0 8.2
k0
1.05 + Ψ
16
k0 = k 0 = 7.81 − 6.29 ∙ Ψ + 9.78 ∙ Ψ 2
0 > 𝛹 > −1 √(1 + Ψ)2 + 0.112 ∙ (1 − Ψ)2 + (1 + Ψ)

396 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

−1 ≥ Ψ − 2 k 0 = 5.98 ∙ (1 − Ψ)2

Ψ ≤ −2 k 0 = infinite

For outstand plates with an absolute value of the stress at the free end greater than
the corresponding value at the fixed end:

For 1 ≥ Ψ ≥ −1
k 0 = 0.57 − 0.21 ∙ Ψ + 0.07 ∙ Ψ 2
For −1 > 𝛹
k 0 = infinite

For outstand plates with an absolute value of the stress at the free end lower than
the corresponding value at the fixed end:

For 1≥Ψ≥0
0.578
k0 =
Ψ + 0.34
For 0 > 𝛹 ≥ −1
k 0 = 1.7 − 5 ∙ Ψ + 17.1 ∙ Ψ2
For −1 > 𝛹
k 0 = infinite
Cases in which 𝑘0 = infinite are not included in Eurocode 3. With these cases, the plate is
considered to be practically in tension and it will not be necessary to determine the class.
These cases have been included in the program to avoid errors, and the value 𝑘0 = 𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑒
has been adopted because the resultant plate class is 1 and the plate reduction factor is  =
1 (the same values as if the whole plate was in tension). The reduction factor is used later in
the effective section calculation.

3. Obtain the limiting proportions as functions of: , Ψ and k0 and the plate
characteristics (internal, outstand: free end in compression or tension).

EN 1993-1-1:2005:

Internal plates:

397 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Limit(1) = 396 ε / (13 α − 1) for α < 0.5

Limit(1) = 36 ε / α for α < 0.5

Limit(2) = 456 ε / (13 α − 1) for α ≥ 0.5

Limit(2) = 41.5 ε / α for α < 0.5

Limit(3) = 42 ε / (0.67 + 0.33 Ψ ) for Ψ > −1

Limit(3) = 62 ε (1 − Ψ)√(−Ψ) for Ψ ≤ −1

Outstand plates, free end in compression:

Limit(1) = 9 ε / α

Limit(2) = 10 ε / α

Limit(3) = 21 ε √K 0

Outstand plates, free end in tension:

9ε
Limit(1) =
α√α
10 ε
Limit(2) =
α√α

Limit(3) = 21 ε√K 0

Above is the general equation used by the program to obtain the limiting proportions
for determining plate classes. In addition, plates of Eurocode 3 may be checked
according to special cases.

For example:

In sections totally compressed:

= 1; Ψ = 1 for all plates

In sections under pure bending:

 = 0.5; Ψ = -1 for the web

398 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

 = 1; Ψ = 1 for compressed flanges

4. Obtain the plate class:

If GeomRat < Limit(1) Plate Class = 1
If Limit(1) ≤ GeomRat < Limit(2) Plate Class = 2
If Limit(2) ≤ GeomRat < Limit(3) Plate Class = 3
If Limit(3) ≤ GeomRat Plate Class = 4

Repeat these steps (1,2,3,4) for each section plate.

5. Assign of the highest class of the plates to the entire section.

In tubular sections, the section class is directly determined as if it were a unique
plate, with GeomRat and the Limits calculated as follows:
6. GeomRat = outer diameter/ thickness.
Limit(1) = 50 ε2
Limit(2) = 70 ε2
Limit(3) = 90 ε2

For class 4 sections, the section resistance is reduced, using the effective width method.

For each section plate, the effective lengths at both ends of the plate and the reduction
factors 𝜌1 and 𝜌2 are calculated. These factors relate the length of the effective zone at each
plate end to its width.

Effective_length_end 1 = plate_width∗ ρ1
Effective_length_end 2 = plate_width∗ ρ2

The following formula from Eurocode 3 has been implemented for this process:

Ψ = σ2 ⁄σ1

1. Internal plates:

For 0 ≤ Ψ ≤ 1 (Both ends compressed)

399 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

beff = ρ b̅

be1 = 2 beff / (5 − Ψ)

be2 = beff − be1

be1
ρ1 =
plate_width

be2
ρ2 =
plate_width

b̅ = corrected plate width

plate_width = real plate width
For Ψ < 0 (end 1 in compression and end 2 in tension)

beff = ρ bc = ρ b̅/(1 − Ψ)

be1 = 0.4 beff

be2 = 0.6 beff
be1
ρ1 =
plate_width
be2 + bt
ρ2 =
plate_width

2. Outstand plates:

400 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

For 0 ≤ Ψ ≤ 1 (Both ends in compression: end 1 fixed, end 2 free)

beff = ρ b̅

beff
ρ1 =
plate_width
ρ2 = 0
For Ψ < 0(end 1 fixed and in tension, end 2 free and in compression)

beff = ρbc = ρc⁄(1 − Ψ)

beff + bt
ρ1 =
plate_width
ρ2 = 0
For Ψ < 0 (end 1 fixed and in compression, end 2 free and in tension)

beff = ρbc = ρc⁄(1 − Ψ)

401 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

beff
ρ1 =
plate_width

bt
ρ2 =
plate_width
𝜌1 and 𝜌2 are switched.

The global reduction factor  is obtained by as follows:

EN 1993-1-1:2005:

For internal compression elements

For λ̅p > 0.673

λ̅p − 0.055(3 + Ψ)
ρ= 2
λ̅p

For λ̅p ≤ 0.673

ρ=1

For outstands compression elements:

For λ̅p > 0.748

λ̅p − 0.188
ρ= 2
λ̅p

For λ̅p ≤ 0.748

ρ=1

Both Eurocode define as the plate slendernesss given by:

b̅⁄t
λ̅p =
28.4ε√k 0
where:

402 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

𝑏̅ = corrected plate width

t = relevant thickness

 = material parameter

k0 = buckling factor

To determine effective section properties, three steps are followed:

1. Effective widths of flanges are calculated from factors α and Ψ these factors are
determined from the gross section properties. As a result, an intermediate
section is obtained with reductions taken in the flanges only.
2. The resultant section properties are obtained and factors α and Ψ are calculated
again.
3. Effective widths of webs are calculated so that the finalized effective section is
determined. Finally, the section properties are recalculated once more.
The recalculated section properties are included in the effective section data table.
Checking can be accomplished with the gross, net or effective section properties,
according to the section class and checking type.

Each checking type follows a specific procedure that will be explained in the following
sections.

7.1.7. Checking of Members in Axial Tension

Corresponds to chapter 6.2.3 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
NEd = FX Design value of the axial force (positive if tensile, element not processed
if compressive).

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

For this checking type, the section class is always 1 and the considered section is
either the gross or net section.
3. Criteria calculation.
For members under axial tension, the general criterion Crt_TOT is checked at each
section. This criterion coincides with the axial criterion Crt_N.
NEd
NEd ≤ Nt.Rd → Crt_TOT = Crt_N = ≤1
Nt.Rd

where Nt.Rd is the design tension resistance of the cross-section, taken as the smaller
value of:

403 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

NPl,Rd = Afy ⁄YM 0 plastic design strength

of the gross cross-section

Nu.Rd = 0.9Anet fu ⁄YM2 ultimate design strength

of the net cross-section

4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table:

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design value of the tensile force (EN 1993-1-1:2005).
NTRD Nt.Rd Design tensile strength of the cross-section.
CRT_N NEd ⁄Nt.Rd Axial criterion.
CRT_TOT NEd ⁄Nt.Rd Eurocode 3 global criterion.
NPLRD Npl.Rd Design plastic strength of the gross cross-section.

NURD Nu.Rd Ultimate design strength

7.1.8. Checking of Members in Axial Compression

Corresponds to chapter 6.2.4 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
NEd = FX Design value of the axial force (positive if compressive, element not
processed if tensile).

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

For this check type, the section class is always 1 and the considered section is the
gross or net section.
3. Criteria calculation.
For members in axial compression, the general criterion Crt_TOT is checked at each
section. This criterion coincides with the axial criterion Crt_N:
NEd
NEd ≤ Nc.Rd → Crt_TOT = Crt_N = ≤1
Nc.Rd

where 𝑁𝑐.𝑅𝑑 is the design compression resistance of the cross-section

404 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Class 1,2 or 3 cross-sections:

Nc.Rd = Afy ⁄YM 0 design plastic resistance of the gross section

Class 4 cross sections:

EN 1993-1-1:2005:

Nc.Rd = Afeff fy ⁄YM 0

4. Output results written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF) . Checking results: criteria
and variables are described at the following table.

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design axial force (EN 1993-1-1:2005).
NCRD Nc.Rd Design compression strength of the cross-section.
CRT_N Nd ⁄Nc.Rd Axial criterion.

CRT_TOT Nd ⁄Nc.Rd Eurocode 3 global criterion.

CLASS Section Class.

AREA A, Aeff Area of the section (Gross or Effective).

7.1.9. Checking of Members under Bending Moment

Corresponds to chapter 6.2.5 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
MEd = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment along the relevant axis for
bending.

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of the section with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation process is
accomplished with the gross section properties.

405 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

3. Criteria calculation.
For members subjected to a bending moment in the absence of shear force, the
following condition is checked at each section:
where:

MEd
|MEd | ≤ Mc.Rd → Crt_TOT = Crt_My = | |≤1
Mc.Rd

MEd = design value of the bending moment

Mc.Rd = design moment resistance of the cross-section

Class 1 or 2 cross-sections:

Mc.Rd = Wpl ∙ fy ⁄ YM 0

Class 3 cross sections:

Mc.Rd = Wel ∙ fy ⁄ YM 0

Class 4 cross sections:

EN 1993-1-1:2005:

Mc.Rd = Weff ∙ fy ⁄ YM 0

4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Description

MED MEd Design value of the bending moment (EN 1993-1-
1:2005).
MCRD Mc.Rd Design moment resistance of the cross-section.
CRT_M Md ⁄Mc.Rd Bending criterion.
CRT_TOT Md ⁄Mc.Rd Eurocode 3 global criterion.
CLASS Section Class.
W Wel , Wpl Weff Used section modulus (Elastic, Plastic or Effective).

7.1.10. Checking of Members under Shear Force

Corresponds to chapter 6.2.6 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

406 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
VEd = FZ or FY Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the relevant
axis of bending.

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

For this checking type, the section class is always 1 and the effective section is the
gross section.
3. Criteria calculation.
With members under shear force, the following condition is checked at each section:
VEd
|VEd | ≤ VPl.Rd → Crt_TOT = Crt_S = | |≤1
V Pl.Rd

where:

VEd design value of the shear force

VPl.Rd design plastic shear resistance:VPl.Rd = Av (fy ⁄√3)⁄YM0 Modificat

ions to
Av shear area, obtained subtracting from the gross area the summation the
of the flanges areas: Av = A − ∑ Flanges_Area previous
computat
ion of Av are as follows:

a. Rolled I and H sections, load parallel to web:

Av = Av + (t w + 2r)t f

b. Rolled channel sections, load parallel to web:

Av = Av + (t w + r)t f

EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies additional cases for the calculation of Av :

 Rolled I and H sections with load parallel to web:

Av = Av + (t w + 2r)t f but not less than η hw t w

 Rolled T shaped sections with load parallel to web:

Av = 0.9 ∙ (A − b ∙ t r )

Where:

η η = 1.2 for steels with fy = 460 MPa

η= 1.0 for steels with fy > 460 MPa

407 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

hw Web depth

tw Web thickness

4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Description

VED VEd Design value of the shear force (EN 1993-1-1:2005).
VPLRD Vpl.Rd Design plastic shear resistance.

CRT_S Vd ⁄Vpl.Rd Shear criterion.

CRT_TOT Vd ⁄Vpl.Rd Eurocode 3 global criterion.

CLASS Section Class.

S_AREA Av Shear area.

7.1.11. Checking of Members under Bending Moment and

Shear Force
Corresponds to chapter 6.2.8 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
VEd = FZ or FY Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the relevant
axis of bending.

MEd = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment along the relevant axis of
bending.

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of the sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with gross section properties.
3. Criteria calculation.
For members subjected to bending moment and shear force, the following condition
is checked at each section:

408 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Md
|MEd | ≤ MV.Rd → Crt_TOT = Crt_BS = | |≤1
M V.Rd

Where:

MV.Rd = design resistance moment of the cross-section, reduced by the presence of

shear.

The reduction for shear is applied if the design value of the shear force exceeds 50%
of the design plastic shear resistance of the cross-section; written explicitly as:

VEd > 0.5 Vpl.Rd

The design resistance moment is obtained as follows:

EN 1993-1-1:2005:
a. For double T cross-sections with equal flanges, bending about the major axis:

ρA2v fy
MV.Rd = (Wpl − ) ⁄Y
4t w M0

2
2VEd
ρ=( − 1)
Vpl.Rd
Aw = hw t w

b. For other cases the yield strength is reduced as follows:

fy = fy (1 − ρ)

Note: This reduction of the yield strength fy is applied to the entire section. Eurocode
3 only requires the reduction to be applied to the shear area, and therefore, it is a
conservative simplification.

For both cases, MV.Rd is the smaller value of either MV.Rd or MC.Rd.

MC.Rd is the design moment resistance of the cross-section, calculated according to

the class.

4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Description

409 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

MED MEd Design value of the bending moment (EN 1993-1-

1:2005).
VED VEd Design value of the shear force (EN 1993-1-
1:2005).
MVRD Mv.Rd Reduced design resistance moment of the cross-
section.
CRT_BS Md ⁄Mv.Rd Bending and Shear criterion.
CRT_TOT Md ⁄Mv.Rd Eurocode 3 global criterion.
CLASS Section Class.
S_AREA Av Shear area.
W Wel , Wpl , Weff Used section modulus (Elastic, Plastic or Effective).

VPLRD Vpl.Rd Design plastic shear resistance.

RHO ρ Reduction factor.

7.1.12. Checking of Members under Bending Moment and

Axial Force
Corresponds to chapter 6.2.9 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
NEd = FX Design value of the axial force.

My.Ed = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment along the relevant axis of
bending.

Mz.Ed = MZ or MY Design value of the bending moment about the secondary axis
of bending.

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of the sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. These calculations are
accomplished with the gross section properties.
3. Criteria calculation.
For members subjected to bi-axial bending and in absence of shear force, the
following conditions at each section are checked:

410 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Class 1 and 2 sections:

α
My.Ed Mz.Ed β
( ) +( ) ≤1
MNy.Rd MNz.Rd
This condition is equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = (Crt_My)α + (Crt_Mz)β ≤ 1

My.Ed
Crt_My = ( )
MNy.Rd
Mz.dE
Crt_Mz = ( )
MNz.Rd
Where MNy.Rd and MNz.Rd are the design moment resistance of the cross-section,
reduced by the presence of the axial force:
2
N
MNy.Rd = Mypl.Rd [1 − ( Ed⁄N ) ]
pl.Rd

2
N
MNz.Rd = Mzpl.Rd [1 − ( Ed⁄N ) ]
pl.Rd

Where  and b are constants, which may take the following values:

For I and H sections:

 = 2 and b =5n β 1
For circular tubes:

 = 2 and b =2
For rectangular hollow sections:
1.66
α = β = 1−1.13n2

but αβ6

For solid rectangles and plates (the rest of sections):

NEd
n=( )
Npl.Rd

411 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Furthermore, the code specifies that in the case of rolled shapes for I or H sections or
other sections with flanges, it is not necessary to reduce the design plastic strength
for bending around the y-y axis due to the axial force if the following two conditions
are fulfilled:

Nd ≤ 0.25 ∙ Npl.Rd ∙ y
0.5 ∙ hw ∙ t w ∙ fy
Nd ≤
γM0
(if it does not reach half the tension strength of the web)
The same is applicable for bending around the z-z axis due to the axial force. There is
no reduction when the following condition is fulfiled:

hw ∙ t w ∙ fy
Nd ≤
γM0

In absence of Mz.d, the previous check can be reduced to:

My.Ed
( )≤1
MNy.Rd
Condition equivalent to:

My.Ed
Crt_TOT = Crt_My = ( )
MNy.Rd
Class 3 sections (without holes for fasteners):

NEd My.Ed Mz.Ed

( )+( )+( )≤1
Afyd Wel.y fyd Mel.z fyd
Condition equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My + Crt_Mz  1

NEd
Crt_N = ( )
Afyd
My.Ed
Crt_My = ( )
Wel.y fyd
Mz.Ed f
Crt_Mz = ( ) fyd = y⁄γM0
Wel.y fyd
Where Mel.y is the elastic resistant modulus about the y axis and Wel.z is the elastic
resistant modulus about the z axis.

In absence of Mz.d, the above criterion becomes:

412 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

NEd My.Ed
( )+( )≤1
Afyd Wel.y fyd
Which is equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My  1

NEd
Crt_N ( )
Afyd
My.Ed
Crt_My = ( )
Wel.y fyd
Class 4 sections:

NEd My.Ed + NEd eNy Mz.Ed + NEd eNy

( )+( )+( )
Aeff fyd Weff.y fyd Weff.z fyd
Condition equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My + Crt_Mz  1

NEd
Crt_N = ( )
Aeff fyd
MEy.d + NEd eNy
Crt_My = ( )
Weff.y fyd
Mz.Ed + NEd eNy
Crt_Mz = ( )
Weff.z fyd
Where:

Aeff effective area of the cross-section

Weff.y effective section modulus of the cross-section when subjected to a

moment about the y axis

Weff.z effective section modulus of the cross-section when subjected to a

moment about the z axis

eNy shift of the center of gravity along the y axis

eNz shift of the center of gravity along the z axis

Without Mz.d , the above criterion becomes:

413 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

NEd My.Ed + NEd eNy NEd eNy

( )+( )+( )≤1
Aeff fyd Weff.y fyd Weff.z fyd
which is equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My + Crt_Mz  1

NEd
Crt_N = ( )
Aeff fyd
My.Ed + Nd eNy
Crt_My = ( )
Weff fyd
NEd eNy
Crt_Mz = ( )
Weff.z fyd
4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design value of the axial force (EN 1993-1-1:2005).
MYED My.Ed Design value of the bending moment about Y axis
(EN 1993-1-1:2005).
MZED Mz.Ed Design value of the bending moment about Z axis
(EN 1993-1-1:2005).
NCRD A ∙ fyd, Design compression resistance of the cross-section
Aeff ∙ fyd

MNYRD MNy∙Rd, Wel.y ∙ fyd, Reduced design moment resistance of the cross-
Weff∙y ∙ fyd section about Y axis

MNZRD MNz.Rd, Wel.z ∙ fyd, Reduced design moment resistance of the cross-
Weff∙ Z ∙ fyd section about Z axis

CRT_N NEd Axial criterion

⁄N
cRd

CRT_MY MyEd Bending criterion along Y

⁄M
NyRd

CRT_MZ MzEd Bending criterion along Z

⁄M
NzRd

414 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Result Concepts Description

ALPHA α Alpha constant
BETA β Beta constant
CRT_TOT Crt_tot  1 Eurocode 3 global criterion

CLASS Section Class

AREA A, Aeff Area of the section utilized (Gross or Effective)
WY Wel.y, Wpl.y, Weff.y Used section Y modulus (Elastic, Plastic or Effective)

WZ Wel.z, Wpl.z, Weff.z Used section Z modulus (Elastic, Plastic or Effective)

SIGXED σX.Ed Maximum longitudinal stress

ENY eNy Shift of the Z axis in Y direction

ENZ eNz Shift of the Y axis in Z direction

USE_MY My.Ed + NEd ∙ eNy Modified design value of the bending moment
about Y axis
USE_MZ Mz.Ed + NEd ∙ eNz Modified design value of the bending moment
about Z axis
PARM_N n Parameter n

7.1.13. Checking of Members under Bending, Shear and

Axial Force
Corresponds to chapter 6.2.10 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection. The forces and moments considered for this
checking type are:
NEd = FX Design value of the axial force.

Vy.Ed = FY or FZ Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the secondary

axis of bending.

Vy.Ed = FY or FZ Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the relevant

axis of bending.

My.Ed = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment about the relevant axis of

415 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

bending.

Mz.Ed = MZ or MY Design value of the bending moment about the secondary axis
of bending.

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of the sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with the gross section properties.
3. Criteria calculation.
For members subjected to bending, axial and shear force, the same conditions of the
bending +axial force and bi-axial bending are checked at each section, reducing the
design plastic resistance moment for the presence of shear force.
The shear force effect is taken into account when it exceeds 50% of the design plastic
resistance of the cross-section. In this case, both the axial and the shear force are
taken into account.
The axial force effects are included as stated in the previous section, and the shear
force effects are taken into account considering a yield strength for the cross-section,
reduced by the factor (1-), as follows:

fyd = fy (1 − ρ)/YM 0
where:
2
ρ = (2VEd /Vpl.Rd − 1) for VEd /Vpl.Rd > 0.5

ρ=0 for VEd /Vpl.Rd < 0.5

This yield strength reduction is selectively applied to the resistance of the cross-
section along each axis, according to the previous conditions.

Note: The yield strength reduction is applied to the entire cross-section; however,
Eurocode only requires the reduction to be applied to the shear area. Thus, it is a
conservative simplification.

4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

416 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design value of the axial force (EN 1993-1-
1:2005).
VZED VEd Design value of the shear force (EN 1993-1-
1:2005).
VYED VEd Design value of the shear force (EN 1993-1-
1:2005).
MYED My.Ed Design value of the bending moment about Y
axis (EN 1993-1-1:2005).
MZED My.Ed Design value of the bending moment about Z
axis (EN 1993-1-1:2005).
NCRD A ∙ fyd, Design compression resistance of the cross-
Aeff ∙ fyd section.

MNYRD MNy.Rd, Reduced design moment Y resistance of the

Wy ∙ fyd ∙ (1 − ρ) cross-section.

MNZRD MNz∙Rd, Reduced design moment Z resistance of the

Wz ∙ fyd ∙ (1 − ρ) cross-section.

CRT_N NEd ⁄NcRd Axial criterion.

CRT_MY MyEd /MNyRd Bending Y criterion.

CRT_MZ MzEd /MNzRd Bending Z criterion.

ALPHA α Alpha constant.
BETA β Beta constant.
RHO_Y ρ Reduction factor for MNYRD.
RHO_Z ρ Reduction factor for MNZRD.
CRT_TOT Crt_tot  1 Eurocode 3 global criterion.
AREA A, Aeff Used area of the section (Gross or Effective).
WY Wel.y, Wpl.y, Weff.y Used section Y modulus (Elastic, Plastic or
Effective).
WZ Wel.z, Wpl∙z, Weff∙z Used section Z modulus (Elastic, Plastic or
Effective).

417 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Result Concepts Description

SIGXED σx.Ed Maximum longitudinal stress.
ENY eNy Shift of the Z axis in Y direction.

ENZ eNz Shift of the Y axis in Z direction.

USE_MY My∙Ed + NEd∙ eNz Modified design value of the bending moment
about Y axis.
USE_MZ MZ.Ed + NEd ∙ eNy Modified design value of the bending moment
about Z axis.
SHY_AR Av Shear Y area.
SHZ_AR Av Shear Z area.
PARM_N n Parameter n.

7.1.14. Checking for Buckling of Members in Compression

Corresponds to chapter 6.3.1 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered in this checking type are:
NEd = FX Design value of the axial force (positive if compressive,
otherwise element is not processed).

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the sections general processing with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with the gross section properties.
3. Criteria calculation.
When checking the buckling of compression members, the criterion is given by:
N
NEd ≤ Nb.Rd → Crt_TOT = Crt_CB = N Ed ≤ 1
p.Rd

where:

Nb.Rd Design buckling resistance. Nb.Rd = χ β A fy /γM1

b = 1 for class 1, 2 or 3 sections.

b = Aeff /A for class 4 sections.

418 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

χ Reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode, the program does
not consider the torsional or the lateral-torsional buckling.

The  calculation in members of constant cross-section may be determined from:

1
χ= 1⁄ ≤1
∅ + (∅2 − λ̅2 ) 2

∅ = 0.5[1 + α(λ̅ − 0.2) + λ̅2 ]

where  is an imperfection factor that depends on the buckling curve. This curve
depends on the cross-section type, producing the following values for :

Buckling Buckling
Section type Limits
axis
Steel fy
curve


< 460 MPa a 0.21

Rolled I h/b>1.2 and t  40mm y–y
≥ 460 MPa a0 0.13

< 460 MPa b 0.34

Rolled I h/b>1.2 and t  40mm z–z
≥ 460 MPa a0 0.13

h/b>1.2 and 40mm<t 

< 460 MPa b 0.34
Rolled I y–y
100mm ≥ 460 MPa a 0.21

h/b>1.2 and 40mm<t 

< 460 MPa c 0.49
Rolled I z–z
100mm ≥ 460 MPa a 0.21

< 460 MPa b 0.34

Welded I h/b  1.2 and t  100mm y–y
≥ 460 MPa a 0.21

< 460 MPa c 0.49

Welded I h/b  1.2 and t  100mm z–z
≥ 460 MPa a 0.21

< 460 MPa d 0.76

Rolled I t>100mm y–y
≥ 460 MPa c 0.49

< 460 MPa d 0.76

Rolled I t>100mm z–z
≥ 460 MPa c 0.49

Welded I t  40mm y–y all b 0.34

Welded I t  40mm z–z all c 0.49

Welded I t >40mm y–y all c 0.49

419 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Welded I t >40mm z–z all d 0.76

< 460 MPa a 0.21

Pipes Hot finished all
≥ 460 MPa a0 0.13

Cold formed all all c 0.49

Thick weld:
Reinforced box all all c 0.49
a/t>0.5 b/t<30 h/tw<30
sections
In other case all all b 0.34

U, T, plate - all all c 0.49

L - all all b 0.34

1⁄
λ̅ = [βA Afy /Ncr ] 2

Where Ncr is the elastic critical force for the relevant buckling mode. (See section for
Critical Forces and Moments Calculation).

In the case of angular sections, the buckling length will be taken as the highest among
the buckling lengths on the Y and Z axis.

4. The elastic critical axial forces are calculated in the planes XY (Ncrxy) and XZ (Ncrxz)
and the corresponding values of xy and xz , and the correspondent to the
principal axis Ncru and Ncrv and the values for u and v taking the smaller one as
the final value for .

χ = min(χxy , χxz , χu , χv )

5. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design value of the compressive force (EN
1993-1-1:2005).
NBRD Nb.Rd Design buckling resistance of a compressed
member.

420 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Result Concepts Description

CRT_CB Nd /Nb.Rd Compression buckling criterion.
CRT_TOT Nd /Nb.Rd Eurocode 3 global criterion.
CHI Min{χy , χz } Reduction factor for the relevant buckling
mode.
BETA_A βA Ratio of the used area to gross area.
AREA A Area of the gross section.
CHI_Y χy Reduction factor for the relevant My buckling
mode.
CHI_Z χz Reduction factor for the relevant Mz buckling
mode.
CHI_V χv Reduction factor for the principal axis V.
CHI_U χ𝑢 Reduction factor for the principal axis U.
CLASS Section Class.
PHI_Y ∅y Parameter Phi for bending My.

PHI_Z ∅z Parameter Phi for bending Mz.

PHI_V ∅𝑣 Parameter Phi for the principal axis V.
PHI_U ∅𝑢 Parameter Phi for the principal axis U.
LAM_Y λy Non-dimensional reduced slenderness for
bending My.
LAM_Z λz Non-dimensional reduced slenderness for
bending Mz.
LAM_V λv Non-dimensional reduced slenderness for the
principal axis V.
LAM_U λ𝑢 Non-dimensional reduced slenderness for the
principal axis U.
NCR_Y Ncr Elastic critical force for the relevant My
buckling mode.
NCR_Z Ncr Elastic critical force for the relevant Mz
buckling mode.
NCR_V Ncr Elastic critical force for the principal axis V.

421 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Result Concepts Description

NCR_U Ncr Elastic critical force for the principal axis U.
ALP_Y αy Imperfection factor for bending My.

ALP_Z αz Imperfection factor for bending Mz.

7.1.15. Checking for Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Beams

Subjected to Bending
Corresponds chapter 6.3.2 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
MEd = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment about the relevant
axis of bending.

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with the gross section properties.
3. Criteria calculation.
When checking for lateral-torsional buckling of beams, the criterion shall be taken as:
M
|MEd | ≤ Mb.Rd  Crt_TOT = Crt_LT = | Ed | ≤ 1
M b.Rd

where:

Mb.Rd Design buckling resistance moment of a laterally unrestrained

beam. Mb.Rd = χLT βw Wpl.y fy / γM1

bw = 1 for class 1and 2 sections.

bw = Wel.y /Wpl.y for class 3 sections.

bw = Weff.y /Wpl.y for class 4 sections.

LT Reduction factor for lateral-torsional buckling.

The value of LT is calculated as:

422 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

1
χLT = 1⁄ ≤1
∅LT + (∅2LT − λ̅2LT ) 2

∅LT = 0.5[1 + αLT (λ̅LT − 0.2) + λ̅2LT ]

1⁄
λ̅LT = [βw Wpl.y fy /Mcr ] 2

Where:

αLT is the imperfection factor for lateral-torsional buckling:

Section type Limits Buckling α

curve

Rolled I h/b≤2 a 0.21

h/b>2 b 0.34

Welded I h/b≤2 c 0.49

h/b>2 d 0.76

Others 0.76

Mcr is the elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional

buckling.

4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Description

MED MEd Design value of the bending moment (EN 1993-1-
1:2005).
MBRD Mb.Rd Buckling resistance moment of a laterally
unrestrained beam.
CRT_LT Md /Mb.Rd Lateral-torsional buckling criterion.
CRT_TOT Md /Mb∙Rd Eurocode 3 global criterion.
CLASS Section Class.
CHI_LT χLT Reduction factor for lateral-torsional buckling.

423 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

BETA_W βW Ratio of the used modulus to plastic modulus.

WPL Wpl.y Plastic modulus.

PHI_LT ∅LT Parameter Phi for lateral-torsional buckling.

LAM_LT λLT Non-dimensional reduced slenderness.
MCR Mcr Elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling.
ALP_LT αLT Imperfection factor for lateral-torsional buckling.

7.1.16. Checking for Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Members

Subjected to Bending and Axial Compression
Corresponds to chapter 6.3.3 in EN 1993-1-1:2005.

1. Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered in this checking type are:
NEd = FX Design value of the axial compression (positive if
compressive, otherwise element not processed if tensile).

My.Ed = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment about the relevant

axis of bending.

Mz.Ed = MZ or MY Design value of the bending moment about the secondary

axis of bending.

2. Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with the gross section properties.
3. Criteria calculation.

EN 1993-1-1:2005 and Annex B (method 2)

The following criterion will always be calculated:

NEd My,Ed + eN,y NEd Mz,Ed + eN,z NEd

( ) + (K y Cmy ) + (αz K y Cmz )≤1
Nb,Rd 1 Myb,Rd 1 Mzb,Rd 1

Crt_1 = Crt_N1 + Crt_My1 + Crt_Mz1  1

424 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Elements without torsional buckling:

NEd My,Ed + eN,y NEd Mz,Ed + eN,z NEd

( ) + (αy K y Cmy ) + (K z Cmz )≤1
Nb,d 2 Myb,Rd 2 Mzb,Rd 2

Elements which may have torsional buckling:

NEd My,Ed + eN,y NEd Mz,Ed + eN,z NEd

( ) + (K yLT ) + (K z Cmz )≤1
Nb.Rd 2 Myb,Rd 2 Mzb,Rd 2

 Crt_2 = Crt_N2 + Crt_My2 + Crt_Mz2  1

 Crt_TOT = Max (Crt_1, Crt_2)
Where:

NEd
Crt_N1 = ( ) Axial force criterion 1.
Nb,Rd 1

My,Ed + eN,y NEd Bending moment criterion for principal

Crt_My1 = (K y Cmy )
Myb,Rd 1 axis 1.

Mz,Ed + eN,z NEd Bending moment criterion for secondary

Crt_Mz1 = (K z Cmz )
Mzb,Rd 2 axis 1

Crt_TOT1 General criterion 1.

NEd
Crt_N2 = ( ) Axial force criterion 2.
Nb,Rd 2

My,Ed + eN,y NEd Bending moment criterion 2 for

Crt_My2 (αy K y Cmy )
Myb,Rd 2 principal axis without torsional buckling

Bending moment criterion 2 for

My,Ed + eN,y NEd
Crt_My2 = (K yLT ) principal axis when torsional buckling is
Myb,Rd 2
considered.

Mz,Ed + eN,z NEd Bending moment criterion 2 for

Crt_Mz2 = (K z Cmz )
Mzb,Rd 2 secondary axis.

Crt_TOT2 Criterion 2

Crt_TOT=max (Crt_TOT1, Crt_TOT2 ) Global criterion.

425 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Where:
Nb,Rd1 = χy Afy /γM1 Mb,Rdy1 = χLT Wy fy /γM1 Mb,Rdz1 = W f /γ
z y M1
Nb,Rd2 = χy Afy /γM1 Mb,Rdy2 = χLT Wy fy /γM1 Mb,Rdz2 = W f /γ
z y M1

(χLT = 1.0 when torsional buckling is not considered).

χy and χz are the reduction factors defined for the section corresponding to the
check for Buckling of Compression Members.
χLT lateral buckling factor according to 6.3.2.2. Assumes the value of 1 for members
not susceptible to torsional deformations.
eN,y and eN,z shifts of the centroid of the effective area relative to the centre of
gravity of the gross section in class 4 members for y, z axes.
Cm,y , Cm,z and Cm,LT are equivalent uniform moment factors for flexural bending.
These factors are entered as member properties at member level. (See CMy , CMy and
CMz ). These factors may be taken from Table B.3 from Annex B of code EN 1993-1-
1:2005.
Checking Parameters:
A WY Wz αY αz eN,y eN,z eN,z
Class
A Wpl,y Wpl,z
1 0.6 0.6 0 0
A Wpl,y Wpl,z
2 0.6 0.6 0 0
A Wel,y Wel,z
3 0.8 1 0 0

Depending Depending
on on
4 Aeff Weff,y Weff,z 0.8 1 members members
and and
stresses stresses

Interaction Factors:

Section
Class Ky Kz K yLT
type

NEd NEd 0.1. λ̅z NEd

1y2 I, H 1 + (λ̅y − 0.2) ̅̅̅z − 0.6)
1 + (2λ 1− . ≤ 0.6 + λ̅z
χy NC,Rd χz NC,Rd (CmLT − 0.25) χz NC,Rd

426 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

NEd
RHS 1 + (λ̅z − 0.2)
χz NC,Rd

All NEd NEd 0.5. λ̅z NEd

3y4 1 + 0.6λ̅y 1 + 0.6λ̅z 1− .
sections χy NC,Rd χz NC,Rd (CmLT − 0.25) χz NC,Rd

where:
λy y λz Limited slenderness values for y-y and z-z axes, less than 1.
fy
NC,Rd = A ∗
γM1
4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design value of the axial
compression force.
MYED My.Ed Design value of the bending
moment about Y axis.
MZED Mz.Ed Design value of the bending
moment about Z axis.
NBRD1 χy ∙ A ∙ fy /γM1 Design compression
resistance of the cross-
section.
MYRD1 χLT ∙ Wy ∙ fy /γM1 Reduced design moment
resistance of the cross-
section about Y axis.
MZRD1 Wz ∙ fy /γM1 Reduced design moment
resistance of the cross-
section about Z axis.
NBRD2 χz ∙ A ∙ fy /γM1 Design compression
resistance of the cross-
section.
MYRD2 χLT ∙ Wy ∙ fy /γM1 Reduced design moment
resistance of the cross-
section about Y axis.

427 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Result Concepts Description

MZRD2 Wz ∙ fy /γM1 Reduced design moment
resistance of the cross-
section about Z axis.
K_Y Ky Parameter K y .

K_Z Kz Parameter K z .
K_LT K LT Parameter K LT .
CRT_N1 NEd /NcRd1 Axial criterion.
CRT_MY1 K y Cmy (My,Ed + NEd ∙ eNy )/Myb,Rd1 Bending Y criterion.

CRT_MZ1 αz ∙ K z ∙ Cmz (Mz,Ed + NEd eNz )/Mzb,Rd1 Bending Z criterion.

CRT_1 CRT_N1+CRT_MY1+CRT_MZ1 Criterion 1
CRT_N2 NEd /NcRd2 Axial criterion.
CRT_MY2 KCmy (My,Ed + NEd ∙ eNy )/MyRd2 Bending Y criterion.
K=K LT /Cmy if torsion exists
and if not present K=αy K y

CRT_MZ2 K z ∙ Cmz (Mz,Ed + NEd eNz )/Mzb,Rd2 Bending Z criterion.

CRT_2 CRT_N2+CRT_MY2+CRT_MZ2 Criterion 2

CRT_TOT Crt_tot  1 Eurocode 3 global criterion.

CLASS Section Class.

CHIMIN Min{χy , χz } Reduction factor for the
relevant buckling mode.
CHI_Y χy Reduction factor for the
relevant My buckling mode.
CHI_Z χz Reduction factor for the
relevant Mz buckling
mode.
CHI_LT χLT Reduction factor for lateral-
torsional buckling.
AREA A, Aeff Used area of the section
(Gross or Effective).

428 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

Result Concepts Description

WY Wel.y , Wpl,y , Weff.y Used section Y modulus
(Elastic, Plastic or Effective).
WZ Wel.z , Wpl,z , Weff.z Used section Z modulus
(Elastic, Plastic or Effective).
ENY eNy Shift of the Z axis in Y
direction.
ENZ eNz Shift of the Y axis in Z
direction.
NCR_Y Ncr Elastic critical force for the
relevant My buckling mode.
NCR_Z Ncr Elastic critical force for the
relevant Mz buckling mode.
MCR Mcr Elastic critical moment for
lateral-torsional buckling.
LAM_Y λy Non-dimensional reduced
slenderness for bending My.
LAM_Z λz Non-dimensional reduced
slenderness for bending Mz.
LAM_LT λLT Non-dimensional reduced
slenderness for lateral-
torsional buckling.

7.1.17. Critical Forces and Moments Calculation

The critical forces and moments Ncr xy , Ncr xz and Mcr, are needed for the different types of
buckling checks. They are calculated based on the following formulation:
2
AEπ2 π ixy
Ncr xy = 2 = AE ( )
λxy Lxy
AEπ2 π ixz 2
Ncr xz = 2 = AE ( )
λxz Lxz

429 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

where:

Ncr xy Elastic critical axial force in plane XY.

Ncr xz Elastic critical axial force in plane XZ.

A Gross area.

E Elasticity modulus.

λxy Member slenderness in plane XY.

λxz Member slenderness in plane XZ.

ixy Radius of gyration of the member in plane XY.

ixz Radius of gyration of the member in plane XZ.

Lxy Buckling length of member in plane XY.

Lxz Buckling length of member in plane XZ.

The buckling length in both planes is the length between the ends restrained against lateral
movement and it is obtained from the member properties, according to the following
expressions:

Lxy = L ∙ Cfbuckxy
Lxz = L ∙ Cfbuckxz

where:

Cfbuckxy Buckling factor in plane XY.

Cfbuckxz Buckling factor in plane XZ.

For the calculation of the elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling, Mcr, the
following equation shall be used. This equation is only valid for uniform symmetrical cross-
sections about the minor axis (Annex F, ENV 1993-1-1:1992). Eurocode 3 does not provide a
method for calculating this moment in nonsymmetrical cross-sections or sections with other
symmetry plane (angles, channel section, etc.).
1/2
π2 EIz k 2 Iw (kL)2 GIt 2
Mcr = C1 2
{[( ) + 2 + [C2 Zg − C3 Zj ] ] − [C2 Zg − C3 Zj ]}
(kL) k w Iz π EIz

430 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

0.5
Zj = Zs − ∫ (y 2 + z 2 ) z dA
Iy
A

where:

Mcr Elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling.

C1 , C2 y C3 Factors depending on the loading and end restraint conditions.

k y kw Effective length factors.

E Elasticity modulus.

Iy Moment of inertia about the principal axis.

Iy Moment of inertia about the minor axis.

L Length of the member between end restraints.

G Shear modulus.

Zg Za − Zs

Za Coordinate of the point of load application. By default the load is

applied at the center of gravity, therefore: Za = 0.

Zs Coordinate of the shear center.

A Cross-section area.

Factors C and k are read from the properties at structural element level.

The integration of the previous equation is calculated as a summation extending to each

plate. This calculation is accomplished for each plate according to its ends coordinates:
𝑦1 , 𝑧1 and 𝑦2 , 𝑧2 and its thicknesses.
n plates

∫ (y 2 + z 2 ) z dA = ∑ Si ∗ ∫ (y 2 + z 2 ) z dl
A i=1 Li

where:

si = thickness of plate i

dA = si * dl

y = y1 + I∗ cos α

431 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.1 Steel Structures According to Eurocode 3

z = z1 + I∗ sin α
z2 − z1
α = arctan
y2 − y1

Li = √(y1 − y2 )2 + (z1 − z2 )2 = plate width

Li

432 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

7.2. Steel Structures According to AISC

ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.
7.2.1. Material properties
For AISC 13th Edition checking, the following material properties are used:

Description Property

Steel yield strength Fy(th)

Ultimate strength Fu(th)

Elasticity modulus E

Poisson coefficient 

Shear modulus G
*th =thickness of the plate

7.2.2. Section data

AISC 13th Edition considers the following data set for the section:

- Gross section data

- Net section data
- Effective section data.
- Data belonging to the section and plates class.

Gross section data correspond to the nominal properties of the cross-section. For the net
section, only the area is considered. This area is calculated by subtracting the holes for
screws, rivets and other holes from the gross section area. (The area of holes is introduced
within the structural steel code properties).

The effective section data and the section and plates class data are obtained in the checking
process according to chapter B, section B4 of the code. This chapter classifies steel sections
into three groups (compact, noncompact and slender), depending upon the width-thickness
ratio and other mandatory limits.

The AISC 13TH Edition module utilizes the gross section data in user units and the CivilFEM
axis or section axis as initial data. The program calculates the effective section data and the
class data, and stores them in CivilFEM’s results file, in user units and in CivilFEM or section
axis.

433 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

The section data used in AISC 13TH Edition are shown in the following tables:

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Height H
2.- Web thickness Tw
3.- Flanges thickness Tf
4.- Flanges width B
5.- Distance between flanges Hi
6.- Radius of fillet (Rolled shapes) r1
7.- Toe radius (Rolled shapes) r2
8.- Weld throat thickness (Welded shapes) a
9.- Web free depth d

Output data (None)

Description Data Reference axes

Input data:
1.- Depth in Y Tky CivilFEM
2.- Depth in Z tkz CivilFEM
3.- Cross-section area A
4.- Moments of inertia for torsion It CivilFEM
5.- Moments of inertia for bending Iyy, Izz CivilFEM
6.- Product of inertia Izy CivilFEM
7.- Elastic resistant modulus Wely, Welz CivilFEM
8.- Plastic resistant modulus Wply, Wplz CivilFEM
9.- Radius of gyration iy, iz CivilFEM
10.- Gravity center coordinates Ycdg, Zcdg Section
11.- Extreme coordinates of the perimeter Ymin, Ymax, Section
Zmin, Zmax
12.- Distance between GC and SC in Y and in Z Yms, Zms Section
13.- Warping constant Iw
14.- Shear resistant areas Yws, Zws CivilFEM
15.- Torsional resistant modulus Xwt CivilFEM
16.- Moments of inertia for bending about U, V Iuu, Ivv Principal
17.- Angle Y->U or Z->V  CivilFEM

Output data: (None)

434 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Gross section area Agross
2.- Area of holes Aholes

Output data:
1.- Cross-section area Anet

The effective section depends upon the geometry of the section; thus, the effective section
is calculated for each element and each of the ends of the element.

Description Data
Input data: (None)

Output data:

1.- Reduction factor Q

2.- Reduction factor Qs
3.- Reduction factor Qa

7.2.3. Structural steel code properties

For AISC 13th Edition checking, besides the section properties, more data are needed for
bucling checks. These data are shown in the following table.

Description Data

Input data:

1.- Unbraced length of member (global buckling) L

2.- Effective length factors Y direction KY
3.- Effective length factors Z direction KZ
4.- Effective length factors for torsional buckling KTOR
5.- Flexural factor relative to bending moment Cb
6.- Length between lateral restraints Lb

Output data:

1.- Compression class CLS_COMP

2.- Bending class CLS_FLEX

435 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

7.2.4. Check Process

Necessary steps to conduct the different checks in CivilFEM are as follows:

a) Obtain material properties corresponding to the element stored in CivilFEM database

and calculate the rest of the properties needed for checking:
Properties obtained from CivilFEM database (materials):
Elasticity modulus E
Poisson’s ratio
Yield strength Fy (th)
Ultimate strength Fu (th)
Shear modulus G
Thickness of corresponding plate th

b) Obtain the cross-sectional data corresponding to the element.

c) Initiate the values of the plate’s reduction factors and the other plate’s parameters to
determine its class.
d) Perform a check of the section according to the type of external load.
e) Results. In CivilFEM, checking results for each element end are stored in the results
file .CRCF

7.2.5. Design requirements

7.2.5.1. Design for Strength Using Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD)
Design shall be performed in accordance with:

R u ≤ ϕR n

Where:

Ru Required strength (LRFD).

Rn Nominal strength.

ϕ Resistance factor.

ΦR n Design strength

436 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

7.2.5.2. Design for Strength Using Allowable Strength Design (ASD)

Design shall be performed in accordance with:

R a ≤ R n /Ω

Where:

Ra Required strength (ASD)

Rn Nominal strength.

Ω Safety factor

R n /Ω Allowable strength

Section Class and Reduction Factors Calculation.

Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact or slender-element sections. For a

section to qualify as compact its flanges must be continuously connected to the web or webs
and the width-thickness ratios of its compression elements must not exceed the limiting
width-thickness ratios λp (see table B4.1 of AISC 13th Edition). If the width-thickness ratio of
one or more compression elements exceeds λp but does not exceed λr , the section is
noncompact. If the width-thickness ratio of any element exceeds λr , (see table B4.1 of AISC
13th Edition), the section is referred to as a slender-element compression section.

Therefore, the code suggests different lambda values depending on if the element is
subjected to compression, flexure or compression plus flexure.

The section classification is the worst-case scenario of all of its plates. Therefore, the class is
calculated for each plate with the exception of pipe sections, which have their own
formulation because it cannot be decomposed into plates. This classification will consider
the following parameters:

a) Length of elements:
The program will define the element length (b or h) as the length of the plate
(distance between the extreme points), except when otherwise specified.

b) Flange or web distinction:

To distinguish between flanges or webs, the program follows the criteria below:

Once the principal axis of bending is defined, the program will examine the plates of
the section. Fields Pty and Ptz of the plates indicate if they behave as flanges, webs

437 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

or undefined, choosing the correct one for the each axis. If undefined, the following
criterion will be used to classify the plate as flange or web:

If |∆y| < |∆z| (increments of end coordinates) and flexure is in the Y axis, it will be
considered a web; if not, it will be a flange. The reverse will hold true for flexure in
the Z-axis.

 Hot rolled Steel Shapes:

Section I and C:

The length of the plate h will be taken as the value d for the section
dimensions.
Section Box:

The length of the plate will be taken as the width length minus three times
the thickness.

7.2.5.3. Members subjected to compression

In order to check for compression it is necessary to determine if the element is stiffened or
unstiffened.

- For stiffened elements:

λp = 0.0

E
λr = 1.49√F
y

Pipe sections
E
λr = 0.11
Fy

Box sections

E
λp = 1.12√F
y

E
λr = 1.40√F
y

- Unstiffened elements:

438 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

E
λp = 0.0 λr = 0.56√F
y

Angular sections

E
λr = 0.45√F
y

Stem of T sections

E
λr = 0.75√F
y

7.2.5.4. Members subjected to bending

The bending check is only applicable to very specific sections. Therefore, the slenderness
factor is listed for each section:

 Section I and C:
Py = Fy ∙ Ag ; Φb = 0.90

4
kc =
√h⁄t
w

69 MPa for hot rolled shapes (10 ksi)

Fr =
114 MPa for welded sections (16.5 ksi)

𝐹𝐿 = minimum of (Fyf − Fr ) and (Fyw ) where Fyf and Fyw are the Fy of flange
and web respectively.

Flanges of rolled sections:

E E
λp = 0.38√F λr = 0.83√F
L L

Flanges of welded sections:

E E
λp = 0.38√F λr = 0.95√F
yf L /kc

Flange:

Pu E P
If ⁄ΦP ≤ 0.125 ∶ λp = 3.76√F (1 − 2.75 ∅Pu )
y y y

439 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

Pu E P E
If ⁄ΦP > 0.125 ∶ λp = 1.12 √F (2.33 − ∅Pu ) ≥ 1.49√F
y y y y

E P
Always: λr = 5.70√F (1 − 0.74 ΦPu )
y y

Pu is the compression axial force (taken as positive). If in tension, it will be

taken as zero.

 Pipe section:
E
λp = 0.07 F
y

E
λr = 0.31 F
y

Box section:

Flanges of box section:

E
λp = 1.12
Fy

E
λr = 1.40
Fy

Flanges: the program distinguishes between the flange and web upon the
principal axis chosen by the user.

Pu E 𝑃
If ⁄ΦP ≤ 0.125 ∶ λp = 3.76√F (1 − 2.75 Φ𝑃𝑢 )
y y 𝑦

Pu E P E
If ⁄ΦP > 0.125 ∶ λp = 1.12√F (2.33 − ΦPu ) ≥ 1.49√F
y y y y

E P
Always: λr = 5.70√F (1 − 0.74 ΦPu )
y y

 T section:
λp = 0.0

E
Stem: λp = 0.75√
Fy

440 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

E
Flanges: λr = 0.56√F
y

7.2.6. Checking of Members for Tension (Chapter D)

The axial tension force must be taken as positive (if the tension force has a negative value,
the element will not be checked)

Design tensile strength Φt Pn and the allowable tensile strength Pn ⁄Ωt , of tension members,
shall be the lower value of :

a) yielding in the gross section:

Pn = Fy Ag

Φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)

b) rupture in the net section:

Pn = Fu Ae

Φt = 0.75(LRFD) Ωt = = 2.00 (ASD)

Being:

Ae Effective net area.

Ag Gross area.

Fy Minimum yield stress.

Fu Minimum tensile strength.

The effective net area will be taken as Ag – AHOLES. The user will need to enter the correct
value for AHOLES (the code indicates that the diameter is 1/16th in. (2 mm) greater than the
real diameter).

7.2.7. Checking of Members in Axial Compression (Chapter

E)
The design compressive strength, Φc Pn,and the allowable compressive strength, Pn ⁄Ωc , are
determined as follows:

441 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

The nominal compressive strength, Pn , shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling and flexural-torsional buckling.

∅c = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωc = 1.67 (ASD)

7.2.8. Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling

This type of check can be carried out for compact sections as well as for noncompact or
slender sections. These three cases adhere to the following steps:

Nominal compressive strength, Pn :

Pn = Ag Fcr (E3-1)

KI Fy
λc = √
rπ E

Q = Qs Qa

KL E
a) For : ≤ 4.71√QF
r y

QFy
Fcr = Q (0.658 Fe ) Fy

KL E
b) for > 4.71√QF
r y

Fcr = 0.877Fe
Where:

Ag Gross area of member.

r Governing radius of gyration about the buckling axis.

K Effective length factor.

l Unbraced length.

Fe π2 E
Elastic critical buckling stress Fe = KL 2
( )
r

Factor Q for compact and noncompact sections is always 1. Nevertheless, for slender
sections, the value of Q has a particular procedure. Such procedure is described below:

442 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

Factor Q for slender sections:

For unstiffened plates, Qs must be calculated and for stiffened plates, Qa must be
determined. If these cases do not apply (box sections or angular sections, for example), a
value of 1 for these factors will be taken.

For circular sections, there is a particular procedure of calculating Q. Such procedure is

described below:

 For circular sections, Q is:

0.038∙E 2
Q = Qa = F (D⁄t) + 3 0.11 E⁄F ≤ D⁄t < 0.45 E⁄F
y y y

Factor Qs:

If there are several plates free, the value of Qs is taken as the biggest value of all of them.
The program will check the slenderness of the section in the following order:

 Angular
λ
Q s = 1.340 − 0.76
If 0.45√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ .91√E⁄Fy
√E⁄Fy

E⁄Fy
If 0.91√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Q s = 0.53
λ2

 Stem of T
λ
Q s = 1.908 − 1.22
If 0.75√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ 1.03√E⁄Fy
√E⁄Fy

E⁄Fy
If 1.03√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Q s = 0.69
λ2

 Rolled shapes
λ
Q s = 1.415 − 0.74
If 0.56√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ 1.03√E⁄Fy
√E⁄Fy

E⁄Fy
If 1.03√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Q s = 0.69
λ2

 Other sections
λ
Q s = 1.415 − 0.65
If 0.64√k c ∙ E⁄Fy λ ≤ 1.17√k c ∙ E⁄Fy
√k c ∙ E⁄Fy

443 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

E/Fy
If 1.17√k c ∙ E/Fy < 𝜆 Q s = 0.90k c
λ2

Where  is the element slenderness and

4
kc = , 0.35 ≤ k c ≤ 0.76 for I sections
√λ

k c = 0.76 for other sections

Factor Qa:

The calculation of factor Qa is an iterative process. Its procedure is the following:

1) An initial value of Q equal to Qs is taken.

2) With this value Fcr is calculated.
3) This Fcr value is taken to calculate f(f = Pn /Aeff )
4) For elements with stiffened plates, the effective width be is calculated.
5) With be the effective area is calculated.
6) With the value of the effective area, Qa is calculated, and the process starts
again.
effective
Qa =
gross area
 For a box section
E E 0.38 E
If λ ≥ 1.40√ be = 1.92 ∙ t√ f [1 − √ ]
f λ f

 For other sections

E E 0.34 E
If λ ≥ 1.49√ be = 1.92 ∙ t√ [1 − √ ]
f f λ f

If it is not within those limits, be = b

With the be values for each plate, the part that does not contribute [t·(b-be )] is
subtracted from the area (where t is the plate thickness). Using this procedure, the
effective area is calculated.

Finally, with Qs and Qa, Q is calculated, and Fcr is obtained.

444 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

7.2.9. Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling

This type of check can be carried out for compact sections as well as for noncompact or
slender sections. The steps for these three cases are as follows:

Nominal compressive strength,Pn :

Pn = Ag Fcr

c) for λe √Q ≤ 1.5
2
Fcr = Q(0.658Qλe )Fy

(b) for λe √Q > 1.5

0.877
Fcr = [ ] Fy
λ2e

Where:

Fy
λe = √
Fe

Q = Qs Qa
Factor Q for compact and noncompact sections is 1. Nevertheless, for slender sections, the Q
factor has a particular procedure of calculation. Such procedure is equal to the one
previously described.

The elastic stress for critical torsional buckling or flexural-torsional buckling Fe is calculated
as the lowest root of the following third degree equation, in which the axis have been
changed to adapt to the CivilFEM normal axis:

y 2 Z 2
(Fe − Fex )(Fe − Fey )(Fe − Fez ) − Fe2 (Fe − Fez ) ( 0 ) − Fe2 (Fe − Fey ) ( 0 ) = 0
r 0 r 0

Where:

Kx Effective length factor for torsional buckling.

G Shear modulus (MPa).

445 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

Cw Warping constant (mm6).

J Torsional constant (mm4).

Iy , Iz Moments of inertia about the principal axis (mm4).

X0 , yo Coordinates of shear center with respect to the center of gravity (mm).

Iy + Iz
r̅ 02 = y02 + Z02 +
A

𝑦02 + 𝑍02
𝐻 =1−( )
𝑟̅0 2
π2 ∙ E
Fey =
K y ∙ I/ry
π2 ∙ E
Fez =
K z ∙ I/rz

π2 ∙ E ∙ Cw 1
Fex =( + G ∙ J) ∙
(Kx ∙ I) A ∙ r̅02
where:

A Cross-sectional area of member.

l Unbraced length.

Ky, Kz Effective length factor, in the z and y directions.

ry , rz Radii of gyration about the principal axes.

r̅02 Polar radius of gyration about the shear center.

In this formula, CivilFEM principal axes are used. If the CivilFEM axes are the principal axes
5º sexagesimal degrees, K y and K z are calculated with respect to the Y and Z-axes of
CivilFEM. If this is not the case (angular shapes, for example) axes U and V will be used as
principal axes, with U as the axis with higher inertia.

The torsional inertia (Ixx in CivilFEM, J in AISC 13TH Edition) is calculated for CivilFEM
sections, but not for captured sections. Therefore the user will have to introduce this
parameter in the mechanical properties of CivilFEM.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

446 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

7.2.10. Compressive Strength for Flexure

Chapter F is only applicable to members subject to simple bending about one principal axis.

The design flexural strength, ϕb Mn , and the allowable flexural strength, Mn /Ωb , shall be
determined as follows:

For all provisions: ϕb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)

Where Mn is the lowest value of four checks according to sections F2 through F12:

a) Yielding
b) Lateral-torsional buckling
c) Flange local buckling
d) Web local buckling
The value of the nominal flexural strength with the following considerations:

 For compact sections, if Lb < Lp only yielding of steel will be checked.

 For T sections, and other compact sections, only yielding and torsional buckling will
be checked.
 The case of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply to sections loaded on the minor
axis of inertia nor box or square sections.
 The case of lateral-torsional buckling only applies for sections with double symmetry,
channel and T sections. Therefore the rest of sections will be checked for torsion plus
combined loads and will not be checked under flexure.
 For slender sections, the code contemplates the following cases:

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r
State

I, C Cb X1 √2 X2X Lb E X1
LTB FL S z √1 + 1 2 1.76√ √ √1 + X2 FL2
loaded λ 2λ2 rz Fyf FL 1 +
in the
axis of 0.69E
rolled b
higher FLB λ2
FL S z Class B4.1 Class B4.1
0.90Ekc t
inertia. welded
λ2

447 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

WLB R e Fyf Sz N.A. h⁄

t w Class B4.1 Class B4.1

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r
State
I, C LTB N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
loaded
in the
axis of FLB 0.69E b Class
Fy S y Class B4.1
lower λ2 t B4.1
inertia.

WLB N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r
State

2ECb √JA Lb 0.13E√JA 2E√JA

LTB Fyt Seff
λSz rz Mp Mr

Box
Seff b
FLB Fyt Seff F Class B4.1 Class B4.1
S y t

WLB R e Fyf Sz N.A. h⁄

t w Class B4.1 Class B4.1

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r Notes
State

448 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

LTB NA NA NA NA NA

Slender:
Limited
Pipe Fcr S
0.33E Class Class by
FLB
Non-compact: D⁄t
D⁄t B4.1 B4.1 Class
0.021E B4.1
Mn = ( + Fy ) ∙ S
D⁄t

WLB NA NA NA NA NA

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r
State

π√EIz GJ
LTB Mn = Mcr = [B + √1 + B 2 ] N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
T, loaded in Lb
web plane
FLB N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.

WLB N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.

Where:

π EGJA
X1 = √
Sz 2

Cw Sz 2
X2 = 4 ( )
Iz GJ

d Iz
B = +2.3 √
Lb J

(positive sign if the stem is under tension, negative if it is under compression)

In T sections: Mn ≤ 1.6My stem in tension; Mn ≤ 1.0My stem in compression.

For slender webs the nominal flexural strength Mn is the minimum of the following checks:

 tension-flange yield
 compression flange buckling

449 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

The first check uses the following formula:

Mn = Sxc Fy
where:

Sxc Section modulus referred to tension flange.

Fy Yield strength of tension flange.

The second check uses the following formula:

Mn = Sxc R PG Fcr
where:

aw hc E
R PG = 1 − ( − 5.70√ ) ≤ 1.0
1200 + 300aw t w Fy

The critical stress depends upon different slenderness parameters such as , λp , λr and Cpg
in the following way:

For λ ≤ λp Fcr = Fyf

For λp ≤ λ ≤ λr λ − λp
Fcr = Cb ∙ Fyf ∙ [1 − 0.3 ∙ ( )] ≤ Fyf
λr − λp

For λ > λr Cpg

Fcr =
λ2
The slenderness values have to be calculated for the following limit states:

 Lateral torsional buckling

Lb
λ=
rT

E
λp = 1.1 ∙ √
Fyf

E
λr = π ∙ √
0.7Fyf

Cpg = 1970000 ∙ Cb (International System units)

450 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

rT is the radius of gyration of compression flange plus one third of the compression
portion of the web (mm).

By default, the program takes a conservative value of Cb = 1 .

 Flange local buckling

br
λ=
2t f

E
λp = 0.38 ∙ √
Fyf

E
λr = 1.35 ∙ √
Fyf /k c

Cpg = 180650 ∙ k c (IS units)

where:

Cb = 1
k c = 4/√h/t w
and
0.35 ≤ k c ≤ 0.76
Between these two slenderness, the program will choose values the value that produces a
lower critical stress.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

7.2.11. Checking of Members for Shear (Chapter G)

The design shear strength, ϕv Vn , and the allowable shear strength, Vn /Ωv , shall be
determined as follows:

For all provisions: ϕv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)

According to the limit states of shear yielding and shear buckling, the nominal shear
strength, Vn , of unstiffened webs is:

Vn = 0.6Fy Aw Cv

451 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

For webs of rolled I-shaped members with h/t w ≤ 2.24√E/Fy :

ϕv = 1.00 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.50 (ASD)

Cv = 1.0 (web shear coefficient)

For webs of all other doubly symmetric shapes and singly symmetric shapes and channels
Cv is determined as follows:

1. For h/t w ≤ 1.10√k v E/Fy

Cv = 1.0

2. For 1.10√k v E/Fy < ℎ/t w ≤ 1.37√k v E/Fy

1.10√k v E/Fy
Cv =
h/t w

3. For h/t w ≤ 1.37√k v E/Fy

1.51k v E
Cv =
(h/t w )2 Fy

Where Aw is the overall depth times the web thickness.

It is assumed that there are no stiffeners; therefore, the web plate buckling coefficient K v
will be calculated as a constant equal to 5.0.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

7.2.12. Checking of Members for Combined Flexure and

Axial Tension / Compression (Chapter H)
For this check, it is first necessary to determine the value of Mn. This value comes into play
in the checking of formulas. The value of Mn, will be calculated in the same way as members
subjected to flexure; thus, the nominal flexure strength (𝑀𝑛 ) is the minimum of four checks:

1. Yielding
2. Lateral-torsional buckling
3. Flange local buckling
4. Web local buckling

In the case of having bending plus tension or bending plus compression, the interaction
between flexure and axial force is limited by the following equations:

452 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

P
(a) For Pr ≥ 0.2
c
Pr 8 M Mry
+ 9 (Mrz + M ) ≤ 1.0 (H1-1a)
Pc cz cy

P
(b) For Pr ≥ 0.2
c
Pr M Mry
+ (Mrz + M ) ≤ 1.0 (H1-1b)
2Pc cz cy

If the axial force is tension:

Pr Required tensile strength (N).

Pc Available tensile strength (N):

ϕt Pn(LRFD) or Pn /Ωt (ASD)

Mr Required flexural strength (N·mm).

Mc Available flexural strength (N·mm):

Design: ϕb Mn (LRFD) or

Allowable: Mn /Ωb (ASD)

y Strong axis bending.

z Weak axis bending.

ϕt Resistance factor for tension (Sect.D2)

ϕb Resistance factor for flexure = 0.90

Ωt Safety factor for tension (Sect D2)

Ωb Safety factor for flexure = 1.67

If the axial force is compression:

Pr Required compressive strength (N).

Pc Available compressive strength (N):

Design: ϕc Pn (LRFD) or

Allowable: Pn /Ωc (ASD)

Mr Required flexural strength (N·mm).

453 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

Mc Available flexural strength (N·mm):

Design: ϕb Mn (LRFD) or

Allowable: Mn /Ωb (ASD)

Y Strong axis of bending.

Z Weak axis of bending.

Φc Resistance factor for compression =0.90

Φb Resistance factor for flexure = 0.90

Ωc Safety factor for compression =1.67

Ωb Safety factor for flexure = 1.67

The following checks are carried out by CivilFEM:

 Axial force and flexural buckling

 Bending moment Z direction
 Bending moment Y direction
If one of these checks do not meet the code requirements, it will not be possible to check
the member under flexure plus tension / compression.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

7.2.13. Checking of Members for Combined Torsion, Flexure,

Shear and/or Axial Force (Chapter H)
The design torsional strength, TTn , and the allowable torsional strength, Tn/ΩT , shall be the
lowest value obtained according to the limit states of yielding under normal stress, shear
yielding under shear stress or buckling, determined as follows:

ϕT = 0.90 (LRFD) ΩT = 1.67 (ASD)

 For the limit state of yielding, under normal stress:

Fn = Fy
 For the limit state of yielding, under shear stress:
Fn = 0.6Fy
 For the limit state of buckling:

454 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.2 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 13th Ed.

Fn = Fcr

- Where 𝐹𝑐𝑟 is calculated

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

455 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

7.3. Steel Structures According to British

Standard 5950
The British Standard BS 5950:2000 supersedes BS 5950:1985, which has been withdrawn. BS
5950:2000 is the British Standard for the structural use of steelwork in building, widely in use
in regions which experience or have experienced British influence. The purpose of this
manual is to define the reach and method of implementing this method within CivilFEM.

The types of analyses considered in this standard have been developed according to the
ultimate limit state in agreement with the simple and continuous design methods. Semi-
continuous design and experimental verification fall beyond the scope of this specification.

The applicable cross sections for checking procedures include rolled or welded sections
subjected to axial forces, shear, and bending in 2D and 3D as well as solid sections subjected
to the aforementioned forces.

The calculations made by CivilFEM correspond to the design guidelines of British Standard
5950:2000 Structural use of steelwork in building: Part 1. Code of practice for design – Rolled
and welded sections.

7.3.1 Checking Types

With CivilFEM it is possible to accomplish the following checking and analysis types:

Checking of sections subjected to:

- Bending British Standard 5950 (2000) apt. 4.2
- Bending and Shear British Standard 5950 (2000) apt. 4.2
- Lateral Torsional Buckling British Standard 5950 (2000) apt. 4.3
- Axial Tension British Standard 5950 (2000) apt. 4.6
- Axial Compression British Standard 5950 (2000) apt. 4.7
- Axial Tension with Moments British Standard 5950 (2000) apt. 4.8.2
- Axial Compression with Moments British Standard 5950 (2000) apt. 4.8.3

7.3.2 Reference Axis

With performing checks according to BS 5950:2000, CivilFEM includes three different
coordinate reference systems. All of these systems are right-handed:

1. CivilFEM Reference Axes ( XCF , YCF , ZCF).

456 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

2. Cross-Section Reference Axes (XS , YS , ZS ).

3. BS 5950:2000 Reference Axes (Code Axes), (XBS , YBS , ZBS ).

YCF YBS

YS

ZCF XBS
G

ZS
O

For the BS 5950:2000 axes axes system:

The origin matches to the CivilFEM axes origin.

XEC3 axis coincides with CivilFEM X-axis.

YEC3 axis is the relevant axis for bending and its orientation is defined by the
user (in steel check process).

ZEC3 axis is perpendicular to the plane defined by X and Y axis, to ensure a

right-handed system.

To define this reference system, the user must indicate which direction of the CivilFEM axis
(-Z, -Y, +Z or +Y) coincides with the relevant axis for positive bending. The user may define
this reference system when checking according to this code. In conclusion, the code
reference system coincides with that of CivilFEM, but it is rotated a multiple of 90 degrees,
as shown in table below.

7.3.3 Material Properties

BS 5950:2000 uses the following material properties in its checks:

Description Properties, symbol

Yield strength Ys
Tensile strength Us
py (table 9 of BS 5950-1:2000 and table 3
Design strength
of EN10113-2:1993)

457 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Material strength factor γm = 1

2
Modulus of elasticity E = 205 kN/mm

Shear Modulus 𝐺 = 𝐸⁄[2 (1

∙ + 𝜈)]
Poisson’s ratio 𝜈 = 0.3
Coefficient of linear thermal expansion 𝛼 = 12 ∙ 10−6 ∘ 𝐶 −1
Effective net area coefficient K e (BS 5950-1:2000 – Section 3.4.3)
1⁄
2
275
𝜀=( )
Constant є py

The code uses other safety factors (γI , γp ) which depend on the type of loads and which
must be used when performing load combinations.

7.3.4 Section Data

BS 5950:2000 considers the following data set for the cross section:

Gross section data

Net section data
Effective section data
Data concerning the section and element class.
Gross section data correspond to the nominal properties of the cross-section.

From the net section, the net area and the effective net area are considered. The net area is
calculated by subtracting the area of holes for screws, rivets and other holes from the gross
section area, taking into account the deduction for fastener holes according to section 3.4.4
of the code (see figures 3 and 4 of the code). The area of holes is introduced within the
structural steel code properties.

The effective net area is obtained from the net area, multiplying it by a coefficient K e which
depends on type of steel used. This coefficient is calculated by the program and stored
together with the material properties.

Effective section data are obtained in the checking process according to the effective width
method (Sect. 3.6 of BS 5950:2000). This method discounts the non-resistance zones for
local buckling in class 4 cross-sections. For cross-sections of a lower class, this method does
not reduce the section because of local buckling.

As an alternative method for slender cross sections calculation, a reduced design strength
(ρyr ) may be calculated at which the cross section would be class 3 (section 3.6.5 of the
code).

458 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Section and element class data are obtained using tables 11 and 12 of BS 5950:2000 (section
3.5.2). The classification of each element is based on its width to thickness ratio and
according to section type (hot-rolled or welded), element type (web or flange) and position
(internal or external element). CivilFEM assumes the section class as the largest from all the
elements (least favorable).

The initial required data for the BS 5950:2000 module includes the gross section data in user
units and the CivilFEM axis or section axis (see the section corresponding to Reference axis in
beam sections in Chapter 5 of this Manual). The data are then properly converted from the
section’s axis into the BS 5950:2000 axis and the results are given in the code axis. The
program calculates the effective and net section data and the class data and stores them
into CivilFEM’s results file in user units and in the CivilFEM coordinate system.

The section data used in BS 5950:2000 is shown in the following tables:

I.- Section Dimensions

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Height H
2.- Web thickness Tw
3.- Flanges thickness Tf
4.- Flanges width B
5.- Distance between flanges Hi
6.- Radius of fillet (Rolled shapes) r1
7.- Toe radius (Rolled shapes) r2
8.- Weld throat thickness (Welded shapes) a
9.- Web free depth d

Output data (Nothing)

I.- Gross Section Resistant Properties

Description Data

Input:

1.- Area A
2.- Moments of inertia for torsion It
3.- Moments of inertia for bending Ixx, Iyy
4.- Product of inertia Ixy
5.- Elastic resistant modulus Wx, Wy
6.- Plastic resistant modulus Wpx, Wpy
7.- Radius of gyration ix, iy

459 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

8.- Coordinates of the center of gravity Ymn, Ymx,

Xmn, Xmx
9.- Distance between GC and SC in X and in Y Xm, Ym
10.- Distance CG to shear center along Y axis Ys
11.- Distance CG to shear center along X axis Xs
12.- Warping Constant Iw
13.- Shear resistant areas Yws, Xws
14.- Torsional resistant modulus Zwt

Output Data:

1.- Shear area for major axis (X) Avx

2.- Sv parameter for major axis (X) Svx
3.- Shear area for minor axis (Y) Avy
4.- Sv parameter for minor axis (X) Svy
5.- Critical shear strength of web panel for major axis Vcrx
6.- Critical shear strength of web panel for minor axis Vcry
7.- Y coordinate of plastic center
8.- X coordinate of plastic center Yp
Xp

* The section properties listed here in are related to the

BS coordinate system (XBS, YBS, ZBS)

III.- Net section data

Description Data

Input data:

AHOLES*

Output data:

1.- Net area Ant

2.- Effective net area Aneff

Ant = A - AHOLES
Aneff = K e ∙ Ant with Aneff  A (Gross area)
* Deduction for holes are introduced as a code property

IV.- Effective section data

Description Data

Input data:
None

460 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Description Data
Output data:

1.- Effective Area Aeff

2.- Moments of inertia for torsion It

3.- Moments of inertia for Y bending Iyyeff

4.- Moments of inertia for X bending Ixxeff

5.- Elastic resistant Y modulus Wyeff

6.- Elastic resistant X modulus Wxeff

7.- Plastic resistant Y modulus Wpyeff

8.- Plastic resistant X modulus Wpxeff

9.- Section class Cls

10.- Web class for shear buckling ClsAlm

V.- Section element data

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Number of elements N
2.- Element type: flange or web (for the relevant axis of bending) Pltype
3.- Union condition at the ends: free or fixed Cp1, Cp2
4.- Element thickness t
5.- Coordinates of the extreme points of the element (using Section axes) Yp1, Yp2,
Zp1, Zp2

Output data:
6.- Element class Cl
7.- Reduction factor (for class 4 section- alternative method) fr
8.- Web Class Webclass

7.3.5 Structural steel code properties

For BS 5950:2000 check, besides the section properties, more data are needed for buckling
checks. These data are shown in the following table.

461 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Description Data Article

Input data:

1.- Unbraced length of member L

2.- Compression buckling factor for X axis Kcx Section 4.7.3
3.- Compression buckling factor for Y axis Kcy Section 4.7.3
4.- Lateral torsional buckling factor for X axis KLtx Section 4.3.5

5.- Lateral torsional buckling factor for Y axis Klty Section 4.3.5

6.- Factors by which multiply “L” to found the length Cfbuckx,

between restrictions in planes xz and yz, respectively Cfbucky

7.- Robertson Constant CteRob Appendix C.2

8.- Equivalent uniform moment factor for major axis flexural mx Section 4.8.3
bending
9.- Equivalent uniform moment factor for minor axis flexural my Section 4.8.3
bending
10.- Equivalent uniform moment factor for lateral mlt Section 4.3.6.6
torsional buckling
11.- Depth of the compression flanges lip DL Section 4.3.6.7

12.- Intermediate stiffeners depth d/a Section 4.4.5

11.- CivilFEM Axis which is the X axis in BS 5950:2000 CHCKAXIS

0: Not defined
1: -Z CivilFEM
2: +Y CivilFEM
3: +Z CivilFEM
4: -Y CivilFEM

7.3.6 Checking Process

The steps for the checking process are the following ones:

4. Read the checking type requested by the user.

5. Read the CivilFEM axis to be considered as the principal axis for bending, so that
it coincides with the X-axis of BS5950. In CivilFEM, by default, the principal axis
for bending that coincides with the +X axis of BS 5950:2000 is the –Z-axis.
6. The following operations are carried out for each selected element:
a. Obtain material properties corresponding to the element, stored in CivilFEM
database, and calculate the rest of the properties needed for checking:
Properties obtained from CivilFEM database:
Elasticity modulus E
Poisson’s ratio

462 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Yield strength Ys
Ultimate strength Us
Design strength ρy
Ke parameter Ke
Safety factor γM

Calculated properties:
Shear Modulus:
E
G=
2∗ (1+ v)
Epsilon, material coefficient:

ε = √275⁄ρy (ρy in N⁄mm2 )

b. Obtain the cross-section data corresponding to the element.
c. Determination of section class.
d. There are two calculation procedures for slender cross sections (class 4) that may
be may chosen by the user:
1. Initialize reduction factors of section plates and the effective cross section
properties calculation.
2. Calculate a reduced design strength that should be used in place of the
nominal design strength (section 3.6.5 of the code).
e. Obtain forces acting on the section (FX, Fvx , Fyv , Mx , My ).
f. Specific section checking according to the type of external load.
g. Writing of results, which will be stored in the results file .CRCF

7.3.7 Section Class and Reduction Factor Calculation.

According to BS 5950:2000, the sections are made up of different elements, which can be
classified according to:

a) The way they work:

Webs and flanges in the X and Y axes, depending on which is the principal bending
axis.

b) Their relation to the other elements:

Internal or outside elements

463 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

The sections of the shapes included in the program libraries contain this information for
each element. CivilFEM classifies elements as either flange or web according to each axis and
gives the element union condition at each end. The ends can be classified as fixed or free
(i.e. an end is called fixed if it is in contact with another plate and free if it is not).

For checking the structure for safety, BS 5950:2000 classifies cross sections into four
different classes to determine whether local buckling influences their capacity (section
3.5.2):

Class 1 Plastic cross sections are those in which a plastic hinge can be
developed with sufficient rotation capacity to allow redistribution of
moments within the structure.

Class 2 Compact cross sections are those in which the full plastic moment
capacity can be developed but local buckling may prevent
development of a plastic hinge with sufficient rotation capacity to
permit plastic design.

Class 3 Semi-compact sections are those in which the stress at the extreme
fibers can reach the design strength but local buckling may prevent
the development of the full plastic moment.

Class 4 Slender sections are those which contain slender elements subject to
compression due to moment or axial load. Local buckling may
prevent the stress in a slender section from reaching the design
strength.

The cross-section class is the highest (least favorable) class of its elements: flanges and webs.
The class of each element is first determined according to the limits of tables 11 and 12 of BS
5950:2000. According to these tables, the class of an element depends on:

1. The width to thickness ratio. The dimensions of the elements (b, d, t, T) should
be
taken as shown in Figure 5 of the code.
Rd = Width / Thickness
2. The limits of this ratio, according to the type of section, element (flange or web) and
position (internal or outside). Elements that do not meet the limits for class 3 semi-
compact are classified as class 4. The limits are the following (refer to figure 5 of the
code for dimensions):

 Sections other than circular hollow sections (CHS) and rectangular hollow section
(RHS):

464 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Compression element Class 1 Class 2 Class 3

Outstand rolled flange 9∗ 𝜀 10∗ ε 15∗ ε

Angle, compression due to

bending

Angle, axial compression 0 0 15∗ ε

b+d
≤ 24 ∙ ε
t

Outstand welded flange 8∗ ε 9∗ ε 13∗ ε

Internal flange, compression 28∗ ε 32∗ ε 40∗ ε

due to bending

Internal flange, axial 0 0 40∗ ε

compression

Web of an I, H or box 80∗ ε /(1 + r1 ) For r1 ≤ 0 120∗ ε /(1 + 2r2 )

section, compression due to
bending 100∗ ε/(1 + r1 ) ≥ 40∗ ε

but ≥ 40∗ ε but ≥ 40∗ ε

For
r1 > 0

100∗ ε/(1 + 1.5r1 )

but ≥ 40∗ ε

Web of an I, H or box 0 0 120∗ ε /(1 + 2r2 )

section, axial compression
but ≥ 40∗ ε

Web of a channel 40∗ ε 40∗ ε 40∗ ε

Stem of a T section, rolled 8∗ ε 9∗ ε 18∗ ε

or cut from a rolled I or H
section

 Circular hollow sections (CHS):

Circular hollow sections are classified as having only one element and the width to
thickness ratio (R d ) is determined as follows:

465 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

R d = D⁄t D = Diameter.
t = Wall thickness.

Class 1 Class 2 Class 3

Compression due to 40∗ ε2 50∗ ε2 140∗ ε2

bending

Axial compression 0 0 80∗ ε2

 Rectangular hollow sections hot finished (HF RHS):

Compression element Class 1 Class 2 Class 3

Flange, compression due to 28∗ ε2 32∗ ε 40∗ ε

bending
but ≤ 80∗ ε − d/t but ≤ 62∗ ε − 0.5d/t

Flange, axial compression 0 0 40∗ ε

Web, compression due to 64∗ ε/(1 + 0.6r1 ) 80∗ ε/(1 + r1 ) 120∗ ε/(1 + 2r2 )
bending
but ≥ 40∗ ε but ≥ 40∗ ε but ≥ 40∗ ε

Web, axial compression 0 0 120∗ ε/(1 + 2r2 )

but ≥ 40∗ ε

 Rectangular hollow sections cold formed (CF RHS):

Compression element Class 1 Class 2 Class 3

Flange, compression due to 26∗ ε 28∗ ε 35∗ ε

bending
but ≤ 72∗ ε − d/t but ≤ 54∗ ε − 0.5d/t

Flange, axial compression 0 0 35∗ ε

Web, compression due to 56∗ ε/(1 + 0.6r1 ) 70∗ ε/(1 + r1 ) 105∗ ε/(1 + r2 )

466 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

bending but ≥ 35∗ ε but ≥ 35∗ ε but ≥ 35∗ ε

Web, axial compression 0 0 105∗ ε/(1 + 2r2 )

but ≥ 35∗ ε

* The dimensions b and t are defined in figure 5 of the code.

Notes:

1. The classification of the elements according to the way they work (webs or flanges) is
included in the program section library. In other cases the user can specify it or, by
default, the program will automatically determine it as a function of the angle  with
respect to the principal axis of bending, following the below criterion:
For  Web

For  Flange

2. Apart from the type of section, type and position of the element, the limits of the
d on the
parameters r1 r2 ,

a) For I or H-sections with equal flanges:

F
r1 = d∙t∙ c with −1 < r1 ≤ 1
ρyw

Fc
r2 =
Ag ∙ ρyw
b) For I or H-sections with unequal flanges:
The program deals with this type of sections as generic sections for
which the values of r1 and 𝑟2 are the following:

r1 = 1
r2 = 1
c) Rectangular hollow sections or welded box sections with equal
flanges:
F
c
r1 = 2∙d∙t∙ρ with −1 < 𝑟1 ≤ 1
yw

Fc
r2 =
Ag ∙ ρyw

Where:

467 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Ag Gross section area.

Bc Width of the compression flange.

Bt Width of the tension flange.

d Web depth.

Fc Axial compression (negative for tension).

f1 Maximum compressive stress in the web (figure 7 of the

code).

f2 Minimum compressive stress in the web (figure 7 of the

code).

ρyf Design strength of the flanges.

ρwy Design strength of the web (but ρyw ≤ ρyf ).

Tc Thickness of the compression flange.

Tf Thickness of the tension flange.

t Web thickness.

3. The webs are also classified for shear buckling resistance according to the following
criteria:
a. For rolled sections with Rd > 70 ∗ 
b. For welded sections with Rd > 62 ∗ 
In these cases, the shear buckling resistance should be checked according to the
section 4.4.5 of the BS 5950:2000.

4. Class 3 semi-compact sections are designed using the effective plastic modulus
Seff according to section 3.5.6 and followings of BS 5950:2000.

7.3.7.1 Procedures for Slender Sections (Class 4)

BS 5950:2000 accepts two different procedures for designing slender cross sections.

a) Effective section properties calculation (Sections 3.6.2, 3.6.3, 3.6.4)

The local buckling resistance of class 4 slender cross sections is performed by adopting
effective section properties. The width of the compression elements are reduced in such

468 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

way that the effective width of a class 4 section will be the same as the maximum width for a
class 3 section.

For outstand elements, the reduction is applied to its free end, and for internal elements,
the reduction is applied to the non-effective zone, comprised of the central portion of the
element with two equal portions of effective zone at the ends.

For each section element, the program calculates two reduction factors
ρ1 and ρ2 to determine the effective width at each element end. These factors relate the
width of the effective zone at each end with the width of the plate.

Effective_width_end1 = plate_width∗ ρ2
Effective_ width _end 2 = plate_width∗ ρ2

1 2

1 b 2 b

Effective area calculation (Aeff )

The effective area is determined from the effective cross section as shown in Figure 8a of the
code (section 3.6.2.2).

469 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Effective modulus calculation (Zeff )

The effective modulus is determined from the effective cross section as shown in Figure 8b
of the code (section 3.6.2.3).

470 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

For cross sections with slender webs, the effective modulus is determined from the effective
cross section as shown in Figure 9 of the code (section 3.6.2.4).

471 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Circular Hollow Sections

For circular hollow sections, the effective modulus and the effective area is determined
according to the section 3.6.6 of BS 5950:2000.

b) Alternative Method (section 3.6.5)

As an alternative to the method previously described, a reduced design strength yr is

calculated as if the cross section were a class 3 semi-compact. This reduced design strength
is used in place of y in the checks of section capacity and member buckling resistance. The
reduction factor fr is calculated for each section 4 element according to the below
expression:

β3 2
fr = ( )
β
ρyr = fr ∙ ρy

Where:

b3 Limiting value for a class 3 section according to the tables 11 and 12 of

the code.

b Width to thickness ratio for each element.

7.3.8 Checking of Bending Moment and Shear Force (BS

Article 4.2)
1. Forces and moments selection
The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the
Fv = FZ or FY
relevant axis of bending.

Design value of the bending moment along the relevant

Mx = MY or MZ
axis of bending.

2. Class determination and calculation either of the effective section properties or the
design strength reduction factor for slender sections (depending on the selected
method).
3. Criteria calculation
In members subjected to bending moment and shear force, three conditions should be
checked:

3.1. Shear checking (Article 4.2.3 of BS 5950:2000)

472 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

The first condition to be checked is the shear criteria at each section:

F
Fv ≤ Pv  Crt_V = Pv ≤ 1
v

Where:

Pv Design value of the shear capacity: Pv = 0.6 ∙ ρy ∙ Av

ρy Design strength of the material.

Shear area.
Av

Shear Area Calculation (𝐀 𝐯 )

According to section 4.2.3 the shear area is calculated as follows:

Shape Shear Area

Rolled I, H and channel sections, load parallel to web. t∙D

Welded I sections, load parallel to web. t∙d

Solid bars and plates. 0∙9∙A

Rectangular hollow sections, load parallel to webs. D

( )A
D+B

Welded box sections. 2∙t∙d

Circular hollow sections. 0.6 ∙ A

Any other case. 0.9A0

where:
t Total web thickness.

473 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

B Breadth.

D Overall depth.

d Depth of the web.

A Area of the section.

Area of the rectilinear element of the section which has the

A0
largest dimension in the direction parallel to the load:

∑i=web elements Breadthi ∙ thicknessi

In the case of biaxial bending, it is necessary to consider both shear areas,

perpendicular to both the Standard’s X- and Y-axis.
3.2. Shear buckling resistance of thin webs (Article 4.4.5)
The shear buckling resistance should be checked if the ratio d/t of the web exceeds
70· for a rolled section or 62· for welded sections. It should satisfy the following
criterion:

Fv
Crt_PV = ≤1
Vw

Vw = ∑ q w ∙ d ∙ t

Where:

Shear buckling resistance (summation extended to all section

Vw
webs).

Critical shear strength.

qw

d Depth of the web.

t Thickness of the web.

The critical shear strength is obtained following the Appendix H.1 of the code
where q w = Fn(ρy , d⁄t, d⁄a)and a is the distance between stiffeners. The ratio
d/a may be introduced by the user. By default, d/a = 1.

474 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

If the web of the section is not slender (d/t < 70· for rolled sections and
d/t < 62· for welded sections):

Crt_PV = 0
3.3. Bending moment check
Besides the shear checking, the following condition at each section is checked (Article
4.2.5 of BS 5950:2000):
M
Mx ≤ Mc  Crt_M = Mx ≤ 1
c

Mc = fr ∙ ρy ∙ Mdf

Where:

Moment capacity.
Mc

Fr Stress reduction factor (only for the alternative method for

slender sections).

Bending resistant modulus.

Mdf

The reduction of the bending resistant modulus due to the effect of shear load is only
applied if the shear load is above 60% of shear capacity of the section:

Fv > 0.6 Pv

The bending resistant modulus is obtained by the following expressions:

1. If Fv ≤ 0.6 Pv

a. For plastic or compact sections:

Mdf = S < 1.2 ∙ 𝑍
b. For semi-compact sections:
Mdf = Seff
c. For slender sections:
Mdf = Zeff
2. If Fv > 0.6 Pv

475 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

a. For plastic or compact sections:

Mdf = S − Sv ∙ ρ
b. For semi-compact sections:

Mdf = Seff − Sv ∙ ρ
c. For slender sections:

Sv
Mdf = Zeff − ρ ∙ ( )
1.5
2 ∙ Fv 2
ρ=[ ]
Pv
Where:

Z Elastic resistant modulus of the section.

Zeff Effective elastic modulus.

S Plastic resistant modulus of the section.

Seff Effective plastic modulus.

Sv Plastic reduced modulus due to the effect of shear force.

Sv Parameter Calculation

The Sv calculation is done following the expression below:

Sv = S − Sf

Where:

S ∑
Plastic resistant modulus of the section: S= S
i = elements i

Sf Plastic modulus of the section remaining after deduction

∑
of the shear area: Sr = S
i = webs i

4. Calculation of the total criterion:

CRT_TOT = Max (Crt_V, Crt_PV, Crt_M)

476 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

5. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table:

Result Concepts Articles Description

MX Mx Design value of the bending moment
MC Mc 4.2.5 Moment capacity
FV Fv Design value of the shear force
PV Pv 4.2.3 Design value of the shear capacity
CRT_V Fv 4.2.3 Shear criterion
⁄P
v

CRT_PV Fv 4.4.5 Buckling web criterion

⁄V
w

CRT_M Mx 4.2.5 Bending criterion

⁄M
c

CRT_TOT BS Global criterion

CLASS 3.5.2 Section class
WEBCLASS 3.5.2 Webs' Class
MDF Mdf 4.2.5 Plastic or elastic modulus of the section
VW Vw 4.4.5 Shear buckling resistance

7.3.9 Checking of Lateral Torsional Buckling Resistance (BS

Article 4.3)
1. Forces and moments selection.
The forces and moments considered in this check are:
Mx = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment about the relevant
axis of bending.

2. Class determination.
3. Criteria calculation.
Resistance to lateral-torsional buckling need not be checked separately for the following
cases:

 Bending about the minor axis

 Circular hollow sections (CHS), square RHS or circular or square solid bars

477 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

 I, H, Channel or Box sections, if equivalent slenderness (λLT ) does not exceed

the limiting equivalent slenderness (λL0 )
 RHS, unless the slenderness exceeds the limiting value given in Table 15 of the
code for the relevant value D/B.

D/B Depth / Width Limiting value of λ

1.25 770∗ 275/ρy

1.33 670∗ 275/ρy

1.4 580∗ 275/ρy

1.44 550∗ 275/ρy

1.5 515∗ 275/ρy

1.67 435∗ 275/ρy

1.75 410∗ 275/ρy

1.8 395∗ 275/ρy

2 340∗ 275/ρy

2.5 275∗ 275/ρy

3 225∗ 275/ρy

4 170∗ 275/ρy

When checking for lateral torsional buckling of beams, the criterion shall be taken as:

mLT ∙ Mx
Crt_TOT = ≤1
Mb
Where:

Mb Lateral torsional buckling resistance moment.

mLT Equivalent uniform moment factor for lateral torsional

buckling. This can be introduced according to the table 18 of
the code (by default, mLT = 1)

Mx Maximum major axis bending moment.

478 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

3.1 Determination of the buckling resistance moment Mb (Article 4.3.6.4)

The value of Mb may be determined from the following:

 For plastic and compact sections:

Mb = ρb ∙ Sx
 For semi-compact sections:
Mb = ρb ∙ Seff
 For slender sections:
Mb = ρb ∙ Seff
Where ρb is the bending strength.

If the equivalent slenderness λLT is less than or equal to the limiting slenderness λL0
for the relevant design strength given in the tables 16 and 17 of the code, then ρb
should be taken as equal to ρy and no considerations for lateral torsional buckling
will be necessary.

For λLT ≤ λL0 → ρb = ρy

Otherwise the bending strength is obtained from the formula given in Appendix B.2.1
of the code:
ρE ∙ρy
For λLT > λL0 → ρb = 1 ⁄
ϕLT +(ϕLT2 −ρE ∙ρy ) 2

ρy (ηLT + 1) ∙ ρE
ϕLT =
2
ρE = (π2 ∙ E⁄ 2 )
λLT
Where LT is the Perry coefficient

The Perry coefficient ηLT for lateral torsional buckling should be taken as follows:

a) For rolled sections:

ηLT = αLT ∗ (λLT − λL0 )/1000 con ηLT ≥ 0

b) For welded sections:

479 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

If λLT ≤ λL0 ηLT = 0

If λL0 ≤ λLT < 2λL0 ηLT = 2αLT (λLT − λL0 )/1000

If 2λL0 ≤ λLT ≤ 3λL0 ηLT = 2αLT (λL0 )/1000

If 3λL0 ≤ λLT ηLT = (λLT − λL0 )/1000

Where:
1⁄
π2 E 2
λL0 Limiting equivalent slenderness: λL0 = 0.4 ( ρ )
y

αLT Robertson constant, taken as 0.007.

λLT Equivalent slenderness.

A. Equivalent Slenderness for I, H and Channel Sections

The equivalent slenderness λLT is taken as follows:

λLT = uvλ√βw
The ratio βw depends on the section class:

 For class 1 or 2 sections: βw = 1.0

 For class 3 sections: βw = Seff ⁄Sx
 For class 4 sections: βw = Zeff ⁄Sx
LEx LEy
λ = max ( , )
ry ry
Lex = L ∙ CfBuckx ∙ Kltx
Ley = L ∙ CfBuckx ∙ Klty

The buckling parameter u and the torsional index x are calculated as follows:

 For I and H sections

1⁄
4Sx2 γ 4
u = ( 2 2)
A hs
Tc + Tt
hs = (D − )
2
x = 0.566 ∙ hs (A/J)0.5

480 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

 For Channel sections

1⁄
Iy Sx2 γ 4
u=( 2 )
A H
1⁄
AH 2
x = 1.132 ( )
Iy J
Iy
γ = (1 − )
Ix
Where:

J Torsion constant (mechanical property of the section).

Tc Thickness of the compression flange.

Tt Thickness of the tension flange.

Sx Plastic modulus about the major axis.

Ix Moment of inertia about the major axis (mechanical property

of the section).

Iy Moment of inertia about the minor axis (mechanical property

of the section).

A Cross sectional area (mechanical property of the section).

H Warping constant (mechanical property of the section).

The slenderness factor (v parameter) is given by:

−1⁄
1⁄ 2
2 2
λ
v = [(4η(η − 1) + 0.05 ( ) + Ψ2 ) + Ψ]
x

Icf
η=
Icf + Itf
Where:

Icf Moment of area of the compression flange about the

minor axis of the section.

Itf Moment of area of the tension flange about the minor axis
of the section.

481 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Ψ Monosymmetry index, for I and T sections with lipped

flanges.

The monosymmetry index Ψ is calculated as follows:

D
Ψ = 0.8 ∙ (2η − 1) ∙ (1 + 2DL ) for η > 0.5
D
Ψ = 1.0 ∙ (2η − 1) ∙ (1 + 2DL ) for η < 0.5

Where:

D Overall depth of the section (mechanical property of the

section).

DL Depth of the lip. By default DL=0.

B. Equivalent slenderness determination for Box Sections including RHS (Appendix B.2.6)

The equivalent slenderness, λLT , for box sections is taken directly from the
expression below:
1⁄
λLT = 2.25 ∙ (Φb ∙ λ ∙ βw ) 2

1⁄
Sx2 ∙ γ′ 2
Φb = ( )
A∙J
Iy J
γ′ (1 − ) ∙ (1 − )
Ix 2.6 ∙ Ix
C. Equivalent slenderness determination for T sections (Appendix B.2.8)

The equivalent slenderness, λLT , for T sections is obtained from the following:

a) If Ixx = Iyy : Lateral torsional buckling does not occur and λLT = 0

b) If Iyy > Ixx : Lateral torsional buckling occurs about the x-x axis and λLT is given
by:

βW LE B 0.5
λLT = 2.8 ( )
T2

482 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

c) If: Ixx < Iyy Lateral torsional buckling occurs about the x-x axis and λLT is given by:

λLT = uνλ√βW
0.25
4Sx2 γ
u=( 2)
A2 (D − T⁄2)
−1⁄
1⁄ 2
2 2
v = [(w + 0.05(λ⁄x) + Ψ2 ) + Ψ]

4H
w=( 2)
Iy (D − T⁄2)
x = 0.566(D − T⁄2)(A⁄J)0.5
γ = 1 − Iy ⁄Ix
B3 T 3 (D − T⁄2)3 t 3
H= +
144 36
D. Equivalent slenderness determination for Equal Angle sections (Appendix B.2.9.1)

The equivalent slenderness, λLT , for equal angle sections is obtained from the
following:

λLT = 2.25∗ (ϕa ∗ λv )0.5

0.5
Zu2 γa
ϕa = ( )
AJ
Iv
γa = (1 − )
Iu
Lv
λv =
rv
E. Equivalent slenderness determination for Unequal Angle sections (Appendix B.2.9.2)

The equivalent slenderness, λLT , for unequal angle sections is obtained from the
following:

λLT = 2.25∗ νa (ϕa ∗ λv )0.5

0.5 −0.5
4.5Ψa 2 4.5Ψa
νa = [(1 + ( ) ) + ]
λv λv

∫ υ(u2i + ν2i ) 1
Ψa = [2υ0 − ]
Iu t

483 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

The monosymmetry index Ψa for an unequal angle is taken as positive when the
short leg is in compression and negative when the long leg is in compression.

ν0 is the coordinate of the shear center along the v-v axis.

Result Concepts Articles Description

MB mb 4.3.6 Buckling resistance moment
UMLT 4.3.6 Equivalent uniform moment
M m Equivalent uniform moment factor
LAMBDA Lambda B.2 Slenderness
LAMBDALT LambdaLT B.2 Equivalent slenderness
LAMBDALO LambdaLO B.2 Limiting equivalent slenderness
CRT_TOT mLT ∙ Mx 4.3.6 Global criterion
Mb
CLASS 3.5.2 Section class
WEBCLASS 3.5.2 Web class

7.3.10 Checking of Members in Axial Tension (BS Article 4.6)

1. Forces and moments selection.
The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
F = FX Design value of the axial force (positive if tensile, element
not processed if compressive).

2. Class determination.
3. Criteria calculation.
For members under axial tension, the general criterion Crt_TOT is checked at each
section. This criterion coincides with the axial criterion Crt_N:
F
F ≤ Pt  Crt_TOT = Crt_N = Pt ≤ 1
Where Pt is the tension capacity: Pt = Aneff /ρy

4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table:

484 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Result Concepts Articles Description

F F 4.6.1 Tension Force
PT Pt 4.6.1 Tension capacity
CRT_TOT F⁄Pt 4.6.1 Global criterion

7.3.11 Checking of Members in Axial Compression (BS Article

4.7)
1. Forces and moments selection.
The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
F = FX Design value of the axial force (negative if it is
compressive). If it is tensile, the element is not processed.

2. Class determination.
3. Criteria calculation.
For members under axial compression, the general criterion Crt_TOT is checked at
each section. This criterion coincides with the axial compression criterion Crt_CB:
F
F ≤ Pc  Crt_TOT = Pc ≤ 1
Where:

F Axial compression force.

Pc Compressive strength for buckling.

The compressive strength is determined according to the article 4.7.4 of BS

5950:2000:

 For class 1, 2 or 3 sections:

Pc = Ag ∙ ρc
 For class 4 sections:
Pc = Aeff ∙ ρcs
Where:

Ag Gross sectional area.

Aeff Effective cross sectional area.

ρc Compressive strength.

485 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

ρcs Compressive strength for a reduced slenderness of

0.5
λ(Aeff ⁄Ag ) .

The compressive strength may be obtained from (See Appendix C):

ρE ∙ ρy
ρc = 1⁄
2
ϕ + (ϕ2 − ρE ∙ ρy )
ρy ∙ (η + 1) ∙ ρE
ϕ=
2
Where:

ρy Design strength (reduced by 20N/mm2 for welded I, H or

box sections).

ρE Euler strength: ρE = π2 ∙ E⁄λ2

E Material elasticity modulus.

𝜆 LE
Slenderness: λ = ⁄i
g

ig Radius of gyration about the relevant axis.

LE Effective buckling length: LE = max(L ∙ CfBuckx ∙ Kx, L ∙

CfBucky ∙ K y )

L Actual length of the member.

K x and K y Correction factors of buckling lengths for planes XZ and

YZ.

The Perry coefficient η for flexural buckling under load should be taken as follows
(Appendix C.2):

η = 0.001 ∙ a ∙ (λ − λo )
Where λo is the limiting slenderness:
1⁄2
π2 ∙ E
λo = 0.2 ∙ ( )
ρy
The constant a (Robertson constant) is determined by the program from the type of
section and buckling axis, according to the table 23 of the BS 5950:2000. Therefore, if

486 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

the user introduces a value for this constant in member properties, the program will
give precedence to the user’s value.

a= 2.0 for curve (a)

a= 3.5 for curve (b)

a= 5.5 for curve (c)

a= 8.0 for curve (d)

To distinguish between I and H shapes the program follows the criteria below:

I shapes if ix ⁄iy > 2

H shapes if ix ⁄iy < 2
4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Articles Description

F F 4.7 Compression Force
PC Pc 4.7.4 Compression capacity
RHOC ρc 4.7.5 Compression Resistance
LAMBDA Lambda 4.7.2 Slenderness
LAMBDA0 Lambda0 C.2 Limiting slenderness
PERRYFCT NU C.2 Perry factor
ROBERSTS a C.2 Robertson constant
CRT_TOT F⁄Pc 4.7 Global criterion
WEBCLASS 3.5.2 Web class
CLASS 3.5.2 Section class

7.3.12 Tension Members with Moments (BS Article 4.8.2)

1. Forces and moments selection.
The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
F = FX Design value of the axial force.

Mx = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment along the primary

487 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

bending axis.

My = MZ or MY Design value of the bending moment about the secondary

bending axis.

2. Class determination.
3. Criteria calculation.
For members subjected to an axial tension force and bending moments, each section
should be checked according the same conditions for members subjected to a shear
force and bending moments (see section 9.8.3 of this manual).

Therefore, for this type of checking, the following conditions are checked:

3.1 Shear checking in both directions

Fvx
Crt_VX = ≤1
Pvx
Fvy
Crt_VY = ≤1
Pvy

Where Fvx and Fvy are the shear forces about X and Y axis, and Pvx and Pvy the
shear capacity about X and Y axis.

3.2 Shear buckling resistance of shear webs

Fvx
Crt_PVX = ≤1
Vwx

Fvy
Crt_PVY = ≤1
Vwy

Where Vwx and Vwy are the shear buckling resistance about X and Y axis,
respectively.

Vwx = ∑ q wx ∙ d ∙ t

Vwy = ∑ q wy ∙ d ∙ t

3.3 Checking of axial force and bending moments

Each section is checked according to the following condition:

488 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

F Mx My
+ + ≤1
Aneff ∙ ρy Mcx Mcy
Equivalent to:

Crt_CMP = Crt_AXL + Crt_Mx + Crt_My  1

|F|
Crt_AXL =
Pt
Mx
Crt_Mx =
Mcx
My
Crt_My =
Mcy
Where:

F Axial force.

Mx Bending moment about major axis.

My Bending moment about minor axis.

Aneff Effective net area of the section.

ρy Design strength of the material.

Mcx Moment capacity about major axis.

Mcy Moment capacity about minor axis.

Mcx and Mcy are calculated according to the Article 4.2.5 of BS 5950:2000.

For this checking type (moments on both directions), the shear area, the plastic
modulus and the Sv parameter are calculated with respect to both directions (X and Y
axis).

3.3 Checking of global criterion

CRT_TOT = Max (Crt_CMP, Crt_VX, Crt_VPX, Crt_VY, Crt_VPY)

4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Result Concepts Articles Description

F F Axial tension force

489 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Result Concepts Articles Description

MX Mx 4.2.5 Bending moment about major axis
MY My 4.2.5 Bending moment about minor axis

FVX Fvx Shear force about major axis

FVY Fyv Shear force about minor axis

PVX Pvx 4.2.3 Shear capacity about major axis

PVY Pvy 4.2.3 Shear capacity about minor axis

PT Pt 4.6.1 Axial Tension Capacity

MCX Mcx 4.2.5 Moment capacity about major axis
MCY Mcy 4.2.5 Moment capacity about minor axis

CRT_AXL 𝐹 ⁄(𝐴𝑛𝑒𝑓𝑓 ∙ 𝜌𝑦 ) 4.6.1 Axial Criterion

CRT_VX Fvx /Pvx 4.2.3 Shear Criterion about major axis

CRT_VY Fvy /Pvy 4.2.3 Shear Criterion about minor axis

CRT_MX Mx /Mcx 4.2.5 Bending Criterion about major axis

CRT_MY My /Mcy 4.2.5 Bending Criterion about minor axis

CRT_PVX Fvx /Vwx 4.4.5 Buckling web Criterion about major

axis
CRT_PVY Fvy /Vwy 4.4.5 Buckling web Criterion about minor
axis
CRT_CMP Crt_AXL + 4.8.2 Axial + moments Criterion
Crt_MX +
Crt_MY
SVX Svx 4.2.6 Sv parameter for major axis

SVY Svy 4.2.6 Sv parameter for minor axis

CRT_TOT 4.8.2 Global criterion

AVX Avx 4.2.3 Shear Area for major axis

AVY Avy 4.2.3 Shear Area for minor axis

VWX Vwx 4.4.5 Shear buckling resistant for major axis

490 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Result Concepts Articles Description

VWY Vwy 4.4.5 Shear buckling resistant for minor axis

MDFX Sx , Zx , Sx − 4.2.6 Resistant modulus for major axis

Svx ∗ R o1
MDFY Sy , Zy , Sy − 4.2.6 Resistant modulus for minor axis
Svy ∗ R o1

ZX Zx 4.2.6 Elastic Modulus about major axis

SX Sx 4.2.6 Plastic Modulus about major axis

ZY Zy 4.2.6 Elastic Modulus about minor axis

SY Sy 4.2.6 Plastic Modulus about minor axis

CLASS 3.5.2 Sections class

WEBCLASS 3.5.2 Web’s class

7.3.13 Compression Members with Moments (BS Article 4.8.3)

1. Forces and moments selection.
The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
F = FX Design value of the axial force.

Fvx = FY or FZ Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the

primary bending axis.

Fvy = FZ or FY Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the

secondary bending axis.

Mx = MY or MZ Design value of the bending moment along the primary

bending axis.

My = MZ or MY Design value of the bending moment about the secondary

bending axis.

2. Class determination.
3. Criteria calculation.
Compression members are checked for local capacity at the points of greatest bending
and axial load. This capacity may be limited by either yielding or local buckling,
depending on the section properties. The member is then checked for global buckling.
Therefore, for this type of checking, the following conditions are checked:

491 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

3.1 Local Capacity Check

3.1.1 Axial Criterion
F
Crt_AX_L = ≤1
Fc
Where:

F Axial load

Fc Compression capacity:

For class 1, 2 or 3 sections: Fc = Ag ∙ ρy

For class 4 sections: Fc = Aeff ∙ ρy

3.1.2 Local criteria as for Tension Members with Moments

Bending criterion (major axis)= Crt_MX_L

Bending criterion (minor axis)= Crt_MY_L

Shear criterion about major axis= Crt_VX

Shear criterion about minor axis = Crt_VY

Buckling web Criterion about major axis = Crt_PVX

Buckling web Criterion about minor axis = Crt_PVY

3.1.3 Component Local Criterion

Crt_CM_L = Crt_AX_L + Crt_MX_L + Crt_MY_L ≤ 1
3.2 Overall Buckling Check
3.2.1 Axial Criterion (Buckling)
F
Crt_AX_O_1 = ≤1
Pc
F
Crt_AX_O_2 = ≤1
Pcy
Where:

F Design value of the axial compressive force.

Pc Compression resistance.

492 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Pcy Compresion resistance, considering buckling about the minor

axis only:

For class 1, 2 or 3 sections: Pc = Ag ∙ ρc

For class 4 sections: Pc = Aeff ∙ ρc

Ag Gross sectional area.

ρc Compressive strength obtained according article 4.7.5 of the

code.

3.2.2 Bending Moment Criterion (primary axis)

mx ∙ Mx
Crt_MX_O_1 = ≤1
ρy ∙ Zx
mLT ∙ MLT
Crt_MX_O_2 = ≤1
Mb
Where:

mx Equivalent uniform moment factor. By default mx = 1.

mLT Equivalent uniform moment factor for lateral torsional

buckling. By default mLT = 1.

Mx Bending moment about major axis.

Mb Buckling resistance moment according the article 4.3 of the

code.

MLT Maximum major axis moment .

3.2.3 Bending Moment Criterion (secondary axis)

my ∙ My
Crt_MY_O = ≤1
ρy ∙ Zy
Where:

my Equivalent uniform moment factor. By default my = 1.

My Bending moment about minor axis.

493 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

Zy Elastic modulus about the minor axis (for slender class 4

sections Zyeff is taken).

3.2.4 Component Global Criterion

Crt_CM_O_1 = Crt_AX_O_1 + Crt_MX_O_1 + Crt_MY_O ≤ 1
Fx |mx ∗ Mx | |my ∗ My |
Crt_Cmp_O_1 = + +
Pc ρy Zx ρy Zy
Crt_CM_O_2 = Crt_AX_O_2 + Crt_MX_O_2 + Crt_MY_O ≤ 1
Fx |mLT ∗ MLT | |my ∗ My |
Crt_Cmp_O_2 = + +
Pcy Mb ρy Zy
Crt_CM_O = Max(Crt_CM_O_1, Crt_CM_O_2 ≤ 1
3.3 Total Criterion
Crt_TOT=Max(Crt_CM_L,Crt_CM_O,Crt_VX, Crt_VPX, Crt_VY,Crt_VPY)
4. Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF). Checking results:
criteria and variables are described in the following table.

TABLE Concepts Articles Description

F F Design value of the axial
compressive force
PC Pc 4.7.4 Compression resistance
FVX Fvx Shear force about major axis
MX Mx Bending moment about major axis
ZX Zx 4.2.5 Elastic Modulus about major axis
SX Sx 4.2.5 Plastic Modulus about major axis
SVX Svx 4.2.5 Sv parameter for major axis
AVX Avx 4.2.3 Shear Area for major axis
VWX Vwx 4.4.5 Shear buckling resistant for major
axis
MDFX Sx , Zx , Sx − Svx ∗ R o1 4.2.5 Resistant modulus for major axis
PVX Pvx 4.2.3 Shear capacity about major axis

494 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

TABLE Concepts Articles Description

MCX Mcx 4.2.5 Moment capacity about major axis
FVY Fvy Shear force about minor axis

MY My Bending moment about minor axis

ZY Zy 4.2.5 Elastic Modulus about minor axis

SY Sy 4.2.5 Plastic Modulus about minor axis

SVY Svy 4.2.5 Sv parameter for minor axis

AVY Avy 4.2.3 Shear Area for minor axis

VWY Vwy 4.4.5 Shear buckling resistant for minor

axis
MDFY Sy , Zy , Sy − Svy ∗ R o1 4.2.5 Resistant modulus for minor axis

PVY Pvy 4.2.3 Shear capacity about minor axis

MCY Mcy 4.2.5 Moment capacity about minor axis

M M 4.8.3.3 Equivalent uniform moment factor

LAMBDA Lambda 4.3.7.5 Slenderness
LAMBDA0 Lambda0 C.2 Limiting slenderness
LAMBDALT LambdaLT 4.3.7.5 Equivalent slenderness
LAMBDAL0 LambdaL0 B.2.4 Limiting equivalent slenderness
PERRYFCT NU C.2 Perry Factor
MB Mb 4.3.7 Buckling resistance moment
capacity
CRT_TOT Max(Crt_CM_L, 4.8.3 Total Criterion
Crt_CM_O, Crt_VX,
Crt_VY, ...)
CRT_CM_L Crt_AX_L + Crt_MX_L 4.8.3 Local Axial + moments Criterion
+ Crt_MY_L
CRT_CM_O Crt_AX_O + 4.8.3 Global Axial + moments Criterion
Crt_MX_O +
Crt_MY_O

495 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.3 Steel Structures According to British Standard 5950

TABLE Concepts Articles Description

CRT_AX_L F 4.8.3 Local axial criterion
Fc
CRT_MX_L Mx ⁄Mcx 4.2.5 Local bending moment criterion
about X axis
CRT_MY_L My ⁄Mcy 4.2.5 Local bending moment criterion
about Y axis
CRT_AX_O F/Pc ,⁄F/Pcy 4.8.3 Global axial criterion

CRT_MX_O mx ∙Mx mLT ∙MLT 4.8.3 Global bending moment criterion

,
ρy ∙Zx Mb
about X axis
CRT_MY_O my ∙ My 4.8.3 Global bending moment criterion
ρy ∙ Zy about Y axis
CRT_VX Fvx ⁄Pvx 4.2.3 Shear criterion about X axis
CRT_PVX Fvx ⁄Vwx 4.4.5 Buckling web Criterion about
major axis
CRT_VY Fvy ⁄Pvy 4.2.3 Shear criterion about Y axis

CRT_PVY Fvy ⁄Vwy 4.4.5 Buckling web Criterion about

minor axis
CLASS Class 3.5.2 Section Class
WEBCLASS Webclass 3.5.2 Web’s Class

496 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

7.4. Steel Structures According to ASME

BPVC III Sub. NF
Steel structures checking according to ASME BPVC III Subsection NF in CivilFEM includes the
checking of structures composed of welded or rolled shapes under axial forces, shear forces
and bending moments in 3D.

The calculations performed by CivilFEM correspond to the provisions of this code according
to the following sections:

1 Allowable Stresses

2 Stability and Slenderness and Width-Thickness Ratios

7.4.1 Checking Types

With CivilFEM it is possible to accomplish the following checking and analysis types:

Checking of sections (ASME NF-3322.1) subjected to:

Stress in Tension
Stress in Shear
Stress in Compression
Stress in Bending
Axial Compression and Bending
Axial Tension and Bending

Stability check (ASME NF-3322.2):

Maximum Slenderness Ratios

Width Ratios

497 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

7.4.2 Material Properties

The following material properties are used for checking according to ASME BPVC III
Subsection NF:

Description Property
Steel yield strength Sy (th)

Ultimate strength Su (th)

Modulus of Elasticity E
*th = plate thickness

Furthermore, although austenitic stainless steel is an intrinsic material property, it can be

modified by changing the material property.

7.4.3 Section Data

The section data of the element must be included in the CivilFEM database. All geometrical
and mechanical properties are automatically obtained when defining the cross section or
capturing the solid section. The section data required for checking according to this code are
listed below:

Data Description
A Area of the cross-section

Iy Moment of inertia about Y axis

Iz Moment of inertia about Z axis

Iyz Product of inertia about YZ

Y Coordinate Y of the considered fiber

Z Coordinate Z of the considered fiber

iy Radius of gyration about Y axis

iz Radius of gyration about Z axis

Yws Shear area in Y

Zws Shear area in Z

498 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

From the net section, only the area is considered. This area is calculated by subtracting the
holes for screws, rivets and other holes from the gross sectional area. The user should be
aware that the code indicates the diameter used to calculate the area of holes is greater
than the real diameter. The area of holes is introduced within the structural steel code
properties.

In order to determine the effective net area Ae of axially loaded tension members, the
reduction coefficient Ct must be set (parameter). By default, Ct=0.75.

7.4.4 Structural Steel Properties

For ASME BPVC III Subsection NF, the data set checked at member level is shown in the
following table.

Description Data Chapter

1.- Unbraced length of the member L 3322
2.- Buckling length factor in Y axis KY 3322
3.- Buckling length factor in Z axis KZ 3322
4.- Bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient CBY 3322
in Y axis
5.- Bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient CBZ 3322
in Z axis
6.- Coefficient applied to bending term in interaction
CMY 3322
equation and dependent upon column curvature
caused by applied moments in Z axis
CMZ 3322
7.- Coefficient applied to bending term in interaction
equation and dependent upon column curvature
caused by applied moments in Y axis PIN 3322
8.- Pin-connected members:
0: No (default)
1: Yes COLUMN 3322
9.- Member type:
0: Beam (default)
1: Column BRACED 3322
9.- Laterally braced in the region of compression:
0: No (default)
1: Yes

7.4.5 Checking Process

Necessary steps to conduct the different checks in CivilFEM are as follows:

499 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

a) Obtain the cross-sectional data corresponding to the element.

b) Specific section checking according to the type of external load.
c) Results. In CivilFEM, checking results for each element end are stored in the results
file .CRCF
The required data for the different types of checking can be found in tables within the
corresponding sections in this manual.

7.4.6 Tension Checking

In CivilFEM, elements subjected to tension are checked according to ASME BPVC III
Subsection NF code for each end of the selected elements and solid sections of the model
with a structural steel cross section. The check for tension adheres to the following steps:

7.4.6.1 Calculation of the Allowable Stress

The allowable stress in tension shall be as given in the equations below:

Except for pin-connected and threaded members, Ft shall be:

Ft = 0.6 ∙ Sy ≤ 0.5 ∙ Su∗

(*)
Su on the effective net area

For pin-connected members, using the net area:

Ft = 0.45 ∙ Sy

7.4.6.2 Calculation of the Stress Criterion

The obtained equivalent stress ft is divided by the steel design strength Ft in order to obtain
a value that is stored as the CRT_STR parameter in the corresponding alternative. This value
must be between 0.0 and 1.0 for the element to be valid according to the ASME BPVC III
Subsection NF code; consequently, the equivalent stress must be less than the steel design
strength.

ft
CRT_STR = ≤1
Ft

7.4.6.3 Slenderness Ratio

The maximum slenderness ratio l/r for tension members is obtained and stored as SLD_RT.
This slenderness ratio is divided by 240 (SLD_RT shall not exceed 240) and stored as the
CRT_SLD. Therefore, this value must be between 0.0 and 1.0 for the element to be valid
according this code.

500 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

I I
STR_RT = max ( , )
ry rz

SLD_RT
CRT_SLD = ≤1
240

7.4.6.4 Calculation of the Total Criterion

The Total Criterion is obtained from the maximum value between the stress criterion and
the slender criterion; this criterion is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the corresponding
alternative in CivilFEM’s results file for each element end. This value must be between 0.0
and 1.0 for the element to be valid according the ASME BPVC III Subsection NF code.

CRT_TOT=MAX(CRT_STR,CRT_SLD)

7.4.7 Shear Checking

In CivilFEM the elements subjected to a shear force are checked according to ASME BPVC III
Subsection NF code is done for each element end of those selected elements or solid
sections of the model with a structural steel cross section.

7.4.7.1 Calculation of the Allowable Stress

The allowable stress for shear resistance of the effective section is as follows:

Fv = 0.40 ∙ Sy

7.4.7.2 Calculation of the Total Criterion

The equivalent stress obtained fv is divided by the steel design strength Fv in order to obtain
a value that is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active alternative in the CivilFEM’s
results file for each element end. This value must be between 0.0 and 1.0 so that the
element will be valid according to the ASME BPVC III Subsection NF code; consequently, the
equivalent stress must be less than the steel design strength.

fv
CRT_TOT = ≤1
Fv

This equivalent stress fv is the maximum value obtained in both directions:

Vy Vz
Fv = MAX ( , )
Yws Zws

501 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

7.4.8 Compression Checking

In CivilFEM, elements subjected to compression are checked of according to ASME BPVC III
Subsection NF for each element end of the selected elements or solid sections of the model
with a structural steel cross section.

7.4.8.1 Calculation of the Allowable Stress

The allowable stress in compression shall be determined as described below:

1- Gross sections of columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel:

(KI⁄r)2
[1 − ] ∙ Fy
2 ∙ Cc 2
FA = if kI⁄r ≤ Cc
5 3(KI⁄r) (KI⁄r)3
+ −
3 8 ∙ Cc 8 ∙ Cc 3
12π2 E kI
FA = if > Cc
23 ∙ (KI/r)2 r

where

2π2 E
Cc = √
Sy

2- Gross sections of columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel:

kI/r
FA = Sy (0.47 − 444 ) if kI/r ≤ 120

kI/r
FA = Sy (0.40 − 600 ) if kI/r > 120

3- Member elements other than columns:

502 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

FA = 0.60Sy

7.4.8.2 Slenderness Ratio

The maximum slenderness ratio l/r for tension members is obtained and stored as SLD_RT.
This slenderness ratio is divided by 200 (SLD_RT shall not exceed 200) and stored as the
parameter CRT_SLD. Consequently, this value must be between 0.0 and 1.0 for that the
element to be valid according this code.

kI ∙ I kz ∙ I
STR_RT = max ( , )
ry rz

SLD_RT
CRT_SLD = ≤1
200

7.4.8.3 Stress Reduction Factor

The ASME BPVC III Subsection NF code decreases the efficiency of a section through
reduction factors when axially loaded members contain elements subjected to compression
and have a width-thickness ratio above the limit below:

7.4.8.4 Unstiffened Compression Elements

Unstiffened compression elements have one free edge parallel to the direction of the
compressive stress. Stress on these elements shall be decreased by the reduction factor Qs
when the width-thickness ratio exceeds the limits below. The flange width will be the
distance from the free edge to the web.

1- For Single Angles,

when b/t ≤ 76/√Sy

Qs = 1.0

when 76/√Sy < 𝑏/𝑡 < 155/√Sy

Qs = 1.340 − 0.00447 (b/t)√Sy

when b/t > 155/√Sy

Qs = 15500/[Sy(b/t)2 ]

503 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

2- For Stems of Tees,

when b/t < 127/√Sy

Qs = 1.0

when 95 /√Sy < 𝑏/𝑡 < 176 /√Sy

Qs = 1.908 − 0.00715 (b/t)√Sy

when b/t > 176 /√Sy

Qs = 20000 /[Sy(b/t)2 ]

3- For other Compression Members,

when b/t < 95 /√Sy

Qs = 1.0

when 95 /√Sy < 𝑏/𝑡 < 176 /√Sy

Qs = 1.415 − 0.00437 (b/t)√Sy

when b/t > 176 /√Sy

Qs = 20000 /[Sy(b/t)2 ]

where Sy is the yield strength, in ksi.

Furthermore, proportions of unstiffened elements of channels and tees that exceed the
limits above are checked for the following limits:

Ratio of Flange Width to Ratio of Flange Thickness

Shape
Profile Depth to Web or Stem Thickness

Built-up Channels  0.25  3.0

Rolled Channels  0.50  2.0

Built-up Tees  0.50  1.25

504 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

Rolled Tees  0.50  1.10

Table NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1

This proportion checking result is defined in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF) as CTR_W with a
value of 0.0 if the proportional limits are fulfilled and 2100 if they are not.

7.4.8.5 Stiffened Compression Elements

Stiffened compression elements have lateral support along both edges which are parallel to
the direction of the compressive stress. If the width-thickness ratio of these elements
exceeds the limit below, a reduced effective width be shall be used:

1- For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:

when b/t > 238 /√Sy

253t 50.3
be = [1 − ]≤b
√f (b/t)√f

2- For other uniform compressed elements:

when b/t > 253 /√Sy

253t 44.3
be = [1 − ]≤b
√f (b/t)√f

Where f is the axial compressive stress on the member based on the effective area, in
ksi.

If unstiffened elements are included in the total cross section, f must be such that the
maximum compressive stress in the unstiffened elements does not exceed Fa Qs .
Therefore, the calculation of the effective width of stiffened elements adheres to the
following iterative process:

505 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

a) The axial compressive stress f is obtained.

b) An initial value of the effective width be is calculated.
c) A new axial compressive stress f’ of the effective area is obtained
d) If f’ exceeds Fa Qs , a new axial compressive stress f’’ is obtained by increasing the last
axial compressive stress f’.
This process is repeated until the axial compressive stress does not exceed Fa Qs or until
the effective area is equal to the total area.

Using the effective width be , the form factor Qa is then calculated by the ratio of the
effective area to the total area.

Aef = A − ∑(b − bef) ∙ t

Qa = Aef / A

7.4.8.6 Calculation of the Stress Criterion

The allowable stress for axially loaded compression members shall not exceed:

(KI/r)2
Qs Qa [1 − ] ∙ Fy
2 ∙ Cc 2
FA ≤ if kI/r ≤ Cc
5 3(KI/r) (KI/r)3
+ −
3 8 ∙ Cc 8 ∙ Cc 3

After verifing the equation above, the equivalent stress obtained fa is divided by the steel
design strength Fa to obtain a value stored as the CRT_STR parameter in the active
alternative in CivilFEM’s results file for each element end. This value must be between 0.0
and 1.0 so that the element will be valid according to ASME BPVC III Subsection NF;
therefore, the equivalent stress must be lower than the steel design strength.

fa
CRT_TOT =
Fa

506 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

7.4.8.7 Calculation of the Total Criterion

The Total Criterion is obtained from the maximum value between the stress criterion and
the slender criterion and is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active alternative in the
CivilFEM’s results file for each element end. This value must be between 0.0 and 1.0 for the
element to be valid according to the ASME BPVC III Subsection NF.

CRT_TOT = MAX (CRT_STR, CRT_SLD)

7.4.9 Bending Checking

In CivilFEM, elements subjected bending are checked according to ASME BPVC III Subsection
NF for each element end of the selected elements or solid sections of the model with a
structural steel cross section.

7.4.9.1 Calculation of the Allowable Stress

First, the section is classified as a compact section, member with a high flange width-
thickness ratio or miscellaneous member:

(a) Compact sections: For a section to qualify as compact, its flanges must be continuously
connected to the web or webs and the width-thickness ratios of its compression elements
must not exceed the limiting ratios below:

1- The width-thickness ratio of the compression flanges shall not exceed:

a. for unstiffened elements b/t < 65/√Sy
b. for stiffened elements b/t < 190/√Sy
2- Depth-thickness ratio of webs
d/t < (640/√Sy)[1 − 3.74(fa/Sy)] if fa/Sy ≤ 0.16

d/t < 257/√Sy if fa/Sy > 0.16

3- Moreover, the compression flanges shall be braced laterally at intervals not

exceeding 76bf /√Sy nor 20000/(d/Af )Sy. This property is set by the user as a
structural steel code property. If the cross section has no compression flanges, the
member will be taken into account as braced laterally.
(b) Members with a high flange width-thickness ratio: members shall satisfy the
requirements above, except unstiffened flanges shall satisfy:

507 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

65/√Sy < 𝑏/𝑡 < 95/√Sy

(c) Miscellaneous members: limit ratios above do not apply to these members.

Next, the allowable bending stress is determined by the equations below:

1- I Sections:
a. Compact sections bent about their minor axis of inertia shall not exceed a
bending stress of:
FB = 0.75 ∙ Sy

b. Members with a high flange width-thickness ratio bent about their minor axis
of inertia shall not exceed a bending stress of:
FB = Sy[1.075 − 0.005(br /2t f )√Sy]

c. Compact sections bent about their major axis of inertia shall not exceed:
FB = 0.66Sy

d. Members with a high flange width-thickness ratio bent about their major axis
of inertia shall not exceed a bending stress of:
FB = Sy[0.79 − 0.002(bf /2t f )√Sy]

e. Miscellaneous member sections bent about their major axis of inertia shall
not exceed the larger value below:
2
FB1 = { [Sy(I/rc )2 ] /(1530 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )} Sy ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy
3

when [(102 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/Sy]1⁄2 ≤ I/rc ≤ [(510 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/Sy]1⁄2

FB1 = (170 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/(I/rc )2 ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy

when I/rc ≥ [(510 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/Sy]1⁄2

where rc is the radius of the section, comprising of the area of the

compression flange plus one-third of the area of the compression web.

When the area of the compression flange is greater than or equal to the area
of the tension flange:

FB2 = (12 ∙ 103 ∙ CC )/(I ∙ d⁄Af ) ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy

508 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

f. Members not included above which are braced laterally in the region of the
compressive stress shall not exceed a bending stress of:
FB = 0.60 ∙ Sy

If these members are not braced laterally in the region of the compressive
stress, the section will be not checked.

2- Tubular Square Box Sections:

a. Compact sections bent about their minor axis of inertia, but not necessarily
braced laterally, shall not exceed a bending stress of:
FB = 0.66 ∙ Sy

b. Members not included shall not exceed a bending stress of:

FB = 0.60 ∙ Sy

However, this section strength can be decreased through reduction factors.

3- Pipe Sections:
a. If the diameter-thickness ratio of hollow, circular sections does not exceed
3300/Sy, the bending stress shall not exceed:
FB = 0.66 ∙ Sy

If the diameter-thickness ratio is greater than the value above, the section will
be not checked.

4- U channel Sections:
a. If the section is bent about its major axis of inertia, the bending stress shall
not exceed the larger value below:
2
FB1 = { − [Sy(I⁄rc )2 /(1530 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )]} Sy ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy
3

when [(102 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/Sy]1⁄2 ≤ I⁄rc ≤ [(510 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/Sy]1⁄2

FB1 = (170 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/(I⁄rc )2 ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy

when I⁄rc ≥ [(510 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/Sy]1⁄2

509 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

where rc is the radius of the section, comprising of the area of the

compression flange plus one-third of the area of the compression web.

When the area of the compression flange is greater than or equal to the area
of the tension flange,

FB2 = (12 ∙ 103 ∙ cb )/(I ∙ d⁄Af ) ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy

b. Members not included above which are braced laterally in the region of the
compressive stress shall not exceed a bending stress of:
FB = 0.60 ∙ Sy

If these members are not braced laterally in the region of the compressive
stress, the section will be not checked.

5- Tees Sections:
a. Compact sections loaded in the direction of the web which coincides with the
minor axis of inertia, shall not exceed a bending stress of:
FB = 0.66 ∙ Sy

b. Members with a high flange width-thickness ratio which are loaded in the
direction of the web coinciding with the minor axis of inertia shall not exceed
a bending stress of:
FB = Sy[0.79 − 0.002(bf ⁄2t f )√Sy]

c. Miscellaneous member sections loaded in the direction of the web coinciding

with the minor axis of inertia, shall not exceed the larger bending stress
below:
2
FB1 = { − [Sy(I⁄rc )2 /(1530 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )]} Sy ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy
3

when [(102 ∙ 103 ∙ cb )/Sy]1⁄2 ≤ I⁄rc ≤ [(510 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/]1⁄2

FB1 = (170 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/(I⁄rc )2 ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy

When I⁄rc ≥ [(510 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/Sy]1⁄2

where rc is the radius of a section comprising the area of the compression

flange plus one-third of the area the of compression web

510 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

When the compression flange area is greater than or equal to the tension
flange area:

FB2 = (12 ∙ 103 ∙ Cb )/(I ∙ d⁄Af ) ≤ 0.60 ∙ Sy

d. Members not included above which are braced laterally in the region of the
compressive stress shall not exceed a bending stress of:
FB = 0.60 ∙ Sy

If these members are not braced laterally in the region of the compressive
stress, the section will be not checked.

6- All other sections:

a. Members braced laterally in the region of the compressive stress shall not
exceed a bending stress of:
FB = 0.60 ∙ Sy

If these members are not braced laterally in the region of compressive stress,
the section will be not checked.

7.4.9.2 Stress Reduction Factor

ASME BPVC III Subsection NF Code decreases the efficiency of a section through reduction
factors for flexural members containing elements subject to compression with a width-
thickness ratio in excess of the limits below:

7.4.9.3 Unstiffened Compression Elements

Unstiffened compression elements have one free edge parallel to the direction of the
compressive stress. When the width-thickness ratio exceeds the limits below, the stress
calculation will include a reduction of factor Qs. The width of flanges is taken from distance
from the free edge to the weld.

1- For Single Angles:

when b⁄t < 76⁄√Sy

Qs = 1.0

when 76⁄√Sy < b⁄t < 155⁄√Sy

Qs = 1.340 − 0.00447(b⁄t)√Sy

511 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

when b⁄t > 155/√Sy

Qs = 15500/[Sy(b⁄t)2 ]

2- For Stems of Tees:

when b⁄t < 127/√Sy

Qs = 1.0

when 127/√Sy < b⁄t < 176/√Sy

Qs = 1.908 − 0.00715(b⁄t)√Sy

when b⁄t > 176/√Sy

Qs = 20000/[Sy(b⁄t)2 ]

3- For Other Compression Members:

when b⁄t < 95/√Sy

Qs = 1.0

when 95⁄√Sy < b⁄t < 176⁄√Sy

Qs = 1.415 − 0.00437(b⁄t)√Sy

when b⁄t > 176/√Sy

Qs = 20000/[Sy(b⁄t)2 ]

where Sy is the yield strength, in ksi.

Furthermore, unstiffened elements of channels and tees with proportions that exceed the
limits above are checked for the following limits:

Ratio of Flange Width to Ratio of Flange Thickness

Shape
Profile Depth to Web or Stem Thickness

Built-up channels  0.25  3.0

Rolled channels  0.50  2.0

Built-up tees  0.50  1.25

512 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

Rolled tees  0.50  1.10

Table NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1

This proportion checking result is written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF) as CTR_W with a
value of 0.0 if the proportion limits are satisfied and 2100 if they are not.

7.4.9.4 Stiffened Compression Elements

Stiffened compression elements have lateral support along both edges which are parallel to
the direction of the compressive stress. When the width-thickness ratio of these elements
exceeds the applicable limit below, a reduced effective width 𝑏𝑒 shall be used:

1- For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness,

when b⁄t > 238/√Sy

253t 50.3
be = [1 − ]≤b
√f (b⁄t)√f

2- For other uniform compressed elements,

When b⁄t > 253/√Sy

253t 44.3
be = [1 − ]≤b
√f (b⁄t)√f

Where f is the compressive stress on member based on the effective area, in ksi.

If unstiffened elements are included in the total cross section, f must have a value such
that the maximum compressive stress in the unstiffened elements does not exceed
Fb Qs . Therefore, the calculation of the effective width of stiffened elements adheres to
the following iterative process:

a) The maximum compressive stress f of the element is obtained

b) An initial value of the effective width be is calculated in all the compressive
elements.
c) A new axial compressive stress f’ is obtained of the effective area.
d) If f’ exceeds Fb Qs , a new effective width be ’ is obtained by increasing the previous
effective width be .

513 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

This iteration is repeated until the axial compressive stress is less than Fb Qs or the
effective area is equal to the total area.

Using the effective width be , the form factor Qa is then calculated by the ratio of the
effective area to the total area.

Aef = A − ∑(b − bef) ∙ t

Qa = Aef/A

7.4.9.5 Calculation of the Total Criterion

When reduction factors are required, the maximum allowable bending stress shall not
exceed 0.6 Sy Qs or the Fb value as provided above.

The computed bending stress Fb , obtained from the effective area, is divided by the steel
design strength Fb in order to obtain a value that is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the
active alternative in CivilFEM’s results file for each element end. This value must be between
0.0 and 1.0 so that the element will be valid according to ASME BPVC III Subsection NF;
therefore, the equivalent stress must be less than the steel design strength.

fb
CRT_TOT = ≤1
Fb

7.4.10 Axial Compression & Bending Checking

In CivilFEM the checking of elements under bending and axial compression forces according
to ASME BPVC III Subsection NF code are done for each element end of those selected
elements or solid sections of the model whose cross section type is structural steel.

7.4.10.1 Calculation of the Total Criterion

For members subjected to both axial compression and bending, stresses shall satisfy the
requirements of the following equations:

fa Cmy fby Cmz fbz

+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa (1 − fa ⁄F′ey )Fby (1 − fa ⁄F′ez )Fbz

514 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

fa fby fbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60 ∙ Sy Fby Fbz

When evaluating both primary and secondary stresses:

fa fby fbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fby Fbz

When evaluating primary stresses:

fa fby fbz
+ + ≤ 1.5
Fa Fby Fbz

The Total Criterion will be the maximum value of the equations below and will be stored as
the CRT_TOT parameter in the active alternative in CivilFEM’s results file for each element
end. This value must be between 0.0 and 1.0 for the element to be valid according to ASME
BPVC III Subsection NF; therefore, the equivalent stress must be less than the steel design
strength.

7.4.10.2 Axial Tension & Bending Checking

In CivilFEM, elements subjected bending and axial tension forces are checked according to
ASME BPVC III Subsection NF for each element end of the selected elements or solid sections
of the model with a structural steel cross section.

7.4.10.3 Calculation of the Total Criterion

Members subject to both axial tension and bending stresses shall satisfy the requirements of
the following equation:

fa fby fbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60 ∙ Sy Fby Fbz

Where fb is the computed bending tensile stress. However, the computed bending
compressive stress, taken alone, shall not exceed the allowable compressive stress F a.

Therefore, the total criterion will be:

515 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.4 Steel Structures According to ASME BPVC III Sub. NF

fa fby fbz fbc

CRT_TOT = MAX ( + + , )
0.60 ∙ Sy Fby Fbz Fa

Where fbc is the computed bending compressive stress.

The total criterion is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active alternative in CivilFEM’s
results file for each element end. This value shall be between 0.0 and 1.0 for the element to
be valid according to ASME BPVC III Subsection NF; consequently, the equivalent stress must
be less than the steel design strength.

516 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

7.5. Steel Structures According to

GB50017
Steel structures checking according to the Chinese Steel Design Code GB50017 in CivilFEM
includes the checking of structures composed of welded or rolled shapes subjected to axial
forces, shear forces and bending moments in 3D.
The calculations made by CivilFEM correspond to the provisions of GB50017 from the
following sections:

Section 4 Bending element calculations

Section 5 Axially loaded structures and calculation of compression and

bending

7.5.1 Checking Types

For checks within CivilFEM according to GB50017, it is possible to accomplish the following
checking and analysis types:

Checking of sections subjected to:

- Bending force GB50017 Art. 4.1.1
- Shear force GB50017 Art. 4.1.2
- Bending and shear force GB50017 Art. 4.1.4
- Axial force GB50017 Art. 5.1.1
- Bending and axial force GB50017 Art. 5.2.1
- Compression buckling GB50017 Art. 5.1.2

7.5.2 Material Properties

In GB50017 checking, the following material properties are used:

Description Property
Steel yield strength f(th)

517 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

Ultimate strength fce (th)

Shear strength fv (th)
Elasticity modulus E
*th = plate thickness

7.5.3 Section Data

The section data of the element must be included in the CivilFEM database. All geometrical
and mechanical properties are automatically obtained defining the cross section or capturing
the solid section. Below, the section data necessary for checking according to GB50017 are
listed:

Data Description
A Area of the cross-section
Iy Moment of inertia about Y axis

Iz Moment of inertia about Z axis

Iyz Product of inertia about YZ

Y Coordinate Y of the considered fiber

Z Coordinate Z of the considered fiber
iy Radius of gyration about Y axis

iz Radius of gyration about Z axis

Yws Shear area in Y
Zws Shear area in Z
Xwt Torsional modulus

From net section, only the area is considered. This area is calculated by subtracting the holes
for screws, rivets and other holes from the gross section area. The user should be aware that
LRFD indicates the diameter from which to calculate the area of holes is greater than the real
diameter. The area of holes is introduced within the structural steel code properties.

518 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

7.5.4 Structural steel code properties

For LRFD, the checked data set used at member level is shown in the following table. All data
is stored with the section data in user units and in CivilFEM reference axis.

Description Data Chapter

Input data:

1.- Plastic developing coefficient in Y axis GAMMAy 5.2

0.0: not defined (default)
2.- Plastic developing coefficient in Z axis GAMMAz 5.2
0.0: not defined (default)
3.- Cross section type in Y axis: TSECy Table 5.1.2-1 &
0: not defined (default) Table 5.1.2-2
1: Type a
2: Type b
3: Type c
4: Type d
4.- Cross section type in Z axis: TSECz Table 5.1.2-1 &
0: not defined (default) Table 5.1.2-2
1: Type a
2: Type b
3: Type c
4: Type d
5.- Unbraced length of the member L 5.1.2
6.- Buckling length factor in Y axis KY 5.1.2
7.- Buckling length factor in Z axis KZ 5.1.2

7.5.5 Cross Section Type Classification

The cross section type is defined by values introduced in TSECY and TSECZ structural steel
code properties. Otherwise they will be computed from the following table 5-3:

CROSS SECTION TYPE Y Z

I Section Rolled Section If b⁄h ≤ 0.8 b a

519 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

Y If b⁄h ≤ 0.8 b b
Z

Welded Section b b

Channel
Y

Rolled or Welded b b
Z

Pipe Rolled a a
Y

Z
By dimensions b b

L angle Rolled b b

Square
Tubing or Box
Rolled or Welded if
Y
(b + h)/2 c c
> 20
Z t

Standard T
Y

Z Rolled or Welded b b

520 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

CROSS SECTION TYPE Y Z

I Section If t < 80𝑚𝑚 c b

Rolled
Y If t ≥ 80mm d c
Z

Welded (default) b b

Square Rolled or Welded if

Tubing or b b
(b + h)/2
Box > 20
t
Y
Rolled or Welded if
Z
(b + h)/2 c c
≤ 20
t

7.5.6 Checking Process

Required steps to conduct the different checks in CivilFEM are as follows:

a) Obtain the cross-section data corresponding to the element.

b) Specific section checking according to the type of external load.
c) Results. Checking results are stored in the results file .CRCF.

In sections corresponding to the different types of checking, the necessary data

corresponding to the each type of solicitation is described.

7.5.7 Bending Checking

In CivilFEM the checking of elements under bending according to GB50017 code is done for
each element end of those selected elements or solid sections of the model with a cross
section type of structural steel. For this check, the program follows the steps below:

7.5.7.1. Calculation of the Maximum Normal Stress

The maximum normal stress is calculated with the general equation for sections subjected to
bending moments according to axes, not necessarily principal of inertia:

521 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

My M
(Iz Z − Iyz y) − γ z (Iy y − Iyz Z)
γ y z
σ∗ = σn 2
Iy Iz − Iyz

Where:

My Bending moment in Y direction

Mz Bending moment in Z direction

Iy Moment of inertia in Y direction

Iz Moment of inertia in Z direction

Iyz Product of inertia about YZ

Plastic development coefficients

γy , γz are obtained from the associated structural steel code properties. Otherwise they
should be defined according to 11.5.4.

CROSS SECTION TYPE γy γz

Z 1.20 1.05

Y
1.20 if My > 0

Z
1.05

1.05 if My ≤ 0

522 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

Z 1.15 1.15

Z
1.05 1.05

Y
1.20 if Mz > 0
Z
1.20

1.05 if Mz ≤ 0

Otherwise 1.00 1.00

7.5.7.2. Calculation of GB50017 Criterion

The equivalent stress previously obtained is then divided by the steel design strength
σu in order to obtain a value that is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active
alternative in CivilFEM’s results file for each element end. This value shall be between 0.0
and 1.0 so that the element will be valid according to the GB50017 code; therefore, the
equivalent stress must be lower than the steel design stress.

σ∗
CRT_TOT =
σu

7.5.8 Shear Checking

In CivilFEM, the checking of elements under shear force according to the GB50017 code is
performed for each element end of those selected elements or solid sections of the model
with a cross section type of structural steel.

523 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

7.5.8.1. Calculation of the Maximum Tangential Stress

The maximum tangential shear and torsion stresses for each element end are calculated
from shear forces and section mechanical properties in the following equation:

Ty Tz
σ∗ = σt = MAX ( , )
Yws Zws

Where:

Ty Shear Force in Y direction

Tz Shear Force in Z direction

Yws Shear area about Y axis.

Zws Shear area about Z axis.

7.5.8.2. Calculation of GB50017 Criterion

The equivalent stress obtained is divided by the steel design strength σu in order to obtain a
value that is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active alternative in CivilFEM’s results
file for each element end. This value shall be between 0.0 and 1.0 so that the element will be
valid according to the GB50017 code; consequently, the equivalent stress must be lower
than the steel design stress.

σ∗
CRT_TOT = ≤1
σU

7.5.9 Bending & Shear Checking

In CivilFEM the checking of elements under bending and shear forces according to GB50017
code is done for each element end of those selected elements or solid sections of the model
with a cross section type of structural steel. The following steps:

7.5.9.1. Calculation of the Maximum Normal Stress

The maximum normal stress is calculated with the general equation for sections subjected to
bending moments according to axes, not necessarily the principal axes of inertia:

My (Iz Z − Iyz y) − Mz (Iy y − Iyz Z)

σ∗ = σn = 2
Iy Iz − Iyz

Where:

524 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

My Bending moment in Y direction

Mz Bending moment in Z direction

Iy Moment of inertia in Y direction

Iz Moment of inertia in Z direction

Iyz Product of inertia about YZ

7.5.9.2. Calculation of the Maximum Tangential Stress

The maximum tangential shear and torsion stresses for each element end are calculated
from shear forces and section mechanical properties in the following equation:

Ty Tz
σ∗ = σt = MAX ( , )
Yws Zws

Where:

Ty Shear Force in Y direction

Tz Shear Force in Z direction

Yws Shear area about Y axis.

Zws Shear area about Z axis.

7.5.9.3. Calculation of the Maximum Equivalent Stress

The maximum equivalent stress in the section σ∗ is calculated by using:

σ∗ = √σn2 + 3σt 2

The maximum equivalent stress for each element end is stored in the active alternative in
CivilFEM’s results file with the parameter named SCEQV.

525 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

7.5.9.4. Calculation of GB50017 Criterion

The equivalent stress obtained is divided by the steel design strength u in order to obtain a
value that is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active alternative in CivilFEM’s results
file for each element end. This value shall be between 0.0 and 1.0 so that the element will be
valid according to the GB50017 code; thus, the equivalent stress must be lower than the
steel design stress.

σ∗
CRT_TOT = ≤1
βF

Where β is the amplifying factor for the combined design strength. If σn and σt have
different sign β= 1.2, otherwise β= 1.1.

7.5.10 Axial Force Checking

In CivilFEM, the checking of elements under axial forces (without considering buckling)
according to the GB50017 code is done for each element end of those selected elements or
solid sections of the model with a cross section type of structural steel.

7.5.10.1. Calculation of the Maximum Axial Stress

The maximum tangential shear and torsion stresses for each element end are calculated
from shear forces and section mechanical properties in the following equation:

n1 N
σ∗ = (1 − 0.5 )
n An

Where:

N Axial force

An Net area of the cross section

n Number of high-strength frictional bolts

nt Number of bolts at the calculated section

526 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

n1
In CivilFEM coefficient is given by RTB factor which can be modified in the structural steel
n
code properties.

7.5.10.2. Calculation of GB50017 Criterion

The equivalent stress obtained is then divided by the steel design strength
σu in order to obtain a value that is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active
alternative in the CivilFEM’s results file for each element end. This value shall be between
0.0 and 1.0 so that the element will be valid according to the GB50017 code; therefore, the
equivalent stress must be lower than the steel design stress.

σ∗
CRT_TOT = ≤1
f

7.5.11 Bending & Axial Checking

In CivilFEM, checking elements subjected to bending and axial forces according to GB50017
code is conducted for each element end of those selected elements or solid sections of the
model with a cross section type of structural steel.

7.5.11.1. Calculation of the Maximum Equivalent Stress

The maximum equivalent stress in the section σ∗ is calculated by using:

My M
(Iz Z − Iyz y) − γ z (Iy y − Iyz Z)
N γ y z
σ∗ = + 2
An Iy Iz − Iyz

Where:

My Bending moment in Y direction

Mz Bending moment in Z direction

Iy Moment of inertia in Y direction

527 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

Iz Moment of inertia in Z direction

Iyz Product of inertia about YZ

Plastic development coefficients γy , γz are obtained from the associated in the structural
steel code properties.

7.5.11.2. Calculation of GB50017 Criterion

The equivalent stress obtained is then divided by the steel design strength σu in order to
obtain a value that is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active alternative in CivilFEM’s
results file for each element end. This value shall be between 0.0 and 1.0 so that the
element will be valid according to the GB50017 code; therefore, the equivalent stress must
be lower than the steel design stress.

σ∗
CRT_TOT = ≤1
f

7.5.12 Compression Buckling Checking

In CivilFEM the checking of elements considering buckling according to GB50017 code is
done for each element end of those selected elements or solid sections of the model with a
cross section type of structural steel and subjected to a compressive force.

7.5.12.1. Calculation of the Maximum Equivalent Stress

The maximum equivalent stress in the section σ∗ is calculated by using:

N
σ∗ =
φA

Where φ is the stability coefficient for axially compressed members. The stability coefficient
φ is calculated from the slenderness ratio:
ky
λy = L
iy

kz
λz = L
iz

Where:

528 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

L Unbraced length of member

ky Buckling length factors in Y axis

kz Buckling length factors in Z axis

iy Rotational radius to Y axis

iz Rotational radius to Z axis

In non symmetric sections, the axes are defined as the directions of principal inertia.

To compute φ:
λ
a) If λn = π √fy /E ≤ 0.215 then φ = 1 − α1 λ2n

b) Otherwise:

1
φ= 2
[(α2 + α3 λn + λ2n ) − √(α2 + α3 λn + λ2n )2 − 4λ2n ]
2λn

Where α1 , α2 , α3 are chosen according to the following table:

CROSS SECTION α1 α2 α3

a 0.410 0.986 0.152

b 0.650 0.965 0.300

λn ≤ 1.05 0.906 0.595

c 0.730
λn ≤ 1.05 1.216 0.302

λn ≤ 1.05 0.868 0.915

d 1.350
λn ≤ 1.05 1.375 0.432

The cross section type is determined from tables of chapter 7.5.5.

529 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.5 Steel Structures According to GB50017

7.5.12.2. Calculation of GB50017 Criterion

The equivalent stress obtained is then divided by the steel design strength σu in order to
obtain a value that is stored as the CRT_TOT parameter in the active alternative in CivilFEM’s
results file for each element end. This value shall be between 0.0 and 1.0 so that the
element will be valid according to the GB50017 code; consequently, the equivalent stress
must be lower than the steel design stress.

σ∗
CRT_TOT = ≤1
f

530 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

7.6. Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Checking steel structures according to Indian Standard IS 800 (2007) is implemented in
CivilFEM. It is possible to check structures composed by welded or rolled shapes under axial
forces, shear forces and bending moments in 3D.

The calculations made by CivilFEM correspond to the recommendations of Indian Standard

General Construction in Steel – Code of Practice (Third Revision).

7.6.1 Checking types

With CivilFEM it is possible to accomplish the following check and analysis types:

- Tension Section 6.2

- Compression Section 7.1
- Bending Section 8.2.1
- Shear force Section 8.4
- Bending and Shear Section 9.2
- Lateral Torsional Buckling Section 8.2.2
- Axial Force with Moments Section 9.3

7.6.2 Material Properties

For IS 800:2007 checking, the following material properties are used:

Description Properties, symbol

Yield strength fy
Ultimate tensile strength fu

Resistance, governed by yielding γm0 = 1.1

Partial safety factor for material Resistance of member to buckling γm0 = 1.1

Resistance, governed by ultimate stress

γm1 = 1.25
Modulus of elasticity E = 200 kN/mm2
𝐸
Shear Modulus 𝐺=
2(1 + 𝜐)
Poisson’s ratio  = 0.3

531 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Coefficient of linear thermal expansion  = 1210-6 C-1

250
Constant є 𝜀=√
fy

7.6.2 Section Data

IS 800:2007 considers the following data set for the section:

- Gross section data

- Net section data
- Effective section data
- Data pertaining to the section and plates class.

Gross section data correspond to the nominal properties of the cross-section.

For the net section, only the area is considered. This area is calculated by subtracting the
holes for screws, rivets and other holes from the gross section area.

Effective section data and section and plates class data are obtained in the checking process
according to the effective width method. For class 4 cross-sections, this method subtracts
the non-resistance zones for local buckling. However, for cross-sections of a lower class, the
sections are not reduced for local buckling.

The initial required data for the IS 800:2007 module includes the gross section data in user
units and the CivilFEM or section axis. In the following tables, the section data used in IS
800:2007 are shown:

Common data for gross, net and effective sections

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Height H
2.- Web thickness Tw
3.- Flanges thickness Tf
4.- Flanges width B
5.- Distance between flanges Hi
6.- Radius of fillet (Rolled shapes) r1
7.- Toe radius (Rolled shapes) r2
8.- Weld throat thickness (Welded shapes) a
9.- Web free depth d

532 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Output data (None)

Gross section data

Description Data Reference

axis

Input data:
1.- Depth in Y Tky CivilFEM
2.- Depth in Z tkz CivilFEM
3.- Cross-section area A
4.- Moments of inertia for torsion It CivilFEM
5.- Moments of inertia for bending Iyy, Izz CivilFEM
6.- Product of inertia Izy CivilFEM
7.- Elastic resistant modulus Wely, Welz CivilFEM
8.- Plastic resistant modulus Wply, Wplz CivilFEM
9.- Radius of gyration iy, iz CivilFEM
10.- Gravity center coordinates Ycdg, Zcdg Section
11.- Extreme coordinates of the perimeter Ymin, Ymax, Section
Zmin, Zmax
12.- Distance between GC and SC in Y and in Z Yms, Zms Section
13.- Warping constant Iw
14.- Shear resistant areas Yws, Zws CivilFEM
15.- Torsional resistant modulus Xwt CivilFEM
16.- Moments of inertia for bending about U, V Iuu, Ivv Principal
17.- Angle Y->U or Z->V  CivilFEM

Output data: (None)

Net section data

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Gross section area Agross
2.- Area of holes Aholes

Output data:
1.- Net Cross-section area Anet

533 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

The effective section depends on the section geometry and on the forces and moments that
are applied to it. Consequently, for each element end, the effective section is calculated.

Effective section data

Description Data Reference

axis

Imput data: (None)

Output data:
1.- Cross-section area Aeff
2.- Moments of inertia for bending Iyyeff, Izzeff CivilFEM
3.- Product of inertia Izyeff CivilFEM
4.- Elastic resistant modulus Wyeff, Wzeff CivilFEM
5.- Gravity center coordinates Ygeff, Zgeff Section
6.- Distance between GC and SC in Y and in Z Ymseff, Zmseff Section
7.- Warping constant Iw
8.- Shear resistant areas Yws, Zws CivilFEM

Data referred to the section plates

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Plates number N
2.- Plate type: flange or web (for the relevant axis of bending) Pltype
3.- Union condition at the ends: free or fixed Cp1, Cp2
4.- Plate thickness t
5.- Coordinates of the extreme points of the plate (in Section axis) Yp1, Yp2,
Zp1, Zp2

Output data:
6.- Reduction factors of the plates at each end Rho1, Rho2
7.- Plates class Cl

7.6.3 Structural steel code properties

534 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

For IS 800:2007 checking, the data set used at member level are shown in the following
table. All the data are stored with the section data in user units and in the CivilFEM
reference axis. This data is defined as the parameters:

 L, K, KW, C1, C2, C3, CMY, CMZ, CMLT, CFBUCKXY and CFBUCKXZ.
Note that CFBUCKXY and CFBUCKXZ are used for simple buckling calculations and K, KW,
C1, C2, C3, CMY, CMZ, CMLT are used for lateral and torsional buckling. This is important
for understanding the way CivilFEM obtains buckling length. In simple buckling, buckling
effective length (K*L according to 7.2.1) is obtained as CFBUCKXZ*L or CFBUCKXY*L.
Lateral buckling effective length (LLT according to 8.3) is obtained using K*L (this K is the
one entered in the Member Properties pane).

Member Properties

Description IS800-07

Input data:

1.- Unbraced length of member (global buckling). Length between L

lateral restraints (lateral-torsional buckling)

2.- Effective length factors k, kw

3.- Lateral buckling factors, depending on the load and restraint C1, C2, C3
conditions
4.- Equivalent uniform moment factors for flexural buckling CMy, CMz

5.- Equivalent uniform moment factors for lateral-torsional buckling CMLt

6.- Reduction factor for vectorial effects N/A

7.- Buckling factors for planes XZ and YZ (Effective buckling length for Cfbuckxy,
plane XY =L*Cfbuckxy ) (Effective buckling length for plane XZ Cfbuckxz
=L*Cfbuckxz )

7.6.4 Check process

The checking process includes the evaluation of the following expression:

NEd My.Ed Mz.Ed

+ + ≤1
Nc.Rd My.Rd Mz.Rd

Evaluation steps:

1. Read the checking type requested by the user.

2. Default checking type: Bending, shear and axial force.

535 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

3. Read the CivilFEM axis to be considered as the relevant axis for bending so that it
coincides with the Y axis of IS 800:2007. In CivilFEM, by default, the principle bending
axis that coincides with the +Y axis of IS 800:2007 is the –Z.
4. The following operations are necessary for each selected element:
a. Obtain material properties of the element stored in CivilFEM database and
calculate the rest of the properties needed for checking:
Properties obtained from CivilFEM database:

Calculated properties:

Epsilon, material coefficient:

ε = √250/fy (th) (fy in N/mm2)

b. Obtain the cross-section data corresponding to the element.

c. Initialize values of the effective cross-section.
d. Initialize reduction factors of section plates and the rest of plate parameters
necessary for obtaining the plate class.
e. If necessary for the type of check (check for buckling), calculate the critical forces
and moments of the section for buckling: elastic critical forces for the XY and XZ
planes and elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling. (See section:
Calculation of critical forces and moments).
f. Obtain internal forces and moments (Td, Pd, Vy.d, Vz.d, Mx.d, My.d, Mz.d within the
section.
g. Specific section checking according to the type of external load. The specific
check includes:
1. If necessary, selecting the forces and moments considered for the
determination of the section class and used for the checking process.
2. Obtaining the cross-section class and calculating the effective section
properties (See Section: General Processing of Sections).
3. Checking the cross-section according to the external load and its class by
calculating the following criteria: Crt_TOT, Crt_N, Crt_Mx and Crt_My.
h. Recording the results.

7.6.5 Section Class and Reduction Factors Calculation

Sections, according to IS 800:2007, are made up by plates. These plates can be classified
according to:

536 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Plate function: webs and flanges in Y and Z axis, according to the considered relevant
axis of bending.
Plate union condition: internal plates or outstand plates.

For sections included in the program libraries, the information above is defined for each
plate. CivilFEM classifies plates as flanges or webs according to their axis and provides the
plate union condition for each end. Ends can be classified as fixed or free (a fixed end is
connected to another plate and free end is not).

For checking the structure for safety, IS 800:2007 classifies sections as one of four possible
classes:

Class 1 Cross-sections, which can develop plastic hinges and have the rotation
(Plastic) capacity required for failure of the structure by formation of plastic
mechanism.

Class 2 Cross-sections, which can develop plastic moment of resistance, but

(Compact) have inadequate plastic hinge rotation capacity for formation of plastic
mechanism, due to local buckling.

Class 3 Cross-sections, in which the extreme fiber in compression can reach yield
(Semi-Compact) stress, but cannot develop the plastic moment of resistance, due to local
buckling.

Class 4 Cross-sections in which the elements buckle locally even before reaching
(Slender) yield stress.

The cross-section class is the highest (least favorable) class of all of its elements: flanges and
webs (plates). First, the class of each plate is determined according to the limits of IS
800:2007. The plate class depends on the following:

- The geometric width to thickness ratio with the plate width properly corrected
according to the plate and shape type.
GeomRat = Corrected_Width / thickness
The width correction consists of subtracting the zone that does not contribute to
buckling resistance in the fixed ends. This zone depends on the shape type of the
section. Usually, the radii of the fillet in hot rolled shapes or the weld throats in
welded shapes determine the deduction zone. The values of the corrected width that
CivilFEM uses for each shape type include:

537 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

 Welded Shapes:
Double T section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

d Web free depth

Outstand flanges:

Corrected 𝐵 Tw
− − r1
width 2 2

Where:

B Flanges width

Tw Web thickness

r1 Radius of fillet

T section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

Outstand flanges:
B
Corrected width =
2

C section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

Outstand flanges:

Corrected
𝐵 − Tw − r1
width

L section:

Corrected width = √I12 + I22

538 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

I1 , I2 Angle flange width

Box section:

Internal webs:

Corrected width = H

H Height

Internal flanges:

Corrected width = B = 2 ∙ TW

Tw Web thickness

Circular hollow section

Corrected width = H

 Rolled Shapes:
Double T section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

d Web free depth

Outstand flanges:

B
Corrected width =
2

B Flanges width

T Section:

Internal webs or flanges:

Corrected width = d

Outstand flanges:

B
Corrected width =
2

C Section:

Internal webs or flanges:

539 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Corrected width = d

Outstand flanges:

Corrected width = B

L Section:

Corrected width = √I12 + I22

I1 , I2 Angle flange width

Box section:

Internal webs:

Corrected width = d

Internal flanges:

Corrected width = 𝐵 − 3 ∙ Tf

Tf Flanges thickness

Pipe section:

Corrected width = H

The limit listed below for width to thickness ratio. This limit depends on the material

k0, and the plate type, internal or

outstand; the outstand case depends on if the free end is under tension or
compression.
Limit (class) = f(ε, α, Ψ, k 0 )

ε = √250/fy (fy in N/mm2 )

where:

Compressed length / total length

 σ2 /σ1

k0 Buckling factor

The higher stress in the plate ends.

The lower stress in the plate ends.

540 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

A linear stress distribution on the plate is assumed.

The procedure to determine the section class is as follows:

Obtain stresses at first plate ends from the stresses applied on the section, properly
filtered according to the check type requested by the user.
k0
For internal plates:

0 > Ψ > −1 k 0 = 7.81 − 6.29 ∙ Ψ + 9.78 ∙ Ψ2

−1 ≥ Ψ > −2 k 0 = 5.98 ∙ (1 − Ψ)2

Ψ ≤ −2 k 0 = infinite

For outstand plates with an absolute value of the stress at the free end greater than
the corresponding value at the fixed end:

For 1 ≥ Ψ ≥ −1
k 0 = 0.57 − 0.21 ∙ Ψ + 0.07 ∙ Ψ2
For −1 > Ψ
k 0 = infinite
For outstand plates with an absolute value of the stress at the free end lower than
the corresponding value at the fixed end:

For 1≥Ψ≥0
0.578
k0 =
Ψ + 0.34
For 0 > Ψ ≥ −1
k 0 = 1.7 − 5 ∙ Ψ + 17.1 ∙ Ψ2
For −1 > Ψ
k 0 = infinite
Cases in which k 0 = infinite are not included in IS 800:2007. With these cases, the plate is
considered to be practically in tension and it will not be necessary to determine the class.
These cases have been included in the program to avoid errors, and the value k 0 =infinite has
been adopted because the resultant plate class is 1 and the plate reduction factor is  = 1

541 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

(the same values as if the whole plate was in tension). The reduction factor is used later in
the effective section calculation.

- k0 and the plate

characteristics (internal, outstand: free end in compression or tension).

Internal plates:

Limit(1) = 396 ε/(13α − 1) < 0.5

Limit(1) = 36 ε/α < 0.5

Limit(2) = 456 ε/(13α − 1)

Limit(2) = 41.5 ε/α <0.5

Limit(3) = 42 ε/(0.67 + 0.33Ψ) -1

Limit(3) = 62 ε (1 − Ψ)√(−Ψ) -1

Outstand plates, free end in compression:

Limit(1) = 9 ε/α

Limit(2) = 10 ε/α

Limit(3) = 21 ε/√k 0

Outstand plates, free end in tension:

9ε
Limit(1) =
α√α
10 ε
Limit(2) =
α√α

Limit(3) = 21 ε/√k 0

Above is the general equation used by the program to obtain the limiting proportions
for determining plate classes. In addition, plates of IS 800:2007 may be checked
according to special cases.

542 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

For example:

In sections totally compressed:

all plates
In sections under pure bending:

-1 for the web

Obtain the plate class:

If GeomRat < Limit(1) Plate Class = 1
If GeomRat < Limit(2) Plate Class = 2
If GeomRat < Limit(3) Plate Class = 3
If GeomRat Plate Class = 4

Repeat these steps (1,2,3,4) for each section plate.

Assign of the highest class of the plates to the entire section.

In tubular sections, the section class is directly determined as if it were a unique
plate, with GeomRat and the Limits calculated as follows:
GeomRat = outer diameter/ thickness.
Limit(1) = 50 ε2
Limit(2) = 70 ε2
Limit(3) = 90 ε2

For class 4 sections, the section resistance is reduced, using the effective width method.

For each section plate, the effective lengths at both ends of the plate and the reduction
1 2 are calculated. These factors relate the length of the effective zone at each
plate end to its width.

Effective_length_end 2 =

The following formula from IS 800:2007 has been implemented for this process:

Ψ = σ2 σ1

543 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

1. Internal plates:

For 0 ≤ Ψ ≤ 1 (Both ends compressed)

Internal plates

beff = ρb̅
be1 = 2beff /(5 − Ψ)
be2 = beff − be1
be1
ρ1 =
plate_width
be2
ρ2 =
plate_width

b̅ = corrected plate width

plate_width = real plate width
For Ψ < 0 (end 1 in compression and end 2 in tension)

beff =ρbc =ρb̅/(1 − Ψ)

be1 = 0.4 beff
be2 = 0.6 beff
be1
ρ1 =
plate_width

544 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

be2 + bt
ρ2 =
plate_width
2. Outstand plates:

For 0 ≤ Ψ ≤ 1 (Both ends in compression: end 1 fixed, end 2 free)

beff = ρb̅
be1
ρ1 =
plate_width

ρ2 = 0

For Ψ < 0 (end 1 fixed and in tension, end 2 free and in compression)

beff = ρbc = ρc/(1 − Ψ)

beff + bt
ρ1 =
plate_width
ρ2 = 0

For Ψ < 0 (end 1 fixed and in compression, end 2 free and in tension)

545 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

çbeff = ρbc = ρc/(1 − Ψ)

beff
ρ1 =
plate_width
bt
ρ2 =
plate_width

ρ1 and ρ2 are switched.

The global reduction factor  is obtained by as follows:

For internal compression elements

For λ̅p > 0.673

λ̅p − 0.055(3 + Ψ)
ρ=
λ̅2p

For λ̅p ≤ 0.673

ρ=1

For outstands compression elements:

For λ̅p > 0.748

λ̅p − 0.188
ρ=
λ̅2p

For λ̅p ≤ 0.748

546 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

ρ=1

λ̅p is defined as the plate slenderness given by:

b̅/t
λ̅p =
28.4ε√k 0
where:

𝑏̅ = corrected plate width

t = relevant thickness

= material parameter

k0 = buckling factor

To determine effective section properties, three steps are followed:

- Effective widths of flanges

determined from the gross section properties. As a result, an intermediate section is
obtained with reductions taken in the flanges only.
-
again.
- Effective widths of webs are calculated so that the finalized effective section is
determined. Finally, the section properties are recalculated once more.
The recalculated section properties are included in the effective section data table.
Checking can be accomplished with the gross, net or effective section properties,
according to the section class and checking type.

Each checking type follows a specific procedure that will be explained in the following
sections.

7.6.6 Checking of Members in Axial Tension

Corresponds to chapter 6 in IS-800-2007.

- Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
T = FX Design value of the axial force (positive if tensile, element
not processed if compressive).

- Class determination.

547 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

- Criteria calculation.
For members under axial tension, the general criterion Crt_TOT is checked at each
section.
T
T ≤ Td  Crt_TOT = T ≤ 1
d

Where Td is the design strength of the member.

If we only take into account the design strength due to yielding of gross section (article
6.2, IS800:2007):

Td = Tdg = Ag fy /γm0

If we take into account the design strength in tension of a plate, ,as governed by rupture
of net cross-sectional area:

Td = Tdn = 0.9An fu /γm1

An is the net cross-sectional area and it will be calculated as Ag − Aholes

Aholes should be included by the user according to the IS 800:2007

Td = min(Tdg , Tdn )

- Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file as an alternative. Checking
results: criteria and variables are described in the following table:

Checking of Members in Axial Tension

Result Concepts Description

T T Tension Force.
TD Td Design strength of the member.
TDG Tdg Design strength due to yielding of gross section.
TDN Tdn Design strength in tension of a plate, as governed by
rupture of net cross-sectional area.
CRT_TOT T/Td Global criterion.

7.6.7 Checking of Members under Bending Moment

Corresponds to chapter 8 in IS-800-2007.

548 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

- Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
Md = 𝑀𝑦 𝑜𝑟 𝑀𝑧 Design value of the bending moment along the relevant axis for
bending. Represented as Md in IS-800-2007.

- Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of the section with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial or with all the
forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation process is
accomplished with the gross section properties.
- Criteria calculation.
For members subjected to a bending moment in the absence of shear force, the
following condition is checked at each section:
Md
|Md | ≤ Mc.Rd Crt_TOT = Crt_My = | |≤1
M c.Rd

where:

Md =design value of the bending moment

Mc.Rd =design moment resistance of the cross-section

Class 1 or 2 cross-sections:

Mc.Rd = Wpl ∙ fy /YM0

Class 3 cross sections:

Mc.Rd = Wel ∙ fy /YM0

Class 4 cross sections:

Mc.Rd = Eeff ∙ fy /YM0

- Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file as an alternative. Checking
results: criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Checking of Members under Bending Moment

Result Concepts Description

MED MEd Design value of the bending moment.
MCRD Mc.Rd Design moment resistance of the cross-section.
CRT_M Md /Mc.Rd Bending criterion.

549 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

CRT_TOT Md /Mc.Rd IS 800:2007 global criterion.

CLASS Section Class.
W Wel , Wpl , Weff Used section modulus (Elastic, Plastic or Effective).

7.6.8 Checking of Members under Shear Force

Corresponds to chapter 8.4 in IS-800-2007.

- Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
Vd = 𝐹𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝐹𝑦 Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the relevant
axis of bending.

- Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

For this checking type, the section class is always 1 and the effective section is the
gross section.
- Criteria calculation.
With members under shear force, the following condition is checked at each section:
Vd
|Vd | ≤ VPl.Rd  CRT_TOT = Crt_S = | |≤1
VPl.Rd

where:

Vd design value of the shear force

VPl.Rd design plastic shear resistance: VPl.Rd = Av (fy /√3)/YM0

Av shear area.

IS800-07 specifies additional cases for the calculation of Av :

 I and channel sections:

Av = ht w (𝑅𝑂𝐿𝐿𝐸𝐷 𝑆𝐸𝐶𝑇𝐼𝑂𝑁𝑆)

Av = dt w (𝑅𝑂𝐿𝐿𝐸𝐷 𝑆𝐸𝐶𝑇𝐼𝑂𝑁𝑆)

 Rectangular hollow sections of uniform thickness

Loaded parallel to depth (h) — A h / (b + h)
Loaded parallel to width (b) — A b / (b + h)
 Circular: 2A/π
- Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file as an alternative. Checking
results: criteria and variables are described in the following table.

550 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Checking of Members under Shear Force

Result Concepts Description

VED VEd Design value of the shear force.
VPLRD Vpl.Rd Design plastic shear resistance.

CRT_S Vd /Vpl.Rd Shear criterion.

CRT_TOT Vd /Vpl.Rd IS 800:2007 global criterion.

CLASS Section Class.

S_AREA Av Shear area.

7.6.9 Checking of Members under Bending Moment and Shear

Force
Corresponds to chapter 9.2 in IS-800-2007.

- Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
Vd = 𝐹𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝐹𝑦 Design value of the shear force perpendicular to the relevant
axis of bending.

Md = 𝑀𝑦 𝑜𝑟 𝑀𝑧 Design value of the bending moment along the relevant axis of

bending.

- Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of the sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial or with all the
forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with gross section properties.
- Criteria calculation.
For members subjected to bending moment and shear force, the following condition
is checked at each section:
Md
|Md | ≤ MV.Rd → Crt_TOT = Crt_BS = | |≤1
MV.Rd

Where:

MV.Rd = design resistance moment of the cross-section, reduced by the presence of

shear.

The reduction for shear is applied if the design value of the shear force exceeds 50%
of the design plastic shear resistance of the cross-section; written explicitly as:

551 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Vd > 0.5 Vpl.Rd

The design resistance moment is obtained as follows:

- For double T cross-sections with equal flanges, bending about the major axis:
ρA2 f
MV.Rd=(Wpl − 4t v) y⁄Y
w M0

2
2Vd
ρ=( − 1)
Vpl.Rd

Aw = hw t w

- For other cases the yield strength is reduced as follows:

fy = fy (1 − ρ)

Note: This reduction of the yield strength fy is applied to the entire section. IS
800:2007 only requires the reduction to be applied to the shear area, and therefore,
it is a conservative simplification.

For both cases, MV.Rd is the smaller value of either MV.Rd or MC.Rd .

MC.Rd is the design moment resistance of the cross-section, calculated according to

the class.

- Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file as an alternative. Checking
results: criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Checking of Members under Bending Moment and Shear Force

Result Concepts Description

MED MEd Design value of the bending moment.

VED VEd Design value of the shear force.

MVRD Mv.Rd Reduced design resistance moment of the cross-

section.

552 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

CRT_BS Md /Mv.Rd Bending and Shear criterion.

CRT_TOT Md /Mv.Rd IS 800:2007 global criterion.

CLASS Section Class.

S_AREA Av Shear area.

W Wel, Wpl, Weff Used section modulus (Elastic, Plastic or Effective).

VPLRD Vpl.Rd Design plastic shear resistance.

RHO ρ Reduction factor.

7.6.10 Checking of Members under Bending Moment + Axial Force

and Bi-axial Bending + Axial Force
Corresponds to chapter 9.3 in IS-800-2007.

- Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
Nd = 𝐹𝑋 Design value of the axial force..

My.d = 𝑀𝑦 𝑜𝑟 𝑀𝑧 Design value of the bending moment along the relevant axis of
bending.

Mz.d = 𝑀𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝑀𝑦 Design value of the bending moment about the secondary axis
of bending.

- Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of the sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. These calculations are
accomplished with the gross section properties.
- Criteria calculation.
For members subjected to bi-axial bending and in absence of shear force, the
following conditions at each section are checked:
Class 1 and 2 sections:
α
My.d Mz.d β
( ) +( ) ≤1
MNy.Rd MNz.Rd
This condition is equivalent to:

Crt_My = (Crt_My)α + (Crt_Mz)β ≤ 1

553 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

My.d
Crt_My = ( )
MNy.Rd
Mz.d
Crt_Mz = ( )
MNz.Rd

Where MNy.Rd and MNz.Rd are the design moment resistance of the cross-section,
reduced by the presence of the axial force:
2
N
MNy.Rd = Mypl.Rd [1 − ( d⁄N ) ]
pl.Rd

2
N
MNz.Rd = Mzpl.Rd [1 − ( d⁄N ) ]
pl.Rd

Where  and b are constants, which may take the following values:

For I and H sections:

α = 2 and β = 5n β≥1
For circular tubes:

α = 2 and β = 2
For rectangular hollow sections:
1.66
α = β = 1−1.13n2 but α=β≤6
For solid rectangles and plates (the rest of sections):

α = β = 1.73 + 1.8n3
Nd
n=( )
Npl.Rd

In absence of Mz.d, the previous check can be reduced to:

My.d
( )≤1
MNy.Rd
Condition equivalent to:

554 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

My.d
Crt_TOT = Crt_My = ( )
MNy.Rd
Class 3 sections (without holes for fasteners):

Nd My.d Mz.d
( )+( )+( )≤1
Afyd Wel.y fyd Wel.z fyd
Condition equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My + Crt_Mz  1

Nd
Crt_N = ( )
Afyd
My.d
Crt_My = ( )
Wel.y fyd
Mz.d
Crt_Mz = ( ) f = fy ⁄γM0
Mel.y fyd yd
Where Wel.y is the elastic resistant modulus about the y axis and Wel.z is the elastic
resistant modulus about the z axis.

In absence of Mz.d, the above criterion becomes:

Nd My.d
( )+( )≤1
Afyd Wel.y fyd
Which is equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My  1

Nd
Crt_N = ( )
Afyd
My.d
Crt_My = ( )
Wel.y fyd
Class 4 sections:

Nd My.d + Nd eNy Mz.d + Nd eNy

( )+( )+( )≤1
Aeff fyd Weff.y fyd Weff.z fyd
Condition equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My + Crt_Mz  1

Nd
Crt_N = ( )
Aeff fyd

555 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

My.d + Nd eNy
Crt_My = ( )
Weff.y fyd
Mz.d + Nd eNy
Crt_Mz = ( )
Weff.z fyd
Where:

Aeff effective area of the cross-section

Weff.y effective section modulus of the cross-section when subjected to a

moment about the y axis

Weff.z effective section modulus of the cross-section when subjected to a

moment about the z axis

eNy shift of the center of gravity along the y axis

eNz shift of the center of gravity along the z axis

Without Mz.d , the above criterion becomes:

Nd My.d + Nd eNy Nd eNy

( )+( )+( )≤1
Aeff fyd Weff.y fyd Weff.z fyd
which is equivalent to:

Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My + Crt_Mz  1

Nd
Crt_N = ( )
Aeff fyd
My.d + Nd eNy
Crt_My = ( )
Weff.y fyd
Nd eNy
Crt_Mz = ( )
Weff.z fyd
- Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file as an alternative. Checking
results: criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Checking of Members under Bending Moment + Axial Force and Bi-axial Bending + Axial
Force

Result Concepts Description

556 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design value of the axial force.
MYED My.Ed Design value of the bending moment about Y axis.

MZED Mz.Ed Design value of the bending moment about Z axis.

NCRD A ∙ fyd , Design compression resistance of the cross-section
Aeff ∙ fyd

MNYRD MNy∙Rd ,Wel.y ∙ fyd , Reduced design moment resistance of the cross-
W ∙f section about Y axis
eff∙y yd

MNZRD MNz∙Rd,Wel.z ∙ fyd , Reduced design moment resistance of the cross-

W ∙f section about Z axis
eff∙Z yd

CRT_N Nd /NcRd Axial criterion

CRT_MY Myd /MNyRd Bending criterion along Y

CRT_MZ Mzd /MNzRd Bending criterion along Z

ALPHA α Alpha constant
BETA β Beta constant
CRT_TOT Crt_tot  1 IS 800:2007 global criterion

CLASS Section Class

AREA A, Aeff Area of the section utilized (Gross or Effective)
WY Wel.y , Wpl.y , Weff.y Used section Y modulus (Elastic, Plastic or Effective)

WZ Wel.z , Wpl.z , Weff.z Used section Z modulus (Elastic, Plastic or Effective)

SIGXED σX.Ed Maximum longitudinal stress

ENY eNy Shift of the Z axis in Y direction

ENZ eNz Shift of the Y axis in Z direction

USE_MY My.d + Nd ∙ eNy Modified design value of the bending moment about Y
axis
USE_MZ Mz.d + Nd ∙ eNz Modified design value of the bending moment about Z
axis
PARM_N n Parameter n

557 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

7.6.11 Checking for Buckling of Compression Members

Corresponds to chapter 8 in IS-800-2007.

- Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered in this checking type are:
Nd = 𝐹𝑋 Design value of the axial force (positive if compressive,
otherwise element is not processed). Represented as Pd .

- Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the sections general processing with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with the gross section properties.
- Criteria calculation.
When checking the buckling of compression members, the criterion is given by:
Nd
Nd ≤ Nb.Rd  Crt_TOT = Crt_CB = N ≤1
b.Rd

where:

Nb.Rd Design buckling resistance. Nb.Rd = χ β Α fy /γM1

β = 1 for class 1, 2 or 3 sections.

β = Aeff /A for class 4 sections.

Reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode, the program does
not consider the torsional or the lateral-torsional buckling.

The  calculation in members of constant cross-section may be determined from:

1
χ= 1⁄ ≤1
Φ + (Φ2 − λ̅2 ) 2

Φ = 0.5[1 + α(λ̅ − 0.2) + λ̅2 ]

where  is an imperfection factor that depends on the buckling curve. This curve
depends on the cross-section type, producing the following values for :

558 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Imperfection factor  for IS-800-2007

Section type Limits Buckling axis Buckling curve 

Rolled I h/b>1.2 and tf  40mm y–y a 0.21

Rolled I h/b>1.2 and tf  40mm z–z b 0.34

Rolled I h/b>1.2 and 40mm<t  100mm y–y b 0.34

Rolled I h/b>1.2 and 40mm<tf  100mm z–z c 0.49

Rolled I h/b  1.2 and tf  100mm y–y b 0.34

Rolled I h/b  1.2 and tf  100mm z–z c 0.49

Rolled I tf>100mm y–y d 0.76

Rolled I tf>100mm z–z d 0.76

Welded I tf  40mm y–y b 0.34

Welded I tf  40mm z–z c 0.49

Welded I tf >40mm y–y c 0.49

Welded I tf >40mm z–z d 0.76

Rolled box and pipe - Any a 0.21

Welded box and pipe

- Any b 0.34
(Using fyb)

Welded box in other case - Any b 0.34

Welded box b/tf <30 y–y c 0.49

Welded box h/tw <30 z–z c 0.49

U, L and T - Any c 0.49

1⁄
λ̅ = [βA Afy /Ncr ] 2

Where Ncr is the elastic critical force for the relevant buckling mode. (See section for
Critical Forces and Moments Calculation).

The elastic critical axial forces are calculated in the planes XY (Ncrxy ) and XZ (Ncrxz )
and the corresponding values of χxy and χxz , taking the smaller one as the final value
for .

559 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

χ = min(χxy , χxz )
- Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file as an alternative. Checking
results: criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Checking for Buckling of Compression Members

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design value of the compressive force.
NBRD Nb.Rd Design buckling resistance of a compressed
member.
CRT_CB Nd /Nb.Rd Compression buckling criterion.
CRT_TOT Nd /Nb.Rd IS 800:2007 global criterion.
CHI Min{χy , χz } Reduction factor for the relevant buckling
mode.
BETA_A βA Ratio of the used area to gross area.
AREA A Area of the gross section.
CHI_Y χy Reduction factor for the relevant My buckling
mode.
CHI_Z χz Reduction factor for the relevant Mz buckling
mode.
CLASS Section Class.
PHI_Y Φy Parameter Phi for bending My.

PHI_Z Φz Parameter Phi for bending Mz.

LAM_Y λy Non-dimensional reduced slenderness for
bending My.
LAM_Z λz Non-dimensional reduced slenderness for
bending Mz.
NCR_Y Ncr Elastic critical force for the relevant My
buckling mode.
NCR_Z Ncr Elastic critical force for the relevant Mz
buckling mode.
ALP_Y αy Imperfection factor for bending My.

560 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Result Concepts Description

ALP_Z αz Imperfection factor for bending Mz.

7.6.12 Checking Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Members Subjected

to Combined Bending and Axial Tension
Corresponds to chapter 9.3 in IS-800-2007.

- Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered for this checking type are:
NSd = 𝐹𝑋 Design value of the axial force (positive if tensile, otherwise
element not processed if compressive).

MSd = 𝑀𝑦 𝑜𝑟 𝑀𝑧 Design value of the bending moment about the relevant

bending axis.

- Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with the gross section properties.

- Criteria calculation.
With checking lateral-torsional buckling of members subjected to combined bending
and axial tension, the value of the axial force is multiplied by a reduction factor
Ψvec in order to consider the axial force and bending moment as a vector magnitude.
The value of Ψvec depends on the country where the code will be applied. That factor
is introduced as a property at member level, and typically its value is equal to: Ψvec =
0.8
The stress in the extreme compression fiber is calculated as follows:
MSd Ψvec Nt.Sd
σcom.ed = −
Wcom A
Where Wcom is the elastic section modulus for the extreme compression fiber and
Nt.Sd is the design value of the axial tension.

The verification equation is derived to:

Meff.Sd
Meff.Sd < Mb.Rd  Crt_TOT = Crt_LT = ≤1
Mb.Rd

Where:

Meff.Sd = Wcom σcom.ed

561 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

- Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file as an alternative. Checking
results: criteria and variables are described in the following table.

Checking Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Members Subjected to Combined Bending and

Axial Tension

Results Concepts Description

NTSD Nt.Sd Design value of the axial tension.
MSD MSd Design value of the bending moment.
MEFFSD Meff.Sd Effective design internal moment.
MBRD Mb.Rd Buckling resistance moment of a laterally
unrestrained beam.
CRT_LT Meff.Sd /Mb.Rd Lateral-torsional buckling criterion.
CRT_TOT Meff.Sd /Mb.Rd IS 800:2007 global criterion.
CLASS Section Class.
WCOM Wcom Elastic section modulus for the extreme
compression fiber.
SCOMED σCom.Ed Net calculated stress in the extreme compression
fiber.
CHI_LT χLT Reduction factor for lateral-torsional buckling.
BETA_W βw Ratio of the used modulus to plastic modulus.
WPL Wpl.y Plastic modulus.

PHI_LT ΦLT Parameter Phi for lateral-torsional buckling.

LAM_LT λLT Esbeltez adimensional reducida.
MCR Mcr Elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling.
ALP_LT αLT Non-dimensional reduced slenderness.

7.6.13 Checking for Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Members

Subjected to Bending and Axial Compression
Corresponds to chapter 9.3 in IS-800-2007.

- Forces and moments selection.

The forces and moments considered in this checking type are:

562 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Nd = 𝐹𝑋 Design value of the axial compression (positive if

compressive, otherwise element not processed if tensile).

Myd = 𝑀𝑦 𝑜𝑟 𝑀𝑧 Design value of the bending moment about the relevant

axis of bending.

Mzd = 𝑀𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝑀𝑦 Design value of the bending moment about the secondary

axis of bending.

- Class definition and effective section properties calculation.

The section class is determined by the general processing of sections with the
previously selected forces and moments if the selected option is partial, or with all
the forces and moments if the selected option is full. The entire calculation is
accomplished with the gross section properties.

- Criteria calculation.

When checking the lateral-torsional buckling of members subjected to combined

bending and axial compression, the criterion to satisfy is as follows:

Nd My.d Mz.d
| |+| |+| |≤1
Nb.Rd Myb.Rd Mzb.Rd
 Crt_TOT = Crt_N + Crt_My + Crt_Mz  1
where:

Crt_TOT IS 800:2007 global criterion.

Nd Axial criterion.
Crt_N = | |
Nb.Rd

My.d Bending criterion (principal axis).

Crt_My = | |
Myb.Rd

Mz.d Bending criterion (secondary axis).

Crt_Mz = | |
Mzb.Rd

Nb.Rd Design buckling resistance for compression.

Myb.Rd Design buckling resistance moment (principal axis)

Mzb.Rd Design buckling resistance moment (secondary axis).

563 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

The member resistances depend on the cross-section class and on the possibility that
the lateral-torsional buckling is a potential failure mode for the structure.

Members with class 1 and 2 cross-sections shall satisfy:

Nd k y My.d k z Mz.d
+ + ≤1
χmin Afy /γM1 WPl.y fy /γM1 WPl.z fy /γM1
where:

μ y ∙ Nd
ky = 1 − ≤ 1.5
χy ∙ A ∙ fy
Wpl.y − Wel.y
μy = λ̅y (2βMy − 4) + [ ] μy ≤ 0.90
Wel.y
μz Nd
kz = 1 − k ≤ 1.5
χz Afy z
Wpl.z −Welz
μz =λ̅z (2βMz − 4) + [ ] μz ≤ 0.90
Wel.z

χmin = min(χy ; χz )
Where:

χy and χz are the reduction factors defined at the section corresponding

to Checking for Buckling of Compression Members.

βMy and βMz are equivalent uniform moment factors for flexural bending.
These factors are entered as properties at member level. (See
section Data at Member Level, factors BetaMy and BetaMz).

Members with Class 1 and 2 cross-sections for which lateral-torsional buckling is a

potential failure mode shall satisfy:

Nd k LT My.d k z Mz.d
+ + ≤1
χz Afy /γM1 χLT Wpl.y fy /γM1 WPl.z fy /γM1
where:

μLT ∙ Nd
k LT = 1 − ≤1
χz ∙ A ∙ fy
μLT = 0.15 λ̅ CM.LT − 0.15 μLT ≤ 0.90
where CM.LT is an equivalent uniform moment factor for lateral-torsional buckling.
This factor, as the precedent factors CMy and CMz.

Members with Class 3 cross-sections shall satisfy:

564 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Nd k y My.d k z Mz.d
+ + ≤1
χmin Afy /γM1 Wel.y fy /γM1 Wel.z Fy /γM1
where ky, kz and min are as for Class 1 and 2 cross-sections.

μy = λ̅y (2βMy − 4) μy ≤ 0.90

μz = λ̅z (2βMz − 4) μz ≤ 0.90

Members with Class 3 cross-sections for which lateral-torsional buckling is a potential

failure mode shall satisfy:

Nd k y My.d k z Mz.d
+ + ≤1
χz Afy /γM1 χLT Wel.y fy /γM1 Wel.z Fy /γM1

Members with Class 4 cross-sections shall satisfy:

Nd k y (My.d + Nd eNy ) k z (Mz.d + Nd eNz )

+ + ≤1
χmin Afy /γM1 Weff.y fy /γM1 Wel.z Fy /γM1
where:

k y, k z and χmin are the same as for class 1 and 2 cross-sections,

but use the effective area Aeff , instead of the
gross area A.

μy and μz are the same as for class 3 cross-sections, but

add the moment Nd . eN that appears by the shift
of the center of gravity in the effective cross-
section, when determining
CMy and CMz .

Aeff , Weff.y , Weff.z , eN.y , eNz are defined in the section corresponding to
Checking of members under bending and axial
force and bi-axial bending.

Members with Class 4 cross-sections for which lateral-torsional buckling is a potential

failure mode shall satisfy:

Nd k LT (My.d + Nd eNy ) k z (Mz.d + Nd eNy )

+ + ≤1
χz Afy /γM1 χLT Wel.y fy /γM1 Wel.z Fy /γM1
where:

565 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

k LT is similar to class 1 and 2 cross-sections, but uses the effective area Aeff,
instead of the gross area A.

μLt is similar to class 2 cross-sections, but adds the moment Nd . eN that

appears by the shift of the center of gravity in the effective cross-
section, when determining βMLT.

Checking Parameters:
A Wy Wz αy αz eN,y eN,z eN,z
Class
A Wpl,y Wpl,z
1 0.6 0.6 0 0
A Wpl,y Wpl,z
2 0.6 0.6 0 0
A Wel,y Wel,z
3 0.8 1 0 0

Depending Depending
on on
4 A eff Well,y Weff,z 0.8 1 members members
and and
stresses stresses

Interaction Factors:

Section
Class ky kz k yLT
type

NEd
I, H 1 + (λ̅z − 0.6)
NEd χz NC,Rd 0.1. λ̅z NEd
1y2 1 + (λ̅y − 0.2) 1− . . 0.6 + λ̅z
χy NC,Rd NEd (CmLT − 0.25) χz NC,Rd
RHS 1 + (λ̅y − 0.2)
χz NC,Rd

All NEd NEd 0.05. λ̅z NEd

3y4 1 + 0.6λ̅y 1 + 0.6λ̅z 1− .
sections χy NC,Rd χz NC,Rd (CmLT − 0.25) χz NC,Rd

where:
λy y λz Limited slenderness values for y-y and z-z axes, less than 1.
fy
NC,Rd = A∗
γM1
- Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file as an alternative. Checking
results: criteria and variables are described in the following table.

566 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Checking for Lateral-Torsional Buckling of Members Subjected to Bending and Axial

Compression

Result Concepts Description

NED NEd Design value of the axial
compression force.
MYED My.Ed Design value of the bending
moment about Y axis.
MZED Mz.Ed Design value of the bending
moment about Z axis.
NBRD1 χy ∙ A ∙ fy /γM1 Design compression
resistance of the cross-
section.
MYRD1 χLT ∙ Wy ∙ fy /γM1 Reduced design moment
resistance of the cross-
section about Y axis.
MZRD1 Wz ∙ fy /γM1 Reduced design moment
resistance of the cross-
section about Z axis.
NBRD2 χz ∙ Afy /γM1 Design compression
resistance of the cross-
section.
MYRD2 χLT ∙ Wy ∙ fy /γM1 Reduced design moment
resistance of the cross-
section about Y axis.
MZRD2 Wz ∙ fy /γM1 Reduced design moment
resistance of the cross-
section about Z axis.
K_Y Ky Parameter Ky.

K_Z Kz Parameter Kz.

K_LT K LT Parameter KLT.

567 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Result Concepts Description

CRT_N1 NEd /NcRd1 Axial criterion.
CRT_MY1 K y Cmy (My,Ed + NEd ∙ eNy )/Myb,Rd1 Bending Y criterion.

CRT_MZ1 αz ·K z ·Cmz (Mz,Ed + Ned eNz )/Mzb,Rd1 Bending Z criterion.

CRT_1 CRT_N1+CRT_MY1 Criterion 1
+CRT_MZ1
CRT_N2 NEd /NcRd2 Axial criterion.
CRT_MY2 KCmy (My,Ed +NEd ·eNy )/ MyRd2 Bending Y criterion. K=KyLT if
torsion exists and if not
present K=yKy
CRT_MZ2 K z ∙ Cmz (Mz,Ed+NEd ·eNz )/ MzRd2 Bending Z criterion.
CRT_2 CRT_N2+CRT_MY2 Criterion 2
+CRT_MZ2
CRT_TOT Crt_tot  1 IS 800:2007 global criterion.

CLASS Section Class.

CHIMIN 𝑀𝑖𝑛{𝜒𝑦 , 𝜒𝑧 } Reduction factor for the
relevant buckling mode.
CHI_Y χy Reduction factor for the
relevant My buckling mode.
CHI_Z χz Reduction factor for the
relevant Mz buckling mode.
CHI_LT χLT Reduction factor for lateral-
torsional buckling.
AREA A, Aeff Used area of the section
(Gross or Effective).
WY Wel.y , Wpl.y , Weff.y Used section Y modulus
(Elastic, Plastic or Effective).
WZ Wel.z , Wpl.z , Weff.z Used section Z modulus
(Elastic, Plastic or Effective).
ENY eNy Shift of the Z axis in Y
direction.

568 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Result Concepts Description

ENZ eNz Shift of the Y axis in Z
direction.
NCR_Y Ncr Elastic critical force for the
relevant My buckling mode.
NCR_Z Ncr Elastic critical force for the
relevant Mz buckling mode.
MCR Mcr Elastic critical moment for
lateral-torsional buckling.
LAM_Y λy Non-dimensional reduced
slenderness for bending My.
LAM_Z λz Non-dimensional reduced
slenderness for bending Mz.
LAM_LT λLT Non-dimensional reduced
slenderness for lateral-
torsional buckling.

7.6.14 Critical Forces and Moments Calculation

The critical forces and moments Ncrxy , Ncrxz and Mcr , are needed for the different types of
buckling checks. They are calculated based on the following formulation:
2
AEπ2 π ixy
Ncrxy = 2 = AE ( )
λxy Lxy
AEπ2 π ixz 2
Ncrxz = = AE ( )
λ2xz Lxz
where:

Ncrxy Elastic critical axial force in plane XY.

Ncrxz Elastic critical axial force in plane XZ.

A Gross area.

E Elasticity modulus.

λxy Member slenderness in plane XY.

569 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

λxz Member slenderness in plane XZ.

ixy Radius of gyration of the member in plane XY.

ixz Radius of gyration of the member in plane XZ.

Lxy Buckling length of member in plane XY.

Lxz Buckling length of member in plane XZ.

The buckling length in both planes is the length between the ends restrained against lateral
movement and it is obtained from the member properties, according to the following
expressions:

L xy  L·Cfbuckxy

Lxz  L·Cfbuckxz
where:

Cfbuckxy Buckling factor in plane XY.

Cfbuckxz Buckling factor in plane XZ.

For the calculation of the elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling, Mcr, the
following equation shall be used. This equation is only valid for uniform symmetrical cross-
sections about the minor axis (Annex E, IS 800:2007). IS 800:2007 does not provide a method
for calculating this moment in nonsymmetrical cross-sections or sections with other
symmetry plane (angles, channel section, etc.).
1/2
π2 Elz k 2 Iw (kL)2 Glt 2
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = C1 {[( ) + + [C2 Z g − C3 Z j ] ] − [C2 Zg − C3 Zj ]}
(kL)2 k w Iz π2 Elz
0.5 ∫ 2
Zj = Zs − (y + z 2 )z dA
Iy A
where:

Mcr Elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling.

C1 ,C2 , C3 Factors depending on the loading and end restraint conditions.

k,k w Effective length factors.

E Elasticity modulus.

Iy Moment of inertia about the principal axis.

570 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Iz Moment of inertia about the minor axis.

L Length of the member between end restraints.

G Shear modulus.

Zg Za – Zs

Za Coordinate of the point of load application. ANSYS always

considers that the load is applied at the center of gravity,
therefore: Za = 0.

Zs Coordinate of the shear center.

A Cross-section area.

Factors C and k are read from the properties at member level.

The integration of the previous equation is calculated as a summation extending to each

plate. This calculation is accomplished for each plate according to its ends coordinates:

y1 ,Z1 and y2 ,Z2 and its thicknesses.

nplates
∫ (y 2 + Z 2 ) z dA = ∑ S ∗ ∫ (y 2 + z 2 )z dl
i
A Li
i=1

where:

Si = thickness of plate i

dA = Si ∗ dl

y = y1 + I ∗ cosα

z = z1 + I ∗ sinα
z2 − z1
α = arctang
y2 − y1

Li = √(y1 − y2 )2 + (z1 − z2 )2 = plate width

571 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.6 Steel Structures According to IS800-07

Li

572 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

7.7. Steel Structures According to AASHTO

LRFD (2012)
7.7.1. Checking Types

With CivilFEM it is possible to perform the following checking and analysis types:

- Tension Section 6.8.2

- Flexure 6.12.2.2, A6
- Shear Force 6.10.9
- Flexure and axial force 6.9.2.2, 6.8.2.3
- Bending plus axial force 6.9.2.2, 6.8.2.3
- Compression members 6.9.4.1.2
- Compression members 6.9.4.1.3

7.7.2. Material Properties

For AASHTO LRFD BRIDGE DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS 2010 checking, the following material
properties are used:

Description Property

Steel yield strength Fy(th)

Ultimate strength Fu(th)

Elasticity modulus E

Poisson coefficient 
Shear modulus G
*th =thickness of plate

7.7.3. Check process

Necessary steps to conduct the different checks in CivilFEM are as follows:

a) Obtain material properties corresponding to the element stored in CivilFEM database

and calculate the rest of the properties needed for checking:

573 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

Properties obtained from CivilFEM database:

Elasticity modulus E

Poisson’s ratio: ν

Yield strength: Fy (th)

Ultimate strength Fu (th)

Shear modulus G

Thickness of corresponding plate th

b) Obtain the cross-sectional data corresponding to the element.

c) Initiate the values of the plate’s reduction factors and the other plate’s parameters to
determine its class.

d) Perform a check of the section according to the type of external load.

e) Results. In CivilFEM.

The required data for the different checking types are provided within tables found in their
corresponding section of this manual.

7.7.4. Section Class and Reduction Factors Calculation

Steel sections are classified for flexure as compact, noncompact or slender-element sections.
For a section to qualify as compact its flanges must be continuously connected to the web or
webs and the width-thickness ratios of its compression elements must not exceed the
limiting width-thickness ratios p. If the width-thickness ratio of one or more compression
elements exceeds p but does not exceed r, the section is noncompact. If the width-
thickness ratio of any element exceeds r, the section is referred to as a slender-element
compression section. Compression classification is similar but with only one ratio to
distinguish slender and non-slender sections

Therefore, the code suggests different lambda values depending on if the element is
subjected to compression, flexure or compression plus flexure.

The section classification is the worst-case scenario of all of its plates. Therefore, the class is
calculated for each plate with the exception of pipe sections, which have their own
formulation because it cannot be decomposed into plates. This classification will consider
the following parameters:

a) Length of elements:

574 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

The program will define the element length (b or h) as the length of the plate
(distance between the extreme points), except when otherwise specified.

b) Flange or web distinction:

To distinguish between flanges or webs, the program follows the criteria below:

Once the principal axis of bending is defined, the program will examine the plates of
the section. Fields Pty and Ptz of the plates indicate if they behave as flanges, webs
or undefined, choosing the correct one for the each axis. If undefined, the following
criterion will be used to classify the plate as flange or web: if |y|<|z|
(increments of end coordinates) and flexure is in the Y axis, it will be considered a
web; if not, it will be a flange. The reverse will hold true for flexure in the Z-axis.

 Hot rolled Steel Shapes:

Section I and C:

The length of the plate h will be taken as the value d for the section
dimensions.
Section Box:

The length of the plate will be taken as the width length minus three times
the thickness.

7.7.5. Members Subjected to Compression

In order to check for compression it is necessary to determine if the element is stiffened or
unstiffened.

- For stiffened elements:

E
λ = 1.49√
Fy

Pipe sections

E
λ = 0.11
Fy

Box sections

E
λ = 1.40√
Fy

- Unstiffened elements:

575 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

E
λ = 0.56√
Fy

Angular sections

E
λ = 0.45√
Fy

Stem of T sections

E
λ = 0.75√
Fy

7.7.6. Members Subjected to Bending

The bending check is only applicable to very specific sections. Therefore, the slenderness
factor is listed for each section:

 Section I:
Flanges:

E EKc
λp = 0.38√F λr = 0.95√ F
yc yr

For hot rolled shapes K c = 0.76

4
For welded sections 0.35 ≤ K c ≤ 0.76 , kc =
√D⁄t
w

Fyr = minimum of 0.7Fyc , R h Fyw Sxt /Sxc y Fyw but no less than 0.5Fyc .

Web:

𝐸
√F
yc
𝜆𝑝 = 2
MP
(0.54 R M − 0.09)
h y

576 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

E
λr = 5.70√
Fy

 Section C
Flanges:

E EKc
λp = 3.76√F λr = 0.95√ F
y yr

For hot rolled shapes K c = 0.76

4
For welded sections 0.35 ≤ K c ≤ 0.76 , kc =
√D⁄t
w

Fyr = minimum of 0.7Fyc , R h Fyw Sxt /Sxc y Fyw but no less than 0.5Fyc .

Web:

E
λp = 3.76√
Fy

E
λr = 5.70√
Fy

 Pipe section:
E
λp = 0.07
Fy

E
λr = 0.31
Fy

 Box section:
Flanges of box section:

E
λp = 1.12√
Fy

577 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

E
λr = 1.40√
Fy

Webs: the program distinguishes between the flange and web upon the
principal axis chosen by the user.

E
λp = 2.42√
Fy

E
λr = 5.70√
Fy

 T section:
E
Flange: λr = 0.38√
Fy

E
λp = 1.0√
Fy

Web: No limits are included for flexure classification, so class section is only
checked for flange limit.

7.7.7. Members Subjected to Tension

The axial tension force must be taken as positive (if the tension force has a negative value,
the element will not be checked)

The factored tensile resistance, Pr , shall be taken as the lesser of :

a) yielding in the gross section:

Pr = Φy Fy Ag

Φy = 0.95

b) rupture in the net section:

Pr = Φu Fu An R p U

Φu = 0.80

578 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

Being:

An Effective net area.

Ag Gross area.

Fy Minimum yield stress.

Fu Minimum tensile strength.

Values of Rp and U must be introduced by the user according article 6.8.2.1.

The effective net area will be taken as Ag – AHOLES. The user will need to enter the correct
value for AHOLES (the code indicates that the diameter is 1/16th in. (2 mm) greater than the
real diameter).

7.7.8. Members Subjected to Axial Compression

Axial compression check by la AASHTO LRFD BRIDGE DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS 2010 of the
design compressive strength, Φc Pn , are determined as follows:

Φc = 0.90

Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling

Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling

Q = Qs Qa
P
(a) for Pe ≥ 0.44
0

P0
Pn = (0.658Pe ) P0
P
(b) for Pe < 0.44
0

Pn = 0.877Pe
Being:
P0 = QFy Ag

579 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

π2
Pe = EAg
Kl 2
(r )
s

Where:

Ag Gross area of member.

Q Slender element reduction factor.

rs Governing radius of gyration about the buckling axis.

K Effective length factor.

l Unbraced length.

Factor Q for compact and noncompact sections is always 1. Nevertheless, for slender
sections ( exceed ratio given in 10-G.6.1.1 ) , the value of Q = Qs Qa has a particular
procedure. Such procedure is described below:

Factor Q for slender sections:

For unstiffened plates, Qs must be calculated and for stiffened plates, Qa must be
determined. If these cases do not apply (box sections or angular sections, for
example), a value of 1 for these factors will be taken.
For circular sections, there is a particular procedure of calculating Q. Such procedure is
described below:
 For circular sections, Q is:

0.038∙E 2
Q = Qa = +3 0.11 E⁄F ≤ D⁄t < 0.45 E⁄F
Fy (D⁄t) y y

Factor Qs:

If there are several plates free, the value of Qs is taken as the biggest value of all of
them. The program will check the slenderness of the section in the following order:

 Angular
λ
If 0.45√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ 0.91√E⁄Fy Qs = 1.340 − 0.76
√E⁄Fy

E/Fy
If 0.91√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Qs = 0.53
λ2

 Stem of T

580 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

λ
If 0.75√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ 1.03√E⁄Fy Qs = 1.908 − 1.22
√E⁄Fy

E/Fy
If 1.03√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Qs = 0.69
λ2

 Rolled shapes
λ
If 0.56√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ 1.03√E⁄Fy Qs = 1.415 − 0.74
√E⁄Fy

E/Fy
If 1.03√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Qs = 0.69
λ2

 Other sections
Qs
If 0.64√k c ∙ E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ 1.17√k c ∙ E⁄Fy λ
= 1.415 − 0.65
√k c ∙ E⁄Fy

E/Fy
If 1.17√k c ∙ E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Qs = 0.90
λ2

Where  is the element slenderness and

4 For hot rolled I

kc = , 0.35 ≤ k c ≤ 0.76
√λ sections

k c = 0.76 for other sections

Factor Qa:

The calculation of factor Qa is an iterative process. Its procedure is the following:

7) An initial value of Q equal to Qs calculated before is taken.

8) With this value f = QsFy is calculated.
9) For elements with stiffened plates, the effective width be is calculated.
10) With be the effective area is calculated.
11) With the value of the effective area, Qa is calculated.
effctive area
Qa 
gross area
 For a box section

581 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

E E 0.38 E
If λ ≥ 1.40√ be = 1.92 ∙ t√ [1 − √ ]
f f λ f

 For other sections

E E 0.34 E
If λ ≥ 1.49√ be = 1.92 ∙ t√ [1 − √ ]
f f λ f

If it is not within those limits, be = b

With the be values for each plate, the part that does not contribute [t·(b-be)] is
subtracted from the area (where t is the plate thickness). Using this procedure, the
effective area is calculated.

Finally, with Qs and Qa, Q is calculated.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file.

Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling

This type of check can be carried out for compact sections as well as for noncompact or
slender sections. The steps for these three cases are as follows:

Nominal compressive strength, Pn :

P
(a) for Pe ≥ 0.44
0

P0
Pn = (0.658Pe ) P0
P
(b) for Pe < 0.44
0

Pn = 0.877Pe
Where:

P0 = QFy Ag
Q = Qs Qa
Factor Q for compact and noncompact sections is 1. Nevertheless, for slender sections, the Q
factor has a particular procedure of calculation. Such procedure is equal to the one
previously described.

582 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

The elastic stress for critical torsional buckling or flexural-torsional buckling Fe is calculated
as the lowest root of the following third degree equation, in which the axis have been
changed to adapt to the CivilFEM normal axis:

y 2 Z 2
(Pe − Pex )(Pe − Pey )(Pe − Pez ) − Pe2 (Pe − Pez ) ( 0 ) − Pe2 (Pe − Pey ) ( 0 ) = 0 (6.9.4.1.3-7)
r 0 r
0

Where:

Kx Effective length factor for torsional buckling.

G Shear modulus (MPa).

Cw Warping constant (mm6).

J Torsional constant (mm4).

Iy , Iz Moments of inertia about the principal axis (mm4).

X0 , y0 Coordinates of shear center with respect to the center of gravity (mm).

Iy + Iz
r̅ 02 = y02 + z02 +
A
y0 + Z02
2
H=1−( )
r̅ 02
π2 ∙ E
Pey = 2A
(K y ∙ I⁄ry )
π2 ∙ E
Pez = A
(K z ∙ I⁄rz )2
π2 ∙ E ∙ Cw
Pex = ( )
(K x ∙ I)2
where:

A Cross-sectional area of member.

l Unbraced length.

Ky, Kz Effective length factor, in the z and y directions.

ry rz Radii of gyration about the principal axes.

r̅02 Polar radius of gyration about the shear center.

583 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

In this formula, CivilFEM principal axes are used. If the CivilFEM axes are the principal axes
5º sexagesimal degrees, Ky and Kz are calculated with respect to the Y and Z-axes of
CivilFEM. If this is not the case (angular shapes, for example) axes U and V will be used as
principal axes, with U as the axis with higher inertia.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file.

7.7.9. Members Subjected to Flexure

Summary of the checks done by CivilFEM:

SECTION TYPE YIELDING LTB FLB WLB Conditions

X X X Non-slender
BOX web
(6.12.2.2.2) (6.12.2.2.2) (6.12.2.2.2)

X X(local buckling) Compact, non-

compact and
PIPE (6.12.2.2.3) (6.12.2.2.3) slender under
the limit for
flexure check.

X X X X Non-slender
T SECTION flange
(6.12.2.2.4) (6.12.2.2.4) (6.12.2.2.4) (6.12.2.2.4)

X X X Non-slender
I SECTION
web and Fy<70
(A.6.3.3) (A.6.3.2) ksi
(FLEXUREABOU
T STRONG AXIS)

DOUBLE T X X Non-slender
flanges
(FLEXURE (6.12.2.2.1)
ABOUT WEAK
AXIS)

SECTION C X X Compact
members
(FLEXURE (6.12.2.2.5) (6.12.2.2.5)
ABOUT
STRONG AXIS)

SECTION C X X Non-slender
flanges
(FLEXURE (6.12.2.2.5)
ABOUT WEAK

584 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

AXIS)

The design flexural strength, f Mn, shall be determined as follows:

f = 1.00

Where Mn is the lowest value of four checks:

e) Yielding (Y)
f) Lateral-torsional buckling (LTB)
g) Flange local buckling (FLB)
h) Web local buckling (WLB)

The checks done depends on the section:

 Box (non-slender webs)

 Yielding
M n = Mp

 FLB
If λp ≤ λ ≤ λr

y b F
Mn = Mp = (Mp − Fy S) (3.57 t f √ 𝐸 − 4.0) ≤ Mp
f

If𝜆 > λr

Mn = Fy Seff
 WLB
If 𝜆 > 𝜆p

𝐷
y F
Mn = Mp − (Mp − Fy S ) (0.305 t √ 𝐸 − 0.738) ≤ Mp
w

 Circular tubes (compact, non-compact and slender under the ratio limit

585 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

E
λ = 0.45 F )
y

1. Yielding
M n = Mp

2. Local buckling

If λp ≤ λ ≤ λr

0.021E
Mn = [ + Fy ] S
λ

If 𝜆 > 𝜆r

Mn = Fcr S

0.33E
Fcr =
λ

 T shape
1. Yielding Mn = Mp

If stem is in tension, the limit on Mn is 1.6My

If stem is in compression Mn is limited to My

2. LTB
𝜋√EIy GJ
Mn = [𝐵 + √1 + 𝐵 2 ] ≤ Mp
Lb

d Iy
B = ±2.3 √
Lb J

(The plus sign for B shall apply when the stem is in tension and the minus sign shall apply
when the stem is in compression)

586 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

3. FLB
Ifλp ≤ λ ≤ λr

λ−λp
Mn = Mp − (Mp − 0.7Fy Sxc ) (λ ) ≤ 1.6My
r −λp

Sxc : Elastic section modulus with respect to the compression flange

λ > λr is not provided because the limiting slenderness value is larger than
12 (Eq. 6.10.2.2-1)

4. Local buckling of the stem

EJ
Mn = 0.424 d ≤ My

 I shape loaded on the strong axis (non-slender web)

1. Yielding
Mn = My R pc

2. LTB
E
Lp = 1.0rt √
Fy

2
E J F S h
Lr = 1.95rt √ √1 + √1 + 6.76 ( yr x )
Fyr Sx h EJ

Where:

bf
rt = radius of gyration =
Dc fw
√12 (1 + )
3bf t f

If Lb ≤ Lp

Mn = My R pc
If Lp < Lb ≤ Lr

587 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

Fyr Sx L −Lp
Mn = Cb [1 − (1 − M )( Lb−L )] My R pc ≤ My R pc
y Rpc r p

If Lb > Lr

Mn = Fcr Sx

C b π2 E 𝐽 L 2
Fcr = 2 √1 + 0.078 ( b)
L Sx h r
( b) t
rt

3. FLB
If λ ≤ λp
Mn = My R pc
If λ ≤ λp

Fyr Sx λ−λp
Mn = [1 − (1 − R ) (λ )] R pc My
pc My r −λp

R pc is the web plastification factor for the compression flange determined as specified in
Article A6.2.1 or Article A6.2.2:

E
√F E
y
If is compact web λ≤ Mp 2 ≤ 5.7√F
(0.54 −0.09) y
Rh M y

Mp
R pc =
My

E
If is non-compact web, λ ≤ 5.7√F
y

R h My λ − λp M p M p
R pc = [1 − (1 − )( )] ≤
Mp λr − λp M y M y

588 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

R h is the hybrid factor and for sections that are checked in CivilFEM takes a value of 1.

 T shape loaded on weak axis (flanges compact or non-compact)

1. Yielding:
Mn = Mp
2. FLB
If λ ≤ λp
Mn =Mp

If λp ≤ λ ≤ λr

Sy λ− λp
Mn = 1 − (1 − Z )( ) Fyf Zy
y 𝐸
0.45√
F
[ fy
]

 C shape loaded on the strong axis ( web and flanges compact)

1. Yielding
Mn = Mp
2. LTB

E
Lp = 1.76ry √
Fy

2
Lr = 1.95 rts
E
√S
Jc
√1 + √1 + 6.76 (0.7Fy Sx h0)
0.7Fy x h0 EJc

If Lp <Lb <Lr

L −Lp
Mn = Cb [Mp − (Mp − 0.7Fy Sx )( Lb−L )] ≤ Mp
r p

If Lb >Lr

Mn =Fcr Sx

589 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

Cb π2 E Jc Lb 2
Fcr = √
2 1 + 0.078 ( )
L Sx h0 rts
(r b )
ts

h0 Iy
C= √
2 Cw

2
√Iy Cw
rts =
Sx
Where:

ry = radius of gyration about the weak axis(in)

J = Torsional constant St. Venant (in4)

Sx = Elastic section modulus about strong axis(in3)

h0 = distance between centroids of the flanges(in)

Cw =warping constant(in6)

Cb =Moment gradient modifier. Must be introduced by the user.

 C shape loaded on the weak axis (flanges compact or non-compact)

1. Yielding
Mn = min (Mp , 1.6Fy Sy )

2. FLB
If λ ≤ λp
Mn = M p
Ifλp ≤ λ ≤ λr

Sy λ − λp
Mn = 1 − (1 − )( ) Fyf Zy
Zy
E
0.45√F
fy
[ ]

590 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file.

7.7.10. Members Subjected to Shear

The design shear strength, Φv , Vn , shall be determined as follows:

For all provisions: Φv = 1.0

To calculate the nominal shear strength CivilFEM follows the provisions of the article
6.10.9.2 except for box-shaped (6.12.1.2.3b) and circular tubes (6.12.1.2.3c)

Vn =C∗ Vp

Vp =0.58∗ Fyw ∗ D ∗ t w , where D is total depth of the web.

C is the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength determined as:

D k E
a. For ≤ 1.12√ F Cv = 1.0 (AASHTO 6.10.9.3.2-4)
tw y

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
b. For 1.12√ F < t ≤ 1.40√F Cv = h √t (AASHTO 6.10.9.3.2-5)
y w y w
tw

D Ek 1.57 Ek
c. For tw
≤ 1.40√ F Cy = h 2 (F ) (AASHTO 6.10.9.3.2-6)
y ( ) y
tw

The web plate buckling coefficient, Kv, will be calculated as a constant equal to 5.0.

For shape-box sections D is the clear distance between flanges less inside corner radius on
each side. Both webs area shall be considered effective in resisting the shear.

For circular tubes the nominal shear strength will be taken as:

Vn = 0.5Fcr A

Fcr , shear buckling resistance (ksi)taken as the larger of either:

1.60E
Fcr1 = 5 ≤ 0.58Fy
L D
√ v ( )4
D t

591 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

0.78E
Fcr2 = 3 ≤ 0.58Fy
D 2
(t)

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file.

7.7.11. Members Subjected to Combined Forces

Checking of Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Tension /

Compression
For this check, it is first necessary to determine the value of Mn. This value comes into play
in the checking of formulas. The value of Mn, will be calculated in the same way as members
subjected to flexure; thus, the nominal flexure strength (Mn) is the minimum of four checks:

1. Yielding
2. Lateral-torsional buckling
3. Flange local buckling
4. Web local buckling
In the case of having bending plus tension or bending plus compression, the interaction
between flexure and axial force is limited by the following equations:
Pr
(c) For ≥ 0.2
Pc
Pu 8 M Muy
+ 9 ( Muz + M ) ≤ 1.0 (6.8.2.3-2, 6.9.2.2-2)
Pr rz ry

Pr
(d) For < 0.2
Pc
Pu M Muy
+ ( Muz + M ) ≤ 1.0 (6.8.2.3-1, 6.9.2.2-1)
2Pr rz ry

Where:

Pu Axial force resulting from factored loads.

Pr Factored resistance.

Mu Moment resulting from factored loads.

Mr Factored flexural resistance .

592 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

y Strong axis bending.

z Weak axis bending.

The following checks are carried out by CivilFEM:

 Axial force and flexural buckling

 Bending moment Z direction
 Bending moment Y direction

If one of these checks do not meet the code requirements, it will not be possible to check
the member under flexure plus tension / compression.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file

593 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.7 Steel Structures According to AASHTO LRFD (2012)

594 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

7.8. Steel Structures According to AISC

ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.
7.8.1. Material properties
For AISC 13th Edition checking, the following material properties are used:

Description Property

Steel yield strength Fy(th)

Ultimate strength Fu(th)

Elasticity modulus E

Poisson coefficient 

Shear modulus G
*th =thickness of the plate

7.8.2. Section data

AISC 14th Edition considers the following data set for the section:

- Gross section data

- Net section data
- Effective section data.
- Data belonging to the section and plates class.

Gross section data correspond to the nominal properties of the cross-section. For the net
section, only the area is considered. This area is calculated by subtracting the holes for
screws, rivets and other holes from the gross section area. (The area of holes is introduced
within the structural steel code properties).

The effective section data and the section and plates class data are obtained in the checking
process according to chapter B, section B4 of the code. This chapter classifies steel sections
into three groups (compact, noncompact and slender), depending upon the width-thickness
ratio and other mandatory limits.

The AISC 14TH Edition module utilizes the gross section data in user units and the CivilFEM
axis or section axis as initial data. The program calculates the effective section data and the
class data, and stores them in CivilFEM’s results file, in user units and in CivilFEM or section
axis.

595 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

The section data used in AISC 14TH Edition are shown in the following tables:

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Height H
2.- Web thickness Tw
3.- Flanges thickness Tf
4.- Flanges width B
5.- Distance between flanges Hi
6.- Radius of fillet (Rolled shapes) r1
7.- Toe radius (Rolled shapes) r2
8.- Weld throat thickness (Welded shapes) a
9.- Web free depth d

Output data (None)

Description Data Reference axes

Input data:
1.- Depth in Y Tky CivilFEM
2.- Depth in Z tkz CivilFEM
3.- Cross-section area A
4.- Moments of inertia for torsion It CivilFEM
5.- Moments of inertia for bending Iyy, Izz CivilFEM
6.- Product of inertia Izy CivilFEM
7.- Elastic resistant modulus Wely, Welz CivilFEM
8.- Plastic resistant modulus Wply, Wplz CivilFEM
9.- Radius of gyration iy, iz CivilFEM
10.- Gravity center coordinates Ycdg, Zcdg Section
11.- Extreme coordinates of the perimeter Ymin, Ymax, Section
Zmin, Zmax
12.- Distance between GC and SC in Y and in Z Yms, Zms Section
13.- Warping constant Iw
14.- Shear resistant areas Yws, Zws CivilFEM
15.- Torsional resistant modulus Xwt CivilFEM
16.- Moments of inertia for bending about U, V Iuu, Ivv Principal
17.- Angle Y->U or Z->V  CivilFEM

Output data: (None)

596 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

Description Data

Input data:
1.- Gross section area Agross
2.- Area of holes Aholes

Output data:
1.- Cross-section area Anet

The effective section depends upon the geometry of the section; thus, the effective section
is calculated for each element and each of the ends of the element.

Description Data
Input data: (None)

Output data:

1.- Reduction factor Q

2.- Reduction factor Qs
3.- Reduction factor Qa

7.8.3. Structural steel code properties

For AISC 14th Edition checking, besides the section properties, more data are needed for
bucling checks. These data are shown in the following table.

Description Data

Input data:

1.- Unbraced length of member (global buckling) L

2.- Effective length factors Y direction KY
3.- Effective length factors Z direction KZ
4.- Effective length factors for torsional buckling KTOR
5.- Flexural factor relative to bending moment Cb
6.- Length between lateral restraints Lb

Output data:

1.- Compression class CLS_COMP

2.- Bending class CLS_FLEX

597 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

7.8.4. Check Process

Necessary steps to conduct the different checks in CivilFEM are as follows:

f) Obtain material properties corresponding to the element stored in CivilFEM database

and calculate the rest of the properties needed for checking:
Properties obtained from CivilFEM database (materials):
Elasticity modulus E
Poisson’s ratio v
Yield strength Fy (th)
Ultimate strength Fu (th)
Shear modulus G
Thickness of corresponding plate th

g) Obtain the cross-sectional data corresponding to the element.

h) Initiate the values of the plate’s reduction factors and the other plate’s parameters to
determine its class.
i) Perform a check of the section according to the type of external load.
j) Results. In CivilFEM, checking results for each element end are stored in the results
file .CRCF

7.8.5. Design requirements

7.8.5.1. Design for Strength Using Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD)
Design shall be performed in accordance with:

R u ≤ ϕR n

Where:

Ru Required strength (LRFD).

Rn Nominal strength.

ϕ Resistance factor.

ΦR n Design strength

598 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

7.8.5.2. Design for Strength Using Allowable Strength Design (ASD)

Design shall be performed in accordance with:

R a ≤ R n /Ω

Where:

Ra Required strength (ASD)

Rn Nominal strength.

Ω Safety factor

R n /Ω Allowable strength

Section Class and Reduction Factors Calculation.

Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact or slender-element sections for
bending sections and slender or non slender for compression sections. For a section to
qualify as compact its flanges must be continuously connected to the web or webs and the
width-thickness ratios of its compression elements must not exceed the limiting width-
thickness ratios λp (see table B4.1 of AISC 14th Edition). If the width-thickness ratio of one or
more compression elements exceeds λp but does not exceed λr , the section is noncompact.
If the width-thickness ratio of any element exceeds λr , (see table B4.1 of AISC 14th Edition),
the section is referred to as a slender-element compression section.

Therefore, the code suggests different lambda values depending on if the element is
subjected to compression, flexure or compression plus flexure.

The section classification is the worst-case scenario of all of its plates. Therefore, the class is
calculated for each plate with the exception of pipe sections, which have their own
formulation because it cannot be decomposed into plates. This classification will consider
the following parameters:

a) Length of elements:
The program will define the element length (b or h) as the length of the plate
(distance between the extreme points), except when otherwise specified.

b) Flange or web distinction:

To distinguish between flanges or webs, the program follows the criteria below:

Once the principal axis of bending is defined, the program will examine the plates of
the section. Fields Pty and Ptz of the plates indicate if they behave as flanges, webs

599 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

or undefined, choosing the correct one for the each axis. If undefined, the following
criterion will be used to classify the plate as flange or web:

If |∆y| < |∆z| (increments of end coordinates) and flexure is in the Y axis, it will be
considered a web; if not, it will be a flange. The reverse will hold true for flexure in
the Z-axis.

 Hot rolled Steel Shapes:

Section I and C:

The length of the plate h will be taken as the value d for the section
dimensions.
Section Box:

The length of the plate will be taken as the width length minus three times
the thickness.

7.8.5.3. Members subjected to compression

In order to check for compression it is necessary to determine if the element is stiffened or
unstiffened.

- For stiffened elements:

λp = 0.0

E
λr = 1.49√F
y

Pipe sections
E
λr = 0.11
Fy

Box sections

E
λp = 1.12√F
y

E
λr = 1.40√F
y

- Unstiffened elements:

600 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

E
λp = 0.0 λr = 0.56√F
y

Angular sections

E
λr = 0.45√F
y

Stem of T sections

E
λr = 0.75√F
y

7.8.5.4. Members subjected to bending

The bending check is only applicable to very specific sections. Therefore, the slenderness
factor is listed for each section:

 Section I and C:
Py = Fy ∙ Ag ; Φb = 0.90

4
kc =
√h⁄t
w

69 MPa for hot rolled shapes (10 ksi)

Fr =
114 MPa for welded sections (16.5 ksi)

𝐹𝐿 = minimum of (Fyf − Fr ) and (Fyw ) where Fyf and Fyw are the Fy of flange
and web respectively.

Flanges of rolled sections:

E E
λp = 0.38√F λr = 0.83√F
L L

Flanges of welded sections:

E E
λp = 0.38√F λr = 0.95√F
yf L /kc

Flange:

Pu E P
If ⁄ΦP ≤ 0.125 ∶ λp = 3.76√F (1 − 2.75 ∅Pu )
y y y

601 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

Pu E P E
If ⁄ΦP > 0.125 ∶ λp = 1.12 √F (2.33 − ∅Pu ) ≥ 1.49√F
y y y y

E P
Always: λr = 5.70√F (1 − 0.74 ΦPu )
y y

Pu is the compression axial force (taken as positive). If in tension, it will be

taken as zero.

 Pipe section:
E
λp = 0.07 F
y

E
λr = 0.31 F
y

Box section:

Flanges of box section:

E
λp = 1.12
Fy

E
λr = 1.40
Fy

Flanges: the program distinguishes between the flange and web upon the
principal axis chosen by the user.

Pu E 𝑃
If ⁄ΦP ≤ 0.125 ∶ λp = 3.76√F (1 − 2.75 Φ𝑃𝑢 )
y y 𝑦

Pu E P E
If ⁄ΦP > 0.125 ∶ λp = 1.12√F (2.33 − ΦPu ) ≥ 1.49√F
y y y y

E P
Always: λr = 5.70√F (1 − 0.74 ΦPu )
y y

 T section:
λp = 0.0

E
Stem: λp = 0.75√
Fy

602 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

E
Flanges: λr = 0.56√F
y

7.8.6. Checking of Members for Tension (Chapter D)

The axial tension force must be taken as positive (if the tension force has a negative value,
the element will not be checked)

Design tensile strength Φt Pn and the allowable tensile strength Pn ⁄Ωt , of tension members,
shall be the lower value of :

c) yielding in the gross section:

Pn = Fy Ag

Φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)

d) rupture in the net section:

Pn = Fu Ae

Φt = 0.75(LRFD) Ωt = = 2.00 (ASD)

Being:

Ae Effective net area.

Ag Gross area.

Fy Minimum yield stress.

Fu Minimum tensile strength.

The effective net area will be taken as Ag – AHOLES. The user will need to enter the correct
value for AHOLES (the code indicates that the diameter is 1/16th in. (2 mm) greater than the
real diameter).

7.8.7. Checking of Members in Axial Compression (Chapter

E)
The design compressive strength, Φc Pn,and the allowable compressive strength, Pn ⁄Ωc , are
determined as follows:

603 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

The nominal compressive strength, Pn , shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling and flexural-torsional buckling.

∅c = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωc = 1.67 (ASD)

7.8.8. Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling

This type of check can be carried out for compact sections as well as for noncompact or
slender sections. These three cases adhere to the following steps:

Nominal compressive strength, Pn :

Pn = Ag Fcr (E3-1)

KI Fy
λc = √
rπ E

Q = Qs Qa

KL E
d) For : ≤ 4.71√QF
r y

QFy
Fcr = Q (0.658 Fe ) Fy

KL E
e) for > 4.71√QF
r y

Fcr = 0.877Fe
Where:

Ag Gross area of member.

r Governing radius of gyration about the buckling axis.

K Effective length factor.

l Unbraced length.

Fe π2 E
Elastic critical buckling stress Fe = KL 2
( )
r

Factor Q for compact and noncompact sections is always 1. Nevertheless, for slender
sections, the value of Q has a particular procedure. Such procedure is described below:

604 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

Factor Q for slender sections:

For unstiffened plates, Qs must be calculated and for stiffened plates, Qa must be
determined. If these cases do not apply (box sections or angular sections, for example), a
value of 1 for these factors will be taken.

For circular sections, there is a particular procedure of calculating Q. Such procedure is

described below:

 For circular sections, Q is:

0.038∙E 2
Q = Qa = F (D⁄t) + 3 0.11 E⁄F ≤ D⁄t < 0.45 E⁄F
y y y

Factor Qs:

If there are several plates free, the value of Qs is taken as the biggest value of all of them.
The program will check the slenderness of the section in the following order:

 Angular
λ
Q s = 1.340 − 0.76
If 0.45√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ .91√E⁄Fy
√E⁄Fy

E⁄Fy
If 0.91√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Q s = 0.53
λ2

 Stem of T
λ
Q s = 1.908 − 1.22
If 0.75√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ 1.03√E⁄Fy
√E⁄Fy

E⁄Fy
If 1.03√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Q s = 0.69
λ2

 Rolled shapes
λ
Q s = 1.415 − 0.74
If 0.56√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 ≤ 1.03√E⁄Fy
√E⁄Fy

E⁄Fy
If 1.03√E⁄Fy < 𝜆 Q s = 0.69
λ2

 Other sections
λ
Q s = 1.415 − 0.65
If 0.64√k c ∙ E⁄Fy λ ≤ 1.17√k c ∙ E⁄Fy
√k c ∙ E⁄Fy

605 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

E/Fy
If 1.17√k c ∙ E/Fy < 𝜆 Q s = 0.90k c
λ2

Where  is the element slenderness and

4
kc = , 0.35 ≤ k c ≤ 0.76 for I sections
√λ

k c = 0.76 for other sections

Factor Qa:

The calculation of factor Qa is an iterative process. Its procedure is the following:

12) An initial value of Q equal to Qs is taken.

13) With this value Fcr is calculated.
14) This Fcr value is taken to calculate f(f = Pn /Aeff )
15) For elements with stiffened plates, the effective width be is calculated.
16) With be the effective area is calculated.
17) With the value of the effective area, Qa is calculated, and the process starts
again.
effective
Qa =
gross area
 For a box section
E E 0.38 E
If λ ≥ 1.40√ be = 1.92 ∙ t√ f [1 − √ ]
f λ f

 For other sections

E E 0.34 E
If λ ≥ 1.49√ be = 1.92 ∙ t√ [1 − √ ]
f f λ f

If it is not within those limits, be = b

With the be values for each plate, the part that does not contribute [t·(b-be )] is
subtracted from the area (where t is the plate thickness). Using this procedure, the
effective area is calculated.

Finally, with Qs and Qa, Q is calculated, and Fcr is obtained.

606 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

7.8.9. Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling

This type of check can be carried out for compact sections as well as for noncompact or
slender sections. The steps for these three cases are as follows:

Nominal compressive strength,Pn :

Pn = Ag Fcr

f) for λe √Q ≤ 1.5
2
Fcr = Q(0.658Qλe )Fy

(b) for λe √Q > 1.5

0.877
Fcr = [ ] Fy
λ2e

Where:

Fy
λe = √
Fe

Q = Qs Qa
Factor Q for compact and noncompact sections is 1. Nevertheless, for slender sections, the Q
factor has a particular procedure of calculation. Such procedure is equal to the one
previously described.

The elastic stress for critical torsional buckling or flexural-torsional buckling Fe is calculated
as the lowest root of the following third degree equation, in which the axis have been
changed to adapt to the CivilFEM normal axis:

y 2 Z 2
(Fe − Fex )(Fe − Fey )(Fe − Fez ) − Fe2 (Fe − Fez ) ( 0 ) − Fe2 (Fe − Fey ) ( 0 ) = 0
r 0 r 0

Where:

Kx Effective length factor for torsional buckling.

G Shear modulus (MPa).

607 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

Cw Warping constant (mm6).

J Torsional constant (mm4).

Iy , Iz Moments of inertia about the principal axis (mm4).

X0 , yo Coordinates of shear center with respect to the center of gravity (mm).

Iy + Iz
r̅ 02 = y02 + Z02 +
A

𝑦02 + 𝑍02
𝐻 =1−( )
𝑟̅0 2
π2 ∙ E
Fey =
K y ∙ I/ry
π2 ∙ E
Fez =
K z ∙ I/rz

π2 ∙ E ∙ Cw 1
Fex =( + G ∙ J) ∙
(Kx ∙ I) A ∙ r̅02
where:

A Cross-sectional area of member.

l Unbraced length.

Ky, Kz Effective length factor, in the z and y directions.

ry , rz Radii of gyration about the principal axes.

r̅02 Polar radius of gyration about the shear center.

In this formula, CivilFEM principal axes are used. If the CivilFEM axes are the principal axes
5º sexagesimal degrees, K y and K z are calculated with respect to the Y and Z-axes of
CivilFEM. If this is not the case (angular shapes, for example) axes U and V will be used as
principal axes, with U as the axis with higher inertia.

The torsional inertia (Ixx in CivilFEM, J in AISC 13TH Edition) is calculated for CivilFEM
sections, but not for captured sections. Therefore the user will have to introduce this
parameter in the mechanical properties of CivilFEM.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

608 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

7.8.10. Compressive Strength for Flexure

Chapter F is only applicable to members subject to simple bending about one principal axis.

The design flexural strength, ϕb Mn , and the allowable flexural strength, Mn /Ωb , shall be
determined as follows:

For all provisions: ϕb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)

Where Mn is the lowest value of four checks according to sections F2 through F12:

i) Yielding
j) Lateral-torsional buckling
k) Flange local buckling
l) Web local buckling
The value of the nominal flexural strength with the following considerations:

 For compact sections, if Lb < Lp only yielding of steel will be checked.

 For T sections, and other compact sections, only yielding and torsional buckling will
be checked.
 The case of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply to sections loaded on the minor
axis of inertia nor box or square sections.
 The case of lateral-torsional buckling only applies for sections with double symmetry,
channel and T sections. Therefore the rest of sections will be checked for torsion plus
combined loads and will not be checked under flexure.
 For slender sections, the code contemplates the following cases:

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r
State

I, C Cb X1 √2 X2X Lb E X1
LTB FL S z √1 + 1 2 1.76√ √ √1 + X2 FL2
loaded λ 2λ2 rz Fyf FL 1 +
in the
axis of 0.69E
rolled b
higher FLB λ2
FL S z Class B4.1 Class B4.1
0.90Ekc t
inertia. welded
λ2

609 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

WLB R e Fyf Sz N.A. h⁄

t w Class B4.1 Class B4.1

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r
State
I, C LTB N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
loaded
in the
axis of FLB 0.69E b Class
Fy S y Class B4.1
lower λ2 t B4.1
inertia.

WLB N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r
State

2ECb √JA Lb 0.13E√JA 2E√JA

LTB Fyt Seff
λSz rz Mp Mr

Box
Seff b
FLB Fyt Seff F Class B4.1 Class B4.1
S y t

WLB R e Fyf Sz N.A. h⁄

t w Class B4.1 Class B4.1

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r Notes
State

610 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

LTB NA NA NA NA NA

Slender:
Limited
Pipe Fcr S
0.33E Class Class by
FLB
Non-compact: D⁄t
D⁄t B4.1 B4.1 Class
0.021E B4.1
Mn = ( + Fy ) ∙ S
D⁄t

WLB NA NA NA NA NA

Limit
Shape Mr Fcr  p r
State

π√EIz GJ
LTB Mn = Mcr = [B + √1 + B 2 ] N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
T, loaded in Lb
web plane
FLB N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.

WLB N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.

Where:

π EGJA
X1 = √
Sz 2

Cw Sz 2
X2 = 4 ( )
Iz GJ

d Iz
B = +2.3 √
Lb J

(positive sign if the stem is under tension, negative if it is under compression)

In T sections: Mn ≤ 1.6My stem in tension; Mn ≤ 1.0My stem in compression.

For slender webs the nominal flexural strength Mn is the minimum of the following checks:

 tension-flange yield
 compression flange buckling

611 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

The first check uses the following formula:

Mn = Sxc Fy
where:

Sxc Section modulus referred to tension flange.

Fy Yield strength of tension flange.

The second check uses the following formula:

Mn = Sxc R PG Fcr
where:

aw hc E
R PG = 1 − ( − 5.70√ ) ≤ 1.0
1200 + 300aw t w Fy

The critical stress depends upon different slenderness parameters such as , λp , λr and Cpg
in the following way:

For λ ≤ λp Fcr = Fyf

For λp ≤ λ ≤ λr λ − λp
Fcr = Cb ∙ Fyf ∙ [1 − 0.3 ∙ ( )] ≤ Fyf
λr − λp

For λ > λr Cpg

Fcr =
λ2
The slenderness values have to be calculated for the following limit states:

 Lateral torsional buckling

Lb
λ=
rT

E
λp = 1.1 ∙ √
Fyf

E
λr = π ∙ √
0.7Fyf

Cpg = 1970000 ∙ Cb (International System units)

612 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

rT is the radius of gyration of compression flange plus one third of the compression
portion of the web (mm).

By default, the program takes a conservative value of Cb = 1 .

 Flange local buckling

br
λ=
2t f

E
λp = 0.38 ∙ √
Fyf

E
λr = 1.35 ∙ √
Fyf /k c

Cpg = 180650 ∙ k c (IS units)

where:

Cb = 1
k c = 4/√h/t w
and
0.35 ≤ k c ≤ 0.76
Between these two slenderness, the program will choose values the value that produces a
lower critical stress.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

7.8.11. Checking of Members for Shear (Chapter G)

The design shear strength, ϕv Vn , and the allowable shear strength, Vn /Ωv , shall be
determined as follows:

For all provisions: ϕv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)

According to the limit states of shear yielding and shear buckling, the nominal shear
strength, Vn , of unstiffened webs is:

Vn = 0.6Fy Aw Cv

613 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

For webs of rolled I-shaped members with h/t w ≤ 2.24√E/Fy :

ϕv = 1.00 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.50 (ASD)

Cv = 1.0 (web shear coefficient)

For webs of all other doubly symmetric shapes and singly symmetric shapes and channels
Cv is determined as follows:

4. For h/t w ≤ 1.10√k v E/Fy

Cv = 1.0

5. For 1.10√k v E/Fy < ℎ/t w ≤ 1.37√k v E/Fy

1.10√k v E/Fy
Cv =
h/t w

6. For h/t w ≤ 1.37√k v E/Fy

1.51k v E
Cv =
(h/t w )2 Fy

Where Aw is the overall depth times the web thickness.

It is assumed that there are no stiffeners; therefore, the web plate buckling coefficient K v
will be calculated as a constant equal to 5.0.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

7.8.12. Checking of Members for Combined Flexure and

Axial Tension / Compression (Chapter H)
For this check, it is first necessary to determine the value of Mn. This value comes into play
in the checking of formulas. The value of Mn, will be calculated in the same way as members
subjected to flexure; thus, the nominal flexure strength (𝑀𝑛 ) is the minimum of four checks:

5. Yielding
6. Lateral-torsional buckling
7. Flange local buckling
8. Web local buckling

In the case of having bending plus tension or bending plus compression, the interaction
between flexure and axial force is limited by the following equations:

614 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

P
(e) For Pr ≥ 0.2
c
Pr 8 M Mry
+ 9 (Mrz + M ) ≤ 1.0 (H1-1a)
Pc cz cy

P
(f) For Pr ≥ 0.2
c
Pr M Mry
+ (Mrz + M ) ≤ 1.0 (H1-1b)
2Pc cz cy

If the axial force is tension:

Pr Required tensile strength (N).

Pc Available tensile strength (N):

ϕt Pn(LRFD) or Pn /Ωt (ASD)

Mr Required flexural strength (N·mm).

Mc Available flexural strength (N·mm):

Design: ϕb Mn (LRFD) or

Allowable: Mn /Ωb (ASD)

y Strong axis bending.

z Weak axis bending.

ϕt Resistance factor for tension (Sect.D2)

ϕb Resistance factor for flexure = 0.90

Ωt Safety factor for tension (Sect D2)

Ωb Safety factor for flexure = 1.67

If the axial force is compression:

Pr Required compressive strength (N).

Pc Available compressive strength (N):

Design: ϕc Pn (LRFD) or

Allowable: Pn /Ωc (ASD)

Mr Required flexural strength (N·mm).

615 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

Mc Available flexural strength (N·mm):

Design: ϕb Mn (LRFD) or

Allowable: Mn /Ωb (ASD)

Y Strong axis of bending.

Z Weak axis of bending.

Φc Resistance factor for compression =0.90

Φb Resistance factor for flexure = 0.90

Ωc Safety factor for compression =1.67

Ωb Safety factor for flexure = 1.67

The following checks are carried out by CivilFEM:

 Axial force and flexural buckling

 Bending moment Z direction
 Bending moment Y direction
If one of these checks do not meet the code requirements, it will not be possible to check
the member under flexure plus tension / compression.

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

7.8.13. Checking of Members for Combined Torsion, Flexure,

Shear and/or Axial Force (Chapter H)
The design torsional strength, TTn , and the allowable torsional strength, Tn/ΩT , shall be the
lowest value obtained according to the limit states of yielding under normal stress, shear
yielding under shear stress or buckling, determined as follows:

ϕT = 0.90 (LRFD) ΩT = 1.67 (ASD)

 For the limit state of yielding, under normal stress:

Fn = Fy
 For the limit state of yielding, under shear stress:
Fn = 0.6Fy
 For the limit state of buckling:

616 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

Fn = Fcr

- Where 𝐹𝑐𝑟 is calculated

Output results are written in the CivilFEM results file (.CRCF).

617 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

7.8 Steel Structures According to AISC ASD/LRFD 14th Ed.

Chapter 8
Seismic Design

618 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.1 Introduction

8.1. Introduction
Seismic design with CivilFEM provides the user a set of tools to analyze seismic action on
structures, according to the provisions of:

User response spectrum

Eurocode 8
The Spanish code NCSE-02

Aspects considered for calculations:

1. Spectrum definition.
2. Calculation of mode shapes.
3. Modal combination.

619 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.2 Spectrum Calculation according to Eurocode 8

8.2. Spectrum Calculation according to

Eurocode 8
8.2.1. Input data
The data required to define the response spectrum for Eurocode 8 (EN-1998-1:2004) are
listed below:

AG Design ground acceleration for the reference return period [ag].

SPTYPE Spectrum type defined. Elastic or Design.

C Ground type coefficient [S].

QH Horizontal behavior factor [qh].

QV Vertical behavior factor [qv].

DMPRAT Ratio of viscous damping ratio of the structure [  ] (in %).

Once the data have been input, the fraction  is obtained by dividing the design ground
acceleration ag by the gravity acceleration g, displayed below:
ag
α=
g

8.2.2. Spectrum calculation

8.2.2.2 Horizontal Spectra

The values of the parameters which describe the horizontal response spectrum are given in
the table below in accordance with the type of subsoil and type of spectrum:

Subsoil types for

A B C D E
Type 1 Elastic
S 1.00 1.20 1.15 1.35 1.40
b0 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50

TB(s) 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.15

TC(s) 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.80 0.50

620 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.2 Spectrum Calculation according to Eurocode 8

Subsoil types for

A B C D E
Type 1 Elastic
TD(s) 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
TE(s) 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50
Kd1 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3
Kd2 5/3 5/3 5/3 5/3 5/3
K1 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
K2 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00

Subsoil types for

A B C D E
Type 2 Elastic
S 1.00 1.35 1.50 1.80 1.60
b0 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50

TB(s) 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.05

TC(s) 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.25
TD(s) 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
TE(s) 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50
Kd1 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3
Kd2 5/3 5/3 5/3 5/3 5/3
K1 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
K2 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00

If the spectrum is elastic, the ordinates of the horizontal spectrum are obtained as
follows:

T β0
Sd (T) = α ∙ S ∙ [1 + ( − 1)] TA < 𝑇 ≤ TB
TB q

β0
Sd (T) = α ∙ S ∙ TB < 𝑇 ≤ TC
q

621 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.2 Spectrum Calculation according to Eurocode 8

β0 TC Kd1
Sd (T) = α ∙ S ∙ [ ] TC < 𝑇 ≤ TD
q T

β0 TC Kd1 TD Kd2
Sd (T) = α ∙ S ∙ [ ] [ ] TD < 𝑇 ≤ TE
q TD T

Where:

q = behavior factor. The values for this factor differ for the horizontal
seismic action and for the vertical seismic action. Therefore, this
factor assumes two different values qh and qv depending on the
material type.

Kd1, Kd2 = exponents which influence the shape of the design spectrum for a
vibration period greater than TC, TD respectively.

If the spectrum is the design spectrum, the ordinates of the horizontal spectrum are
obtained as follows:

2 T 2.5 2
Sd (T) = ag ∙ S ∙ [ + ( − )] 0 < 𝑇 ≤ TB
3 TB q 3

2.5
Sd (T) = ag ∙ S ∙ TB < 𝑇 ≤ TC
q

2.5 TC
Sd (T) = ag ∙ S ∙ [ ] TC < 𝑇 ≤ TD
q T

≥ β ∙ ag

2.5 TC ∙ Td
Sd (T) = ag ∙ S ∙ [ 2 ] TD < 𝑇
q T

≥ β ∙ ag

Where:

q = behavior factor. The values of this factor are different for the
horizontal seismic action and for the vertical seismic action.
Therefore, this factor assumes two different values qh and qv

622 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.2 Spectrum Calculation according to Eurocode 8

depending on the material type.

8.2.2.2 Vertical Spectra

Subsoil types Type 1 Type 2

avg 0.90 0.45
⁄ag

TB(s) 0.05 0.05

TC(s) 0.15 0.15
TD(s) 1.0 1.0

For the elastic spectrum, the ordinates of the vertical spectrum are obtained as
follows:

T
Sve (T) = avg ∙ [1 + (η ∙ 3.0 − 1)] 0 < 𝑇 ≤ TB
TB

Sve (T) = avg ∙ η ∙ 3.0 TB < 𝑇 ≤ TC

TC
Se (T) = ave ∙ η ∙ 3.0 ∙ [ ] TC < 𝑇 ≤ TD
T

623 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.2 Spectrum Calculation according to Eurocode 8

TC ∙ TD
Sve (T) = avg ∙ η ∙ 3.0 ∙ [ ] TD < 𝑇 ≤ 4s
T2

Where:

 = damping correction factor with reference value of  = 1 for a viscous

damping of 5%.

To obtain the vertical design spectrum, the same expressions of the horizontal design
spectrum are utilized with S=1 and the recommended values of ag ,Tc and Td in the
vertical elastic response spectra table.

624 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.3 Spectrum Calculation according to NCSE-2002

8.3. Spectrum Calculation according to

NCSE-2002
8.3.1. Input data
The data required to define the response spectrum are listed below:

ab
AB Ratio of the basic seismic acceleration to the gravity acceleration[ ].
g

SPTYPE Spectrum type to be calculated (Linear or Simplified).

RO Dimensionless risk coefficient [ρ].

C Coefficient of the ground type.

K Coefficient of contribution.

OMEGA Structure type [].

MU Ductility coefficient [].

Once the data have been input, TA and TB are calculated by:
c
TA = k ∙
10
c
TB = k ∙
2.5
In addition, the amplification coefficient of soil S is calculated by:

C
S= for ρ ∙ 𝖺b ≤ 0.1 ∙ g
1.25

C 𝖺b C
S= + 3.33 (ρ ∙ − 0.1) ∙ (1 − ) for 0.1 ∙ g ≤ ρ ∙ 𝖺b ≤ 0.4 ∙ g
1.25 g 1.25

S = 1.0 for 0.4 ∙ g ≤ ρ ∙ 𝖺b

625 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.3 Spectrum Calculation according to NCSE-2002

Finally, the modification factor of the spectrum  is calculated as a function of the damping
by:

ν = (5⁄Ω)0.4

8.3.2. Spectrum calculation

The value of the ordinate of the spectrum (T) is defined as the quotient of the absolute
acceleration of an elastic linear oscillator (Sa) and the maximum acceleration of the
movement applied on its basis (a):

S𝖺
α(T) =
𝖺
The design spectrum Sd is given by (Art. 3.6.2.2):
𝖺b
Sd = (Ti ) = αi ∙ S ∙ ρ ∙ g ∙ ( )
g

where:

S is the soil amplification factor

αi = α(Ti ) ∙ β if Ti ≥ TA
T
αi = 1 + (2.5β − 1) ∙ T i if Ti ≤ TA
A

ν
β=
μ

α(Ti ) is the normalized spectrum of elastic response (Art. 2.3):

α(T) = 1 + 1.5 ∙ T⁄TA if T < TA

α(T) = 2.5 if TA < 𝑇 < TB

α(T) = K ∙ C⁄T if T > TB

A total of 20 values of the period T are calculated as specified below:

1. The first 10 values for periods Ti between 1/10·TA and TA are calculated by:

i ∙ TA
Ti =
10
where: i = 1 to 10

626 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.3 Spectrum Calculation according to NCSE-2002

a. If the spectrum type entered is linear, then the ordinates of the spectrum (Ti)
are obtained with the following equation:
α(T) = 1 + 1.5 ∙ T⁄TA

where: i = 1 to 10

b. If the spectrum type is simplified, then the ordinates of the spectrum (Ti) are
obtained by:
α(Ti ) = α(TA )

where: i = 1 to 10

2. The remaining values of the period and of the ordinates of both spectrum types are
calculated as follows:
a. Values of the period:
10 ∙ TB
Ti =
(21 − i)

where: i = 10 to 20

b. Values of the ordinates of the spectrum, using the following equation:

T
α(Ti ) = α(TA ) B⁄T
i

where: i = 10 to 20

Once the values of the period and the ordinates of the spectrum are calculated, the spectral
accelerations are obtained for two orthogonal directions consisting of the X and Y global
axes by applying:

Sd (Ti )x = Sd (Ti )

Sd (Ti )y = Sd (Ti )

For vertical movements, the ordinates of the spectrum will be reduced by a factor of 0.7.

Sd (Ti )z = 0.70 ∙ Sd (Ti )

627 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.4 Combination of modes and directions

8.4. Combination of modes and directions

The modes r and i and the natural vibration frequencies i of the structure are calculated
by performing the modal analysis using the Block Lanczos method.

Once the vibration modes are obtained they are combined to obtain the response of the
structure.

CivilFEM provides two options for the combination of modes:

8.4.1. Complete Quadratic Combination Method (CQC)

The total modal response is calculated by:

𝑁 𝑁
𝑅𝑚 = √∑ ∑ 𝜀𝑖𝑗 |𝑅𝑖 ∙ 𝑅𝑗 |
1 1

Where:

N= total number of modes

ij= Coupling coefficient.

Ri= modal response in the ith mode.

Rj=modal response in the jth mode.

Coupling coefficient is evaluated by means of:

3/2
8 ∙ √𝜉𝑖 ∙ 𝜉𝑗 ∙ (𝜉𝑖 + 𝑟𝑖𝑗 ∙ 𝜉𝑗 ) ∙ (𝑟𝑖𝑗 )
𝜀𝑖𝑗 = 2 2 2
(1 − (𝑟𝑖𝑗 ) ) + 4 ∙ 𝜉𝑖 ∙ 𝜉𝑗 ∙ 𝑟𝑖𝑗 ∙ (1 + (𝑟𝑖𝑗 ) ) + 4 ∙ (𝜉𝑖2 + 𝜉𝑗2 ) ∙ (𝑟𝑖𝑗 )

Where:
𝑤𝑗
𝑟𝑖𝑗 =
𝑤𝑖

i = Damping ratio of the ith mode.

j = Damping ratio of the jth mode.

628 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

8.4 Combination of modes and directions

8.4.2. Square Root of the Sum of the Squares

The SRSS method is from the NRC Regulatory Guide, for this case, the total mode response is
performed by:

𝑁
𝑅𝑚 = √∑ 𝑅𝑖2
1

8.4.3. Combination of maximum modal values

Once the mode combination is performed, then the maximum modal responses from the
three directions must be combined as well. Two methods may be used:

8.4.3.1 Square Root of the Sum of the Squares

(𝑅 𝑚𝑎𝑥 )𝑖 = √∑((𝑅𝛼𝑚𝑎𝑥 )𝑖 )2
𝛼

Where:

i=X, Y and Z direction (the three components are calculated separately).

8.3.3.2. Newmark method

The maximum seismic response attributable to seismic loading in three orthogonal
directions is given by the following equations:

R1 = P∙RX + S∙RY + S∙RZ

R2 = S∙RX + P∙RY + S∙RZ
R3 = S∙RX + S∙RY + P∙RZ
R4 = -P∙RX - S∙RY - S∙RZ
R5 = -S∙RX - P∙RY - S∙RZ
R6 = -S∙RX - S∙RY - P∙RZ

Where P and S are the primary and secondary combination factor defined by the user.

629 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Chapter 9
Miscellaneous Utilities

630 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

9.1. Parameters and Expressions

Parameters are variables and their type must be declared in the Parameter list window. The
available types are the following:

Real number.
Integer number.
2D point (x, y).
2D vector (x, y).
3D point (x, y, z).
3D vector (x, y, z).

Parameters can be used (instead of a literal number) as a property to any CivilFEM property;
the parameter is evaluated and its current value is used for that property (i.e. Material’s
Young Modulus).

Parameters can be defined as expressions made up of constants, operators, functions and

other previously evaluated parameters.

9.1.1. Naming rules

Parameter names must start with a letter and can only contain letters, numbers, and
underscores. All letters included in the Unicode Standard scripts are permitted. Example:

Parameter

area A

circle area Ac

box number 3 box_3

steel thermal expansion α_steel

Distinction is made between upper and lower case letters. Example: Different parameter
names because of upper and lower cases.

Parameter

area a

631 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

angle A

Reserved words cannot be used as parameter names. Reserved words are the function and
constant names defined in the next sections. Example: Invalid parameter name.

Parameter

maximum area max

tangent line tan

Full list of reserved words:

AND, E, NOT, OR, PI, pi, abs, acos, acosd, acosu, arccos, arccosd, arccosu, arcsin, arcsind,
arcsinu, arctan, arctand, arctanu, asin, asind, asinu, atan, atan2, atand, atanu, ceil, cos,
cosd, cosh, coshd, coshu, cosu, cross, distance, division, dot, e, exp, fact, factorial, floor,
fmod, g_SI, g_ft, ln, log, max, middlePoint, min, mod, norm, oneX2d, oneX3d, oneY2d,
oneY3d, oneZ3d, ones2d, ones3d, percent, percentage, pow, projectionXY, projectionXZ,
projectionYZ, rotate, rotateCW, rotateX, rotateXCW, rotateY, rotateYCW, rotateZ,
rotateZCW, round, roundUp, sin, sind, sinh, sinhd, sinhu, sinu, sqrt, sum, tan, tand, tanh,
tanhd, tanhu, tanu, trunc, truncate, unitary, zero2d, zero3d, Σ, π, ⋁

There is also a list of parameter names already used for predefined local parameters
(parameters for individual material, section or other properties…) that neither can be used
for global parameters:

b, bfbot, bftop, h, mc, od, tf, tfbot, tftop, tk, tw

9.1.2. Constants
Numbers assigned to parameters.

Parameter Input
area A 5.1
number of bars n_bars 24

Reserved words associated with a specific numerical value.

632 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

Predefined constants

Constant
Value Description
Name

π The ratio of a circle’s circumference to its

3.1415926
PI, pi diameter.

e 2.71828 Euler‘s constant.

Earth’s gravity in the International System of

g_SI 9.80665
Units.

Earth’s gravity in Imperial Units (feet per

g_ft 32.174
square second).

A predefined constant assigned to a parameter.

Parameter Input
Earth’s gravity g g_SI

9.1.3. Operators
Arithmetic operators:

Addition (+)
Subtraction (-)
Multiplication (*)
Division (/)
Module (mod): the remainder of the first number when divided by the
second.
Power (^)

Example:

Parameter Input Output

A 41 41
B 7 7

633 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

C A*B 287
D A mod B 6

Relational and Equality operators:

Less than (<): “A<B” returns true if parameter “A” is less than parameter “B”.
Greater than (>): “A>B” returns true if parameter “A” is greater than parameter “B”.
Less than or Equal to (<=): “A<=B” returns true if parameter “A” is equal or less than
parameter “B”.
Greater than or Equal to (>=): “A>=B” returns true if parameter “A” is equal or
greater than parameter “B”.
Equal (=): “A=B” returns true if parameter “A” is equal to parameter “B”.
Different from (<>): “A<>B” returns true if parameter “A” is different from parameter
“B”.

Logical operators:

NOT (!): logical negation on a Boolean expression.

AND (&&): logical conjunction on two Boolean expressions.
OR (||): logical disjunction on two Boolean expressions.

Example:

A B A! A && B A || B

T T F T T

T F F F T

F T T F T

F T T F F

Where “T” means true and “F” means false.

634 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

Operator precedence:

When several operations occur in an expression, each part is evaluated and resolved in a
predetermined order called operator precedence. Parentheses can be used to override the
order of precedence and force operations within parentheses to be evaluated before those
outside. Within parentheses, however, normal operator precedence is maintained.

Operators are sorted in precedence levels from highest to lowest precedence as shown in
the following list. When two or more operators in an expression have the same precedence
level, operations are evaluated from left to right.

I. Power (^).
II. Multiplication (*), division (/), module (mod).
III. Addition (+), subtraction (-).
IV. Less than (<), less than or equal to (<=), greater than (>), greater than or equal to
(>=), equal to (=), different from (<>).
V. NOT (!).
VI. AND (&&).
VII. OR (||).

Example:

Parameters Input Output

A 2+2*3 8
B (2+2)*3 12
C A/2^3+5 6

9.1.4. Functions
Absolute value (abs).

Parameters Input Output

A -3 -3
B abs(A) 3

Square root (sqrt)

Parameters Input Output

A 16 16
B sqrt(A) 4

635 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

Common Logarithm (log)

Parameters Input Output

A 1000 1000
B log(A) 3

Natural Logarithm (ln)

Parameters Input Output

A e*e 7.3890561
B ln(A) 2

Trigonometric functions: Sine (sin), Cosine (cos), Tangent (tan):

Parameters Input Output Unit

B 35 35 deg
C sin (B) 0.5735 -
D cos (B) 0.8191 -
E tan (B) 0.7002 -

IMPORTANT: trigonometric functions evaluate in the units of the model (degrees by

default), and all angular parameters will be converted properly to the units of the model (no
matter if they are in radians or degrees, proper conversions will be applied). Undefined
parameters or dimensionless values will be evaluated in the units of the model, but the
alternative functions: sinr, cosr, tanr are available to evaluate them in radians, or: sind, cosd,
tand to evaluate them in degrees, or: sinu, cosu, tanu to evaluate them in the user units
defined in the model (work the same as: sin, cos, tan).

Parameters Input Output Unit

A pi/2 1.5708 rad
B 90 90 deg
C pi/2 1.5708 -
D 90 90 -
E sin (A) 1.0 -
F sin (B) 1.0 -
G sinr (C) 1.0 -
H sind (D) 1.0 -

Inverse trigonometric functions: Arcsine (asin), Arccosine (acos), Arctangent (atan).

The returned values will be in the units of the model (degrees by default). If the results are
assigned to an angular parameter, they will be shown in the units of the parameter (proper
conversion will be applied). If the functions are going to be operated with undefined

636 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

parameters or dimensionless values, then the results will be operated in the units of the
model, but the alternative functions: asinr, acosr, atanr are available to return results in
radians, or: asind, acosd, atand to return results in degrees, or: asinu, acosu, atanu to return
results in the user units defined in the model (work the same as: asin, acos, atan).

Parameters Input Output Unit

B 0.5 0.5 -
C asin (B) 30 deg
D acos (B) 60 deg
E atan (B) 26.565 deg
F asinr (B) 0.5236 rad

Hyperbolic functions: Hyperbolic sine (sinh), Hyperbolic cosine (cosh), Hyperbolic tangent
(tanh).

Minimum (min)

Parameters Input Output

A 1 1
B 0 0
C min(A,B) 0

Maximum (max)

Parameters Input Output

A 1 1
B 0 0
C max(A,B) 1

Round to the nearest integer (round)

Parameters Input Output

A 1.3 1.3
B 1.5 1.5
C -1.5 -1.5
D -2.6 -2.6

637 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

As round(A) 1
Bs round(B) 2
Cs round(C) -2
Ds round(D) -3

Truncate to zero decimal digits (truncate)

Parameters Input Output

A -1.45 -1.45
B 0.7 0.9
CT truncate(A) -1
DT truncate(B) 0

Factorial (fact)

Parameters Input Output

B 3 3
C fact(B) 6

Distance between two points (distance): distance(p1,p2)

Dot product of vectors (dot): dot(v1,v2) = v1 * v2

Cross product of vectors (cross): cross(v1,v2) = v1 ^ v2 = v1 x v2

Map a real number to the smallest following integer (ceil): The ceil of 2.8 is 3.0. The ceil of -
2.8 is -2.0.

Map a real number to the largest previous integer (floor): The floor of 2.8 is 2.0. The floor of
-2.8 is -3.0.

Remainder of the integer division of two real numbers (fmod): The remainder of -10.00 /
3.00 is -1.0. fmod(-10.0,3.0)=-1.0

Middle point of two points (middlePoint).

Percentage (percent or percentage): x% = percent(x) = percentage(x) = x/100.0

Exponentiation or power (pow): pow(x,y) = x^y = xy

Projection of point into XY plane (projectionXY): projectionXY( (1,1,1) ) = (1,1,0)

638 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

Projection of point into XZ plane (projectionXZ): projectionXZ( (1,1,1) ) = (1,0,1)

Projection of point into YZ plane (projectionYZ): projectionYZ( (1,1,1) ) = (0,1,1)

Round to the closest integer (round).

Round to the next highest integer (roundUp).

Summatory of components of a vector (Σ): Σv = v.x + v.y + v.z

9.1.5. Units
The user has great flexibility in specifying parameter units. However, it is strongly
recommended to take into account the following notes in order to avoid unit conversion
problems:

All dimensional parameters, that is, all variables where a unit type was
assigned (length, mass, etc.) are correctly converted to consistent units before
operation. Problems may arise when operating with variables with unknown
unit types.
o By default, parameters are of “undefined” unit type, which means that
those parameters may have units but are not specified yet. Those
parameters are not converted and will be operated as dimensionless.
As all the other parameters are converted to consistent units, the
effect of operating the undefined parameters with them would be
equivalent to considering the undefined parameters to be defined in
the same consistent units. Users may be aware of this to avoid
unintended results.
o Dimensionless unit type parameters should be reserved to truly
dimensionless variables.
The key is to know that, before operating, all dimensional parameters are
converted to a consistent units system based on the Principal Units of the
Model (Environment -> Model Configuration -> Units), not to the visualization
units.
o The Derived Units of the model can be customized by the user for
visualization or other purposes, and may be unconsistent with the
principal units… So, only the Principal Units of the model are
considered for the consistent units system used on calculations.
o For the Derived Units of the model, the associated consistent units are
shown between brackets. For example, if the units of the model are:

639 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

meters (“m”), seconds (“s”), and kilometers per hour (“km/h”), then
the derived consistent units will be shown as “[m/s]”.
The usage of undefined and/or dimensionless parameters or values in a
formula, that is also using other parameters with assigned unit types, may lead
to misinterpretation in formula evaluation if the unit system is changed or the
model is imported in a different unit system (for example, the change of a
model in Imperial Units to International Units).
o To avoid this kind of situations, CivilFEM “remembers” the units that
were used to define each formula. If those original units are no longer
the same as the units of the model, then, to avoid misinterpretations,
the original units will be shown after a semicolon and used to evaluate
the formula as originaly intended.
o As a rule, formulas are always evaluated in the consistent unit system
based on the principal units of the model, unless other interpretation
units are specified after a semicolon in the formula. In that case, units
after the semicolon will be used for the consistent unit system of that
particular formula.
o The effect of this is formulas will never be misinterpreted due a
change in the units system, even when using undefined or
dimensionless parameters or values, even when mixing formulas from
different unit systems, as the values will still be calculated as originaly
intended and properly converted to the new unit system.
o The idea behind this innovation is to preserve the real magnitudes of
the model, no matter what changes in the unit visualization. If this is
not what intended, the user may remove the units after the semicolon
in the formula.
o For example, in a model defined with Imperial Units with a parameter
“x” in inches, you may use the formula “1+x” so the dimensionless
constant “1” actually operates as 1 inch. When you import that model
in another one with International Units, the parameter “x” would be
converted to meters by default, but the formula will be shown as
“1+x;in” (which means “x” must be converted to inches before
operating, as originaly intended) and the result in inches will be
properly converted to meters.

Example: Unit conversion in a mixed strategy (it is recommended to avoid this case,
specifying the units whenever is possible).

 The following parameters are defined by the user:

640 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

Unit entered
Parameter Magnitude by the User

Rectangle side 1 R1 Length cm

Rectangle side 2 R2 Undefined ?
Rectangle perimeter Rp Undefined ?
Triangle side A tA Length in
Triangle side B tB Length ft
Triangle side C tC Length in
Triangle perimeter tPer Length in

For those parameters with no specific unit defined by the user, the
corresponding unit of the model (global system unit) will be assigned. In this
example, the International Units System is considered to be the unit system
of the model (global unit system). Therefore, R2 and Rp should be in m.

 The user enters the parameter inputs as follow:

Parameters Input Units

Rectangle side 1 R1 5 cm
Rectangle side 2 R2 6 ? (m)
Rectangle perimeter Rp 2*(R1 + R2) ? (m)
Triangle side A tA 3 in
Triangle side B tB 7 ft
Triangle side C tC 4 in
Triangle perimeter tPer tA + tB + tC in

 The parameter inputs are evaluated in a consistent unit system based on

the principal units of the model (meters, in this case; no unit conversion is
performed on parameters R2 and Rp):

Param Input Consistent values Output

Rectangle side 1 R1 5 cm 0.05 m 5 cm
Rectangle side 2 R2 6 (m) 6 6 (m)
Rect. perimeter Rp 2*(R1 + R2) 12.1 12.1 (m)
Triangle side A tA 3 in 0.0762 m 3 in
Triangle side B tB 7 ft 2.1336 m 7 ft
Triangle side C tC 4 in 0.1016 m 4 in
Tri. perimeter tPer tA + tB + tC 2.3114 m 91 in

641 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

As you can see, the rectangle and triangle perimeters are properly
computed:

 Now, if the unit system of the model (global system of units) is set to
Imperial Units (inches), the parameters expressed in the units of the
model will be computed in a consistent unit system based on the Imperial
Units, unless other units are specified after a semicolon. That could be a
problem for the undefined parameters of this example, as proper
conversions could only be performed on parameter with properly defined
units, but all formulas involving parameters with units will “remember”
those original units to evaluate as originally intended (so those original
units will be shown after a semicolon). Again, the rectangle and triangle
perimeters are properly computed:

Anyway, it is strongly recommended to define units for the parameters

that store formula results (like “Rp” in the example), so that CivilFEM can
avoid problems with undefined parameters.

642 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

9.1.6. Parameter List Window

The user can parameterize any part of the modeling process using the Parameter List
window. The parameter list window has the following distribution:

The Parameter List window columns are:

Parameter name: In this column the parameter name will be set. Any occurrence of the
parameter name inside any CivilFEM form will be detected and CivilFEM will substitute
the parameter for its value or formula.
Parameter type: The user can choose between the following parameter types: 2D Point,
2D Vector, 3D Point, 3D Vector, Integer number, Real number. This is useful when the
parameterized value is of the point or vector class. The user just needs to define the
point instead of its two or three individual components.
There is a key difference between a point and a vector: when changing from one
coordinate system to another, points are transformed taking into account the change
of origin and vectors are unaffected by the origin.
Unit type: A list of unit types is available so any unit can be chosen so the user can define
its unit later.
Coordinate system: As different coordinate sytems can be defined in CivilFEM, this
column lets the user choose the system used to define a point or vector parameter. This
makes the point or vector referenced to the coordinate system, so modifying the
coordinate system will modify the global position of the point or vector (but not its
coordinates in the local coordinate system).
Formula: The user is not restricted to entering values for defining a parameter. An
arbitray formula (the formula must begin with an equal sign) can be entered to define
the final value. This is a very powerful feature as another parameter can be used inside a
formula, linking several parameters in the definition. A whole model can be changed in
this way just by changing a single value.
Value: A fixed numerical value can be entered directly. If the user has used the formula
option, the calculated value will be displayed here.

643 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.1 Parameters and Expressions

Unit: The unit can be chosen using this option, so the user has total flexibility when
defining the parameter using a mix unit approach.

The following figures show an example of the Parameter List window usage in conjunction
with geometry creation.

In the previous figure, three parameters are created. Vertical is a real number of the type
length that is defined using a direct value of 5. Then a Horiz parameter is created using a
formula: =Vertical*1.5 . The resulting value is 7.5. Finally a 3D point parameter called P1 is
created using the formula =(Vertical, Horiz, 0) . The resulting point can be directly used when
creating geometry, entering the point with the formula =P1 .

644 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.2 CivilFEM Python Programming

9.2. CivilFEM Python Programming

Python is an interpreted, interactive object-oriented programming language sometimes
compared to Perl, Java, and Tcl. It has interfaces to IP networking, windowing systems,
audio, and other technologies. Integrated with CivilFEM, it provides a more powerful
scripting language than procedure files since it contains conditional logic and looping
statements such as if, while, and for.

To start using Python in CivilFEM just activate the Script editor window.

Always refer to CivilFEM Python Manual and CivilFEM Script Manual to know all available
commands.

One of the biggest differences between the Python language and other programming
languages is that Python does not denote blocks of code with reserved words or symbols
such as if..then..endif (FORTRAN) or if { ... } (curly braces in C). Instead, indenting is used for
this purpose. For example, the take following block of FORTRAN code:

if(jtype.eq.49) then

ladt=idt+lofr

endif

The block of FORTRAN code would need to be coded as follows in Python:

if jtype == 49:

ladt=idt+lofr

Python matches the amount of indenting to the block of code. The colon at the end of the if
statement denotes that it is a compound statement. All the lines that are to be in that block
of code need to be at the same indent level. The block of code is ended when the indenting
level returns to the level of to the compound statement. The examples in the following
chapters will show you more about the Python syntax.

9.2.1 Python Data Types

When programming in Python, you don’t explicitly declare a variable’s data type. Python
determines the data type by how the variable is used. Python supports the following implied
data types:
Basic Data Types:

645 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.2 CivilFEM Python Programming

1. String: A character string similar to the char data in C and character in FORTRAN. A
string may be specified using either single or double quotes.
2. Float: A floating point number similar to the double data type in C and the real*8
data type in FORTRAN.
3. Integer: An integer or fixed point number similar to the long int data type in C and
the integer*8 data type in FORTRAN.

Extended Data Types:

1. List: A Python list is essentially a linked list that can be accessed like an array using
the square bracket operators [ ]. The list can be composed of strings, floats, or
integers to name a few.

The material covered in this tutorial is very basic and should be easy to access and
understand for the first time Python user.
A multi-dimension list is created by first creating a single dimensional list, and then creating
the other dimensions, as follows (a 3x2 array):

A = [None] * 3
for i in range(3)
A[i] = [None] * 2

Always refer to CivilFEM Python Manual to know all available commands.

9.2.2 Python Example

Python files have .py extension.

Polyline:

1. # Points

2. p1 = pnt("Point1", [1,2,3])

3. p2 = pnt("Point2", [2,3,4])

4. p3 = pnt("Point3", [3,4,5])

5. p4 = pnt("Point4", [4,5,6])

6. # Polyline

7. polyline([p1, p2, p3, p4])

646 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

9.2 CivilFEM Python Programming

Lines 1-5: To add a commentary, the # symbol must be inserted first. To create a point
command, createPoint (or alias pnt) is used. If CivilFEM Python Manual is opened then
createPoint needs two arguments:
1) GeomName (str): Name.
2) Pnt (Point): Coordinates of the point.
Each point is saved into a variable to be used later as a list (p1, p2, …)

Lines 6-7: To create a polyline, command createPolyline (or alias polyline) is used. If CivilFEM
Python Manual is opened then createPolyline needs two arguments:
1) GeomName (str): Name.
2) POINT ([Entity]): List of points (between square brackets [ ]) to define the polyline.

The material covered in this tutorial is very basic and should be easy to access and
understand for the first time Python user.
A multi-dimension list is created by first creating a single dimensional list, and then creating
the other dimensions, as follows (a 3x2 array):

A = [None] * 3
for i in range(3)
A[i] = [None] * 2

Always refer to CivilFEM Python Manual and CivilFEM Script Manual to know all available
commands.

647 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©

 Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

Ingeciber S.A. Copyright. All rights Reserved.

All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.

648 CivilFEM Powered by Marc Theory Manual. Ingeciber, S.A.©